GIFT   OF 
MICHAEL  REESE 


HISTORY 


OF   THE 


INDIANS, 


OF 


NORTH  AND  SOUTH  AMERICA. 


BY  THE  AUTHOR  OF 


PETER  PARLEY'S   TALES.  ({ 


UBTTOfiSITY 


BOSTON: 
BRADBURY,  SODEN  &  CO. 

M  DCCC  XLIV. 


STEREOTYPED   BY 

METCALF,    KEITH    &    NICHOLS, 
CAMBRIDGE. 


WM.    A.    HALL   *   CO.,    PRINTERS, 
12   Water  Street. 


CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION 5 

ORIGIN  OF  THE  ABORIGINES 10 

CLASSIFICATION  OF  THE  INDIANS          ....  16 

THE  ABORIGINES  OF  THE  WEST  INDIES          .        ,  22 

THE  CARIES 34 

EARLY  MEXICAN  HISTORY 41 

MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTES    .        .    '    .  54 

THE  EMPIRE  OF  THE  INCAS 80 

THE  ARAUCANIANS        .  ,  .        .         .98 

SOUTHERN  INDIANS  OF  SOUTH  AMERICA          .        .  112 

INDIANS  OF  BRAZIL 121 

THE  INDIANS  OF  FLORIDA 129 

THE  INDIANS  OF  VIRGINIA 147 

THE  SOUTHERN  INDIANS 160 

INDIANS  OF  NEW  ENGLAND 170 

THE  FIVE  NATIONS,  &c 192 

THE  Six  NATIONS                                                              .  205 


IV  CONTENTS. 

WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI      .         .  219 

WESTERN  AND  SOUTHERN  INDIANS  ....  233 

VARIOUS  TRIBES  OF  NORTHERN  AND  WESTERN  INDIANS  241 

THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI          .         .  256 
PRESENT  CONDITION  OF  THE  WESTERN  INDIANS  IN  THE 

UNITED  STATES 287 

THE  PROSPECTS  OF  THE  WESTERN  TRIBES   .        .  297 


HISTORY 

OF     THE 

AMERICAN  INDIANS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

WHEN  America  was  first  discovered,  it  was  found  to 
be  inhabited  by  a  race  of  men  different  from  any  already 
known.  They  were  called  INDIANS,  from  the  West 
Indies,  where  they  were  first  seen,  and  which  Colum 
bus,  according  to  the  common  opinion  of  that  age,  sup 
posed  to  be  a  part  of  the  East  Indies.  On  exploring 
the  coasts  and  the  interior  of  the  vast  continent,  the 
same  singular  people,  in  different  varieties,  were  every 
where  discovered.  Their  general  conformation  and 
features,  character,  habits,  and  customs  were  too  evi 
dently  alike  not  to  render  it  proper  to  class  them  under 
the  same  common  name ;  and  yet  there  were  sufficient 
diversities,  in  these  respects,  to  allow  of  grouping  them 
in  minor  divisions,  as  families  or  tribes.  These  fre 
quently  took  their  names  from  the  parts  of  the  country 
where  they  lived. 

The  differences  just  mentioned  were,  indeed,  no 
greater  than  might  have  been  expected  from  the  va 
rieties  of  climate,  modes  of  life,  and  degree  of  im- 


6  INTRODUCTION. 

provement  which  existed  among  them.  Sometimes 
the  Indians  were  found  gathered  in  large  numbers 
along  the  banks  of  rivers  or  lakes,  or  in  the  dense 
forest,  their  hunting-grounds  ;  and  not  unfrequently 
also,  scattered  in  little  collections  over  the  extended 
face  of  the  country.  As  they  were  often  engaged  in 
wars  with  each  other,  a  powerful  tribe  would  occasion 
ally  subject  to  its  sway  numerous  other  lesser  ones, 
whom  it  held  as  its  vassals. 

No  accurate  account  can  be  given  of  their  numbers. 
Some  have  estimated  the  whole  amount  in  North  and 
South  America,  at  the  time  of  the  discovery  of  the 
continent,  even  as  high  as  one  hundred  or  one  hun 
dred  and  fifty  millions.  This  estimate  is  unquestionably 
much  too  large.  A  more  probable  one  would  be  from 
fifteen  or  twenty  to  twenty-five  millions.  But  they 
have  greatly  diminished,  and  of  all  the  ancient  race 
not  more  than  four  or  five  millions,  if  so  many,  now 
remain.  Pestilence,  wars,  hardships,  and  sufferings 
of  various  kinds  have  been  their  lot  for  nearly  four 
hundred  years;  and  they  have  melted  away  at  the 
approach  of  the  white  man  ;  so  that  even  a  lone  In 
dian  is  now  scarcely  found  beside  the  grave  of  his 
fathers,  where  once  the  war-whoop  might  have  called 
a  thousand  or  more  valiant  men  to  go  forth  to  engage 
in  the  deadly  fray.  With  them  have  perished,  in 
many  instances,  their  ancient  traditions  ;  and  as  they 
had  no  other  means  of  handing  down  the  records  of 
their  deeds,  their  history  is  lost,  except  here  and  there 
a  fragment,  which  has  been  treasured  up  by  some 
white  man  more  curious  than  his  fellows,  in  studying 
their  present  or  former  fates.  Monuments,  indeed, 


INTRODUCTION.  / 

exist,  widely  scattered  over  the  countries  they  once 
occupied  ;  some  rude  and  inartificial,  marked  by  no 
skill  or  taste;  and  others  evidently  reared  at  not  a 
little  expense  of  time  and  labor,  and  characterized  by 
all  the  indications  of  a  people  far  in  advance  of  their 
neighbours  in  the  arts  and  in  civilization. 

By  whom  were  these  reared,  when,  and  for  what 
cause  ?  How  long  have  they  been  thus  reposing  in 
their  undisturbed  quiet,  and  crumbling  in  silent  ruin  ? 
are  questions  that  force  themselves  on  the  mind  of  the 
reflective  traveller,  as  he  stands  beside  or  amid  their 
strange  forms,  and  pores  over  what,  seem  the  sepul 
chres  of  buried  ages.  But  the  tongue  of  history  is 
mute,  and  they  who  could  have  answered  his  inquiries 
have  long  since  passed  away. 

To  give,  therefore,  a  historical  account  of  the  Ameri 
can  Indians  is  a  task  beset  with  not  a  few  difficulties. 
The  sources  of  information  must  be  almost  wholly  de 
rived  from  their  conquerors  and  foes ;  and  though  the 
incidents  related  may  be  in  the  main  correct,  and  the 
causes  that  lie  on  the  surface  be  easily  known,  yet  the 
more  hidden  ones,  the  secret  springs  of  action,  are  be 
yond  our  reach.  We  have  not  the  Indian  himself  re 
cording  for  us  the  motives  that  have  prompted  his  stern 
spirit,  carefully  veiling  his  designs  from  all  around, 
nourishing  the  dark  purpose,  and  maturing  his  plans. 
We  are  not  admitted  to  the  council  of  the  warriors  or 
wise  men,  and  allowed  to  listen  to  their  relation  of  the 
wrongs,  real  or  fancied,  they  have  suffered,  or  to  see 
how  one  after  another  of  the  chiefs  or  counsellors  ut 
ters  his  opinions,  and  the  deep  plot  is  laid  which  is  to 
issue  in  wreaking  a  dire  revenge,  even  to  extermina 
tion,  on  the  hated  intruders. 


8 


INTRODUCTION. 


All  these  various  incentives  to  action,  are  near 
ly  or  quite  beyond  our  inspection.  Yet  it  is  in  the 
contemplation  of  such  only,  that  Indian  history  can  be 
truly  estimated  ;  for  all  these  particulars  throw  their 
lights  and  shades  across  and  into  the  portraiture  of  this 
most  singular  people.  It  could  hardly  be  expected, 
that  they,  who  suffered  from  the  fearful  revenge  of  the 
red  man,  who  saw,  as  it  were,  the  scalping-knife 
gleaming  around  the  head  of  a  beloved  wife,  or  child, 
or  friend,  or  who  felt  the  arrow  quivering  in  their  own 
flesh,  or  who  heard  the  war-whoop  ringing  terrifically 
on  the  domestic  quiet  of  their  habitation,  —  it  could 
hardly,  indeed,  be  expected,  that  such  persons  should 
be  as  truthful  or  impartial  as  if  they  had  been  called 
to  record  scenes  of  a  more  peaceful  and  grateful  kind. 
Without,  therefore,  doing  the  early  writers  the  injustice 
of  supposing  that  they  mean  to  misrepresent  facts,  — 
yet,  in  glancing  over  their  descriptions  of  perfidy,  plots, 
murders,  cruelties,  and  revenge,  we  must  remember 
that  the  red  man  had  no  one  of  his  race  to  record  for 
him  his  history,  and  be  candid  and  just  in  our  judg 
ments,  where  there  may  often  be  not  a  little  to  exten 
uate,  if  not  wholly  to  excuse  from  blame. 

Let  us  also  bear  in  mind  one  remarkable  fact,  that, 
in  their  first  intercourse,  the  reception  extended  to  the 
Europeans  by  the  Americans  was  confiding  and  hos 
pitable,  and  that  this  confidence  and  hospitality  were 
generally  repaid  with  treachery,  rapine,  and  murder. 
This  was  the  history  of  events  for  the  first  century,  till 
at  last  the  red  men,  over  the  whole  continent,  learned 
to  regard  the  Europeans  as  their  enemies,  the  plun 
derers  of  their  wealth,  the  spoilers  of  their  villages,  the 


INTRODUCTION.  9 

greedy  usurpers  of  their  liberty  and  lands.  We 
are  told  of  tribes  of  birds,  in  the  interior  of  Africa, 
which  at  first  permitted  travellers  to  approach  them, 
not  having  yet  learned  the  lesson  of  fear ;  but  after 
the  fowler  had  scattered  death  among  them,  they  dis 
covered  that  man  was  a  being  to  be  dreaded,  and  fled 
at  his  approach.  The  natives  of  America  had  a  simi 
lar  lesson  to  learn  ;  and  though  they  did  not  always 
fly  from  the  approach  of  their  European  enemy,  it 
was  not  because  they  expected  mercy  at  his  hands. 


ORIGIN  OF  THE  ABORIGINES. 


THE  origin  of  the  aborigines  of  America  is  involved 
in  mystery.  Many  have  been  the  speculations  in 
dulged  and  the  volumes  written  by  learned  and  able 
men  to  establish,  each  one,  his  favorite  theory.  Con 
jecture,  by  a  train  of  ingenious  reasonings  and 
comparisons,  has  grown  into  probability,  and  finally 
almost  settled  down  into  certainty.  For  a  time,  as  in 
the  case  of  the  celebrated  "  Letters  of  Junius,"  the  ques 
tion  has  seemed  decided  ;  so  plausible  have  appeared 
the  proofs,  that  it  would  have  been  deemed  almost  like 
incredulity  to  gainsay  them.  But  another  supposition, 
more  likely,  has  been  started,  and  has  supplanted  the 
former  ;  each,  in  its  turn,  has  passed  away,  and  we 
are  perhaps  no  nearer  the  truth  than  before.  We  will 
notice  a  few  of  the  most  prominent  of  these  opinions. 

1.  The  Indians  have  been  supposed,  by  certain 
writers,  to  be  of  Jewish  origin  ;  either  descended  from 
a  portion  of  the  ten  tribes,  or  from  the  Jews  of  a  later 
date.  This  view  has  been  maintained  by  Boudinot 
and  many  others ;  and  Catlin,  in  his  "  Letters,"  has  re 
cently  advocated  it,  especially  with  respect  to  the  In 
dians  west  of  the  Mississippi.  In  proof  of  this  opinion, 


ORIGIN    OF    THE   ABORIGINES.  11 

reference  is  made  to  similarities,  more  or  less  striking, 
in  many  of  their  customs,  rites,  and  ceremonies,  sacri 
fices,  and  traditions.  Thus,  he  has  found  many  of 
their  modes  of  worship  exceedingly  like  those  of  the 
Mosaic  institutions.  He  mentions  a  variety  of  particu 
lars  respecting  separation,  purification,  feasts,  and  fast 
ings,  which  seem  to  him  very  decisive.  "  These," 
he  says,  "  carry  in  my  mind  conclusive  proof,  that  these 
people  are  tinctured  with  Jewish  blood."  Efforts  have 
also  been  made,  but  with  little  success,  to  detect  a  re 
semblance  of  words  in  their  language  to  the  Hebrew, 
and  some  very  able  writers  have  adopted  the  opinion, 
that  this  fact  is  established.  That  there  may  be  such  re 
semblances  as  are  supposed  is  very  probable,  yet  they 
are  perhaps  accidental,  or  such  only  as  are  to  be 
found  among  all  languages.  Besides,  allowance  must 
be  made  for  the  state  of  the  observer's  mind,  and  his 
desire  to  find  analogies,  as  also  for  his  ignorance  of 
the  Indian  language  in  its  roots,  and  his  liability  to 
confound  their  traditions  with  his  own  fancies.  Many 
of  these  similarities,  moreover,  belong  rather  to  the 
general  characteristics  of  the  Patriarchal  age,  than  to 
the  peculiarities  of  the  Jewish  economy.  Even  ad 
mitting  the  analogies  in  manners  and  customs  men 
tioned  by  Catlin  and  others,  they  are  not  so  striking 
as  are  those  of  the  Greeks,  as  depicted  by  Homer, 
to  those  of  the  Jews,  as  portrayed  in  the  Bible. 
There  are  striking  resemblances  between  the  ideas 
and  practices  of  our  American  Indians,  and  those  of 
many  Eastern  nations,  which  show  them  to  be  of 
Asiatic  origin,  but  yet  they  do  not  identify  them  more 
with  the  Jews  than  with  the  Tartars,  or  Egyptians,  or 
even  the  Persians. 


12  ORIGIN    OF    THE   ABORIGINES. 

2.  Some  have  supposed  that  the  ancient  Phoenicians^ 
or  the  Carthaginians,  in  their  navigation  of  the  ocean, 
penetrated    to    this    Western    Continent,   and    found 
ed  colonies.     As  this  is  mere  conjecture,  and  is  sus 
tained  by  no  proof  in  history,  though  here  also  fancied 
resemblances   have    been    detected    in   language   and 
some  minor  things,  it  may  be   dismissed  as  unworthy 
of  serious  consideration. 

3.  Others  again  have    imagined   that  the   Eastern 
and  Western  Continents  were  once  united  by  land  oc 
cupying  the  space  which  is  now  filled  by  the  Atlan 
tic  Ocean  ;   and  that  previous  to  the  great  disruption 
an  emigration  took  place.    With  respect  to  this  view,  it 
is  embarrassed  by  greater  difficulties  than  the  former. 
There  is  not  the  remotest  trace  of  such  an  event  re 
corded  in  history.     It  is  only,  therefore,  entitled  to  be 
considered  as  a  possible  mode   by  which  the  Western 
Continent  might  have  been  peopled. 

4.  The    pretensions  of  the    Welsh   have  been  put 
forth  with  not  a  little  zeal,  and  have  been  considered 
by  some  as  having  more   plausibility.     They  assert, 
that,  about  the  year  1170,  on  the  death  of  Owen  Gwy- 
neth,  a  strife  for  the  succession  arose  among  his  sons  ; 
that  one  of  them,  disgusted  with  the  quarrel,  embarked 
in  ten  ships  with  a  number  of  people,  and  sailed  west 
ward  till  he  discovered  an  unknown  land  ;  that,  leaving 
part  of  his  people  as  a  colony,  he  returned  to  Wales, 
and  after  a  time  again  sailed  with  new  recruits,  and 
was  never  heard  of  afterwards.     Southey  has  built  on 
this  tradition  his  beautiful  poem  of  "  Madoc,"  the  name 
of  the  fancied  chieftain  who  was  at  the  head  of  the  en 
terprise.     The  writer,  by  whom  the  story  was   first 


ORIGIN    OF    THE    ABORIGINES.  13 

published,  is  said,  however,  to  have  lived  at  least  400 
years  after  the  events,  and  discredit  is  thus  thrown  over 
the  whole.  Mr.  Catlin,  in  the  appendix  to  his  second 
volume,  forgetful,  apparently,  that  he  had  already  at 
tributed  certain  rites  and  ceremonies  of  the  same 
people  to  Jewish  origin,  seems  to  suppose  that  the 
Mandans  are  undoubted  descendants  of  Madoc  and  his 
Welshmen,  who,  he  thinks,  entered  the  Gulf  of  Mex 
ico,  and  sailed  up  the  Mississippi  even  to  the  Ohio 
River,  whence  they  afterwards  emigrated  to  the 
Far  West.  He  furnishes  some  words  of  the  Mandan 
language,  which  he  compares  with  the  Welsh,  and 
which  must  be  allowed  to  have  considerable  resem 
blance  to  each  other,  for  the  same  ideas.  Still,  the 
theory  must  be  regarded  as  wholly  fanciful. 

5.  A  supposition  more  plausible  than  any  other  is, 
that  America  was  peopled  from  the  northeastern 
part  of  Asia.  This  seems  to  correspond  with  the 
general  view  of  the  Indians  themselves,  who  represent 
their  ancestors  as  having  been  formerly  residents  in 
Northwestern  America.  It  corresponds  also  with 
history  in  another  respect.  By  successive  emigrations, 
Asia  furnished  Europe  and  Africa  with  their  popula 
tion,  and  why  not  America  ?  If  it  could  supply  other 
quarters  of  the  globe  with  millions,  and  these  of  va 
rious  physical  and  moral  characteristics,  why  not  also 
supply  America  with  its  first  inhabitants  ?  The  iden 
tity  of  the  aborigines  with  the  nations  of  Northeast 
ern  Asia  cannot,  indeed,  be  fully  established  ;  but,  while 
many  causes  may  have  contributed  to  destroy  this  re 
semblance,  enough  is  shown,  with  other  facts,  to  make 
this  theory  preponderate  over  all  others. 


14  ORIGIN    OF    THE   ABORIGINES. 

If  this  supposition  be  true,  it  is  not  to  be  imagined 
that  the  emigration  to  this  continent  all  took  place  at 
once.  There  were  doubtless  successive  arrivals  of 
persons  from  various  parts  of  Asia ;  and  thus  the  In 
dian  traditions,  which  refer  to  the  Northwest  as  the 
country  of  their  ancestors,  and  to  periods  and  intervals 
separating  them,  in  which  people  of  various  character 
made  their  appearance,  one  after  another,  and  left 
some  traces  of  their  residence,  may  be  accounted  for. 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  THE  INDIANS. 


IN  respect  to  the  general  resemblance  of  the  In 
dians,  an  able  writer  of  a  recent  date,  treating  of  this 
question,  says,  —  "  The  testimony  of  all  travellers  goes 
to  prove  that  the  native  Americans  are  possessed  of 
certain  physical  characteristics  which  serve  to  identify 
them  in  places  the  most  remote,  while  they  assimilate 
not  less  in  their  moral  character.  There  are  also,  in 
their  multitudinous  languages,  some  traces  of  a  com 
mon  origin  ;  and  it  may  be  assumed  as  a  fact,  that  no 
other  race  of  men  maintains  so  striking  an  analogy 
through  all  its  subdivisions,  and  amidst  all  its  varieties 
of  physical  circumstances,  —  while,  at  the  same  time,  it 
is  distinguished  from  all  the  other  races  by  external 
peculiarities  of  form,  but  still  more  by  the  internal 
qualities  of  mind  and  intellect." 

M.  Bory  de  St.  Vincent  attempted  to  show  that  the 
American  race  includes  four  species  besides  the  Esqui 
maux  ;  but  he  appears  to  have  failed  in  establishing 
his  theory. 

Dr.  Morton  has  paid  great  attention  to  the  subject. 
He  conducted  his  investigations  by  comparisons  of  the 
skulls  of  a  vast  number  of  different  tribes,  the  results 
of  which  he  has  given  to  the  public  in  his  "  Crania 


CLASSIFICATION    OF    THE    INDIANS.  17 

Americana"  He  considers  the  most  natural  division 
to  be  into  the  Toltecan  and  American ;  the  former  being 
half-civilized,  and  including  the  Peruvians  and  Mexi 
cans;  the  latter  embracing  all  the  barbarous  nations 
except  the  Esquimaux,  whom  he  regards  as  of  Mon 
golian  origin. 

He  divides  each  of  these  into  subordinate  groups, 
those  of  the  American  class  being  called  the  Appala 
chian,  Brazilian,  Patagonian,  and  Fuegian. 

The  APPALACHIAN  includes  all  those  of  North  Ameri 
ca  except  the  Mexicans,  together  with  those  of  South 
America  north  of  the  Amazon  and  east  of  the  Andes. 
They  are  described  thus.  "  The  head  is  rounded,  the 
nose  large,  salient,  and  aquiline,  the  eyes  dark-brown, 
with  little  or  no  obliquity  of  position,  the  mouth  large 
and  straight,  the  teeth  nearly  vertical,  and  the  whole 
face  triangular.  The  neck  is  long,  the  chest  broad,  but 
rarely  deep,  the  body  and  limbs  muscular,  seldom  dis 
posed  to  fatness."  In  character,  they  "  are  warlike 
cruel,  and  unforgiving,"  averse  to  the  restraints  of 
civilized  life,  and  "  have  made  but  little  progress  in 
mental  culture  or  the  mechanic  arts." 

Of  the  BRAZILIAN  it  is  said,  that  they  are  spread 
over  a  great  part  of  South  America  east  of  the  Andes, 
including  the  whole  of  Brazil  and  Paraguay  between 
the  River  Amazon  and  35  degrees  of  south  latitude.  In 
physical  characteristics,  they  resemble  the  Appala 
chian;  their  nose  is  larger  and  more  expanded,  their 
mouth  and  lips  also  large.  Their  eyes  are  small,  more 
or  less  oblique,  and  farther  apart,  the  neck  short  and 
thick,  body  and  limbs  stout  and  full,  to  clumsiness.  In 
mental  character,  it  is  said,  that  none  of  the  American. 
2 


18  CLASSIFICATION    OF    THE    INDIANS. 

race  are  less  susceptible  of  civilization,  and  what  they 
are  taught  by  compulsion  seldom  exceeds  the  hum 
blest  elements  of  knowledge. 

The  PATAGONIAN  branch  comprises  the  nations 
south  of  the  River  La  Plata  to  the  Straits  of  Magellan, 
and  also  the  mountain  tribes  of  Chili.  They  are 
chiefly  distinguished  by  their  tall  stature,  handsome 
forms,  and  unconquerable  courage. 

The  FUEGIANS,  who  call  themselves  Yacannacunnee, 
rove  over  the  sterile  wastes  of  Terra  del  Fuego.  Their 
numbers  are  computed  by  Forster  to  be  only  about 
2,000.  Their  physical  aspect  is  most  repulsive.  They 
are  of  low  stature,  with  large  heads,  broad  faces,  and 
small  eyes,  full  chests,  clumsy  bodies,  large  knees, 
and  ill-shaped  legs.  Their  hair  is  lank,  black,  and 
coarse,  and  their  complexion  a  decided  brown,  like 
that  of  the  more  northern  tribes.  They  have  a  va 
cant  expression  of  face,  and  are  most  stupid  and  slow  in 
their  mental  operations,  destitute  of  curiosity,  and  caring 
for  little  that  does  not  minister  to  their  present  wants. 

Long,  black  hair,  indeed,  is  common  to  all  the  Ameri 
can  tribes.  Their  real  color  is  not  copper,  but  brown, 
most  resembling  cinnamon.  Dr.  Morton  and  Dr. 
McCulloh  agree,  that  no  epithet  is  so  proper  as  the 
brown  race. 

The  diversity  of  complexion  cannot  be  accounted 
for  mainly  by  climate  ;  for  many  near  the  equator  are 
not  darker  than  those  in  the  mountainous  parts  of  tem 
perate  regions.  The  Puelches,  and  other  Magcllanic 
tribes  beyond  35  degrees  south  latitude,  are  darker  than 
others  many  degrees  nearer  the  equator ;  the  Botecudos, 
but  a  little  distance  from  the  tropics,  are  nearly  white  ; 


CLASSIFICATION    OF    THE    INDIANS.  19 

the  Guayacas,  under  the  line,  are  fair,  while  the  Char- 
ruas,  at  50  degrees  south  latitude,  are  almost  black, 
and  the  Californians,  at  25  degrees  north  latitude,  are 
almost  white. 

The  color  seems  also  not  to  depend  on  local  situa 
tion,  and  in  the  same  individual  the  covered  parts  are 
not  fairer  than  those  exposed  to  the  heat  and  moist 
ure.  Where  the  differences  are  slight,  the  cause  may 
possibly  be  found  in  partial  emigrations  from  other 
countries.  The  characteristic  brown  tint  is  said  to  be 
occasioned  by  a  pigment  beneath  the  lower  skin,  pe 
culiar  to  them  with  the  African  family,  but  wanting  in 
the  European. 

Another  division  of  the  American  race  has  been 
suggested,  into  three  great  classes,  according  to  the 
pursuits  on  which  they  depend  for  subsistence,  name 
ly,  hunting,  Jishing,  and  agriculture.  The  American 
race  are  further  said  to  be  intellectually  inferior  to  the 
Caucasian  and  Mongolian  races.  They  seem  inca 
pable  of  a  continued  process  of  reasoning  on  abstract 
subjects.  They  seize  easily  and  eagerly  on  simple 
truths,  but  reject  those  which  require  analysis  or  in 
vestigation.  Their  inventive  faculties  are  small,  and 
they  generally  have  but  little  taste  for  the  arts  and 
sciences.  A  most  remarkable  defect  is  the  difficulty 
they  have  of  comprehending  the  relations  of  numbers. 
Mr.  Schoolcraft  assured  Dr.  Morton,  that  this  was  the 
cause  of  most  of  the  misunderstandings  in  respect  to 
treaties  between  the  English  and  the  native  tribes. 

The  Toltecan  family  are  considered  as  embracing  all 
the  semi-civilized  nations  of  Mexico,  Peru,  and  Bogota, 
reaching  from  the  Rio  Gila,%  in  33  degrees  of  north 


20  CLASSIFICATION    OF    THE    INDIANS. 

latitude,  along  the  western  shore  of  the  continent,  to 
the  frontiers  of  Chili,  and  on  the  eastern  coast  along 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico.  In  South  America,  however,  they 
chiefly  occupied  a  narrow  strip  of  land  between  the 
Andes  and  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The  Bogotese  in  New 
Grenada  were,  in  civilization,  between  the  Peruvians 
and  the  Mexicans.  The  Toltecans  were  not  the  sole 
possessors  of  these  regions,  but  the  dominant  race,  while 
the  American  race  composed  the  mass  of  the  people. 

The  great  difference  between  the  Toltecan  and  the 
American  races  consisted  in  the  intellectual  faculties, 
as  shown  in  their  arts  and  sciences,  architectural  re 
mains,  pyramids,  temples,  grottos,  bass-reliefs,  and 
arabesques  ;  their  roads,  aqueducts,  fortifications,  and 
mining  operations. 

With  respect  to  the  American  languages,  there  is 
said  to  exist  a  remarkable  similarity  among  them. 
From  Cape  Horn  to  the  Arctic  Sea,  all  the  nations  have 
languages  which  possess  a  distinctive  character,  but  still 
apparently  differing  from  all  those  of  the  Old  World. 
This  resemblance,  too,  is  said  not  to  be  of  an  indefinite 
kind.  It  generally  consists  in  the  peculiar  modes  of 
conjugating  the  verbs  by  inserting  syllables.  Vater,  a 
distinguished  German  writer  on  this  subject,  says,  that 
this  wonderful  uniformity  favors,  in  a  singular  manner, 
the  supposition  of  a  primitive  people  which  formed  the 
common  stock  of  the  American  indigenous  nations. 
According  to  M.  Balbi,  there  are  more  than  438  dif 
ferent  languages,  embracing  upwards  of  2,000  dia 
lects.  He  estimates  the  Indians  of  the  brown  race  at 
10,000,000,  and  the  races  produced  by  the  intermix 
ture  of  the  pure  races  at  7,000,000. 


CLASSIFICATION    OF   THE    INDIANS.  21 

We  have  thus  given  a  general  classification  of  the 
great  American  family,  and  the  main  points  respect 
ing  the  question  of  their  origin.  We  must  confess  our 
inability  wholly  to  lift  the  veil  of  obscurity  in  which 
their  early  history  is  involved,  or  answer,  conclusively, 
the  inquiry,  whence  they  came,  or  when  America  was 
first  peopled.  We  can  only  offer  what  we  have  al 
ready  stated  as  the  most  plausible  theory,  that,  ages  ago, 
a  great  nation  of  Asia  passed,  at  different  times,  by  way 
of  Behring's  Straits,  into  the  American  Continent,  and 
in  the  course  of  centuries  spread  themselves  over  its 
surface.  Here  we  suppose  them  to  have  become  di 
vided  by  the  slow  influences  of  climate,  and  other  cir 
cumstances,  into  the  several  varieties  which  they  dis- 
play. 

^- 


THE  ABORIGINES  OF  THE  WEST 
INDIES. 


THE  authentic  history  of  this  remarkable  and  pecu 
liar  race  of  men  opens  with  the  morning  of  the  12th  of 
October,  1492.  Columbus,  the  discoverer  of  the  New 
World,  at  that  memorable  date,  landed  upon  the  Ameri 
can  soil,  and,  as  if  his  first  action  was  to  be  a  type  of  the 
consequences  about  to  follow  in  respect  to  the  wonder 
ing  natives  who  beheld  him  and  his  companions,  he 
landed  with  a  drawn  sword  in  his  hand.  If  the  phi 
lanthropic  spirit  of  the  great  discoverer  could  have 
shaped  events,  the  fate  of  the  aborigines  of  the  new 
continent  had  been  widely  different ;  but  who,  that 
reads  their  history,  can  fail  to  see  that  the  Christians 
of  the  Eastern  Hemisphere  have  brought  but  the 
sword  to  the  American  race  ? 

Nor  were  the  first  actions  of  the  natives,  upon  be 
holding  this  advent  of  beings  that  seemed  to  them  of 
heavenly  birth,  hardly  less  significant  of  their  charac 
ter  and  doom.  They  were  at  first  filled  with  wonder 
and  awe,  and  then,  in  conformity  with  their  confid 
ing  nature,  came  forward  and  timidly  welcomed  the 
strangers.  The  following  is  Irving's  picturesque  de 
scription  of  the  scene. 


THE    ABORIGINES    OF    THE    WEST    INDIES.  23 

"  The  natives  of  the  island,  when  at  the  dawn  of 
day  they  had  beheld  the  ships  hovering  on  the  coast, 
had  supposed  them  some  monsters,  which  had  issued 
from  the  deep  during  the  night.  When  they  beheld  the 
boats  approach  the  shore,  and  a  number  of  strange 
beings,  clad  in  glittering  steel,  or  raiment  of  various 
colors,  landing  upon  the  beach,  they  fled  in  affright 
to  the  woods. 

"  Finding,  however,  that  there  was  no  attempt  to 
pursue  or  molest  them,  they  gradually  recovered  from, 
their  terror,  and  approached  the  Spaniards  with  great 
awe,  frequently  prostrating  themselves,  and  making 
signs  of  adoration.  During  the  ceremony  of  taking 
possession,  they  remained  gazing,  in  timid  admiration, 
at  the  complexion,  the  beards,  the  shining  armor, 
and  splendid  dress  of  the  Spaniards. 

"  The  admiral  particularly  attracted  their  attention, 
from  his  commanding  height,  his  air  of  authority,  his 
scarlet  dress,  and  the  deference  paid  him  by  his  com 
panions  ;  all  which  pointed  him  out  to  be  the  com 
mander. 

"  When  they  had  still  further  recovered  from  their 
fears,  they  approached  the  Spaniards,  touched  their 
beards,  and  examined  their  hands  and  faces,  admiring 
their  whiteness.  Columbus  was  pleased  with  their  sim 
plicity,  their  gentleness,  and  the  confidence  they  re 
posed  in  beings  who  must  have  appeared  so  strange 
and  formidable,  and  he  submitted  to  their  scrutiny  with 
perfect  acquiescence. 

1  The  wondering  savages  were  won  by  this  benig 
nity.  They  now  supposed  that  the  ships  had  sailed 
out  of  the  crystal  firmanent  which  bounded  their  hori- 


24  THE   ABORIGINES    OF    THE   WEST    INDIES. 

zon,  or  that  they  had  descended  from  above  on  their 
ample  wings,  and  that  these  marvellous  beings  were 
inhabitants  of  the  skies. 

"  The  natives  of  the  island  were  no  less  objects  of 
curiosity  to  the  Spaniards,  differing,  as  they  did,  from 
any  race  of  men  they  had  seen.  They  were  entire 
ly  naked,  and  painted  with  a  variety  of  colors  and  de 
vices,  so  as  to  give  them  a  wild  and  fantastic  appear 
ance.  Their  natural  complexion  was  of  a  tawny  or 
.copper  hue,  and  they  had  no  beards.  Their  hair  was 
straight  and  coarse  ;  their  features,  though  disfigured 
by  paint,  were  agreeable ;  they  had  lofty  foreheads, 
and  remarkably  fine  eyes. 

"  They  were  of  moderate  stature,  and  well  shaped. 
They  appeared  to  be  a  simple  and  artless  people,  and 
of  gentle  and  friendly  dispositions.  Their  only  arms 
were  lances,  hardened  at  the  end  by  fire,  or  pointed 
with  a  flint  or  the  bone  of  a  fish.  There  was  no  iron 
among  them,  nor  did  they  know  its  properties  ;  for, 
when  a  drawn  sword  was  presented  to  them,  they  un 
guardedly  took  it  by  the  edge. 

"  Columbus  distributed  among  them  colored  caps, 
glass  beads,  hawk's  bells,  and  other  trifles,  which  they 
received  as  inestimable  gifts,  and,  decorating  them 
selves  with  them,  were  wonderfully  delighted  with 
their  finery.  In  return,  they  brought  cakes  of  a  kind 
of  bread  called  cassava,  made  from  the  yuca  root, 
which  constituted  a  principal  part  of  their  food." 

Thus  kindly  began  the  intercourse  between  the  Old 
World  and  the  New  ;  but  the  demon  of  avarice  soon 
disturbed  their  peace.  The  Spaniards  perceived  small 
ornaments  of  gold  in  the  noses  of  some  of  the  natives. 


THE   ABORIGINES    OF   THE    WEST    INDIES.  25 

On  being  asked  where  this  precious  metal  was  pro 
cured,  they  answered  by  signs,  pointing  to  the  south, 
and  Columbus  understood  them  to  say,  that  a  king  re 
sided  in  that  quarter,  of  such  wealth  that  he  was  served 
in  great  vessels  of  gold. 

Columbus  took  seven  of  the  Indians  with  him,  to 
serve  as  interpreters  and  guides,  and  set  sail  to  find 
the  country  of  gold.  He  cruised  among  the  beautiful 
islands,  and  stopped  at  three  of  them.  These  were 
green,  fertile,  and  abounding  with  spices  and  odorifer 
ous  trees.  The  inhabitants  everywhere  appeared  the 
same,  —  simple,  harmless,  and  happy,  and  totally  un 
acquainted  with  civilized  man. 

Columbus  was  disappointed  in  his  hopes  of  finding 
gold  or  spices  in  these  islands  ;  but  the  natives  con 
tinued  to  point  to  the  south,  and  then  spoke  of  an 
island  in  that  direction  called  Cuba,  which  the  Span 
iards  understood  them  to  say  abounded  in  gold,  pearls, 
and  spices.  People  often  believe  what  they  earnestly 
wish ;  and  Columbus  sailed  in  search  of  Cuba,  fully 
confident  that  he  should  find  the  land  of  riches.  He 
arrived  in  sight  of  it  on  the  28th  of  October,  1492. 

Here  he  found  a  most  lovely  country,  and  the 
houses  of  the  Indians,  neatly  built  of  the  branches 
of  palm-trees,  in  the  shape  of  pavilions,  were  scat 
tered  under  the  trees,  like  tents  in  a  camp.  But  hear 
ing  of  a  province  in  the  centre  of  the  island,  where, 
as  he  understood  the  Indians  to  say,  a  great  prince 
ruled,  Columbus  determined  to  send  a  present  to  him, 
and  one  of  his  letters  of  recommendation  from  the 
king  and  queen  of  Spain. 

For  this  purpose  he  chose  two  Spaniards,  one  of 


26  THE    ABORIGINES    OF    THE    WEST    INDIES. 


whom  was  a  converted  Jew,  and  knew  Hebrew,  Chal- 
daic,  and  Arabic.  Columbus  thought  the  prince  must 
understand  one  or  the  other  of  these  languages.  Two 
Indians  were  sent  with  them  as  guides.  They  were 
furnished  with  strings  of  beads,  and  various  trinkets, 
for  their  travelling  expenses ;  and  they  were  enjoined 
to  ascertain  the  situation  of  the  provinces  and  rivers  of 
Asia,  —  for  Columbus  thought  the  West  Indies  were  a 
part  of  the  Eastern  Continent. 

The  Jew  found  his  Hebrew,  Chaldaic,  and  Arabic 
of  no  avail,  and  the  Indian  interpreter  was  obliged  to 
be  the  orator.  He  made  a  regular  speech  after  the 
Indian  manner,  extolling  the  power,  wealth,  and  gen 
erosity  of  the  white  men.  When  he  had  finished,  the 
Indians  crowded  round  the  Spaniards,  touched  and  ex 
amined  their  skin  and  raiment,  and  kissed  their  hands 
and  feet  in  token  of  adoration.  But  they  had  no  gold 
to  give  them. 

It  was  here  that  tobacco  was  first  discovered.  When 
the  envoys  were  on  their  return,  they  saw  several  of 
the  natives  going  about  with  firebrands  in  their  hands, 
and  certain  dried  herbs  which  they  rolled  up  in  a  leaf, 
and,  lighting  one  end,  put  the  other  into  their  mouths, 
and  continued  inhaling  and  puffing  out  the  smoke.  A 
roll  of  this  kind  they  called  tobacco.  The  Spaniards 
were  struck  with  astonishment  at  this  smoking. 

When  Columbus  became  convinced  that  there  was 
no  gold  of  consequence  to  be  found  in  Cuba,  he  sailed 
in  quest  of  some  richer  lands,  and  soon  discovered  the 
island  of  Hispaniola,  or  Hayti.  It  was  a  beautiful 
island.  The  high  mountains  swept  down  into  luxu 
riant  plains  and  green  savannas,  while  the  appearance 


THE   ABORIGINES    OF    THE    WEST    INDIES.  27 

of  cultivated  fields,  with  the  numerous  fires  at  night, 
and  the  volumes  of  smoke  which  rose  in  various  parts 
by  day,  all  showed  it  to  be  populous.  Columbus  im 
mediately  stood  in  towards  the  land,  to  the  great  con 
sternation  of  his  Indian  guides,  who  assured  him  by 
signs  that  the  inhabitants  had  but  one  eye,  and  were 
fierce  and  cruel  cannibals. 

Columbus  entered  a  harbour  at  the  western  end  of  the 
island  of  Hayti,  on  the  evening  of  the  6th  of  Decem 
ber.  He  gave  to  the  harbour  the  name  of  St.  Nicholas, 
which  it  bears  to  this  day.  The  inhabitants  were 
frightened  at  the  approach  of  the  ships,  and  they  all 
fled  to  the  mountains.  It  was  some  time  before  any 
of  the  natives  could  be  found.  At  last  three  sailors 
succeeded  in  overtaking  a  young  and  beautiful  female, 
whom  they  carried  to  the  ships. 

She  was  treated  with  the  greatest  kindness,  and  dis 
missed  finely  clothed,  and  loaded  with  presents  of 
beads,  hawk's  bells,  and  other  pretty  bawbles.  Colum 
bus  hoped  by  this  conduct  to  conciliate  the  Indians ; 
and  he  succeeded.  The  next  day,  when  the  Spaniards 
landed,  the  natives  permitted  them  to  enter  their 
houses,  and  set  before  them  bread,  fish,  roots,  and  fruits 
of  various  kinds,  in  the  most  kind  and  hospitable  man 
ner. 

Columbus  sailed  along  the  coast,  continuing  his  in 
tercourse  with  the  natives,  some  of  whom  had  orna 
ments  of  gold,  which  they  readily  exchanged  for  the 
merest  trifle  of  European  manufacture.  These  poor, 
simple  people  little  thought  that  to  obtain  gold  these 
Christians  would  destroy  all  the  Indians  in  the  islands. 
No, — they  believed  the  Spaniards  were  more  than  mor- 


28  THE   ABORIGINES    OF   THE    WEST   INDIES. 

tal,  and  that  the  country  from  which  they  came  must 
exist  somewhere  in  the  skies. 

The  generous  and  kind  feelings  of  the  natives  were 
shown  to  great  advantage  when  Columbus  was  dis 
tressed  by  the  loss  of  his  ship.  He  was  sailing  to  visit 
a  grand  cacique  or  chieftain  named  Guacanagari,  who 
resided  on  the  coast  to  the  eastward,  when  his  ship  ran 
aground,  and,  the  breakers  beating  against  her,  she 
was  entirely  wrecked.  He  immediately  sent  messen 
gers  to  inform  Guacanagari  of  this  misfortune. 

When  the  cacique  heard  of  the  distress  of  his  guest, 
he  was  so  much  afflicted  as  to  shed  tears ;  and  never 
in  any  civilized  country  were  the  vaunted  rites  of  hos 
pitality  more  scrupulously  observed  than  by  this  uncul 
tivated  savage.  He  assembled  his  people  and  sent  off 
all  his  canoes  to  the  assistance  of  Columbus,  assuring 
him,  at  the  same  time,  that  every  thing  he  possessed 
was  at  his  service.  The  effects  were  landed  from  the 
wreck  and  deposited  near  the  dwelling  of  the  cacique, 
and  a  guard  set  over  them,  until  houses  could  be  pre 
pared,  in  which  they  could  be  stored. 

There  seemed,  however,  no  disposition  among  the 
natives  to  take  advantage  of  the  misfortune  of  the 
strangers,  or  to  -plunder  the  treasures  thus  cast  upon 
their  shores,  though  they  must  have  been  inestimable 
in  their  eyes.  On  the  contrary,  they  manifested  as 
deep  a  concern  at  the  disaster  of  the  Spaniards  as  if 
it  had  happened  to  themselves,  and  their  only  study 
was,  how  they  could  administer  relief  and  consolation. 

Columbus  was  greatly  affected  by  this  unexpected 
goodness.  "  These  people,"  said  he  in  his  journal, 
"  love  their  neighbours  as  themselves ;  their  discourse 


THE   ABORIGINES    OF    THE   WEST    INDIES.  29 

is  ever  sweet  and  gentle,  and  accompanied  by  a  smile. 
There  is  not  in  the  world  a  better  nation  or  a  better 
land." 

When  the  cacique  first  met  Columbus,  the  latter 
appeared  dejected ;  and  the  good  Indian,  much  mov 
ed,  again  offered  Columbus  every  thing  he  possess 
ed  that  could  be  of  service  to  him.  He  invited  him 
on  shore,  where  a  banquet  was  prepared  for  his  enter 
tainment,  consisting  of  various  kinds  of  fish  and  fruit. 
After  the  feast,  Columbus  was  conducted  to  the  beauti 
ful  groves  which  surrounded  the  dwelling  of  the  ca 
cique,  where  upwards  of  a  thousand  of  the  natives 
were  assembled,  all  perfectly  naked,  who  performed 
several  of  their  national  games  and  dances. 

Thus  did  this  generous  Indian  try,  by  every  means 
in  his  power,  to  cheer  the  melancholy  of  his  guest, 
showing  a  warmth  of  sympathy,  a  delicacy  of  atten 
tion,  and  an  innate  dignity  and  refinement,  which 
could  not  have  been  expected  from  one  in  his  savage 
state.  He  was  treated  with  great  deference  by  his 
subjects,  and  conducted  himself  towards  them  with  a 
gracious  and  prince -like  majesty. 

Three  houses  were  given  to  the  shipwrecked  crew 
for  their  residence.  Here,  living  on  shore,  and  min 
gling  freely  with  the  natives,  they  became  fascinated 
by  their  easy  and  idle  mode  of  life.  They  were  gov 
erned  by  the  caciques  with  an  absolute,  but  patriarchal 
and  easy  rule,  and  existed  in  that  state  of  primitive 
and  savage  simplicity  which  some  philosophers  have 
fondly  pictured  as  the  most  enviable  on  earth. 

The  following  is  the  opinion  of  old  Peter  Martyr : 
"It  is  certain  that  the  land  among, these  people  (the 


30  THE    ABORIGINES    OF    THE    WEST    INDIES. 

Indians)  is  as  common  as  the  sun  and  water,  and  that 
*  mine  and  thine,'  the  seeds  of  all  mischief,  have  no 
place  with  them.  They  are  content  with  so  little, 
that,  in  so  large  a  country,  they  have  rather  superfluity 
than  scarceness ;  so  that  they  seem  to  live  in  a  golden 
world,  without  toil,  in  open  gardens,  neither  intrench 
ed  nor  shut  up  by  walls  or  hedges.  They  deal  truly 
with  one  another,  without  laws,  or  books,  or  judges." 

In  fact,  these  Indians  seemed  to  be  perfectly  con 
tented  ;  their  few  fields,  cultivated  almost  without  la 
bor,  furnished  roots  and  vegetables  ;  their  groves  were 
laden  with  delicious  fruit;  and  the  coast  and  rivers 
abounded  with  fish.  Softened  by  the  indulgence  of 
nature,  a  great  part  of  the  day  was  passed  by  them  in 
indolent  repose.  In  the  evening  they  danced  in  their 
fragrant  groves  to  their  national  songs,  or  the  rude 
sound  of  their  silver  drums. 

Such  was  the  character  of  the  natives  of  many  of 
the  West  India  islands,  when  first  discovered.  Sim 
ple  and  ignorant  they  were,  and  indolent  also,  but  then 
they  were  kind-hearted,  generous,  and  happy.  And 
their  sense  of  justice,  and  of  the  obligations  of  man  to 
do  right,  are  beautifully  set  forth  in  the  following 
story. 

It  was  a  custom  with  Columbus  to  erect  crosses  in 
all  remarkable  places,  to  denote  the  discovery  of  the 
country,  and  its  subjugation  to  the  Catholic  faith.  He 
once  performed  this  ceremony  on  the  banks  of  a  river 
in  Cuba.  It  was  on  a  Sunday  morning.  The  cacique 
attended,  and  also  a  favorite  of  his,  a  venerable  In 
dian,  fourscore  years  of  age. 

While  mass  was  performed  in  a  stately  grove,  the 


THE    ABORIGINES    OF    THE    WEST    INDIES.  31 

natives  looked  on  with  awe  and  reverence.  When  it 
was  ended,  the  old  man  made  a  speech  to  Columbus 
in  the  Indian  manner.  "lam  told,"  said  he,  "that 
thou  hast  lately  come  to  these  lands  with  a  mighty 
force,  and  hast  subdued  many  countries,  spreading 
great  fear  among  the  people  ;  but  be  not  vainglo 
rious. 

"  According  to  our  belief,  the  souls  of  men  have 
two  journeys  to  perform,  after  they  have  departed  from 
the  body  :  one  to  a  place  dismal,  foul,  and  covered  with 
darkness,  prepared  for  such  men  as  have  been  unjust 
and  cruel  to  their  fellow-men  ;  the  other  full  of  delight, 
for  such  as  have  promoted  peace  on  earth.  If,  then, 
thou  art  mortal,  and  dost  expect  to  die,  beware  that 
thou  hurt  no  man  wrongfully,  neither  do  harm  to  those 
who  have  done  no  harm  to  thee." 

When  this  speech  was  explained  to  Columbus  by 
his  interpreter,  he  was  greatly  moved,  and  rejoiced  to 
hear  this  doctrine  of  the  future  state  of  the  soul,  hav 
ing  supposed  that  no  belief  of  the  kind  existed  among 
the  inhabitants  of  these  countries.  He  assured  the 
old  man  that  he  had  been  sent  by  his  sovereigns,  to 
teach  them  the  true  religion,  to  protect  them  from 
harm,  and  to  subdue  their  enemies,  the  Caribs. 

Alas  for  the  simple  Indians  who  believed  such  pro 
fessions  !  Columbus,  no  doubt,  was  sincere ;  but  the 
adventurers  who  accompanied  him,  and  the  tyrants 
who  followed  him,  cared  only  for  riches  for  them 
selves.  They  ground  down  the  poor,  harmless  red 
men  beneath  a  harsh  system  of  labor,  obliging  them 
to  furnish,  month  by  month,  so  much  gold.  This  gold 
was  found  in  fine  grains,  and  it  was  a  severe  task  to 


32     THE  ABORIGINES  OF  THE  WEST  INDIES. 

search  the  mountain-pebbles  and  the  sands  of  the 
plains  for  the  shining  dust. 

Then  the  islands,  after  they  were  seized  upon  by 
the  Christians,  were  parcelled  out  among  the  leaders, 
and  the  Indians  were  compelled  to  be  their  slaves. 
No  wonder  deep  despair  fell  upon  the  natives. 
Weak  and  indolent  by  nature,  and  brought  up  in  the 
untasked  idleness  of  their  soft  climate  and  their  fruit 
ful  groves,  death  itself  seemed  preferable  to  a  life  of 
toil  and  anxiety. 

The  pleasant  life  of  the  island  was  at  an  end  :  the 
dream  in  the  shade  by  day ;  the  slumber  during  the 
noontide  heat  by  the  fountain,  or  under  the  spreading 
palm  ;  and  the  song,  and  the  dance,  and  the  game  in 
the  mellow  evening,  when  summoned  to  their  simple 
amusements  by  the  rude  Indian  drum.  They  spoke 
of  the  times  that  were  past,  before  the  white  men  had 
introduced  sorrow,  and  slavery,  and  weary  labor 
among  them  ;  and  their  songs  were  mournful,  and 
their  dances  slow. 

They  had  flattered  themselves,  for  a  time,  that  the 
visit  of  the  strangers  would  be  but  temporary,  and  that, 
spreading  their  ample  sails,  their  ships  would  waft 
them  back  to  their  home  in  the  sky.  In  their  sim 
plicity,  they  had  frequently  inquired  of  the  Spaniards 
when  they  intended  to  return  to  Turey,  or  the  heavens. 
But  when  all  such  hope  was  at  an  end,  they  became 
desperate,  and  resorted  to  a  forlorn  and  terrible  alter 
native. 

They  knew  the  Spaniards  depended  chiefly  on  the 
supplies  raised  in  the  islands  for  a  subsistence ;  and 
these  poor  Indians  endeavoured  to  produce  a  famine. 


THE   ABORIGINES    OF   THE    WEST    INDIES.  33 

For  this  purpose  they  destroyed  their  fields  of  maize, 
stripped  the  trees  of  their  fruit,  pulled  up  the  yuca 
and  other  roots,  and  then  fled  to  the  mountains. 

The  Spaniards  were  reduced  to  much  distress,  but 
were  partially  relieved  by  supplies  from  Spain.  To 
revenge  themselves  on  the  Indians,  they  pursued  them 
to  their  mountain  retreats,  hunted  them  from  one 
dreary  fastness  to  another,  like  wild  beasts,  until  thou 
sands  perished  in  dens  and  caverns,  of  famine  and 
sickness,  and  the  survivors,  yielding  themselves  up  in 
despair,  submitted  to  the  yoke  of  slavery.  But  they 
did  not  long  bear  the  burden  of  life  under  their  civil 
ized  masters.  In  1504,  only  twelve  years  after  the 
discovery  of  Hayti,  when  Columbus  visited  it,  (under 
the  administration  of  Ovando,)  he  thus  wrote  to  his 
sovereigns :  "  Since  I  left  the  island,  six  parts  out  of 
seven  of  the  natives  are  dead,  all  through  ill-treatment 
and  inhumanity ;  some  by  the  sword,  others  by  blows 
and  cruel  usage,  or  by  hunger." 

No  wonder  these  oppressed  Indians  considered  the 
Christians  the  incarnation  of  all  evil.  Their  feelings 
were  often  expressed  in  a  manner  that  must  have 
touched  the  heart  of  a  real  Christian,  if  there  was 
such  a  one  among  their  oppressors. 

When  Velasquez  set  out  to  conquer  Cuba,  he  had 
only  three  hundred  men  ;  and  these  were  thought  suf 
ficient  to  subdue  an  island  above  seven  hundred  miles 
in  length,  and  filled  with  inhabitants.  From  this  cir 
cumstance  we  may  understand  how  naturally  mild  and 
unwarlike  was  the  character  of  the  Indians.  Indeed, 
they  offered  no  opposition  to  the  Spaniards,  except  in 
one  district.  Hatuey,  a  cacique  who  had  fled  from. 
3 


34  THE   ABORIGINES    OF    THE   WEST    INDIES. 

Hayti,  had  taken  possession  of  the  eastern  extremity 
of  Cuba.  He  stood  upon  the  defensive,  and  endeavour 
ed  to  drive  the  Spaniards  back  to  their  ships.  He  was 
soon  defeated  and  taken  prisoner. 

Velasquez  considered  him  as  a  slave  who  had  taken 
arms  against  his  master,  and  condemned  him  to  the 
flames.  When  Hatuey  was  tied  to  the  stake,  a  friar 
came  forward,  and  told  him  that  if  he  would  embrace 
the  Christian  faith,  he  should  be  immediately,  on  his 
death,  admitted  into  heaven. 

"Are  there  any  Spaniards,"  says  Hatuey,  after 
some  pause,  "  in  that  region  of  bliss  you  describe  ?  " 

"  Yes,"  replied  the  monk,  "  but  only  such  as  are 
worthy  and  good." 

"  The  best  of  them,"  returned  the  indignant  Indian, 
"  have  neither  worth  nor  goodness ;  I  will  not  go  to  a 
place  where  I  may  meet  with  one  of  that  cruel  race." 


THE   CARIES. 

COLUMBUS  discovered  the  islands  of  the  Caribs  or 
Charibs,  now  called  the  Caribbees,  during  his  second 
voyage  to  America,  in  1493.  The  first  island  he  saw 
he  named  Dominica,  because  he  discovered  it  on  Sun 
day.  As  the  ships  gently  moved  onward,  other  islands 
rose  to  sight,  one  after  another,  covered  with  forests, 
and  enlivened  with  flocks  of  parrots  and  other  tropical 
birds,  while  the  whole  air  was  sweetened  by  the  fra 
grance  of  the  breezes  which  passed  over  them. 


THE    CARIES.  '35 

This  beautiful  cluster  of  islands  is  called  the  Antil 
les.  They  extend  from  the  eastern  end  of  Porto  Rico 
to  the  coast  of  Paria  on  the  southern  continent,  form 
ing  a  kind  of  barrier  between  the  main  ocean  and  the 
Caribbean  Sea.  Here  was  the  country  of  the  Caribs. 

Columbus  had  heard  of  the  Caribs  during  his  stay  at 
Hayti  and  Cuba,  at  the  time  of  his  first  voyage.  The 
timid  and  indolent  race  of  Indians  in  those  pleasant 
islands  were  afraid  of  the  Caribs,  and  had  repeatedly 
besought  Columbus  to  assist  them  in  overcoming  these 
their  ferocious  enemies.  The  Caribs  were  represented 
as  terrible  warriors,  and  cruel  cannibals,  who  roasted 
and  ate  their  captives.  This  the  gentle  Haytians 
thought,  truly  enough,  was  a  good  pretext  for  warning 
the  Christians  against  such  foes.  Columbus  did  not 
at  first  imagine  that  the  beautiful  paradise  he  saw,  as 
he  sailed  onward  among  these  green  and  spicy  islands, 
could  be  the  residence  of  cruel  men ;  but  on  landing 
at  Guadaloupe,  he  soon  became  convinced  he  was 
truly  in  a  Golgotha,  a  place  of  skulls.  He  there  saw 
human  limbs  hanging  in  the  houses,  as  if  curing  for 
provisions,  and  some  even  roasting  at  the  fire  for  food. 
He  knew  then  that  he  was  in  the  country  of  the  Caribs. 

On  touching  at  the  island  of  Montserrat,  Columbus 
was  informed  that  the  Caribs  had  eaten  up  all  the  in 
habitants.  If  that  had  been  true,  it  seems  strange  how 
he  obtained  his  information. 

It  is  probable  many  of  these  stories  were  exaggera 
tions.  The  Caribs  were  a  warlike  people,  in  many 
respects  essentially  differing  in  character  from  the  na 
tives  of  the  other  West  India  islands.  They  were  en 
terprising  as  well  as  ferocious,  and  frequently  made 


36  THE    ABORIGINES    OF    THE    WEST    INDIES. 

roving  expeditions  in  their  canoes  to  the  distance  of 
one  hundred  and  fifty  leagues,  invading  the  islands, 
ravaging  the  villages,  making  slaves  of  the  youngest 
and  handsomest  females,  and  carrying  off  the  men  to 
be  killed  and  eaten. 

These  things  were  bad  enough,  and  it  is  not  strange 
report  should  make  them  more  terrible  than  the  reali 
ty.  The  Caribs  also  gave  the  Spaniards  more  trouble 
than  did  the  effeminate  natives  of  the  other  islands. 
They  fought  their  invaders  desperately.  In  some  cases 
the  women  showed  as  much  bravery  as  the  men.  At 
Santa  Cruz  the  females  plied  their  bows  with  such 
vigor,  that  one  of  them  sent  an  arrow  through  a  Span 
ish  buckler,  and  wounded  the  soldier  who  bore  it. 

There  have  been  many  speculations  respecting  the 
origin  of  the  Caribs.  That  they  were  a  different  race 
from  the  inhabitants  of  the  other  islands  is  generally 
acknowledged.  They  also  differed  from  the  Indians 
of  Mexico  and  Peru  ;  though  some  writers  think  they 
were  culprits  banished  either  from  the  continent  or 
the  large  islands,  and  thus  a  difference  of  situation 
might  have  produced  a  difference  of  manners.  Others 
think  they  were  descended  from  some  civilized  people 
of  Europe  or  Africa,  and  imagine  that  there  is  no  dif 
ficulty  attending  the  belief,  that  a  Carthaginian  or 
Phoenician  vessel  might  have  been  overtaken  by  a 
storm,  and  blown  about  by  the  gales,  till  it  entered  the 
current  of  the  trade-winds,  when  it  would  have  been 
easily  carried  to  the  West  Indies. 

The  Caribs  possessed  as  many  of  the  arts  as  were 
necessary  to  live  at  ease  in  that  luxurious  climate. 
Some  of  these  have  excited  the  admiration  of  Eu- 


THE    CARIBS.      ^  £y  37 

%^Ji^.  TV 

ropeans.*  In  their  subsequent  interco^hfcBS^&Tth  the 
Europeans,  they  have,  in  some  instances,  proved  faith 
less  and  treacherous.  In  1708,  the  English  entered 
into  an  agreement  with  the  Caribs  in  St.  Vincent  to 
attack  the  French  colonies  in  Martinico.  The  French 
governor  heard  of  the  treaty,  and  sent  Major  Coullet, 
who  was  a  great  favorite  with  the  savages,  to  persuade 
them  to  break  the  treaty.  Coullet  took  with  him  a 
number  of  officers  and  servants,  and  a  good  store  of 
provisions  and  liquors.  He  reached  St.  Vincent,  gave 
a  grand  entertainment  to  the  principal  Caribs,  and, 
after  circulating  the  brandy  freely,  he  got  himself 
painted  red,  and  made  them  a  flaming  speech.  He 
urged  them  to  break  their  connection  with  the  English. 
How  could  they  refuse  a  man  who  gave  them  brandy, 
and  who  was  red  as  themselves?  They  abandoned 
their  English  friends,  and  burned  all  the  timber  the 
English  had  cut  on  the  island,  and  butchered  the  first 
Englishmen  who  arrived.  But  their  crimes  were  no 
worse  than  those  of  their  Christian  advisers,  who,  on 
both  sides,  were  inciting  these  savages  to  war. 

But  the  Caribs  are  all  gone,  perished  from  the  earth. 
Their  race  is  no  more,  and  their  name  is  only  a  re 
membrance.  The  English  and  the  French,  chiefly  the 
latter,  have  destroyed  them.  There  is,  however,  one 
pleasant  reflection  attending  their  fate.  Though  de 
stroyed,  they  were  never  enslaved.  None  of  their 
conquerors  could  compel  them  to  labor.  Even  those 
who  have  attempted  to  hire  Caribs  for  servants  have 


*  For  an  account  of  these,  see  "  Manners  and  Customs  of  the 
Indians  "  in  "  The  Cabinet  Library." 


38  THE   ABORIGINES    OF   THE    WEST    INDIES. 

found  it  impossible  to  derive  any  benefit  or  profit  from 
them  ;  they  would  not  be  commanded  or  reprimanded. 

This  independence  was  called  pride,  indolence,  and 
stubbornness,  by  their  conquerors.  If  the  Caribs  had 
had  historians  to  record  their  wrongs,  and  their  re 
sistance  to  a*n  overwhelming  tyranny,  they  would  have 
set  the  matter  in  a  very  different  light.  They  would 
have  expressed  the  sentiment  which  the  conduct  of 
their  countrymen  so  steadily  exemplified,  —  that  it  was 
better  to  die  free  than  to  live  slaves. 

So  determined  was  their  resistance  to  all  kinds  of 
authority,  that  it  became  a  proverb  among  the  Eu 
ropeans,  that  to  show  displeasure  to  a  Carib  was  the 
same  as  beating  him,  and  to  beat  him  was  the  same  as 
to  kill  him.  If  they  did  any  thing,  it  was  only  what 
they  chose,  how  they  chose,  and  when  they  chose ; 
and  when  they  were  most  wanted,  it  often  happened 
that  they  would  not  do  what  was  required,  nor  any 
thing  else. 

The  French  missionaries  made  many  attempts  to 
convert  the  Caribs  to  Christianity,  but  without  success. 
It  is  true  that  some  were  apparently  converted  ;  they 
learned  the  catechism  and  prayers,  and  were  bap 
tized  ;  but  they  always  returned  to  their  old  habits. 

A  man  of  family  and  fortune,  named  Chateau  Du- 
bois,  settled  in  Guadaloupe,  and  devoted  a  great  part  of 
his  life  to  the  conversion  of  the  Caribs,  particularly 
those  of  Dominica.  He  constantly  entertained  a  num 
ber  of  them,  and  taught  them  himself.  He  died  in 
the  exercise  of  these  pious  and  charitable  offices,  with 
out  the  consolation  of  having  made  one  single  convert. 

As  we  have  said,  several  had  been  baptized,  and, 


THE    CARIBS.  39 

as  he  hoped,  they  were  well  instructed,  and  apparently 
well  grounded  in  the  Christian  religion  ;  but  after  they 
returned  to  their  own  people,  they  soon  resumed  all 
the  Indian  customs,  and  their  natural  indifference  to  all 
religion. 

Some  years  after  the  death  of  Dubois,  one  of  these 
Carib  apostates  was  at  Martinico.  He  spoke  French 
correctly,  could  read  and  write,  had  been  baptized, 
and  was  then  upwards  of  fifty  years  old.  When  re 
minded  of  the  truths  he  had  been  taught,  and  re 
proached  for  his  apostasy,  he  replied,  "  that  if  he  had 
been  born  of  Christian  parents,  or  if  he  had  continued 
to  live  among  the  French,  he  would  still  have  pro 
fessed  Christianity ;  but  that,  having  returned  to  his 
own  country  and  his  own  people,  he  could  not  resolve 
to  live  in  a  manner  differing  from  their  way  of  life, 
and  by  so  doing  expose  himself  to  the  hatred  and  con 
tempt  of  his  relations."  Alas  !  it  is  small  matter  of 
wonder  that  the  Carib  thought  the  Christian  religion 
was  only  a  profession.  Had  those  who  bore  that 
name  always  been  Christians  in  reality,  and  treated 
the  poor  ignorant  savages  with  the  justice,  truth,  and 
mercy  which  the  gospel  enjoins,  what  a  different  tale 
the  settlement  of  the  New  World  would  have  fur 
nished  ! 

The  Caribs,  who  spread  themselves  over  the  main 
land  contiguous  to  their  islands,  were  similar  in  char 
acteristics  to  those  of  the  West  Indies,  of  whom  they 
are  supposed  to  have  been  the  original  stock.  They 
formed  an  alliance  with  the  English  under  Sir  Walter 
Raleigh,  in  one  of  his  romantic  expeditions  on  that 
coast,  in  1595,  and  for  a  long  time  preserved  the  Eng- 


40  THE   ABORIGINES    OF   THE   WEST    INDIES. 

lish  colors  which  were  presented  to  them  on  that  oc 
casion.  The  Caribs  of  the  continent  are  said  to  have 
been  divided  into  the  Maritimos  and  the  Mediterra- 
neos.  The  former  lived  in  plains,  and  upon  the  coast 
of  the  Atlantic,  and  are  said  to  have  been  the  most 
hostile  of  any  of  the  Indians  who  infest  the  settle 
ments  of  the  missions  of  the  River  Orinoco,  and  have 
been  sometimes  called  the  Galibis.  The  Mediterraneos 
inhabited  the  south  side  of  the  source  of  the  River  Caro- 
ni,  and  are  described  as  of  a  more  pacific  nature,  and 
began  to  receive  the  Jesuit  missionaries  and  embrace 
the  Christian  faith  in  1738. 


EARLY  MEXICAN  HISTORY. 


ACCORDING  to  the  annals  preserved  by  the  Mexicans, 
the  country  embraced  in  the  vale  of  Mexico  was  for 
merly  called  Anahuac.  The  rest  of  the  territory  con 
tained  the  kingdoms  of  Mexico,  Acolhuacan,  Tlacopan, 
Michuacan,  and  the  republics  of  Tlaxcallan  or  Tlascala, 
Cholollan,  and  Huexotzinco.  The  people  who  settled 
the  country  came  from  the  north.  The  first  inhab 
itants  were  called  Toltecs  or  Toltecas,  who  came 
from  a  distant  country  at  the  northwest  in  the  year 
472.  They  migrated  slowly,  cultivating  and  settling 
as  they  proceeded,  so  that  it  was  104  years  before 
they  reached  a  place  fifty  miles  east  of  the  situation 
where  Mexico  was  afterwards  built ;  there  they  re 
mained  for  twenty  years,  and  built  a  city  called  Tol- 
lantzinco.  Thence  they  removed  forty  miles  to  the 
westward,  and  built  another  city  called  Tollan  or  Tula. 

When  they  first  commenced  their  migration,  they 
had  a  number  of  chiefs,  who,  by  the  time  they  reached 
Tollantzinco,  were  reduced  to  seven.  This  form  of 
government  was  afterwards  changed  to  a  monarchy ; 
why,  we  know  not,  but  probably  some  one  of  the 
chiefs  was  more  valiant  or  cunning  than  his  associates, 


42  EARLY    MEXICAN    HISTORY. 

and  supplanted  them.  This  monarchy  began  A.  D. 
607,  and  lasted  384  years,  in  which  time  they  are  said 
to  have  had  only  eight  princes.  This  fact,  however,  is 
accounted  for  by  the  custom  which  prevailed,  of  keep 
ing  up  the  name  of  each  king  for  fifty-two  years. 

They  remained  prosperous  for  400  years,  when  a 
famine  succeeded,  occasioned  by  a  severe  drought, 
which  was  followed  by  a  pestilence  that  destroyed 
many  of  them.  Tradition  says,  that  a  demon  appeared 
once  at  a  festival  ball,  and  with  giant  arms  embraced 
the  people,  and  suffocated  them  ;  that  he  appeared 
again  as  a  child  with  a  putrid  head,  and  brought  the 
plague ;  and  that,  by  his  persuasion,  they  abandoned 
Tula,  and  scattered  themselves  among  various  nations, 
by  whom  they  were  well  received. 

A  hundred  years  afterwards,  succeeded  a  more  bar 
barous  people  from  Amaquemecan.  Who  or  what 
they  were  is  not  known,  as  there  is  no  trace  of  them 
among  the  American  nations ;  nor  is  there  any  reason 
given  why  they  left  their  own  country.  They  are 
said  to  have  been  eight  months  on  their  way,  led  by  a 
son  of  their  monarch,  called  Xolotl,  who  sent  his  son 
to  survey  the  country,  which  he  took  possession  of  by 
shooting  four  arrows  to  the  four  winds.  He  chose  for 
his  capital  Tenayuca,  six  miles  north  of  the  site  of 
Mexico ;  in  which  direction  most  of  the  people  settled. 
It  is  asserted  that  their  numbers  amounted  to  1,000,000 ; 
as  ascertained  by  twelve  piles  of  stones  which  were 
thrown  up  at  a  review  of  the  people  ;  but  this  is  prob 
ably  an  exaggeration. 

This  barbarous  people  formed  alliances  with  the  relics 
of  the  Toltecan  race,  and  their  prince,  Nopaltzin,  mar- 


EARLY  MEXICAN    HISTORY.  43 

ried  a  descendant  of  the  Toltecan  royal  family.  The 
effect  of  these  intermarriages  on  them  was  a  happy  one, 
as  they  were  civilized  by  the  Toltecas,  who  were  much 
their  superiors  in  a  knowledge  of  the  arts.  Heretofore 
they  had  subsisted  only  on  roots  and  fruits,  and  by 
hunting ;  sucking  the  blood  of  the  animals  they  killed, 
and  taking  their  skins  for  clothing  ;  but  now  they 
began  to  dig  up  and  sow  the  ground,  to  work  metals, 
and  attempt  other  useful  arts.  About  eighteen  years 
after  their  arrival,  six  persons  made  their  appearance 
as  an  embassy  from  a  people  living  near  Amaqueme- 
can ;  a  place  was  assigned  them,  and  in  a  few  years 
three  princes  came  with  a  large  army  of  Acolhuans, 
who  received  three  princesses  in  marriage.  The  two 
nations  gradually  coalesced  in  one,  and  took  the  name  of 
the  new  comers ;  the  name  Chechemecas  being  left  to 
the  ruder  and  more  barbarous  tribes  who  lived  by  hunt 
ing  and  on  roots.  These  latter  joined  the  Otomies,  a  bar 
barous  people  who  liyed  farther  north,  in  the  mountains. 
Xolotl  divided  his  dominions  into  three  states,  name 
ly,  Azcapozalco,  eighteen  miles  west  of  Tezcuco,  Xal- 
tocan,  and  Coatlichan,  which  he  conferred,  in  fief,  on 
his  three  sons-in-law.  As  was  natural,  various  civil  wars 
afterwards  occurred  during  the  reigns  of  the  sovereigns 
who  succeeded  Xolotl.  Nopaltzin  reigned  thirty-two 
years,  and  is  said  to  have  died  at  the  advanced  age  of 
ninety-two.  After  him  came  Tlotzin,  who  reigned 
thirty-six  years,  and  was  a  good  prince.  He  was  suc 
ceeded  by  Quinatzin,  a  luxurious  tyrant,  who,  on  the 
removal  of  his  court  from  Tenayuca  to  Tezcuco,  caused 
himself  to  be  borne  thither  in  a  litter  by  four  lords, 
while  a  fifth  held  an  umbrella  over  him  to  keep  off  the 


44  EARLY   MEXICAN    HISTORY. 

sun;  he  is  said  to  have  reigned  sixty  years.  In  his 
reign,  there  were  many  rebellions,  and  on  his  death 
he  was  succeeded  by  a  prince  named  Techotlala. 

In  the  year  1160,  the  Mexicans,  Aztecas,  or  Aztecs 
made  their  appearance.  They  are  said  to  have  come 
from  the  region  north  of  the  Gulf  of  California,  and 
were  induced  to  migrate  from  the  country  where  they 
lived  by  the  persuasion  of  Huitziton,  a  man  of  great 
influence  among  them.  He  is  said  to  have  observed  a 
little  singing-bird,  whose  notes  sounded  like  Tihui, 
which  in  their  language  meant,  Let  us  go.  He  led 
another  person,  also  a  man  of  influence,  to  observe 
this,  and  they  persuaded  the  people  to  obey  the  sugges 
tion,  as  they  said,  of  the  secret  divinity.  This  was 
no  difficult  matter  in  a  partially  civilized  and  super 
stitious  community.  They  proceeded,  as  their  tradition 
relates,  to  the  River  Gila,  where  they  stopped  for  a 
time,  and  where,  it  is  affirmed,  remains  have  been 
found  at  a  somewhat  recent  date.  % 

They  then  removed  to  a  place  about  250  miles  from 
Chihuahua,  toward  the  north -north  west,  now  called  in 
Spanish  Casas  Grandes,  on  account  of  a  large  building 
found  there,  on  the  plan  of  those  in  New  Mexico,  having 
three  floors  with  a  terrace  above  them,  the  door  for  en 
trance  opening  on  the  second  floor,  to  which  the  ascent 
was  by  a  ladder.  Other  remains,  also,  of  a  fortress,  and 
various  utensils,  have  been  found  there.  From  this  spot 
they  proceeded  southward,  crossed  the  mountains,  and 
stopped  at  Culiacan,  a  place  on  the  Gulf  of  California 
in  Lat.  24°  N.  Here  they  made  a  wooden  image, 
called  Huitzilopochtli,  which  they  carried  on  a  chair  of 
reeds,  and  appointed  priests  for  its  service.  When  they 


EARLY   MEXICAN    HISTORY.  45  , 

left  their  country,  on  their  migration,  they  consisted  of 
seven  different  tribes ;  but  here  the  Mexicans  were  left 
with  their  god  by  the  others,  called  the  Xochimilcas, 
Tepanecas,  Chalchese,  Colhuas,  Tlahuicas,  and  Tlas- 
calans,  who  proceeded  onwards.  The  reason  of  this 
separation  is  not  mentioned,  except  that  it  was  at  the 
command  of  the  god,  from  which  it  may  be  conjec 
tured  that  some  quarrel  had  arisen  with  respect  to  his 
worship. 

On  their  way  to  Tula,  the  Mexicans  became  divided 
into  two  factions ;  yet  they  kept  together,  for  the  sake  of 
the  god,  while  they  built  altars,  and  left  their  sick  in 
different  places.  They  remained  in  Tula  nine  years, 
and  spent  eleven  more  in  the  countries  adjoining.  In 
1216,  they  reached  Tzompanco,  a  city  in  the  vale  of 
Mexico,  and  were  hospitably  received  by  the  lord  of 
the  district ;  his  son,  named  Ilhuitcatl,  married  among 
them.  Prom  him  have  descended  all  the  Mexican 
monarchs.  The  people  continued  to  migrate  along  the 
Lake  Tezcuco  during  the  reign  of  Xolotl,  but  in  the 
reign  of  Nopaltzin  they  were  persecuted,  and  obliged, 
in  1245,  to  go  to  Chapoltepec,  a  mountain  two  miles 
from  Mexico.  They  then  took  refuge  in  the  small 
islands  Acocolco,  at  the  southern  extremity  of  the 
Lake  of  Mexico.  Here  they  lived  miserably  for  52 
years,  till  the  year  1314,  when  they  were  reduced  to 
slavery  by  a  petty  king  of  Colhuacan,  by  whom  they 
were  treacherously  entrapped  and  cruelly  oppressed. 

Some  years  after,  on  the  occasion  of  a  war  between 
the  Colhuas  and  the  Xochimilcas,  in  which  the  latter 
were  victorious,  the  Colhuas  were  obliged  to  re 
lease  their  slaves,  who  fought  with  great  bravery,  cut- 


46  EARLY    MEXICAN    HISTORY. 

ting  off  the  ears  of  the  enemies  they  had  killed,  which 
they  produced  on  being  reproached  with  cowardice. 
The  effect  of  this  was  to  excite  such  a  detestation  of 
them,  that  they  were  desired  to  leave  the  country. 
They  did  so,  and  went  north  till  they  came  to  a  place 
called  Acatzitzintlan,  and  afterwards  Mexicaltzinco ; 
but  not  liking  this,  they  went  on  to  Iztacalco,  still  near 
er  to  the  site  of  Mexico.  Here  they  remained  two 
years,  and  then  went  to  a  place  on  the  lake,  where 
they  found  the  nopal  growing  on  a  stone,  and  over  it 
the  foot  of  an  eagle ;  this  was  the  place  marked  out 
by  the  oracle.  Here  they  ended  their  wanderings, 
and  erected  an  altar  to  their  god  ;  one  of  them  went 
for  a  victim,  and  found  a  Colhuan,  whom  they  killed, 
and  offered  as  a  sacrifice  to  the  idol.  Here,  too,  they 
built  their  rush  huts,  and  formed  a  city,  which  was 
called  Tenochtitlan,  and  afterwards  Mexico,  or  the 
place  of  Mexitli,  their  god  of  war. 

This  was  in  1325 ;  the  city  was  situated  on  a  small 
island  in  the  middle  of  a  great  lake,  without  ground 
sufficient  for  cultivation,  or  even  to  build  upon.  It  was 
necessary,  therefore,  to  enlarge  it ;  and  for  this  pur 
pose  they  drove  down  piles  and  palisades,  and  with 
stones,  turf,  &c.,  thus  united  the  other  small  islands  to 
the  larger  one.  To  procure  stone  and  wood,  they  ex 
changed  fish  and  water-fowl  with  some  other  nations, 
and  made,  with  incredible  industry,  floating  gardens, 
on  which  they  raised  vegetable  products.  They  here 
remained  thirteen  years  at  peace,  but  afterwards  quar 
rels  ensued,  and  the  factions  separated  ;  one  of  them 
went  to  a  small  island  a  little  northward,  named  Xal- 
tilolco,  afterwards  Tlatelolco. 


EARLY   MEXICAN    HISTORY.  47 

These  divided  their  city  into  four  parts,  each  quarter 
having  its  tutelar  deity.  In  the  midst  of  the  city, 
Mexitli  was  worshipped  with  horrible  rites,  and  the 
sacrifice  of  prisoners.  Under  pretence  of  consecrat 
ing  her  to  be  the  mother  of  their  god,  they  sought  the 
presence  of  a  Colhuan  princess  at  their  rites ;  and 
when  the  request  was  granted,  they  put  her  to  death, 
flayed  her  body,  and  dressed  one  of  their  brave  men 
in  her  skin.  The  father  was  invited  to  be  present  and 
officiate  as  the  priest.  All  was  darkness,  till,  on  light 
ing  the  copal  in  his  Censer  to  begin  the  rites  of  wor 
ship,  he  saw  the  horrible  spectacle  of  his  immolated 
daughter. 

In  1352,  the  Mexicans  changed  their  aristocracy  of 
twenty  lords  for  a  monarchy,  and  elected  as  their  king 
Acamapitzin,  who  married  a  daughter  of  the  lord  of 
Coatlichan.  The  Tlatelolcos  also  chose  a  king,  who 
was  a  son  of  the  king  of  the  Tepanecas.  The  king 
of  the  Tepanecas  was  persuaded  by  them  to  double 
the  tributes  of  the  Mexicans,  and  oppress  them.  They 
were  commanded  to  transport  to  his  capital,  Azcapo- 
zalco,  a  great  floating  garden,  producing  every  kind 
of  vegetable  known  in  Anahuac  ;  when  this  was  done, 
the  next  year,  another  garden  was  required,  with  a 
duck  and  a  swan  in  it  sitting  on  their  eggs,  ready  to 
hatch  on  arriving  at  Azcapozalco ;  and  then  again,  a 
garden  was  exacted  from  them  having  a  live  stag, 
which  they  were  obliged  to  hunt  in  the  mountains, 
among  their  enemies. 

Acamapitzin,  the  king  of  Mexico,  reigned  thirty- 
seven  years,  and  died  in  1389,  and,  after  an  interreg 
num  of  four  months,  his  son  Huitzilihuitl  succeeded 


48  EARLY   MEXICAN   HISTORY. 

him.  He  requested,  for  a  wife,  one  of  the  daughters 
of  the  king  of  Azcapozalco,  on  which  occasion  the 
ambassadors  are  said  to  have  made  the  following 
speech :  "  We  beseech  you,  with  the  most  profound 
respect,  to  take  compassion  on  our  master  and  your 
'servant,  Huitzilihuitl.  He  is  without  a  wife,  and  we 
are  without  a  queen.  Vouchsafe,  Sire,  to  part  with  one 
of  your  jewels  or  most  precious  'feathers.  Give  us 
one  of  your  daughters,  who  may  come  and  reign  over 
us  in  a  country  which  belongs  to  you."  This  request 
was  granted. 

It  will  be  recollected  that  the  Acolhuans  were  under 
the  government  of  Techotlala,  son  of  Quinatzin.  After 
a  thirty  years'  peace,  a  revolt  was  begun  by  a  prince 
called  Tzompan,  a  descendant  of  one  of  the  three 
original  Acolhuan  princes.  The  rebel  was  defeated 
and  put  to  death.  The  Mexicans,  in  this  war,  were 
the  allies  of  Techotlala,  and  showed  great  valor. 

The  son  of  the  king  of  the  Tepanecas,  Maxtlaton, 
fearing  that  his  sister's  son  by  the  Mexican  king  might 
obtain  the  Tepanecan  crown,  began  to  oppress  the 
Mexicans,  and  sent  assassins  to  murder  his  nephew. 
The  Mexicans,  however,  were  too  weak  to  resent  this 
baseness. 

The  rival  Mexicans  and  Tlatelolcos  advanced  to 
gether  in  wealth  and  power.  Techotlala,  the  Acolhuan 
king,  was  succeeded  by  Ixtlilxochitl  in  1406.  The  king 
of  Azcapozalco,  his  vassal,  sought  to  stir  up  rebellion, 
but  he  was  defeated,  and  compelled  to  sue  for  peace. 
The  same  year  in  which  this  occurred,  the  Mexican 
king  died,  and  his  son,  Chimalpopoca,  was  chosen  his 
successor. 


EARLY   MEXICAN    HISTORY.  49 

The  king  of  the  Acolhuans,  mentioned  above,  was 
driven  from  his  kingdom,  and  both  he  and  one  of  his 
grandsons  were  cut  off  by  the  treachery  of  the  Tepane- 
cas.  The  rebels,  led  on  by  their  king,  Tezozomoc, 
poured  in,  and  conquered  Acolhuacan.  Tezozomoc 
then  gave  Tezcuco  to  the  Mexican  king,  Chimalpo- 
poca,  and  other  portions  to  the  king  of  Tlatelolco,  and 
proclaimed  his  own  capital,  Azcapozalco,  the  metropo 
lis  of  all  the  kingdoms  of  Acolhuacan.  He  was  a 
great  tyrant,  and  was  tormented  with  dreams,  that  the 
son  of  the  murdered  king  of  the  Acolhuans,  Nezahual- 
coyotl,  transformed  into  an  eagle,  had  eaten  out  his 
heart,  or,  in  the  shape  of  a  lion,  had  sucked  his  blood. 
He  enjoined  it,  therefore,  on  his  sons,  to  put  the  prince, 
of  whom  he  had  dreamed,  to  death.  He  survived  his 
dreams  but  a  year,  and  died  in  1422. 

He  was  succeeded  by  his  son  Tajatzin,  but  the 
throne  was  at  once  usurped  by  another  son,  Maxtlaton, 
and  Tajatzin  took  refuge  with  Chimalpopoca,  who  ad 
vised  him  to  invite  his  brother  to  a  feast,  and  murder 
him.  This  being  overheard  and  told  to  Maxtlaton,  he 
pretended  not  to  believe  it,  but  took  the  same  means 
to  get  rid  of  Tajatzin.  The  king  of  Mexico  declined 
the  invitation,  and  escaped  for  a  time ;  but  his  wife 
having  been  ravished  by  Maxtlaton,  he  resolved  not 
to  survive  his  dishonor,  but  to  offer  himself  in  sacrifice 
to  his  god,  Huitzilopochtli.  In  the  midst  of  the  cere 
monies,  Maxtlaton  burst  in,  took  him,  carried  him  off, 
and  caged  him  like  a  criminal. 

This  success  excited  afresh  in  the  mind  of  Maxtla 
ton  the  desire  to  get  the  Acolhuan  prince,  Nezahual- 
coyotl,  into  his  power.  He,  discovering  the  designs 
4 


50  EARLY   MEXICAN    HISTORY. 

of  the  tyrant,  went  boldly  to  him  and  told  him  he  had 
heard  that  he  wished  his  life  also,  and  he  had  there 
fore  come  to  offer  it.  Maxtlaton,  struck  by  his  con 
duct,  assured  him  he  had  no  designs  against  him,  nor 
was  it  his  purpose  to  put  the  king  of  Mexico  to  death. 
He  then  gave  orders  that  he  should  be  hospitably  en 
tertained,  and  even  allowed  him  to  visit  Chimalpopoca 
in  prison.  The  Mexican  king,  however,  soon  after, 
hanged  himself  with  his  girdle  ;  and  Nezahualcoyotl, 
suspecting  the  sincerity  of  Maxtlaton's  professions,  left 
the  court.  After  wandering  about  for  some  time,  ex 
posed  to  various  dangers  from  his  inveterate  foe,  he 
finally  took  refuge  among  the  Cholulans,  who  agreed 
to  assist  him  with  an  army  for  the  purpose  of  over 
throwing  Maxtlaton,  and  restoring  him  to  the  throne, 
which  had  been  usurped  by  the  father  of  the  tyrant. 
On  the  death  of  their  king,  the  Mexicans  raised  to 
the  throne  Itzcoatl,  a  son  of  their  first  monarch, 
Acamapitzin,  a  brave,  prudent,  and  just  prince.  This 
choice  was  offensive  to  Maxtlaton,  —  but  to  Nezahual 
coyotl,  on  the  contrary,  it  afforded  the  highest  satisfac 
tion.  The  new  monarch,  immediately  on  his  eleva 
tion  to  the  throne,  resolved  to  unite  all  his  forces  with 
this  prince  against  the  tyrant  Maxtlaton.  On  a  certain 
occasion,  he  sent  an  ambassador  to  Nezahualcoyotl, 
named  Montezuma,  who,  with  another  nobleman,  was 
taken  captive  on  the  way,  and  carried  to  Chalco. 
They  were  then  sent  to  the  Huexotzincas  to  be  sacri 
ficed.  This  people,  however,  spurned  the  barbarous 
proposal.  Maxtlaton  was  then  informed  of  their  cap 
ture  ;  but  he  commanded  the  lord  of  Chalco,  whom  he 
called  a  double-minded  traitor,  to  set  them  both  at  lib- 


EARLY  MEXICAN   HISTORY.  51 

erty.  Before  this,  however,  they  had  escaped,  by  the 
connivance  of  the  man  to  whom  they  had  been  intrust 
ed,  and  returned  to  Mexico.  Maxtlaton  then  made  war 
against  Mexico.  Montezuma  offered  to  challenge  him, 
which  he  did  by  presenting  to  him  certain  defensive 
weapons,  anointing  his  head,  and  fixing  feathers  on  it. 
Maxtlaton,  in  turn,  commissioned  him  in  like  manner 
to  bear  a  challenge  from  himself  to  the  king  of  Mexico. 
A  terrible  battle  ensued  ;  the  tyrant  was  defeated,  his 
city  taken,  and  himself  killed,  being  beaten  to  death 
while  attempting  to  escape.  His  people,  the  Tepanecas, 
were  entirely  subdued. 

The  Mexican  king  now  replaced  the  Acolhuan 
prince  on  the  throne  of  his  ancestors,  and  carried  on 
his  conquests  by  his  general,  Montezuma.  On  his 
death  in  1436,  he  was  succeeded  by  Montezuma  the 
First.  This  monarch  was  the  greatest  that  ever  sat 
on  the  throne  of  Mexico.  He  engaged  in  a  war  with 
Chalco,  the  king  of  which  city  had  taken  three  Mexican 
lords,  and  two  sons  of  the  king  of  Tezcuco,  put  them 
to  death,  salted  and  dried  their  bodies,  and  placed  them 
in  his  hall  as  supporters  to  torches  !  Montezuma  took 
the  city,  and  executed  vengeance  on  the  barbarous 
people.  He  then  reduced  Tlatelolco,  whose  king  had 
conspired  against  the  late  king  of  Mexico.  He  also 
subdued  the  Mixtecas,  and  thus  enlarged  his  domin 
ions. 

In  1457,  he  sent  an  expedition  against  the  Cotas- 
tese,  and  took  6,200  prisoners,  whom  he  sacrificed  to 
his  god.  He  also  took  signal  vengeance  again  on  the 
Chalchese,  who  had  rebelled,  and  had  sought  to  make 
one  of  his  brothers  king  in  his  stead.  The  brother 
pretended  to  comply ;  but  mounting  a  scaffold  which 


52  EARLY   MEXICAN   HISTORY. 

he  ordered  to  be  erected,  and  taking  a  bunch  of 
flowers  in  his  hand,  then  urging  his  attendant  Mexi 
cans  to  be  faithful  to  their  king,  he  threw  himself  from 
the  scaffold.  This  enraged  the  Chalchese  so  much 
that  they  put  the  Mexicans  to  death,  for  which  Monte- 
zuma  made  war  against  them  till  he  had  almost  extermi 
nated  them.  He  finally,  however,  proclaimed  a  gen 
eral  amnesty.  He  constructed  a  dike,  nine  miles  long 
and  eleven  cubits  broad,  to  prevent  the  recurrence  of 
an  inundation  which  had  happened,  and  which  was 
followed  by  a  famine.  He  died  in  1464. 

Montezuma  the  First  was  succeeded  by  Axayacatl, 
who  pursued  the  conquests  so  successfully  begun  by 
the  late  king.  A  war  broke  out  between  the  Mexi 
cans  and  Tlatelolcos,  which  ended  in  the  final  sub 
jection  of  the  latter.  Their  king  was  killed,  and  carried 
to  the  Mexican  monarch,  who,  with  his  own  hand,  cut 
open  his  breast,  and  tore  out  his  heart.  He  also 
fought  the  Otomies,  and  gained  a  complete  victory, 
making  11,060  prisoners,  among  whom  were  three 
chiefs.  He  died  in  1477,  and  was  succeeded  by  his 
oldest  brother,  Tizoc,  who  was  probably  cut  off  by 
poison.  Tizoc  was  succeeded  by  another  brother, 
named  Ahuitzotl,  who  finished  the  great  temple  begun 
by  his  predecessor,  and,  having  reserved  the  prisoners 
taken  in  his  wars  for  this  purpose,  he  sacrificed,  at  its 
dedication,  as  Torquemada  asserts,  72,344  ;  others  say, 
64,060.  This  was  in  the  year  1486.  He  carried  on 
his  conquests  even  as  far  as  Guatemala,  900  miles 
south  of  Mexico.  He  was  only  once  defeated  ;  this 
was  in  1496,  by  Toltecatl,  a  Huexotzincan  chief.  He 
died  in  1502,  in  consequence  of  striking  his  head 
against  a  door.  Two  years  previous  to  his  death  there 


EARLY   MEXICAN   HISTORY.  53 

was  an  inundation,  which  was  followed  by  a  famine, 
proceeding,  it  is  said,  from  the  decay  of  the  grain. 

Ahuitzotl  was  succeeded  by  Montezuma  the  Second, 
a  man  of  great  bravery,  and  also  a  priest,  but  excessive 
ly  haughty.  His  coronation  was  attended  with  the 
greatest  display  and  pomp.  He  lived  in  exceeding 
splendor ;  lords  were  his  servants,  and  no  one  was  per 
mitted  to  enter  his  palace  without  putting  off  his  shoes 
and  stockings.  Even  the  meanest  utensils  of  his  ser 
vice  were  of  gold  plate  and  sea-shell.  His  dinner  was 
carried  in  by  300  or  400  of  his  young  nobles,  and  he 
pointed  with  a  rod  to  such  dishes  as  he  chose.  He  was 
served  with  water  for  washing  by  four  of  his  most  beau 
tiful  women.  The  vast  expenses  necessary  to  support 
such  luxury  displeased  his  subjects.  He  was,  however^ 
munificent  in  rewarding  his  generals,  by  which  means 
he  retained  their  services,  and  still  further  secured  the 
soldiery  by  appointing  a  hospital  for  invalids.  Unsuc 
cessful  for  a  time  in  a  war  with  the  Tlascalans,  he  final 
ly  took  captive  a  brave  Tlascalan  general,  named 
Tlahuicol,  and  put  him  into  a  cage.  When,  however, 
he  gave  him  his  liberty  to  return  home,  Tlahuicol 
wished  to  sacrifice  himself,  and  perished  in  a  gladiato 
rial  combat,  after  having  killed  eight  men,  and  wound 
ed  twenty  more. 

In  his  reign,  the  conquest  of  Mexico  was  effected 
by  Cortes.  Previous  to  the  arrival  of  the  Spaniards, 
a  vague  apprehension  seems  to  have  troubled  the  minds 
of  Montezuma  and  his  people,  respecting  the  downfall 
of  their  empire,  an  event  which  was  supposed  likewise 
to  be  portended  by  a  comet.  But  the  history  of  this 
catastrophe  must  be  reserved  for  another  chapter. 


MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF 
CORTES. 


MEXICO  was  first  discovered  by  Juan  de  Grijalva. 
He,  however,  seems  to  have  made  no  attempt  to  pen 
etrate  into  the  interior  from  the  sea-coast.  In  1518, 
when  its  conquest  was  undertaken  by  Cortes,  the  Mex 
ican  empire  is  said  to  have  extended  230  leagues  from 
east  to  west,  and  140  from  north  to*  south.  After  ar 
ranging  his  expedition,  on  the  10th  of  February,  1519, 
Cortes  set  sail  from  Havana,  in  Cuba,  and  landed  at 
the  island  of  Cozumel,  on  the  coast  of  Yucatan.  His 
whole  army  consisted  of  but  553  soldiers,  16  horse 
men,  and  110  mechanics,  pilots,  and  mariners.  Having 
released  some  Spanish  captives  whom  he  found  there, 
he  proceeded  to  Tabasco.  Here  he  was  attacked  by 
the  natives,  but  defeated  them,  and  then  pursued  his 
course  north-west  to  San  Juan  de  Ulua,  where  he  ar 
rived  on  the  20th  of  April. 

Hardly  had  the  Spaniards  cast  anchor,  when  they 
saw  two  canoes,  filled  with  Indians,  put  off  from  the 
shore,  and  steer  directly  for  the  general's  ship.  Cortes 
received  his  visiters  courteously,  and,  in  exchange  for 
the  presents  of  fruit,  flowers,  and  little  ornaments  of 
gold  which  they  brought,  gave  them  a  few  trinkets,  of 


MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTES.     55 

European  fabric,  with  which  they  seemed  to  be  great 
ly  pleased.  Through  the  medium  of  an  interpreter, 
whom  he  chanced  to  have  on  board,  a  Mexican  female 
slave,  the  celebrated  Marina,  he  learned  from  the  In 
dians  that  they  belonged  to' a  neighbouring  province 
which  was  subject  to  the  emperor  of  Mexico,  a  mighty 
monarch  who  lived  far  in  the  interior,  called  Monte* 
zuma ;  and  that  they  had  been  sent  to  ascertain  who 
the  strangers  were,  and  what  they  wanted.  Cortes 
replied,  that  he  had  come  only  with  the  most  friendly 
purposes,  and  expressed  a  desire  for  an  interview  with 
the  governor  of  their  province.  Their  inquiries  being 
satisfied,  his  guests  shortly  afterwards  took  their  leave, 
and  returned  to  the  shore. 

The  next  morning,  Cortes  landed  with  all  his  troops 
and  munitions  of  war,  and  immediately  set  to  work, 
with  the  assistance  of  the  natives,  in  erecting  barracks. 
One  can  scarcely  help  being  reminded,  on  reading  the 
account  of  the  readiness  with  which  the  simple  Indians 
engaged  in  this  object,  of  the  fatal  alacrity  with  which 
the  Trojans  are  said  to  have  received  within  their 
walls  the  wooden  horse  that  was  so  soon  to  prove  their 
ruin. 

Once  on  shore,  Cortes  informed  the  governor,  Teuh- 
tlile,  that  he  must  go  to  the  capital.  He  said  that  he 
came  as  the  ambassador  of  a  great  monarch,  and  must 
see  Montezuma  himself.  To  this  the  governor  replied, 
that  he  would  send  couriers  to  the  capital,  to  convey 
his  request  to  the  emperor,  and  so  soon  as  he  had 
learned  Montezuma's  will  he  would  communicate  it  to 
him.  He  then  ordered  his  attendants  to  bring  forward 
some  presents  which  he  had  prepared,  the  richness 


56  MEXICO,    FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF   CORTES. 

and  splendor  of  which  only  confirmed  Cortes  in  the  de 
termination  to  prosecute  his  schemes.  In  the  mean 
while,  some  Mexican  painters  who  accompanied  the 
governor  were  employed  in  depicting  the  appearance 
of  the  Spaniards,  their  ships  and  horses ;  and  Cortes, 
to  render  the  intelligence  to  be  thus  conveyed  to  the 
emperor  more  striking,  arrayed  his  horsemen,  com 
manded  his  trumpets  to  sound,  and  the  guns  to  be 
fired,  by  which  display  the  Mexicans  were  deeply  im 
pressed  with  the  idea  of  the  greatness  of  the  Spaniards. 

Couriers,  stationed  in  relays  along  the  whole  line  of 
the  distance,  in  a  day  or  two  informed  Montezuma  of 
these  things,  though  it  was  180  miles  to  the  capital. 
The  monarch,  who,  in  the  midst  of  his  fears,  seems 
to  have  summoned  somewhat  more  resolution,  com 
manded  Cortes  to  leave  his  dominions.  He  likewise 
sent  him  more  presents ;  fine  cotton  stuffs  resembling 
silk,  pictures,  gold  and  silver  plates  representing  the 
sun  and  moon,  bracelets,  and  other  costly  things. 
Cortes,  however,  still  persisted  in  his  purpose ;  on  hear 
ing  which,  the  Mexican  ambassadors  turned  away  with 
surprise  and  resentment,  and  all  the  natives  deserted 
the  camp  of  the  Spaniards,  nor  came  any  more  to 
trade  with  them.  Cortes,  already  threatened  with  a 
mutiny  among  his  soldiers,  evidently  felt  his  situation. 
to  be  critical,  but  he  nevertheless  went  on  to  found  a 
city,  and  establish  a  government  for  his  colony. 

In  this  juncture  of  his  affairs,  he  was  visited  by  some 
people  from  Cempoalla  and  Chiahuitztla,  two  small 
cities  or  villages  tributary  to  Montezuma.  With  the 
caciques  of  these  places  he  formed  a  treaty  of  alli 
ance,  and  agreed  to  protect  them  against  Montezuma. 


MEXICO,   FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF   CORTES.  57 

Encouraged  by  his  promises,  they  went  so  far  as  to 
insult  the  Mexican  power,  of  which  they  had  before 
stood  in  the  greatest  dread.  Having  secured  their  sub 
mission,  Cortes,  to  take  away  all  hope  of  a  return  to 
Cuba,  and  inspire  his  soldiers  with  a  desperate  courage, 
burned  his  fleet ;  and,  leaving  a  garrison  in  his  new 
city,  called  Vera  Cruz,  he  set  out  for  the  capital  of  the 
Mexican  empire  with  400  infantry,  15  horsemen,  and 
seven  field-pieces,  having  also  been  furnished  by  the 
Cempoallans  with  1300  warriors  and  1000  tamanes, 
or  men  of  burden,  to  carry  the  baggage. 

On  the  route  to  Mexico  lay  the  little  republic  of 
Tlascala,  and  between  these  two  powers  there  had  ex 
isted  for  a  long  period  an  inextinguishable  feud.  On 
arriving  near  the  confines  of  the  republic,  therefore, 
Cortes  sent  forward  an  embassy  of  Cempoallans  in 
viting  the  Tlascalans  to  an  alliance,  and  requesting, 
that,  at  least,  he  might  be  allowed  to  pass  through 
their  territories.  The  senate  was  immediately  con 
vened  to  decide  upon  this  application.  Maxicatzin,  one 
of  the  oldest  of  the  senators,  alluded  to  a  tradition  re 
specting  the  coming  of  white  men,  and  favored  the 
request.  He  was  opposed  by  Xicotencatl,  who  sought 
to  prove  that  the  Spaniards  were  magicians,  and  as 
serted,  as  they  had  pulled  down  the  images  in  Cem- 
poalla,  that  the  gods  would  be  against  them.  They 
resolved  therefore  on  war  ;  seized  the  ambassadors, 
and  placed  them  in  confinement. 

Their  plans  were  well  laid.  They  prepared  an  am 
bush,  allowed  Cortes  to  pass  the  frontier,  and  then,  af 
ter  a  little  skirmishing,  suddenly  fell  upon  him  with  an 
overwhelming  force,  which  to  the  astonished  view  of 


58    MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OP  CORTES. 

the  Spaniards  appeared  to  number  100,000  men.  Not 
withstanding  the  immense  odds  opposed  to  them,  the 
Spaniards  bravely  maintained  their  ground ;  and  at 
length,  after  a  desperate  conflict,  the  Tlascalans,  daunt 
ed  by  the  horses  and  the  fire-arms  of  the  Spaniards,  to 
which  they  were  unaccustomed,  and  disheartened  by 
the  havoc  they  sustained  in  this  to  them  novel  species 
of  warfare,  retreated.  Among  the  slain  were  eight  of 
their  principal  chiefs.  On  the  side  of  the  Spaniards 
the  loss  was  inconsiderable. 

Thinking  that  this  experience  of  the  prowess  of  the 
Spaniards  might  have  wrought  a  change  in  the  dispo 
sition  of  the  Tlascalans  towards  him,  Cortes  now  de 
termined  to  send  an  embassy  to  their  camp  with  over 
tures  of  peace.  The  proposals  were  promptly  reject 
ed,  and  a  message  of  defiance  was  returned  from  the 
Tlascalan  general.  The  next  day  another  battle  fol 
lowed,  the  odds  being  even  greater  than  in  the  former 
engagement ;  but  Spanish  prowess,  aided  by  dissen 
sions  in  the  Tlascalan  camp,  again  proved  victorious. 

The  Tlascalans,  thus  repulsed,  were  assured  by  their 
priests,  that  their  enemies,  being  children  of  the  sun, 
received  strength  from  his  beams  by  day,  and  there 
fore  must  be  attacked  in  the  night ;  and  that,  being  with 
drawn  from  his  rays,  their  vigor  declined,  and  they 
faded  and  became  like  other  men.  A  renewed  trial, 
however,  proved  the  falsity  of  this  assertion,  and, 
after  desperate  efforts  against  the  invading  foe,  the 
Tlascalans  were  compelled  to  sue  for  peace.  A  treaty 
of  alliance  was  formed  for  mutual  protection,  and 
Cortes  and  his  troops  were  received,  as  beings  of  a 
superior  order,  into  the  city  of  Tlascala. 


MEXICO,   FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    Of 

After  recruiting  himself  for  twenty  days  at  Tlascala, 
during  which  time  Cortes  sought  to  gain  all  the  infor 
mation  he  could  respecting  the  condition  of  the  Mexican 
empire,  he  prepared  to  resume  his  march.  During  his 
stay,  the  Tlascalans  yielded  readily  to  all  his  requests 
and  commands,  except  the  one  by  which  they  were  re 
quired  to  dethrone  their  own  gods,  and  substitute  the  ob 
jects  of  the  Spaniards'  worship.  Cortes,  indignant  at  their 
refusal,  was  going  to  effect  his  object  by  force,  had  he 
not  been  restrained  by  the  prudence  of  his  chaplain, 
Olmedo,  who  represented  to  him  the  danger  of  such  an 
attempt.  The  Tlascalans,  therefore,  were  left  to  their 
own  religious  rites  and  objects  of  worship. 

Cortes,  accompanied  by  6,000  of  them,  now  directed 
his  course  towards  Cholula.  This  place  was  only  six 
leagues  distant  from  Tlascala,  was  formerly  an  inde 
pendent  state,  and  had  been  but  lately  subjected  to  the 
Mexican  empire.  It  was  considered  by  all  the  people 
around  as  a  peculiarly  holy  place,  the  sanctuary  or 
principal  seat  of  their  gods,  to  which  pilgrimages  were 
made,  and  in  whose  temple  even  more  human  victims 
were  sacrificed  than  in  that  of  Mexico.  Montezuma  pro 
fessed  now  to  be  willing  to  receive  Cortes  in  his  capital. 
He  had,  however,  laid  a  deep  plot  for  the  extermination 
of  his  enemies.  They  were  to  be  received  into  Cholula 
under  the  mask  of  friendship,  and,  when  not  expecting 
it,  a  vigorous  onset  was  to  be  made  on  them  from  every 
quarter,  while,  by  means  of  pits  dug,  and  barricades 
erected,  and  large  collections  of  stones  on  the  tops  of 
the  temples,  their  retreat  would  be  cut  off,  and  their 
ruin  completed.  Cortes  was  forewarned  of  the  treach 
ery,  and  took  decisive  measures  to  defeat  the  project. 


60     MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTE*S. 

He  arrested  some  of  their  chief  priests,  and  thus  ob 
tained  a  confession  of  the  meditated  crime,  drew  up  his 
troops,  seized  the  magistrates  and  chief  citizens,  and, 
on  a  preconcerted  signal,  both  the  Spaniards  and  Tlas- 
calans  poured  upon  the  multitude,  who  were  so  amazed, 
that  they  were  unable  to  offer  any  resistance.  The 
streets  were  filled  with  blood  and  carnage.  The  tem 
ples  were  set  on  fire,  and  many  of  the  priests  and 
chiefs  perished  in  the  flames.  More  than  6,000  Cho- 
lulans  are  said  to  have  fallen  in  the  massacre,  without 
the  loss  of  a  single  Spaniard.  The  magistrates  were 
then  released,  and  commanded  to  recall  the  people, 
who  had,  in  the  mean  time,  fled  in  every  direction. 
After  so  terrible  a  lesson,  they  dared  not  disobey  the 
command  of  one  who  seemed  to  them  of  a  character 
something  more  than  human,  and  the  city  was  soon 
filled  again  with  those  who  yielded  their  service  to 
the  very  men  who  had  so  mercilessly  butchered  tlreir 
friends  and  relatives. 

Cholula  was  but  twenty  leagues  from  Mexico,  and 
Cortes,  on  his  march,  was  everywhere  hailed  as  a  de 
liverer,  who  came  to  free  the  people  from  the  op 
pression  of  the  Mexican  yoke.  Complaints  were  made 
of  Montezuma  and  his  governors,  and  Cortes  was  en 
couraged  in  the  belief  of  the  ultimate  success  of  his 
enterprise  against  so  mighty  a  monarchy.  Without 
entering  into  the  details  of  his  march,  it  is  enough  to 
say,  that,  on  crossing  the  Sierra  of  Ahualco,  the  valley 
of  Mexico  lay  outstretched  below,  and  the  city,  the 
object  of  his  schemes,  with  its  temples,  and  walls,  and 
palaces,  was  in  full  view  before  him. 

While  the  Spanish  adventurer  became  more  bold  as 


MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTES.    61 

he  proceeded,  the  Mexican  monarch,  on  the  other  hand, 
seems  to  have  grown  more  irresolute  and  timid.  The 
rapid  march  of  the  new  enemy,  the  success  which, 
had  crowned  his  arms,  his  sagacity  in  detecting  the 
plans  for  his  defeat,  —  all  these  things,  combined  with 
the  traditions  to  which  allusion  has  been  made,  seem 
to  have  withheld  Montezuma  from  that  wise  and  valiant 
course  which  might  have  been  expected  from  the 
descendant  of  a  long  line  of  brave  men.  Had  Mon 
tezuma  the  First  been  in  his  place,  as  the  adversary 
with  whom  Cortes  was  to  contend,  the  result  might 
have  been  different. 

As  the  Spaniards  approached  Mexico,  they  were  met 
by  1,000  persons  of  high  rank  adorned  with  plumes 
and  clothed  in  fine  cotton  mantles.  These  saluted 
Cortes  after  the  manner  of  their  country,  and  an 
nounced  the  approach  of  Montezuma.  Next  came 
two  hundred  persons  dressed  alike,  with  large  plumes, 
marching  two  and  two,  in  deep  silence,  and  barefooted, 
with  their  eyes  fixed  on  the  ground.  Then  came  a 
company  of  still  higher  rank  in  their  most  costly  and 
splendid  attire,  in  the  midst  of  whom  was  Montezuma, 
borne  on  the  shoulders  of  four  of  his  principal  favorites, 
while  others  supported  a  canopy  of  curious  workman 
ship  above  his  head.  Before  him  marched  three  offi 
cers,  bearing  rods  of  gold,  which  they  lifted  up  on  high 
at  certain  intervals,  as  a  signal  for  the  people  to  bow 
and  hide  their  faces,  as  unworthy  to  look  on  so  glorious 
a  monarch.  As  he  drew  near,  Cortes  dismounted,  and 
respectfully  advanced  to  meet  him.  Montezuma  like 
wise  alighted,  the  ground  being  covered  with  cotton 
cloths,  and,  leaning  on  the  arm  of  an  attendant,  pro- 


ANCIENT  SCULPTURE,  FROM  PALENQUE. 


MEXICO,   FROM   THE   ARRIVAL   OF   CORTES.  63 

ceeded  at  a  slow  pace.  For  the  first  time,  the  invader 
and  the  monarch  stood  face  to  face.  They  made  their 
salutations,  Cortes  after  the  European  fashion,  and  the 
Mexican  by  touching  the  earth  with  his  hand,  and  kiss 
ing  -it.  This  condescension  in  so  mighty  a  monarch 
only  tended  to  confirm  his  people  in  their  belief,  that 
the  Spaniards  belonged  to  a  superior  race  ;  and,  as 
they  passed  along,  these  latter  heard  themselves  often 
called  Teules,  or  gods. 

This  interview  had  no  decisive  results.  Montezuma 
conducted  Cortes  to  the  quarters  he  had  prepared  for 
him,  being  a  palace  built  by  his  father ;  he  then  left 
him,  saying,  "You  are  now  with  your  brothers,  in 
your  own  house  ;  refresh  yourself  after  your  fatigue, 
and  be  happy  till  I  return."  In  the  evening  he  re 
turned,  loaded  with  rich  presents  to  all.  Cortes  was 
now  informed  that  the  Mexicans  were  convinced,  from 
what  they  had  seen  and  heard,  that  the  Spaniards  were 
the  very  persons  predicted  by  the  Mexican  traditions, 
and  therefore  they  were  received,  not  as  strangers,  but 
as  relations  of  the  same  blood  and  parentage.  Monte 
zuma  also  recognized  him  as  entitled  to  command,  and 
assured  him  that  he  and  his  subjects  would  be  ready 
to  comply  with  his  will  and  to  anticipate  his  wishes. 
This  impression  Cortes  sought  to  confirm  still  more, 
while  at  the  same  time  he  treated  him  with  the  respect 
due  to  the  dignity  of  the  sovereign.  He  had  also  a 
public  audience  with  the  monarch,  and  then  spent 
three  days  in  viewing  the  city. 

The  city  of  Mexico  was  situated  on  a  large  plain 
surrounded  by  mountains,  the  moisture  of  which  col 
lected  in  several  lakes.  The  two  largest  of  these  were 


64     MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTES. 

sixty  or  seventy  miles  in  circuit,  and  communicated 
with  each  other.  Mexico  was  built,  as  has  been  before 
said,  on  some  small  islands  in  one  of  these  lakes.  The 
access  to  it  was  by  causeways  or  dikes  of  stone  and 
earth,  forty  feet  broad.  As  the  water  overflowed  the  flat 
country,  these  causeways  were  somewhat  long.  That 
of  Tacuba,  on  the  west,  extended  a  mile  and  a  half; 
that  of  Tepejacac,  on  the  north,  three  miles  ;  and  that 
of  Iztapalapan  on  the  south,  seven  miles.  The  east  side 
of  the  city  could  only  be  approached  by  canoes.  Each 
causeway  had  openings  for  the  passage  of  the  water, 
over  which  were  thrown  bridges  of  timber  and  earth. 
Many  of  the  buildings,  as  the  temples,  palaces,  and 
houses  of  the  rich  and  the  nobles,  were  large  ;  but 
there  was  also  a  great  number  of  poor  huts.  The 
great  square,  or  market  of  Tlatelolco,  was  of  vast  ex 
tent,  and  would  hold  40,000  or  50,000  persons.  The 
city  contained  300,000  inhabitants,  at  least,  and  some 
writers  assert  that  there  were  many  more. 

The  Spaniards  soon  began  to  feel  uneasy,  and  to 
expect  treachery  on  the  part  of  Montezuma ;  which 
suspicions  seemed  to  be  confirmed  by  the  information, 
that  two  soldiers  belonging  to  the  garrison  at  Vera  Cruz 
had  been  treacherously  murdered  by  Quauhpopoca,  a 
Mexican  chief,  governor  of  a  neighbouring  province, 
instigated,  it  was  believed,  by  Montezuma  ;  and  that, 
in  an  expedition  subsequently  undertaken  by  the  com- 
mandant  of  the  garrison  for  the  purpose  of  avenging 
this  act,  this  officer,  with  seven  or  eight  soldiers,  had 
been  slain.  One  Spaniard  had  also  been  taken  pris 
oner,  and  his  head  cut  off  and  carried  in  triumph 
through  different  cities,  to  show  that  the  invaders  were 


MEXICO,    FROM   THE    ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES.          65 

not  invincible.  The  charm  was  now  broken,  and  Cor 
tes  felt  that  nothing  but  the  most  desperate  measures 
would  save  his  enterprise  from  ruin.  He  therefore 
seized  Montezuma  in  his  palace,  and  hurried  him 
away  to  the  Spanish  quarters. 

The  manner  in  which  this  was  effected  shows  the 
power  he  had  gained  over  the  monarch  and  his  people. 
Admitted  to  his  presence,  the  Mexicans  having  retired 
from  respect,  Cortes  reproached  the  monarch  with  the 
conduct  of  Quauhpopoca,  and  demanded  that  Monte 
zuma  himself  should  become  a  hostage  for  the  fulfil 
ment  of  an  order  for  his  arrest.  The  haughty  Mexi 
can,  surprised  as  he  was,  indignantly  replied,  that  this 
was  contrary  to  all  custom,  and  that  his  subjects  would 
never  suffer  such  an  affront  to  be  offered  to  their  sov 
ereign  ;  but,  seized  with  dread  at  the  threatening  lan 
guage  and  gestures  of  one  of  the  cavaliers  who  attended 
Cortes,  he  finally  yielded  to  the  daring  invader  of  his 
kingdom  and  authority.  Conducted  to  the  Spanish 
quarters,  he  received  his  officers,  and  issued  his  orders, 
as  usual,  but  was  carefully  watched  by  the  Spaniards. 

Quauhpopoca,  his  son,  and  fifteen  of  his  princi 
pal  officers,  were  brought  to  the  capital  and  de 
livered  up  to  the  Spaniards,  and,  not  denying  their 
guilt,  they  were  condemned  to  be  burnt  alive.  The 
Mexicans  gazed  in  silence  on  these  insults  offered  their 
monarch,  who  is  said  to  have  been  even  put  in  fetters 
by  Cortes,  as  a  punishment  for  his  treachery.  The 
daring  adventurer  had  now  so  quelled  the  spirit  of 
Montezuma,  that  he  became  himself  the  virtual  sove 
reign  of  the  realm.  He  displaced  and  appointed  offi 
cers  as  he  chose  ;  sent  out  Spaniards  to  survey  the 
5 


66  MEXICO,   FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES. 

country,  and  selected  stations  for  colonies,  and  by  va 
rious  means  sought  to  prepare  the  minds  of  this  un 
fortunate  people  for  the  Spanish  yoke. 

To  secure  the  command  of  the  lake,  he  excited  the 
curiosity  of  Montezuma  to  see  some  of  those  moving 
palaces  which  could  pass  through  the  water  without 
oars.  Naval  equipments  were  brought  from  Vera  Cruz 
by  the  aid  of  the  Mexicans,  and  others  of  them  were 
employed  in  cutting  down  timber  for  the  construction 
of  two  brigantines.  Cortes  still  further  urged  on  Mon 
tezuma  to  own  himself  the  vassal  of  the  king  of  Cas 
tile,  and  to  pay  him  an  annual  tribute.  With  tears 
and  groans,  broken  in  spirit,  the  Mexican  monarch 
obeyed  the  humiliating  requisition,  while  the  indig 
nant  people  by  their  murmurs  showed  how  deeply 
they  felt  the  degradation  inflicted  on  the  empire.  Im 
mense  treasures  were  lavished  on  the  Spaniards,  and, 
when  Montezuma  refused  utterly  to  change  his  re 
ligion,  they  became  at  last  so  daring,  as  to  attempt  to 
throw  down  the  idols  by  force  from  the  great  temple. 
The  priests  then  rallying  to  defend  them,  Cortes  pru 
dently  desisted  from  his  undertaking. 

This  insult  to  their  deities  roused  at  last  the  spirit  of 
the  people,  who  had  hitherto  submitted  to  the  exactions 
of  their  conquerors  and  the  indignities  heaped  on  them 
selves  and  their  monarch.  They  determined  either  to 
expel  or  destroy  the  Spaniards,  and  nothing  but  the 
captive  condition  of  their  monarch,  and  his  danger, 
prevented  an  outbreak.  After  many  consultations  be 
tween  Montezuma  and  his  priests  and  officers,  Cortes 
was  decidedly  told,  that,  as  he  had  finished  his  em 
bassy,  the  gods  had  signified  it  as  their  desire,  that  he 


MEXICO,    FROM    THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES.  67 

and  his  band  should  leave  the  realm,  or  sudden  de 
struction  would  fall  on  them.  Temporizing  and  affect 
ing  to  comply,  the  wily  Spaniard  informed  Montezuma 
that  he  must  have  time  to  rebuild  his  vessels.  To  so 
reasonable  a  request  no  objection  could  be  urged  ; 
and  Mexicans  were  sent  to  Vera  Cruz  to  aid  in  the 
prosecution  of  this  labor,  while  the  Spanish  carpenters 
were  to  superintend  the  work. 

In  consequence  of  the  arrival  of  an  armament  from 
Cuba  against  him,  Cortes  was  forced  to  leave  an  offi 
cer  with  150  men  at  Mexico,  and  hasten  towards  Vera 
Cruz.  He  met  the  advancing  foe  and  defeated  them, 
received  the  soldiery  thus  conquered  into  his  own 
ranks,  and  hurried  back  again  to  the  Mexican  capital. 
During  his  absence,  infuriated  by  a  wanton  massacre 
committed  upon  their  nobles  by  the  Spanish  command 
ant,  Alvarado,  the  Mexicans  had  risen,  attacked  the 
garrison,  killed  and  wounded  some  of  the  men,  and 
burned  the  brigantines,  so  that  the  Spaniards,  now 
closely  invested  in  their  own  quarters,  were  threatened 
with  famine  or  by  the  fury  of  the  people,  by  whom 
they  were  continually  attacked.  On  his  return,  Cortes 
found  that  the  disaffection  was  widely  spread,  and  he 
was  welcomed  by  none  of  the  towns  on  his  route,  ex 
cept  Tlascala. 

On  his  arrival  in  Mexico,  Montezuma,  who  still  rer 
mained  a  prisoner  in  the  Spanish  quarters,  came  to 
welcome  him  ;  but  Cortes  received  him  so  coldly  that 
the  emperor  soon  retired.  Earnestly  desirous,  how 
ever,  of  vindicating  himself  from  the  imputation  of 
having  been  accessory  to  the  assault  on  the  garrison, 
he  soon  after  sent  some  of  his  attendants  to  solicit  an 


68  MEXICO,    FROM    THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES. 

interview  with  the  Spanish  general.  Irritated  by  the 
continued  demonstrations  of  hostility  on  the  part  of  the 
people,  Cortes  now  threw  off  all  restraint,  and  treated 
the  message  with  the  utmost  contumely,  exclaiming, 
"  What  have  I  to  do  with  this  dog  of  a  king  ?  "  The 
nobles,  swelling  with  indignation,  withdrew. 

Meanwhile  the  people  of  the  city  were  busily  en 
gaged  in  preparing  for  a  vigorous  assault  on  the  Span 
ish  quarters.  Cortes  had  just  despatched  a  messenger 
to  Vera  Cruz,  to  announce  his  safe  arrival  in  the  capi 
tal,  and  his  confident  expectation  of  a  speedy  sub 
mission  on  the  part  of  the  rebels,  as  he  termed  them, 
when  suddenly  the  din  of  war  rose  on  the  air,  and  his 
messenger,  who  had  been  gone  scarcely  half  an  hour, 
returned  in  breathless  haste  with  the  .intelligence  that 
the  city  was  all  in  arms.  The  appalling  tidings  were 
speedily  confirmed,  by  the  appearance  of  the  furious 
populace  rushing  on  through  every  avenue  towards  the 
fortress,  as  if  determined  to  carry  it  by  storm.  The 
conflict  was  fierce  and  obstinate.  Nothing  daunted  by 
the  storm  of  iron  hail  poured  in  upon  their  defenceless 
bodies  from  the  Spanish  ordnance,  which  stretched 
them  on  the  ground  by  hundreds,  they  pressed  on  up 
to  the  very  muzzles  of  the  guns.  Repulsed  on  one 
quarter,  they  turned  with  undiminished  fury  to  anoth 
er,  —  striving,  now,  to  scale  the  parapet,  now  to  force 
the  gates,  and  now  to  undermine  or  open  a  breach  in 
the  walls,  —  and  finally  endeavouring  to  fire  the  edi 
fice  by  shooting  burning  arrows  into  it.  In  this  last 
they  were  partially  successful ;  but  the  approach  of 
night  at  length  caused  them  to  retire. 

On  the  following  day  the  Mexicans  prepared  to  re- 


MEXICO,    FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES.  69 

new  the  attack ;  but  Cortes  resolved  to  anticipate  it  by 
a  sortie.  Accordingly  he  sallied  out  at  the  head  of  his 
cavalry,  supported  by  the  infantry  and  his  Tlascalan  al 
lies.  The  Mexicans  fled  in  disorder  ;  but  soon  rallying 
behind  a  barricade  which  they  had  thrown  up  across 
the  street,  they  began  to  pour  in  volleys  of  missiles 
upon  the  Spaniards,  which  served  in  a  degree  to  check 
their  career.  With  the  aid  of  his  field  pieces,  however, 
Cortes  speedily  cleared  away  the  barricade,  when  the 
Mexicans  again  turned  and  fled.  But  now,  as  the 
Spaniards  continued  to  advance,  the  enemy  had  re 
course  to  a  new  mode  of  annoyance.  Mounting  to  the 
roofs  of  the  houses,  they  hurled  down  large  stones  upon 
the  heads  of  the  cavaliers  with  a  force  which  would 
often  tumble  them  from  their  saddles.  Unable  to  pro 
tect  themselves  against  this  species  of  missiles,  Cortes 
ordered  the  buildings  to  be  set  on  fire,  and  in  this 
manner  several  hundred  houses  were  destroyed.  The 
Spaniards  were  now  victorious  at  every  point;  at 
length,  sated  with  slaughter,  and  perceiving  that  the 
day  was  beginning  to  decline,  Cortes  withdrew  his 
troops  to  their  quarters. 

The  Mexicans,  however,  were  determined  to  allow 
the  hated  strangers  no  rest.  Although,  conformably  to 
the  usage  of  their  nation,  they  made  no  attempt  to  re 
new  the  combat  during  the  night,  they  nevertheless 
bivouacked  around  the  fortress,  and  disturbed  the  slum 
bers  of  their  enemy  by  insulting  taunts  and  menaces, 
which  indicated  but  too  clearly  that  their  ferocity  was 
in  no  degree  subdued  by  the  terrible  havoc  dealt  out 
to  them  during  the  two  preceding  days. 

In  the  hope  of  influencing  the  Mexicans,  Cortes  now 


70     MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTES. 

brought  out  Montezuma  to  command  them  to  cease  from 
hostilities.  At  the  sight  of  their  venerated  sovereign 
in  his  royal  robes,  they  dropped  their  weapons,  and 
silently  bowed  their  heads  in  prostration  to  the  ground. 
Obeying  Cortes's  directions,  he  addressed  them,  and 
plied  them  with  arguments  to  urge  them  to  peace. 
When  he  ceased,  sullen  murmurs  and  indignant  re 
proaches  ran  through  the  ranks,  and,  in  a  rage,  deem 
ing  their  sovereign  only  the  supple  instrument  of  their 
foe,  flights  of  arrows  and  volleys  of  stones  were  poured 
forth  on  the  ramparts  where  he  stood,  so  that,  before 
he  could  be  protected,  Montezuma  fell,  wounded  by 
the  hand  of  one  of  his  own  subjects.  Horror-struck, 
the  Mexicans  fled  ;  while  Montezuma,  disdaining  to  live 
after  this  degradation,  died  in  the  Spanish  quarters. 
Cortes,  knowing  that  affairs  had  arrived  at  the  great 
est  extremity,  now  prepared  for  his  retreat,  which  he 
was  not,  however,  suffered  to  effect,  till  after  long  and 
bloody  conflicts,  in  one  of  which  his  own  life  was  en 
dangered  by  the  devotion  of  two  young  Mexicans,  who 
seized  on  him  and  hurried  him  to  the  edge  of  the  plat 
form  of  the  temple,  intending  to  cast  him  and  them 
selves  down,  that  they  all  might  be  dashed  in  pieces. 
Many  of  his  soldiers  were  driven  into  the  lake,  and 
there  perished  ;  others  were  killed,  and  others  still  were 
taken  prisoners.  He  lost,  it  is  said,  more  than  half 
his  army,  escaping  with  only  about  400  foot  soldiers  and 
twenty  horsemen,  with  which  force  he  broke  through 
the  multitudes  by  whom  he  was  everywhere  hemmed 
in.  He  lost  also  his  artillery,  baggage,  and  ammuni 
tion  ;  besides  4,000  Tlascalans  who  were  killed  and 
taken  prisoners,  which  latter  the  Mexicans  sacrificed 
to  their  gods. 


MEXICO,   FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES.  71 

The  retreat  continued  for  six  days,  during  which 
time  Cortes  and  his  soldiers  were  forced  to  feed  on 
berries,  roots,  and  stalks  of  green  maize.  On  the 
seventh  day,  they  reached  Otumba,  on  the  route  from 
Mexico  to  Tlascala,  the  point  towards  which  he  was 
directing  his  course.  The  Mexicans,  as  he  advanced, 
hung  on  his  rear,  exclaiming,  exultingly,  "  Go  on,  rob 
bers  !  go  where  you  shall  quickly  meet  the  vengeance 
due  to  your  crimes  !  "  On  reaching  the  summit  of  the 
mountain  range,  they  understood  too  well  the  meaning 
of  this  threat ;  for  the  whole  wide  plain  below  them 
in  front  was  covered  with  a  vast  army,  drawn  up  in 
battle  array.  The  Mexicans,  leaving  the  smaller  por 
tion  of  their  force  to  pursue  the  flying  enemy  on  one 
side  of  the  lake,  had  gathered  the  main  body  of  their 
army  on  the  other  side,  and,  marching  forward,  posted 
it  in  the  plain  of  Otumba. 

Cortes,  without  a  moment's  hesitation,  lest  the  sight 
of  such  vast  numbers  might  strike  his  troops  with 
dismay,  led  them  on  to  the  charge  ;  and,  notwithstand 
ing  the  fortitude  of  the  Mexicans,  succeeded  in  pene 
trating  their  dense  battalions.  But,  as  one  quarter 
gave  way,  the  Mexicans  rallied  on  another,  and  con 
tinued  to  pour  upon  the  foe  in  such  numbers,  that, 
but  for  a  fortunate  event  which  turned  the  tide  of 
battle,  the  Spaniards  must  have  been  overpowered 
from  exhaustion.  Cortes,  availing  himself  of  the 
knowledge  which  his  stay  at  Mexico  had  enabled  him 
to  gain,  directed  his  efforts  against  the  quarter  where 
the  standard  was  carried  before  the  Mexican  general, 
assured,  that,  by  the  capture  of  this,  he  could  throw  the 
whole  Mexican  army  into  confusion. 


72  MEXICO,    FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF   CORTES. 

The  event  justified  his  expectation  ;  for  when,  in 
spite  of  the  resistance  of  the  nobles,  he  killed  the 
Mexican  general,  and  seized  on  the  standard,  the 
whole  Mexican  army,  panic-struck,  threw  down  their 
weapons  and  fled  to  the  mountains.  The  spoils  of  the 
field  in  some  degree  compensated  the  Spaniards  for 
the  losses  they  had  sustained  in  their  retreat  from  the 
capital.  Pursuing  their  march  without  further  molesta 
tion  from  the  enemy,  they  shortly  afterwards  reached 
Tlascala,  where  they  were  received  with  the  greatest 
kindness  by  their  faithful  allies.  Here  Cortes  remained, 
raising  recruits,  and  forming  new  plans  for  the  subju 
gation  of  the  empire. 

The  Mexicans,  on  the  death  of  Montezuma,  had 
raised  to  the  throne  his  brother,  Cuitlahua,  who  showed 
himself  worthy  of  the  choice.  After  expelling  Cortes 
from  the  capital,  he  repaired  the  fortifications,  provided 
magazines,  caused  long  spears  to  be  made,  headed  with 
the  swords  and  daggers  taken  from  the  Spaniards, 
gathered  the  people  from  the  provinces,  and  exhorted 
them  to  prove  faithful.  He  also  sent  embassies  to 
Tlascala,  to  persuade  that  people  to  break  off  their 
alliance  with  men  who  were  the  avowed  enemies  of 
the  gods,  and  who  would  assuredly  impose  on  them  the 
yoke  of  bondage.  It  was  no  easy  matter  for  Cortes  to 
withstand  the  influence  of  such  reasonable  sugges 
tions  on  the  minds  of  the  Tlascalans ;  and  had  he  not 
been  on  the  spot,  their  fidelity  might  perhaps  have  wa 
vered. 

But,  while  Cuitlahua  was  thus  planning  the  de 
fence  of  his  kingdom,  and  performing  the  part  of  a 
wise  and  valiant  prince,  he  was  attacked  by  the  small 


MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTES.     73 

pox,  a  disease  introduced,  it  is  said,  by  the  Spaniards, 
and  fell  a  victim  to  this  scourge  of  the  natives  of  the 
New  World.  He  was  succeeded  by  his  nephew,  Gua- 
temozin,  a  young  man  of  great  ability  and  valor. 

In  the  mean  time,  Cortes  was  busily  employed  in 
making  arrangements  for  the  renewal  of  operations 
against  Mexico.  Reinforcements  of  troops,  arms,  and 
ammunition  came  in  from  various  quarters.  The  strong 
holds  on  the  Mexican  frontier  were  reduced,  and  the 
people  of  the  surrounding  country,  who  had  made 
demonstrations  of  hostility,  were  summarily  chastised 
and  subdued.  Cortes  likewise  gave  orders  for  the  con 
struction  of  thirteen  brigantines  at  Tlascala,  which, 
when  finished,  might  be  taken  to  pieces  and  transport 
ed  to  Mexico,  to  be  employed  in  the  siege  of  the  city. 

His  arrangements  being  now  completed,  on  the  24th 
of  December,  1520,  Cortes  set  forward  on  his  march. 
On  reentering  the  Mexican  territories,  he  found  that 
various  preparations  had  been  made  to  oppose  him. 
He,  however,  forced  his  way,  and  took  possession  of 
Tezcuco,  the  second  city  of  the  empire,  situated  on 
the  lake  about  twenty  miles  from  Mexico.  Fixing  his 
head-quarters  here,  he  now  occupied  himself  in  the 
subjugation  of  the  towns  around  bordering  on  the  lake. 
By  treating  the  inhabitants  kindly,  he  won  them  to 
himself,  and,  as  they  had  been  originally  independent, 
and  were  reduced  by  the  Mexican  power,  he  promised 
them  a  restoration  to  their  former  privileges,  subject 
only  to  the  sway  of  the  king  of  Castile.  In  this  man 
ner,  the  Mexican  monarch  and  those  who  remained 
faithful  to  him  became  more  and  more  limited  in  their 
resources,  while  Cortes  was  gaining  additional  strength. 


74  MEXICO,    FROM    THE   ARRIVAL    OF   CORTES. 

Having  finally  completed  the  preparation  of  the  ma 
terials  for  his  brigantines,  he  sent  a  strong  convoy  to 
transport  them  to  Tezcuco.  The  Tlascalans  furnished 
him  8,000  tamanes,  or  carriers,  and  appointed  15,000 
warriors  to  accompany  the  Spanish  troops.  The  mate 
rials  were  carried  sixty  miles  across  the  mountains, 
and  finally  reached  Tezcuco  in  safety. 

A  new  reinforcement  of  soldiers,  with  horses,  bat 
tering  cannon,  and  ammunition,  now  also  joined  him 
from  Hispaniola,  whither  he  had  sent  to  raise  recruits. 
The  brigantines  were  soon  finished  ;  for  the  purpose 
of  floating  them  into  the  lake,  a  canal,  two  miles  long, 
was  made  by  deepening  a  small  rivulet,  and  amid 
shouts,  firing  of  cannon,  and  religious  ceremonies,  they 
were  launched. 

The  force,  destined  for  this  final  attack  on  Mexico, 
amounted  to  86  horsemen  and  818  foot-soldiers,  of 
whom  1 18  were  armed  with  muskets  or  crossbows ; 
a  train  of  artillery  of  three  battering  cannon,  and  fif 
teen  field  pieces.  Each  brigantine  was  manned  by 
twenty-five  Spaniards,  and  bore  one  of  the  small  can 
non.  These  Cortes  commanded  in  person.  The  points 
selected  for  the  attack  were,  from  Tepejacac  on  the 
north  side  of  the  lake,  from  Tacuba  on  the  west,  and 
Cojohuacan  towards  the  south,  corresponding  to  the 
causeways  which  have  been  heretofore  mentioned. 
By  cutting  off  the  aqueducts,  the  inhabitants  were 
reduced  to  great  distress  ;  and  the  efforts  of  the  Mexi 
cans  to  destroy  the  fleet  were  entirely  unsuccessful. 

Cortes,  now  master  of  the  lake,  pushed  on  his  attack 
from  all  points,  broke  down  the  barricades,  forced  his 
way  over  the  trenches,  and  sought  to  penetrate  into 


MEXICO,   FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF   CORTES.          75 

the  heart  of  the  city.  The  Mexicans,  though  losing 
ground  every  day,  repaired  the  breaches  by  night,  la 
boring  with  incredible  effort  to  recover  their  posts. 
With  his  small  force,  the  Spaniard  dared  not  attempt 
a  lodgment  where  he  might  be  hemmed  in  by  num 
bers,  and  thus  defeated.  Finally,  however,  his  troops, 
by  the  most  desperate  assaults,  penetrated  into  the 
city ;  a  success  which  was  shortly  turned  into  a  disas 
trous  and  nearly  fatal  defeat,  in  consequence  of  the 
commander  of  one  of  the  divisions,  Juan  de  Alderete, 
neglecting  his  instructions  to  fill  up  the  canals  and 
gaps  in  the  causeways,  as  he  proceeded,  in  order  to 
secure  the  means  of  retreat. 

Guatemozin,  hearing  of  this,  with  great  presence  of 
mind,  directed  the  Mexicans  to  retire,  thus  drawing 
forward  the  unwary  Spaniards  ;  while  chosen  bodies 
of  troops  were  judiciously  posted  in  various  places  to 
act  when  needed.  The  Spaniards  eagerly  pressed 
on,  till,  at  the  signal,  a  stroke  of  the  great  drum 
in  the  temple  of  the  war-god,  the  Mexicans  poured 
upon  them  with  the  utmost  fury,  and  driving  them 
on  to  the  causeway,  horsemen,  foot,  and  Tlascalans 
plunged  into  the  gap,  and  Cortes  was  unable  to  rally 
them.  The  rout  became  general,  and  he  himself 
was  wounded,  and  with  difficulty  saved  from  being  led 
off  captive  by  the  Mexicans.  Besides  those  who  per 
ished  in  the  conflict,  above  sixty  Spaniards  fell  into 
the  hands  of  the  victors.  These,  as  night  drew  on, 
illuminated  their  city,  and  compelled  their  captives 
to  dance  before  the  image  of  the  war- god.  They  then 
sacrificed  them,  their  shrieks  reaching  the  ears  of  their 
companions,  who  were  unable  to  render  them  any 
assistance. 


76          MEXICO,   FROM    THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES. 

The  priests  now  declared  their  god  to  be  so  pro 
pitiated  by  the  sacrifices  which  had  been  offered  upon 
his  altar,  that  in  eight  days  their  enemies  should  be 
destroyed,  and  peace  and  prosperity  restored.  The 
effect  of  this  confident  prediction  was  such,  that  the 
Indian  allies  of  Cortes  abandoned  him,  and  even  the 
Tlascalans,  hitherto  faithful,  also  deserted  him. 

In  this  trying  emergency,  the  Spaniards  remained 
true  to  their  commander.  At  length,  the  eight  days, 
prescribed  by  the  priests,  having  expired,  and  their  pre 
diction  proving  false,  the  superstitious  allies  of  Cortes, 
believing  that  the  gods,  who  had  deceived  the  Mexi 
cans,  had  abandoned  them,  returned.  Cortes  now 
prosecuted  the  siege  with  renewed  vigor.  The  Mexi 
cans,  as  before,  disputed  every  inch  of  ground  with  in 
credible  bravery.  Still  Cortes  gradually  advanced  his 
lines  in  various  quarters,  and,  giving  up  his  former 
cherished  purpose  of  sparing  the  city,  as  fast  as  any 
portion  was  gained,  it  was  levelled  to  the  ground,  and 
the  materials  were  used  for  filling  up  the  canals. 

This  course  hemmed  in  the  Mexicans  more  and 
more  closely.  Famine  and  disease,  too,  made  their 
appearance  in  the  devoted  city.  Their  provisions  were 
exhausted,  and  their  supplies  of  water  were  cut  off. 
Still,  Guatemozin  remained  firm,  rejecting  all  the  over 
tures  of  Cortes,  and  determined  to  die  rather  than  to 
yield  to  the  oppressors  of  his  country.  At  length  the 
Spaniards  penetrated  to  the  great  square  in  the  centre 
of  the  city.  Three  quarters  of  the  whole  place  were 
now  in  ruins ;  and  the  remainder  was  so  closely  invest 
ed,  that  it  could  not  long  hold  out. 

The  Mexicans  finally  prevailed  upon  Guatemozin  to 


MEXICO,    FROM    THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES.  77 

attempt  an  escape  to  the  remoter  provinces,  where  he 
might  still  be  able  to  carry  on  a  struggle  with  the  in 
vaders.  To  deceive  Cortes,  they  proposed  terms  of 
submission.  The  general,  however,  became  aware  of 
their  object,  and  gave  strict  injunctions  to  his  officers 
to  watch  every  motion  of  the  enemy.  The  com 
mander  of  one  of  the  brigantines,  perceiving  at  one 
time  several  canoes  rowing  across  the  lake  with  the 
greatest  rapidity,  gave  the  signal  to  make  chase. 
On  being  overtaken,  and  seeing  preparations  making 
to  fire  on  one  of  the  canoes,  all  the  rowers  dropped 
their  oars,  threw  down  their  arms,  and  besought  the 
officer  commanding  the  brigantine  not  to  fire,  as  their 
king  was  among  them. 

Guatemozin  immediately  gave  himself  up,  only  re 
questing  that  no  insult  might  be  offered  to  his  wife  and 
children.  When  brought  before  Cortes,  the  Mexican 
chief,  with  great  dignity,  said  :  "  I  have  done  what 
became  a  monarch.  I  have  defended  my  people  to 
the  last.  I  have  nothing  now  to  do  but  to  die.  Take 
this  dagger,"  laying  his  hand  on  one  worn  by  Cortes, 
"  plant  it  in  my  breast,  and  put  an  end  to  a  life  which 
can  no  longer  be  useful." 

^As  soon  as  the  capture  of  Guatemozin  was  known, 
all  resistance  ceased,  and  the  city,  as  much  of  it  as 
remained,  was  taken  possession  of  by  the  Spaniards. 
The  Mexicans  had  endured  the  siege  for  nearly  three 
months,  during  most  of  which  time,  attack  and  defence 
were  carried  on  with  almost  uninterrupted  effort.  The 
fatal  mistake  of  the  Mexicans  was  in  allowing  Cortes 
a  second  time  to  enter  their  city,  when  the  officer  he 
had  left  in  charge  was  so  hemmed  in,  that  he  and  his 


78  MEXICO,   FROM   THE   ARRIVAL    OF    CORTES. 

troops  must  soon  have  perished  by  famine.  Still,  the 
final  conquest  is,  no  doubt,  in  a  great  degree  to  be 
attributed  to  the  great  disparity  of  arms,  and  the  wis 
dom  of  Cortes  in  enlisting  the  superstition  of  the 
Tlascalans  and  their  enmity  to  the  Mexicans  on  his 
side,  and  thus  securing  them  as  allies. 

Guatemozin,  while  a  captive,  bore  his  sufferings 
with  dignity,  and  when  subjected  with  one  of  his  min 
isters  to  torture,  to  make  him  reveal  the  place  where 
his  treasures  were  concealed,  he  said  to  his  fellow- 
sufferer,  who,  overcome  by  anguish,  was  groaning 
aloud,  —  "  Am  I,  then,  taking  my  pleasure,  or  enjoying 
a  bath  ?  "  The  favorite,  stung  by  the  reproach, 
suffered  in  silence  till  he  expired.  The  royal  victim 
was  taken  by  Cortes  from  this  scene  of  torture  and 
indignity  only  to  be  subjected  to  further  sufferings. 

The  extensive  provinces  of  the  empire  readily  sub 
mitted,  on  learning  the  fall  of  the  capital.  Still,  the 
Spaniards  did  not  maintain  their  sway  without  effort. 
The  Mexicans,  from  time  to  time,  sought  to  assert 
their  rights  ;  and  their  oppressors,  considering  them 
as  slaves,  punished  them  in  the  most  ignominious  and 
cruel  manner.  In  Panuco,  a  part  of  the  ancient  em 
pire,  400  nobles,  who  were  concerned  in  an  insurrec 
tion,  were  burned  to  death.  On  the  mere  suspicion 
of  a  design  to  shake  off  the  yoke  and  excite  his  former 
subjects  to  revolt,  Cortes  ordered  Guatemozin  to  be 
hung,  together  with  the  cacique  of  Tacuba.  The  poor 
inhabitants  were  everywhere  reduced  to  bondage,  and 
forced  to  live  under  the  galling  yoke  of  their  op 
pressors.  The  Spaniards  revelled  in  the  luxuries 
and  splendors  of  this  ancient  empire,  while  the  de- 


MEXICO,  FROM  THE  ARRIVAL  OF  CORTES.     79 

scendants  of  kings  and  caciques  were  their  vassals  and 
slaves. 

The  hardships  the  people  endured,  while  following 
their  conquerors  in  their  various  military  expeditions, 
the  attacks  of  disease,  and  other  causes,  swept  offnum- 
hers  of  the  original  population.  After  mining  was 
introduced,  they  were  driven  to  the  mines  to  procure 
treasures  for  their  oppressors.  Some  of  them  have 
since  intermarried  with  the  whites,  and  thus  a  mixed 
race  has  been  introduced.  A  portion  have  embraced 
the  Roman  Catholic  religion,  and  have  been  indebted 
to  the  ecclesiastics  for  some  amelioration  of  their  suf 
ferings. 

At  present,  it  is  computed  that  of  about  8,000,000 
of  inhabitants,  of  which  the  republic  of  Mexico  is  com 
posed,  nearly  two  fifths  are  of  pure  native  blood.  They 
are  said  to  be  grave  and  melancholy,  having  a  taste 
for  music,  great  talent  for  drawing,  being  skilful  in 
modelling  in  wood  or  wax,  and  having  a  great  passion 
for  flowers.  As  a  class,  though  gentle,  they  are  poor 
and  miserable,  yet  live  to  a  great  age,  sometimes  even 
to  a  hundred  years.  They  are  still  much  oppressed,  and, 
though  having  the  nominal  rights  of  citizens,  they  are 
often  kept  as  laborers  for  years  against  their  will.  By 
tempting  their  appetite,  they  are  brought  in  debt,  and 
then,  when  they  have  nothing  to  pay  the  creditor,  he 
assumes  the  right  of  a  master.  They  are  allowed 
magistrates  of  their  own  race,  but  their  caciques,  de 
graded  themselves,  take  every  opportunity  of  oppress 
ing  those  beneath  them. 


THE  EMPIRE  OF  THE  INCAS. 


NOT  many  years  after  the  conquest  of  Mexico,  a 
similar  enterprise  was  undertaken,  which  resulted  in 
the  overthrow  and  subjugation  of  a  people  resembling 
the  Mexicans,  in  their  comparative  advancement  in 
civilization,  and  in  the  extent  and  riches  of  their  em 
pire.  Peru  is  situated  on  the  western  coast  of  South 
America,  and  the  empire  of  its  sovereigns  then  ex 
tended,  from  north  to  south,  above  1,500  miles  on  the 
Pacific  Ocean.  Its  breadth  was  limited  by  the  range 
of  the  mighty  Andes,  and  therefore  varied  in  different 
parts  of  its  extent.  This  vast  territory  was  originally 
peopled  by  independent  tribes,  characterized  by  differ 
ent  manners  and  forms  of  policy.  According  to  the 
Peruvian  traditions,  their  modes  of  life  were  not  superior 
to  those  of  the  most  uncivilized  savages.  They  roamed 
naked  through  the  forests,  without  any  fixed  habitations, 
living  more  like  wild  beasts  than  men. 

For  several  ages,  the  tradition  declares  that  they 
made  little  or  no  advances  towards  improvement,  en 
during  hardships  and  privations  of  all  kinds,  till  there 
suddenly  appeared,  on  the  banks  of  the  Lake  Titicaca, 
a  man  and  woman  of  majestic  form,  and  clothed  in 


THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS.  8l 

decent  garments.  These  persons  called  themselves 
Children  of  the  Sun,  and  asserted  that  they  were  sent 
by  that  benignant  deity  to  instruct  those  who  were  the 
objects  of  his  pity,  and  thus  to  improve  their  condition 
and  render  them  happier.  The  names  of  these  per 
sons,  as  given,  were  Manco  Capac  and  Mama  Cello. 
The  motives  they  addressed  to  the  poor  savages,  to 
induce  them  to  quit  their  barbarous  mode  of  life,  seem 
to  have  been  effectual,  and,  by  their  persuasions,  these 
scattered  people  were  some  of  them  united  together, 
and  obeying  the  supposed  divine  mandate,  they  fol 
lowed  the  strangers  to  Cuzco,  where  they  settled,  and 
commenced  the  building  of  a  city. 

These  extraordinary  individuals  thus  laid  the  foun 
dation  of  the  great  empire,  over  which  their  descendants 
afterwards  reigned  for  several  generations.  Manco 
Capac  taught  the  men  how  to  till  the  ground,  and  va 
rious  arts  by  which  their  comforts  might  be  increased, 
while  Mama  Oello,  at  the  same  time,  showed  the 
women  how  to  weave  and  spin.  Having  thus  con 
vinced  them  of  their  interest  in  their  welfare,  and  pro 
vided  them  with  food,  clothing,  and  suitable  abodes, 
Manco  Capac  enacted  various  laws,  and  introduced 
different  institutions,  by  which  the  people  might  be  ce 
mented  together  as  a  nation  of  established  character. 
He  prescribed  to  them  such  regulations  as  might  gov 
ern  them  both  in  public  and  private  life ;  defined  the 
relations  of  all,  and  constituted  such  offices,  and  ap 
pointed  such  persons  to  fill  them,  as  comported  with  his 
design  of  founding  a  perpetual  and  well  governed  state. 

This  new  kingdom  was  called  the  Empire  of  the 
Incas.     At  first,  the  territory  of  Manco  Capac  did  not 
6 


82  THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS. 

extend  more  than  twenty  or  thirty  miles  round  Cuzco. 
He  exercised,  however,  absolute  authority,  to  which 
the  people  rendered  a  willing  obedience.  His  memo 
ry  was  not  merely  cherished  in  after  ages  as  the 
founder  of  their  nation,  but  as  a  true  benefactor.  If 
this  tradition  be  admitted  to  be  founded  on  the  truth, 
it  forms  an  interesting  subject  of  inquiry,  who  these 
extraordinary  personages  were,  and  from  what  part  of 
the  world  they  probably  came.* 

The  successors  of  Manco  Capac  followed  his  ex 
ample,  gradually  extending  their  dominions,  and,  with 
this  enlargement  of  territory,  rendering  their  authority 
yet  more  and  more  absolute.  In  time,  they  were  re 
garded,  not  only  as  sovereigns  and  descendants  of 
the  founder  of  the  empire,  but  they  were  adored  as 
divinities.  Their  blood  was  considered  sacred,  and  by 
forbidding  their  posterity  to  intermarry  with  the  people 
they  continued  to  preserve  their  own  race  and  rank 
pure  from  all  others.  This  peculiar  family,  thus  set 
apart  as  a  royal  or  noble  race,  were  also  distinguished 
from  all  the  rest  of  the  nation  by  a  certain  garb  and 
ornaments,  which  it  was  unlawful  for  any  of  the  lower 
ranks  to  assume.  The  monarch  himself  appeared  with 
the  ensigns  which  he  alone  might  wear,  and  was  ever 
received  by  his  subjects  with  a  deferential  homage 
scarcely  short  of  adoration. 

The  character  of  the  people  was  very  different  from 

*  In  the  u  Lives  of  Famous  Indians,"  we  have  ofiered  a  few 
suggestions  on  this  subject.  If  the  reader  perceives  some  repe 
tition  of  facts  in  this  article,  to  be  found  in  that  just  mentioned, 
he  will  consider  that  it  is  a  part  of  our  design  to  render  each 
volume  of  the  "  Cabinet  Library,"  complete  in  itself. 


THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS.  83 

that  of  the  Mexicans,  for  while  these  latter,  as  we  have 
seen,  were  warlike  and  ferocious,  engaged  almost  con 
stantly  in  bloody  wars,  and  preserving  cruel  rites,  the 
Peruvians  or  Quichuas,  as  they  were  also  termed,  were 
united  in  a  peaceful  subjection  to  a  milder  superstition. 
The  Mexicans  pushed  forward  their  conquests  by  their 
valor,  and,  by  force  of  arms,  subdued  those  who  op 
posed  them  ;  but  the  Peruvian  Incas,  in  the  capacity  of 
legislators  and  benefactors,  extended  their  sway,  and 
induced  numerous  tribes  to  submit  to  them,  and  learn 
the  arts  and  comforts  of  peace  and  good  government. 
Not  one,  it  is  said,  out  of  twelve  monarchs,  descendants 
of  Manco  Capac,  varied  from  this  character. 

The  empire,  by  degrees,  became  one  of  great  ex 
tent,  comprehending  not  only  all  that  which  is  now 
called  Peru,  but  also  Ecuador,  which  is  still  covered  with 
the  monuments  of  the  Incas.  In  this  vast  region,  the 
most  perfect  order  reigned  ;  the  fields  were  tilled  ;  the 
rivers  were  employed  in  irrigating  the  soil  ;  mountains 
were  formed  into  terraces ;  canals  were  prepared, 
means  being  taken  to  preserve  the  water  in  its  pas 
sage  ;  and  many  large  tracts,  before  mere  deserts, 
were  thus  rendered  productive,  if  not  fertile.  As  a 
means  of  communication  for  the  convenience  of  the 
people,  a  national  road  was  constructed,  with  great  la 
bor,  from  Quito  to  Cuzco,  1,500  miles  in  length.  This 
was  a  surprising  work  of  art.  It  was  not  designed,  in 
deed,  for  carriages,  for  no  such  vehicles  were  in  use 
among  the  Peruvians,  but  for  a  great  thoroughfare  from 
one  end  of  the  empire  to  the  other.  Numerous  flying 
bridges  were  thrown  across  the  deep  ravines,  which 
often  interposed  obstacles  to  the  progress  of  the  work 
that  required  skill  and  patient  industry  to  overcome. 


84  THE   EMPIRE    OF   THE    INCAS. 

The  structures,  too,  of  stone,  either  temples  or  pal 
aces,  were  composed  of  immense  blocks,  inclosing  vast 
spaces,  and  divided  into  numerous  apartments,  one  of 
which  at  Caxamalca  is  said  to  have  been  capable  of 
containing  5,000  men.  Instead  of  the  hieroglyphics, 
by  which  the  Mexicans  preserved  the  records  of  their 
nation,  and  conveyed  from  one  to  another  the  knowl 
edge  of  passing  events,  the  Peruvians  used  the  quipos, 
or  strings,  which,  by  their  colors,  knots,  &c.,  repre 
sented  different  parts  of  the  record  they  wished  to  pre 
serve.  Vast  treasures  were  accumulated  by  the  Incas, 
from  the  rich  silver  mines  in  their  dominions,  and  when 
they  died,  many  of  their  vessels  and  other  portions  of 
their  wealth  were  buried  in  the  grave  with  them. 

When  the  Spaniards  first  visited  Peru,  in  1526,  the 
twelfth  monarch,  named  Huayna  Capac,  was  on  the 
throne.  He  is  said  to  have  been  a  great  prince,  as 
much  distinguished  by  his  wisdom  and  benevolence  as 
for  his  martial  talents.  He  subdued  Quito,  and  thus 
added  to  his  dominions  a  country  nearly  as  large  in 
extent  and  resources  as  his  own.  This  city  became 
another  capital  of  his  realm,  and  here  he  often  resided. 
Contrary  to  the  law,  which  forbade  the  intermarriage 
of  the  Incas  with  others  than  their  own  race,  he  wedded 
a  daughter  of  the  King  of  ^uito.  He  died  in  the 
year  1529,  leaving  Atahualpa,  his  son  by  the  princess 
of  Quito,  heir  to  that  kingdom.  The  rest  of  his  do 
minions  he  left  to  Huascar,  his  eldest  son  by  another 
wife  of  the  race  of  the  Incas. 

This  procedure  was  so  contrary  to  all  the  laws  and 
usages  of  the  empire,  that  the  Peruvians,  though  they 
revered  in  the  highest  degree  their  deceased  monarch, 


THE    EMPIRE    OF   THE    IN 

who  had  added  such  lustre  to  his  reign,  coCftd  not 
contentedly  submit  to  the  division  of  the  empire.  They 
urged  on  Huascar,  therefore,  to  require  his  brother 
to  renounce  his  claim  to  the  government  of  Quito,  and 
acknowledge  him  as  his  liege  lord.  Atahualpa,  how 
ever,  had  already  gained  a  large  body  of  Peruvian 
troops,  who  had  followed  his  father  to  Quito,  and  who 
were  the  best  portion  of  the  army.  He  therefore  not 
only  refused  to  comply  with  his  brother's  demand,  but 
marched  against  him  with  a  chosen  army.  A  civil 
war  ensued.  Atahualpa,  being  superior  in  force,  tri 
umphed  over  Huascar,  the  rightful  monarch  ;  and,  con 
scious  that  he  was  only  partially  descended  from  the 
Incas,  he  sought  to  confirm  himself  by  utterly  extermi 
nating  all  the  children  of  the  sun,  or  the  descendants 
of  Manco  Capac.  To  establish  yet  further  his  own 
authority,  he  kept  his  brother  alive,  in  whose  name  he 
issued  his  own  orders  to  the  various  parts  of  the  empire. 

The  effect  of  this  civil  war  was  most  disastrous  to 
this  hitherto  prosperous  empire.  It  rent  it  asunder  at 
the  very  time  when  a  crafty  foe  was  preparing  its  sub 
jugation,  and  when  the  force  of  united  counsels  and 
efforts  were  needed  for  the  safety  of  the  nation.  Had 
the  Spaniards  entered  Peru  under  the  reign  of  Huayna 
Capac,  they  would  have  found  a  far  different  state  of 
things,  and  possibly  Peru  might,  for  many  succeeding 
years,  have  enjoyed  prosperity  under  the  sway  of  her 
own  beneficent  monarchs,  instead  of  being  trampled 
under  the  foot  of  a  foreign  invader. 

When  Pizarro,  with  Almagro  and  De  Luque,  first 
established  a  colony  at  the  mouth  of  the  River  Piura,  in 
1532,  he  had  already  acquired  some  knowledge  of  the 


86  THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS. 

unnatural  contest  in  which  the  brothers  had  been  en 
gaged.  He  had  been  advancing  gradually,  for  three 
or  four  years,  from  Panama,  till  he  had  gained  the 
very  heart  of  the  empire,  without  the  contending 
parties  apparently  being  aware  that  the  common  ene 
my  was  on  his  march  for  their  ruin.  Huascar,  having 
finally  learned  of  this  event,  sent  messengers  to  Pi- 
zarro  to  entreat  his  aid  against  his  usurping  brother. 
The  wily  Spaniard  at  once  saw  the  advantage  he 
might  derive  from  the  intestine  divisions  of  the  empire, 
and  hastened  forward  without  waiting  for  the  rein 
forcements  he  was  expecting  from  Panama.  He  be 
gan  his  march  from  his  new  colony,  called  St.  Michael, 
where  he  left  a  garrison,  with  only  sixty-two  horsemen 
and  one  hundred  and  two  foot  soldiers,  of  whom  twenty 
were  armed  with  cross-bows,  and  three  with  muskets. 
He  marched  for  Caxamalca,  a  small  town  at  the  dis 
tance  of  twelve  days'  march  from  St.  Michael.  Here 
Atahualpa  was  encamped  with  a  considerable  number 
of  troops.  While  Pizarro  was  on  his  way,  a  messen 
ger  met  him  from  that  prince,  offering  his  alliance,  and 
an  assurance  of  his  friendly  reception  at  Caxamalca. 
Pizarro,  seizing  upon  the  occasion,  returned  answer 
that  he  came  from  a  powerful  monarch,  with  the  de 
sign  of  offering  his  aid  to  Atahualpa  to  sustain  him 
against  those  who  disputed  his  right  to  the  throne. 

The  Peruvians  were  utterly  at  a  loss  how  to  account 
for  the  sudden  appearance  of  the  Spaniards.  They 
viewed  them  as  superior  beings,  but,  as  was  the  case 
with  the  inhabitants  of  Cholula,  in  respect  to  Cortes, 
they  could  not  decide  whether  they  were  to  be  regard 
ed  as  possessed  of  beneficent  or  cruel  intentions.  The 


THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS.  87 

conduct  of  the  Spaniards  did  not  apparently  agree  with 
their  professions ;  for  while  they  declared  that  their 
object  was  to  enlighten  the  natives  in  the  truth,  and 
render  them  more  happy,  they  were  often  guilty  of 
flagrant  outrage  and  cruelty.  The  Inca,  however,  sat 
isfied  by  the  message  of  Pizarro,  was  prepared  to  re 
pose  unbounded  confidence  in  his  expected  visiter. 
The  Spaniards  were  allowed  to  cross  the  desert,  where 
they  might  have  been  easily  checked  on  their  march, 
and  to  pass  in  safety  through  the  defiles  of  the  moun 
tains,  which  were  so  narrow  and  difficult  of  entrance, 
that  a  few  men  might  have  maintained  their  ground 
against  a  large  force.  They  also  took  possession  of  a 
fortress  erected  there  for  the  defence  of  the  country, 
and  then  advanced  to  Caxamalca. 

As  they  approached,  Atahualpa  sent  them  messen 
gers  with  more  costly  presents  than  before.  Pizarro 
entered  the  city  with  his  troops,  and  took  possession  of 
a  large  court,  having  on  one  side  of  it  the  palace  of 
the  Inca,  and  on  the  other  a  temple  of  the  sun. 
Around  the  whole  was  a  strong  rampart,  or  wall  of 
earth.  Atahualpa  was  in  his  camp  about  three  miles 
from  the  city.  Messengers,  therefore,  were  despatched 
immediately  to  him  by  Pizarro,  with  the  same  declara 
tions  and  assurances  as  before,  to  request  an  interview, 
that  he  might  in  person  more  fully  inform  him  respect 
ing  his  design  in  visiting  his  empire. 

These  messengers  were  astonished  at  the  appear 
ance  of  order  and  decency  which  reigned  at  the  Peru 
vian  court,  and  still  more  at  the  display  of  gold  and 
silver  which  everywhere  met  their  view.  They  were 
received  with  the  utmost  cordiality,  and  hospitably  en- 


88  THE    EMPIRE    OF   THE    INCAS. 

tertained.  On  their  return  to  Pizarro,  the  account  they 
gave  of  the  splendor  with  which  their  eyes  had  been 
dazzled,  led  him  to  form  the  perfidious  resolution  of 
seizing  the  monarch,  as  Cortes  had  done  Montezuma, 
in  the  very  heart  of  his  empire.  He  deliberately 
formed  his  plan,  regardless  of  the  character  of  ambas 
sador  which  he  had  assumed,  or  of  the  confidence  that 
Atahualpa  reposed  in  his  promises,  and  made  all  the 
requisite  preparations  for  executing  it  at  once.  Di 
viding  his  horsemen  into  three  small  squadrons  or  com 
panies,  he  selected  from  his  infantry  twenty  men  of 
the  most  tried  courage,  whom  he  retained  as  his  body 
guard  and  to  aid  him  in  his  attempt,  while  he  posted 
his  artillery  and  cross-bowmen  opposite  the  avenue  by 
which  Atahualpa  was  to  make  his  approach. 

Early  on  the  morning  of  the  16th  of  November, 
Atahualpa  made  preparations  for  visiting  the  new 
comers.  Desirous  to  impress  on  his  visiters  the  strong 
est  sense  of  his  greatness  and  splendor,  the  day  was 
far  advanced  before  the  procession  began  its  march, 
and  so  slow  was  its  progress,  that  Pizarro  finally  be 
came  apprehensive  lest  the  monarch  had  penetrated 
his  treacherous  designs,  and  determined  not  to  place 
himself  within  his  reach.  To  quiet  such  fears,  if  any 
existed,  the  Spaniard  sent  him  still  another  embassy  to 
assure  him  of  his  friendship  and  kind  intentions.  Fi 
nally  the  Inca  made  his  appearance  with  the  pomp  of 
a  mighty  monarch.  He  was  preceded  by  400  men  in 
a  uniform  dress,  to  prepare  his  way,  and  sitting  on  a 
throne  adorned  with  beautiful  plumes,  almost  covered 
with  plates  of  gold  and  silver,  and  enriched  with  pre 
cious  stones,  he  was  borne  on  the  shoulders  of  a  num- 


THE   EMPIRE    OF   THE    INCAS.  89 

her  of  his  principal  attendants.  After  him  followed  his 
chief  officers,  carried  in  a  similar  manner ;  bands  of 
singers  and  dancers  also  mingling  in  the  procession, 
and  troops  to  the  number,  it  is  said,  of  30,000  men. 

The  Spanish  priest,  Valverde,  met  him,  on  his  ap 
proach  to  Pizarro,  with  a  crucifix  in  his  hand,  and,  dis 
coursing  to  him  on  various  doctrines  of  the  Catholic 
faith,  demanded  of  him  an  acknowledgment  of  the 
Pope  and  the  monarch  of  Castile  as  his  spiritual  and 
temporal  liege  lords,  on  penalty  of  war  and  vengeance. 
Atahualpa,  even  with  the  aid  of  interpretation,  was 
unable  to  comprehend  this  harangue  so  entirely  unex 
pected  to  himself,  and  when  made  acquainted  with  a 
portion  of  it,  was  most  indignant  at  such  an  attack  on 
his  rights  as  an  independent  ruler  of  his  realm.  He 
calmly  replied,  however,  that  he  was  possessed  of  his 
dominions  by  hereditary  succession  ;  that  no  pope  or 
priest  could  grant  his  realm  to  another  without  his  con 
sent  ;  that  he  had  no  wish  to  renounce  the  worship  of 
his  country's  god,  the  sun,  to  embrace  that  of  the  Span 
iards.  As  for  what  the  priest  had  assured  him  of,  he 
desired  to  know  where  these  extraordinary  matters 
were  to  be  found. 

"  In  this  book,"  replied  Valverde,  reaching  out  his 
breviary.  The  Inca,  opening  it,  and  turning  over  its 
leaves,  applied  it  to  his  ear.  "  This,"  said  he,  "  is 
silent,  it  tells  me  nothing,"  and  threw  it  contemptuous 
ly  to  the  ground.  The  monk,  roused  to  the  utmost 
pitch  of  indignation,  ran  towards  the  Spaniards,  crying 
out,  "  To  arms,  to  arms,  Christians,  the  word  of  God  is 
insulted  ;  avenge  the  profanation  of  these  impious 
heathen  dogs."  Pizarro,  who  had  hitherto  restrained 


90  THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS. 

his  soldiery,  though  inflamed  with  the  desire  of  plun 
dering  the  wealth  which  met  their  view,  now  gave  the 
signal  of  assault.  The  sound  of  the  martial  music,  the 
roar  of  the  cannon  and  musketry,  with  the  charge  of 
horse,  and  the  impetuosity  of  the  attack,  all  combined 
at  once,  threw  the  Peruvians  into  confusion.  They 
fled  in  dismay,  without  the  slightest  attempt  at  defence, 
while  Pizarro,  with  his  chosen  band,  at  once  pressed 
forward  to  the  royal  seat,  and  piercing  the  crowd  of 
devoted  nobles,  who  sacrificed  themselves  to  protect 
him,  seized  on  the  Inca,  dragged  him  to  the  ground, 
and  led  him  off  prisoner  to  the  Spanish  quarters.  The 
flying  troops  were  pursued  with  the  most  unrelenting 
fury,  and  they  continued  to  fall  victims  to  their  merci 
less  invaders  till  the  day  closed.  More  than  4,000 
Peruvians  are  said  to  have  perished ;  not  a  single  Span 
iard  was  killed,  and  but  one  was  wounded. 

The  captive  Inca  was  miserably  dejected  in  spirit, 
though  Pizarro  affected  to  treat  him  with  kindness 
and  respect.  Gradually  becoming  acquainted  with 
the  ruling  passion  of  the  invaders,  he  offered,  on  con 
dition  of  his  being  liberated,  to  fill  the  room  in  which 
he  was  confined,  which  was  twenty-two  feet  long  and 
sixteen  broad,  with  vessels  of  gold,  as  high  as  he 
could  reach.  Pizarro  agreed  to  the  proposal,  and 
marked  out  the  requisite  height  by  a  line  on  the  walls. 
The  Inca,  accordingly,  sent  out  orders  for  the  ransom 
to  be  gathered  from  Quito  and  Cuzco,  where  the  great 
est  quantities  of  gold  and  silver  were  amassed  in  the 
temples.  The  commands  of  the  monarch  were  re 
spected  and  obeyed,  and  persons  were  instantly  em 
ployed  in  bringing  together  the  needed  treasure 


THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS.  91 

While  this  was  going  on,  Pizarro  received  information 
of  the  approach  of  a  reinforcement.  This  was  a  new 
source  of  alarm  to  the  captive  sovereign,  especially  as 
he  also  learned  that  some  Spaniards  had  visited  his 
brother  Huascar  in  his  prison,  who  had  promised  them, 
if  they  would  take  his  part,  far  greater  wealth  than 
Atahualpa  had  done.  To  prevent  this,  he  determined 
to  have  his  brother  put  to  death,  and  his  commands  to 
that  effect  were  executed  accordingly. 

The  promised  treasure  was  now  collected,  but  Pi 
zarro,  with  unexampled  treachery,  not  only  refused  to 
release  his  prisoner,  but  determined  to  put  him  to 
death.  To  this  he  was  instigated  not  only  by  the  new 
ly  arrived  Spaniards,  but  by  an  Indian,  his  interpreter, 
whom  he  had  carried  off  some  years  before  from  be 
yond  Panama,  and  who  had  conceived  a  passion  for 
one  of  the  wives  of  Atahualpa.  He  also  alarmed  the 
Spaniard  with  accounts  of  forces  assembling  in  various 
parts  of  the  empire,  and  imputed  these  preparations 
for  wa.r,  to  the  commands  of  the  captive  monarch. 
Atahualpa  himself,  by  his  own  imprudence,  brought 
about  the  fatal  result.  Attaching  himself  especially 
to  Ferdinand  Pizarro  and  De  Soto,  persons  superior, 
both  in  birth  and  education,  to  Pizarro  himself,  and 
who  treated  him  with  kindness  and  attention,  he  be 
gan  gradually  to  regard  Pizarro  with  contempt.  He 
appears  to  have  been  a  prince  of  no  mean  talents, 
and,  observing  the  mode  by  which  the  Spaniards  com 
municated  their  thoughts  to  each  other  by  writing,  he 
greatly  admired  the  art,  but  was  at  a  loss  to  determine 
whether  it  was  a  natural  or  an  acquired  one. 

To  satisfy  himself  on  this   point,  he  requested  one 


92  THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS. 

of  the  soldiers  to  write  the  name  of  God  on  the  nail  of 
his  thumb.  This  he  showed  to  numbers  of  the  Span 
iards,  asking  its  meaning,  and,  to  his  astonishment,  they 
all  told  him  the  same  thing.  At  length,  when  Pizarro 
came,  he  put  the  question  to  him,  and  the  illiterate  ad 
venturer,  blushing  with  shame,  was  compelled  to  ac 
knowledge  his  ignorance.  Ever  after  this,  Atahualpa 
regarded  the  Spanish  commander  with  a  degree  of 
contempt,  and  the  consciousness  of  this  fact,  rankling 
in  the  breast  of  Pizarro,  fixed  his  purpose  of  putting 
his  royal  captive  to  death. 

To  give  some  color  to  his  injustice,  a  species  of  trial 
was  instituted.  The  monarch  was  arraigned  on  the 
charges  of  usurping  the  throne,  of  putting  his  brother 
and  sovereign  to  death,  of  having  commanded  human 
sacrifices,  of  maintaining  many  concubines  or  wives, 
and  having  wasted  treasures  since  his  captivity  which 
belonged  to  the  Spaniards.  Beside  all  these  charges, 
he  was  accused  of  having  excited  his  subjects  to  rebel 
lion  against  his  conquerors.  On  such  accusations  as 
these,  before  the  self-constituted  tribunal  who  had  al 
ready  doomed  their  victim,  the  wretched  Atahualpa  was 
found  guilty  and  condemned  to  be  burned  alive.  He 
besought  Pizarro  to  send  him  to  Spain  to  be  tried,  and 
condemned,  if  he  must  be  so,  by  a  king.  But  this  was 
no  part  of  Pizarro's  plan,  and  he  gave  orders  for  his 
immediate  execution.  To  save  himself  from  the  cruel 
death  which  was  prepared  for  him,  the  miserable  vic 
tim  of  perfidy  and  cruelty  asked  to  be  baptized;  in 
consideration  of  which  he  was  strangled  at  the  stake, 
instead  of  being  burned  alive. 

A  son  of  the  murdered  Inca  was  then  proclaimed  by 


THE    E3IPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS.  93 

Pizarro  as  monarch  of  Peru,  in  the  hope  that  he  might 
thus  control  the  empire  as  he  pleased.  But  the  people 
of  Cuzco  and  the  country  in  that  vicinity  chose  Manco 
Capac,  a  brother  of  Huascar,  as  the  Inca,  and  rightful 
successor  to  the  supreme  authority.  Civil  wars  at 
once  followed,  and  the  government  was  rent  in  pieces. 
Usurpers  and  aspirants  sprung  up  in  various  parts  of 
the  realm,  claiming  independent  power  ;  the  general  of 
the  late  sovereign  at  Quito,  seized  the  brother  and  chil 
dren  of  his  master,  put  them  to  death,  and  claimed  the 
throne  for  himself. 

These  intestine  divisions,  as  they  weakened  the  Pe 
ruvian  power,  prepared  the  way  for  Pizarro  to  advance 
to  Cuzco.  Several  battles  were  fought,  but  the  city 
was  finally  reached  and  taken  without  resistance.  The 
son  of  Atahualpa  died  on  the  march,  and  the  Peruvians 
seem  generally  to  have  admitted  the  claim  of  Manco 
Capac  to  the  vacant  throne.  Quito  also  soon  fell  into 
the  hands  of  another  band  of  invaders,  who  were  led  on 
by  the  officer  whom  Pizarro  had  left  as  governor  of  St. 
Michael.  The  Spaniards,  however,  found  to  their  dis 
appointment,  that  the  city  was  stripped  of  its  treasures, 
the  people  having  carried  them  away. 

Once  in  possession  of  Peru,  Pizarro  devoted  himself 
to  the  arranging  of  its  districts,  to  the  appointment  of 
officers,  the  establishing  of  regulations  for  the  adminis 
tration  of  justice,  the  collection  of  revenue,  and  the 
working  of  the  mines.  Here  the  Peruvians,  the  former 
masters,  were  driven  as  slaves  to  toil  for  their  oppres 
sors.  Multitudes  of  adventurers  from  Spain  now  flocked 
to  the  conquered  country,  and  forming  themselves  into 
various  small  bands,  each  led  by  some  adventurous  offi- 


94  THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS. 

cer,  they  set  forth  for  the  invasion  of  different  provinces 
of  the  empire,  which  were  yet  unsubdued. 

Manco  Capac  was  not  a  listless  observer  of  these 
proceedings.  Perceiving  that  but  a  few  troops  re 
mained  in  Cuzco,  where  he  resided,  jealously  watched 
by  the  Spaniards,  he  secretly  issued  his  commands  for 
his  subjects  to  assemble  at  a  short  distance  from  the 
capital,  where  he  obtained  leave  to  go  to  attend  a  solemn 
festival.  As  soon  as  he  appeared,  the  banner  was  un 
furled,  and  the  war  began.  All  the  warriors  were 
gathered,  and  the  whole  country  from  Quito  to  Chili 
was  soon  in  arms.  Many  of  the  Spaniard.s,  scattered 
over  the  country,  and  not  expecting  such  an  attack, 
were  cut  off.  An  army,  according  to  the  Spanish  writ 
ers,  of  200,000  men  assaulted  Cuzco,  which  was  de 
fended  by  only  170  Spaniards.  At  the  same  time, 
Pizarro's  new  city  of  Lima  was  besieged,  while  he  was 
obliged  to  remain  within.  All  communication  between 
the  two  cities  was  cut  off;  and  the  besieged  in  either 
place  were  in  utter  ignorance  of  the  fate  of  each  other. 

The  Inca  commanded  in  person  at  Cuzco,  and  here 
it  was  that  the  Peruvians  made  their  greatest  efforts. 
For  nine  whole  months,  they  carried  on  the  siege,  dis 
playing  great  skill,  and  profiting  by  their  observations 
on  the  discipline  of  their  enemies.  To  render  their 
efforts  yet  more  successful,  they  armed  some  of  their 
most  valiant  men  with  the  swords,  spears,  and  bucklers 
which  they  had  taken  from  the  Spaniards  whom  they 
had  put  to  death  throughout  the  country.  Some  even 
made  trial  of  the  Spanish  muskets,  and  charged  their 
foe,  mounted  on  horses,  and  led  by  the  Inca  in  person. 
In  spite  of  the  most  active  defence,  Manco  Capac 


THE    EMPIRE    OF    THE    INCAS.  95 

gained  possession  of  one  half  of  his  capital,  and  proba 
bly  nothing  but  the  sudden  appearance  of  Almagro's 
troops  saved  the  dispirited  Spaniards  from  quitting 
Cuzco,  or  perishing  in  battle. 

The  force  of  Almagro  was  regarded  by  both  parties 
as  the  umpire  of  the  contest,  and  both  sought  his  aid. 
He  and  the  Pizarros  had  been  at  variance,  as  the  Peru 
vians  knew,  and  Manco  Capac  at  first  sought  his  friend 
ship  ;  but  at  length,  despairing  of  success  in  this  way, 
he  attacked  him  by  surprise.  This  decided  the  ques 
tion.  The  Peruvians  unable  to  effect  their  purpose, 
were  defeated  with  great  slaughter,  and  their  army  was 
mostly  dispersed. 

Soon  after  this,  Pizarro,  having  dispersed  the  Peruvi 
ans,  who  had  held  him  shut  up  in  Lima,  and  having 
received  also  reinforcements  from  Spain,  advanced 
towards  Cuzco.  After  fruitless  negotiations,  a  terrible 
battle  was  fought  between  himself  and  his  brothers,  and 
Almagro,  in  which  the  latter  was  defeated  and  put  to 
death.  The  Peruvians  who  seem  at  first  to  have  re 
solved  to  profit  by  the  divisions  of  the  Spaniards, 
instead  of  falling  on  the  exhausted  troops  of  the  victors, 
as  they  should  have  done,  retired  quietly  after  the  bat 
tle,  perhaps  more  than  ever  impressed  with  a  sense  of 
the  superiority  of  their  discipline.  This  bloody  engage 
ment  took  place  on  the  26th  of  April,  1538. 

In  the  following  ten  or  twelve  years,  there  were  a 
succession  of  contests  for  power  between  different  par 
ties  of  the  Spaniards,  during  which  time  we  lose  sight 
of  Manco  Capac  and  the  Peruvians,  except  that  we 
know  that  these  people,  pressed  by  hard  service,  were 
rapidly  wasting  away.  The  representations  of  the  be- 


96  THE    EMPIRE    OF   THE    INCAS. 

nevolent  Las  Casas  at  length  reached  the  Spanish 
monarch,  and  influenced  him  to  avert  some  of  the  evils 
with  which  the  natives  were  threatened,  by  the  estab 
lishment  of  a  more  firm  and  equitable  government. 
This  was  finally  accomplished  by  the  wisdom  of  the 
viceroy,  Pedro  de  la  Gasca,  after  the  entire  defeat  and 
death  of  the  last  of  the  Pizarros,  who  had  rebelled 
against  the  king's  appointment,  in  1549.  This  officer 
made  regulations  concerning  the  treatment  of  the  In 
dians,  by  which  they  might  be  protected  from  oppres 
sion,  and  be  instructed  in  the  principles  of  religion. 
Still  they  were  obliged  to  labor  for  the  Spaniards,  being 
attached  to  the  land  itself,  and  apportioned  out  to  the 
various  persons  who  owned  the  estates. 

Like  almost  all  conquered  and  enslaved  people,  their 
numbers  have  lessened,  while  they  have  been  subjected 
to  the  fluctuations  of  ages.  They  are  now  said  to  be 
feeble  and  depressed  beyond  any  people  of  America, 
seeming  scarcely  capable  of  bold  and  manly  exertion. 
Some  whole  districts,  especially  in  the  ancient  kingdom 
of  Quito,  have  continued  to  be  occupied  almost  entirely 
by  the  Indians.  In  some  places  they  exercise  the  me 
chanic  arts,  and  belong  to  the  lower  class  of  the  popu 
lation.  Some  of  them  have  become  converts  to  the 
Roman  Catholic  priests ;  while  some  still  remember  and 
reverence  the  institutions  of  their  fathers,  and  some 
times  secretly  assemble  and  engage  in  ancient  idola 
trous  rites. 

Robertson  computed  the  number  of  native  Indians  in 
Peru  at  the  time  he  wrote  to  be  2,449,120.  They  are 
said  to  have  "  small  features,  little  feet,  sleek,  coarse, 
black  hair,  and  scarcely  any  beard."  They  have  been 


THE    EMPIRE    OF   THE    INCAS. 


97 


represented  as  sunk  in  apathy  and  insensibility,  but  the 
shy,  reserved,  and  gloomy,  though  tame  aspect  which 
they  present,  is  the  fruit  of  long  oppression,  and  accu 
mulated  wrongs.  They  still  retain  the  deepest  and 
most  mournful  recollections  of  the  Inca,  and  celebrate 
his  death  by  a  sort  of  rude  drama,  accompanied  by  the 
most  melting  strains  of  music. 


THE  ARAUCANIANS. 


THE  Araucanians  inhabit  the  southern  part  of  Chili, 
and  derive  their  name  from  the  province  of  Arauco. 
They  are  a  nation  enthusiastically  attached  to  freedom, 
and  pride  themselves  in  the  appellation  of  Auca,  which 
signifies  free.  They  are  muscular,  robust,  of  great 
strength  of  constitution,  and  often  attain  the  age  of  90  or 
100  years.  They  are  bold  and  warlike,  and  have  ever 
been  most  determined  foes  to  all  the  Spanish  invaders 
of  their  native  country  ;  and,  by  their  warlike  disposi 
tion  and  fiery  courage,  have  occasioned  great  trouble  to 
the  Spaniards  ever  since  they  became  acquainted  with 
them.  All  attempts  to  subjugate  them  to  the  sway  of 
the  Europeans  have  been  unsuccessful. 

Their  military  system  is  greatly  superior  to  that  of 
the  surrounding  nations,  and  the  degree  of  discipline 
they  had  gained  enabled  them  to  carry  on  long  and 
bloody  wars  with  the  Spaniards  who  overrun  Chili,  in 
the  early  part  of  the  sixteenth  century.  Their  state 
was  divided  into  four  nearly  equal  portions,  to  which 
they  gave  the  name  of  the  maritime  country,  the  plain 
country,  the  country  at  the  foot  of  the  Andes,  and  that 
of  the  Andes.  Each  of  these  great  divsions  was  also 


THE    ARAUCANIANS.  99 

subdivided  into  five  smaller  ones,  and  each  of  these  in 
turn  into  nine  still  less.  These  divisions  of  Araucania 
were  existing  previous  to  the  arrival  of  the  Spaniards. 

The  government,  which  is  aristocratic,  is  said  to  be  a 
sort  of  state,  in  which  there  are  three  orders  of  nobil 
ity,  with  gradations  of  rank,  called  the  toquis,  the 
asse-ulmenes,  and  the  ulmenes,  all  of  whom  have  their 
vassals.  Each  order  has  its  badge,  and  the  triple  power 
that  constitutes  the  sovereign  authority  is  vested  in  a 
general  diet,  or  grand  council,  which  is  usually  held  in 
some  large  plain,  where  they  feast  and  deliberate. 
The  grand  council  elect  a  commander-in-chief  to  lead 
them  in  war,  who  may  belong  to  the  inferior  ranks,  if 
he  is  thought  of  greater  ability  than  any  one  in  the  su 
perior  ranks.  The  Puelches,  a  hardy  race  of  moun 
taineers,  formerly  a  distinct  people,  have  been  united 
with  the  Araucanians,  under  the  same  government,  and 
this  part  of  the  nation  are  considered  enitled  to  have 
the  vice-toqui  chosen  from  among  them. 

The  first  account  we  have,  which  may  properly  be 
called  the  history  of  this  people,  is  at  the  beginning  of 
their  wars  with  the  Spaniards,  in  1550.  Their  toqui 
was  named  Aillavila,  and  the  Europeans  having  invaded 
the  inhabitants  of  Penco,  the  Araucanians  ordered  that 
officer  to  march  to  their  assistance  at  the  head  of 
4,000  men.  He  accordingly  crossed  the  great  River 
Biobio,  the  northern  boundary  of  Araucania,  and  boldly 
offered  battle  to  the  Spaniards.  Unlike  the  other  In 
dians,  with  whom  the  Spaniards  had  been  engaged,  the 
Araucanians  were  not  disconcerted  or  terrified  by  the 
discharge  of  fire-arms,  but  fell  at  once  on  the  front  and 
flanks  of  the  enemy  who  were  thrown  into  confusion. 


100  THE    ARAUCANIANS. 

Valdivia,  their  general,  had  his  horse  killed  under  him, 
and  was  exposed  to  great  danger,  when  the  toqui  re 
ceived  a  mortal  wound,  in  consequence  of  which  the 
Indians  drew  off  in  good  order  and  unpursued  by  the 
Europeans.  Valdivia,  who  had  been  in  many  battles 
both  in  Europe  and  America,  declared  that  his  life  had 
never  been  in  such  great  hazard  in  any  of  them  as  in 
this  engagement. 

The  next  year,  the  Araucanians  were  again  led  on 
by  their  new  toqui,  Lincoyan,  and  the  Spaniards,  re 
membering  the  former  engagement,  were  inspired  with 
such  terror,  that  after  confessing  themselves,  and  re 
ceiving  the  sacrament,  they  took  shelter  under  the  can 
non  of  their  fortifications.  In  his  first  attack  on  these, 
Linctfyan  was  unsuccessful,  and  obliged  to  retreat, 
which  the  Spaniards  ascribed  to  the  immediate  interpo 
sition  of  St.  James,  their  patron  saint,  who  they  affirmed 
was  seen  riding  on  a  white  horse,  armed  with  a  flaming 
sword,  and  striking  terror  into  their  enemies.  The  gov 
ernor  having  received  some  reinforcements  from  Peru, 
after  a  year  elapsed,  resolved  to  attack  them  ;  and,  un 
opposed  by  Lincoyan,  he  penetrated  to  the  Cauten,  by 
which  Araucania  is  divided  into  two  equal  parts.  Here 
he  built  a  city  which  he  called  Imperial,  and  also  de 
spatched  one  of  his  officers  to  found  another,  called 
Villarica,  on  the  Lauquen. 

Proceeding  on,  he  traversed  the  whole  of  Araucania, 
from  north  to  south,  with  but  small  loss,  and  finally 
arrived  at  the  territory  of  the  Clinches.  Here  he  found 
a  valiant  nation,  allies  of  the  Araucanians,  who  were 
prepared  to  oppose  his  passage  of  the  Calacalla.  The 
Cunchese  general,  however,  was  induced  to  permit  the 


THE 


invaders  to  pass  unmolested.  Valdivia  here  founded 
another  city,  to  which  he  gave  his  own  name,  and  then, 
satisfied  with  his  conquests,  prepared  to  return,  building 
fortresses  and  founding  cities  in  various  parts.  Ercilla 
says  that  the  Spaniards  in  this  expedition  had  to  fight 
many  battles,  but  the  details  are  not  given. 

To  Lincoyan,  succeeded  Caupolican,  an  account  of 
whose  exploits  has  been  already  given  in  another  vol 
ume  of  this  Library.  He  was  a  brave  warrior,  and 
drove  the  Spaniards  from  several  of  the  towns  and  for 
tresses  which  Valdivia  had  established.  But  these  suc 
cesses  were  succeeded  by  a  severe  reverse,  and  he  was 
on  the  point  of  being  defeated,  when  Lautaro,  incited 
by  patriotism,  broke  forth  from  the  Spanish  ranks,  and 
led  on  his  countrymen  to  victory.  The  whole  Spanish 
army  was  destroyed  except  a  few  prisoners,  and  two 
Promaucians,  their  Indian  allies. 

After  the  death  of  Valdivia,  who  was  put  to  death 
while  pleading  for  his  life,  the  Spaniards  evacuated  all 
the  cities  which  the  Spanish  governor  had  founded, 
except  two.  These  were  immediately  besieged  by 
Caupolican,  while  Lautaro,  now  appointed  lieutenant- 
general,  or  vice-toqui,  fortified  himself  for  the  defence 
of  the  frontiers  on  the  lofty  mountains  of  Mariguena. 
The  mountain  being  full  of  precipices  and  clefts,  and 
covered  on  one  side  by  impenetrable  thickets,  presented 
only  a  single  winding  by-path,  which  led  to  the  top  of 
the  mountain.  Villa  gran,  the  successor  of  Valdivia, 
engaged  in  battle  with  the  young  Lautaro,  but,  after 
a  desperate  fight,  he  was  worsted,  and  compelled  to 
retire.  Believing  it  impossible  to  defend  the  city  of 
Concepcion,  he  embarked  a  portion  of  the  inhabitants, 


IC2  THS   ASAUCANIANS. 

consisting  of  old  men,  women,  and  children,  on  board 
of  two  ships,  then  in  the  harbour,  while  he  led  the 
remainder  to  Santiago. 

Lautaro  entered  the  deserted  city,  where  he  found  a 
great  booty,  and  after  having  plundered  it,  burned  the 
houses,  and  razed  the  citadel  to  the  ground,  and  re 
turned  in  triumph  to  Arauco.  Caupolican,  however, 
was  forced  to  raise  the  siege  of  Imperial  and  Valdivia, 
in  consequence  of  the  strong  reinforcements  which  had 
been  thrown  into  them  by  Villagran.  While  he  was 
engaged  in  ravaging  the  country  around  Imperial,  the 
small-pox,  that  destructive  scourge  of  the  natives,  made 
its  appearance,  probably  communicated  by  some  Span 
ish  soldiers,  and  made  terrible  havoc,  so  that  there  were 
some  districts  almost  depopulated.  In  one  of  these 
containing  12,000  inhabitants,  it  is  asserted  that  not 
more  than  100  persons  escaped  death. 

Villagran,  availing  himself  of  these  circumstances, 
rebuilt  Concepcion,  which  however  was  no  sooner  done 
than  Lautaro  recrossed  the  Biobio,  and  attacking  the 
Spaniards  whom  he  found  in  the  open  plain,  put  them 
to  flight.  He  then  entered  the  fort,  killed  great  num 
bers  of  the  citizens,  and  once  more  plundered  and  burnt 
the  city.  Emboldened  by  this  success,  he  resolved  to 
carry  the  war  still  farther  into  the  enemy's  country,  and 
marched  the  distance  of  500  miles,  to  Santiago,  near 
which  he  encamped  with  his  forces.  The  Spanish 
general  here  surprised  and  fell  upon  them,  and  cut  them 
all  to  pieces,  including  the  brave  Lautaro,  who  fell  in 
the  outset. 

The  Araucanians  fought  with  the  most  determined 
bravery  to  the  very  last,  despising  every  offer  of  quar- 


THE    ARAUCANIANS.  103 

ter ;  thus  the  victory  was  dearly  earned,  with  a  great 
loss  both  of  officers  and  men.  This  battle  took  place 
in  the  year  1556,  and  Lautaro,  at  his  death,  was  only 
nineteen  years  of  age.  Probably,  had  he  lived,  the 
Spaniards  might  have  been  eventually  driven,  not  only 
from  Chili,  but  a  large  portion  of  Peru.  His  name  is 
said  to  be  still  celebrated  in  their  heroic  songs,  and  his 
actions  proposed  as  the  most  glorious  example  to  their 
youth.  The  result  of  this  disaster  was,  that  Caupolican 
quitted  the  siege  of  Imperial,  and  returned  to  his  own 
country. 

A  succession  of  battles  followed,  in  which  the  Arau- 
canians  were  generally  defeated,  and  Caupolican  him 
self,  being  taken  prisoner,  was  put  to  a  cruel  death  by 
impalement.  The  Spanish  general  now  advanced  into 
the  country,  and  reached  the  place  where  Valdivia,  as 
related  above,  had  been  defeated  and  taken  prisoner. 
Here  he  built  a  city,  in  contempt  of  the  Araucanians, 
which  he  called  Canete  ;  and,  considering  the  war  now 
terminated,  he  gave  orders  for  once  more  rebuilding 
Concepcion. 

In  the  year  1558,  he  marched  against  the  Cunches. 
When  this  people  first  heard  of  the  arrival  of  the  stran 
gers,  they  met  to  deliberate  as  to  the  best  course  for 
them  to  take  in  this  emergency ;  whether  to  submit  or 
attempt  resistance  to  an  enemy  flushed  with  victory. 
An  Araucanian,  present  in  their  council,  being  invited  to 
give  his  opinion,  replied  in  the  following  language: 
"  Be  cautious  how  you  adopt  either  of  these  measures ; 
as  vassals,  you  will  be  despised  and  compelled  to  labor ; 
as  enemies,  you  will  be  exterminated.  If  you  wish  to 
free  yourselves  from  these  dangerous  visiters,  make 


104  THE    ARAUCANIANS. 

them  believe  you  are  miserably  poor ;  hide  your  prop 
erty,  particularly  your  gold ;  they  will  not  remain 
where  they  have  no  expectation  of  obtaining  that  sole 
object  of  their  wishes ;  send  them  such  a  present  as 
will  impress  them  with  an  idea  of  your  poverty  ;  in  the 
mean  time,  retire  to  the  woods." 

This  advice  was  approved,  and  the  Araucanian  and 
nine  of  their  own  people  were  commissioned  by  the 
Cunches  to  carry  the  present  recommended  to  the 
Spanish  general.  Accordingly,  they  clothed  them 
selves  in  rags,  and,  counterfeiting  fear,  appeared  be 
fore  the  Spaniard,  and,  after  a  rude  address,  presented 
him  with  a  basket  containing  some  roasted  lizards  and 
wild  fruits.  The  Spanish  soldiery  could  not  refrain 
from  laughter  at  the  ridiculous  appearance  of  these 
ambassadors,  and  begged  their  commander  to  go  no 
farther;  but  he  exhorted  them  to  proceed,  assuring 
them  that  he  had  heard  of  a  country  beyond,  which 
abounded  with  metals.  The  wily  Araucanian,  being 
requested  to  furnish  a  guide,  gave  him  one,  who,  by  his 
direction,  led  the  invaders  by  the  most  rugged  and  diffi 
cult  roads  of  the  coast. 

The  year  1559  was  signalized  by  numerous  battles 
fought  between  the  two  armies.  The  Araucanians 
were  led  by  Caupolican  the  Second,  the  son  of  the  for 
mer  toqui  of  that  name,  whom  he  succeeded.  He  was, 
like  his  father,  a  man  of  distinguished  talents,  but  was 
not  equally  prosperous  in  his  early  efforts  in  defending 
his  country.  At  the  battle  of  Quipeo,  he  lost  nearly 
all  his  valiant  officers,  and,  being  pursued  by  a  de 
tachment  of  Spaniards,  slew  himself,  to  avoid  being 
taken  prisoner,  as  his  father  had  been. 


THE   ARATJCANIANS.  105 

The  Araucanians  were  not,  however,  utterly  disheart 
ened  ;  but  the  few  ulmenes  who  had  escaped  the  defeat 
of  Quipeo  met  in  a  wood,  and  elected  as  toqui  an  offi 
cer  of  inferior  rank,  named  Antiguenu,  who  had  distin 
guished  himself  in  that  battle. 

He,  with  a  few  soldiers,  retired  to  the  inaccessible 
marshes  of  Lumaco,  where  he  caused  high  scaffolds  to 
be  erected  to  secure  his  men  from  the  extreme  moist- 
ture  of  the  gloomy  retreat  he  had  chosen.  The  youth, 
who  were  from  time  to  time  enlisted,  went  there  to  be 
instructed,  and  the  Araucanians  still  considered  them 
selves  free  and  independent. 

Antiguenu  began  soon  to  make  incursions  into  the 
Spanish  territory,  to  practise  his  troops,  and  feed 
them  at  the  enemy's  expense.  Grown  bolder,  he  came 
to  an  engagement  with  a  son  of  Villagran,  whom  he 
defeated,  and  then  marched  against  Canete ;  but  Villa- 
gran,  feeling  that  its  defence  was  impracticable,  with 
drew  the  inhabitants  to  Concepcion  and  Imperial.  The 
Araucanians,  finding  the  town  deserted,  set  fire  to  it,  and 
utterly  consumed  it.  Villagran,  affected  by  this  loss, 
and  worn  down  by  care  and  anxiety,  soon  after  died ;  and 
Antiguenu,  learning  the  fact,  and  having  raised  4,000 
men,  divided  them  into  two  parties  ;  with  one  of  these 
he  directed  the  vice-toqui  to  lay  siege  to  Concepcion, 
while  he  marched  with  the  other  against  Arauco.  The 
siege  was  protracted,  and  the  commanders  decided 
upon  settling  the  affair  by  single  combat.  After  having 
fought  two  hours,  they  were  separated  by  their  men. 

The  garrison,  however,  were  at  last  compelled  by 
famine  to  abandon  the  place,  the  houses  were  burned, 
and  the  walls  demolished.  In  attempting  the  conquest 


106  THE    ARAUCANIANS. 

of  another  place,  called  Angol,  Antiguenu,  after  the 
most  brilliant  feats  of  valor  and  courage,  was  forced 
along  with  a  crowd  of  retreating  soldiers,  and  falling 
from  a  high  bank  into  the  river,  was  drowned. 

His  successor  was  Paillataru,  the  brother  or  cousin 
of  Lautaro.  In  the  year  1665,  the  fort  of  Arauco  and 
the  city  of  Canete  were  rebuilt  by  the  Spanish  com 
mander.  The  history  of  this  remarkable  people  is 
henceforward  a  series  of  battles ;  and,  though  they 
fought  with  various  success,  they  never  lost  their  in 
domitable  spirit,  or  their  determination  not  to  be  brought 
into  subjection  to  the  Europeans.  Observing  the  advan 
tage  obtained  by  cavalry,  they  early  organized  a  body 
of  horsemen,  and  in  seventeen  years  after  their  first 
encounters  with  the  Spaniards,  were  able  to  oppose 
them  with  cavalry  on  the  field  of  battle. 

In  1589,  while  Guanoalca  was  toqui,  the  Spanish 
governor,  believing  that  it  would  be  impossible  for  him 
to  defend  the  forts  of  Purea,  Trinidad,  and  Espiritu 
Santo,  which  had  been  established,  evacuated  them ; 
and  the  war  is  said  to  have  been  reduced  to  the  con 
struction  and  demolition  of  fortifications. 

During  the  toquiate  of  Guanoalca,  and  his  successors, 
Quintuguenu  and  Paillaeco,  the  Araucanians  suffered  a 
number  of  severe  defeats.  After  the  one  last  men 
tioned,  the  Araucanians,  unsubdued  in  courage,  ap 
pointed  to  the  chief  command  a  man  named  Paillama- 
chu,  the  hereditary  toqui  of  the  second  district ;  who, 
though  advanced  in  years,  is  said  to  have  been  a  per 
son  of  wonderful  activity.  The  tide  of  fortune  seemed 
to  turn  at  once  in  his  favor,  and  his  success  was  so 
great,  that  he  is  declared  to  have  surpassed  all  his  pre- 


THE   ARAUCANIANS. 

decessors  in  military  glory,  and  was  enable( 
his  country  again  to  her  full  independence. 

In  1598,  owing  to  his  victories,  not  only  the  Arauca- 
nian  provinces,  but  those  of  the  Cunches  and  the  Hu- 
illiches,  were  in  arms,  comprising  the  whole  country 
to  the  Archipelag^  of  Chiloe.  Every  Spaniard  found 
without  the  garrisons  was  put  to  death,  and  the  cities  of 
Osorno,  Valdivia,  Villarica,  Imperial,  Arauco,  Canete, 
Angol,  and  Caya,  were  all  closely  besieged  at  one  and 
the  same  time.  Paillamachu  also  crossed  the  Biobio, 
buErled  Concepcion  and  Chilian,  laid  waste  the  provin 
ces  dependent  on  them,  and  returned  laden  with  spoils. 
He  also  forced  the  Spaniards  to  evacuate  the  fort  and 
city  of  Arauco,  and  obliged  the  inhabitants  to  retire  to 
Concepcion. 

In  the  month  of  November,  1599,  he  caused  his 
army  to  cross  the  broad  river  Valdivia,  by  swimming, 
stormed  the  city,  burned  the  houses,  and  killed  a  great 
number  of  inhabitants.  He  attacked  the  vessels  that 
lay  at  anchor,  which  only  escaped  by  immediately  set 
ting  sail,  and  then  returned  in  triumph  to  the  guard  he 
had  stationed  on  the  Biobio,  with  a  spoil  of  2,000,000 
of  dollars,  all  the  cannon,  and  upwards  of  400  pris 
oners. 

Villarica  also,  after  a  siege  of  two  years  and  eleven 
months,  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Araucanians  in  the 
year  1602,  and  the  city  of  Imperial  shared  the  same 
fate.  Indeed,  all  the  Spanish  settlements  in  the  coun 
try  were  destroyed,  which  Valdivia  and  his  successors 
had  established,  and  preserved  at  the  expense  of  so 
much  toil  and  blood,  and  they  remained  unbuilt, 
scarcely  a  vestige  of  their  ruins  brin<r  left. 


108  THE    ARAUCANIANS. 

The  prisoners  were  numerous ;  the  unmarried  fe 
males  were  taken  into  the  seraglios  of  their  conquerors, 
while  the  unmarried  men  were  allowed  to  espouse  the 
women  of  the  country.  From  these  mixed  marriages, 
it  is  said,  have  proceeded  the  Mestizos,  who  became,  in 
subsequent  wars,  the  most  terrible^  enemies  of  the 
Spanish  name.  Some  of  the  prisoners  were  ransomed 
by  their  friends  or  exchanged ;  though  many  were 
induced,  from  love  to  their  children,  to  remain  with  their 
captors. 

Paillamachu  died  soon  after,  at  the  close  of  the  year 
1603,  and  was  succeeded  by  Hunecura.  The  disasters 
experienced  by  the  Spaniards  were  severely  felt,  and 
the  court  of  Spain  gave  orders  that  there  should  be 
constantly  maintained  a  body  of  2,000  regular  troops 
on  the  Araucanian  frontier,  for  whose  support  the  sum 
of  292,279  dollars  was  annually  drawn  from  the  treas 
ury  of  Peru. 

A  Jesuit,  named  Luis  Valdivia,  desirous  of  preaching 
to  the  Araucanians,  and  perceiving  how  utterly  impos 
sible  any  such  attempt  would  be  while  war  was  carried 
on,  went  to  Spain,  and  represented  to  the  then  reigning 
king,  Philip  the  Third,  the  great  injury  done  to  the 
cause  of  religion  by  these  continued  wars.  The  prince 
listened  to  his  representations,  and  directed  that  the 
River  Biobio  should  be  fixed  as  the  boundary  line  be 
tween  the  contending  parties.  The  articles  of  peace 
had  been  discussed  and  agreed  upon,  when  the  whole 
was  frustrated  by  an  untoward  event.  The  toqui,  whose 
name  was  Ancanamon,  had  espoused  a  Spanish  woman, 
who,  taking  advantage  of  his  absence,  fled  for  refuge  to 
the  governor,  accompanied  by  her  children  and  four 


THE    ARAUCANIANS.  109 

other  women,  whom  she  had  likewise  persuaded  to  be 
come  Christians ;  two  of  these  were  the  wives,  and  two 
the  daughters  of  her  husband.  The  toqui,  exasperated 
to  the  highest  degree,  met  the  missionaries  who  were 
sent  to  the  Araucanians,  and  put  them  all  to  death. 

The  Spanish  provinces  were  incessantly  harassed, 
and  in  1617,  the  war  is  said  to  have  commenced  with 
redoubled  fury.  During  the  period  which  intervened 
from  this  to  1637,  the  toquis  Leintor  and  Putapichion 
also  held  sway,  and  engaged  in  enterprises  against 
the  Spaniards.  Affairs,  however,  were  not  materially 
changed  ;  the  Araucanians  still  retaining  their  territory 
and  independence.  In  the  year  1638,  the  Dutch  at 
tempted  to  form  an  alliance  with  the  Araucanians,  with 
a  view  to  the  conquest  of  Chili ;  but  their  fleet  being 
dispersed  by  a  storm,  only  one  or  two  of  their  boats 
were  able  to  make  the  land.  Being  well  manned  and 
armed,  the  Araucanians  supposed  them  to  have  come 
with  hostile  intentions ;  they  therefore  attacked  them 
and  destroyed  the  crews.  In  1640,  the  war  was  brought 
to  a  close,  and  in  1641,  the  articles  of  peace  were 
agreed  upon,  and  the  day  of  ratification  appointed ; 
the  place  of  meeting  was  the  village  of  Quillan,  in  the 
province  of  Purea. 

The  Spanish  governor,  the  Marquis  de  Baydes,  ap 
peared  at  the  specified  time  with  a  retinue  of  10,000 
persons  from  all  parts  of  the  kingdom.  Lincopichion, 
the  toqui,  at  the  head  of  the  four  hereditary  toquis,  and 
a  great  number  of  ulmenes,  and  other  natives,  opened 
the  conference  with  an  eloquent  speech.  He  then,  ac 
cording  to  the  Chilian  custom,  killed  a  llama,  and, 
sprinkling  some  of  the  blood  on  a  bunch  of  cinnamon, 


110  THE    ARAUCANTANS. 

presented  it,  in  token  of  amity,  to  the  governor.  The 
articles  of  peace  were  then  proposed  and  ratified.  The 
Araucanians,  in  one  of  these,  agreed  that  they  would 
not  permit  the  landing  of  any  strangers  on  the  coast,  or 
furnish  any  foreign  nation  with  supplies.  The  war  of 
ninety  years'  duration  was  thus  brought  to  a  close  ; 
twenty-eight  llamas  were  sacrificed,  and  the  whole 
was  concluded  by  an  eloquent  harangue  from  Anti- 
guenu,  chief  of  the  district,  in  which  he  dwelt  on  the 
advantages  that  both  nations  would  derive  from  the 
peace. 

In  the  year  1643,  the  Dutch  made  a  second  attempt 
on  Chili,  and  had  they  been  seconded  by  the  Arauca 
nians,  whose  alliance  they  sought,  they  would  undoubt 
edly  have  succeeded  ;  but  these  brave  defenders  of 
their  country  were  faithful  to  their  pledges,  and  refused 
the  overtures  of  the  Dutch.  They  also  advised  the 
Cunches  to  take  the  same  course.  The  Dutch,  there 
fore,  were  forced  to  retire  unsuccessful. 

The  peace  continued  for  a  number  of  years ;  a  war 
broke  out  in  1653,  the  cause  of  which  is  not  assigned. 
The  Araucanians  elected  as  their  commander  the  toqui 
Eleutaru,  who  in  his  first  campaign  totally  defeated  the 
Spaniards,  and  continued  for  ten  years  to  harass  them, 
when  a  peace  was  again  concluded,  which  proved 
more  lasting  than  the  former.  In  1686,  however,  a 
Spanish  governor  came  near  breaking  it  by  removing 
the  inhabitants  of  the  island  of  Mocha  to  the  northern 
shore  of  the  Biobio,  in  order  to  cut  off  all  communi 
cation  with  foreign  enemies. 

Missionaries  in  the  mean  time  were  introduced  among 
the  Araucanians,  accompanied  by  a  species  of  force 


THE    ARAUCANIANS.  Ill 

called  the  Captains  of  the  friends,  as  a  pretended 
guard.  These  having  become  insolent,  the  Arauca- 
nians  determined  to  create  a  toqui,  and  resort  to  arms. 
War  therefore  ensued,  but  after  a  succession  of  little 
skirmishes,  the  peace  of  Negrete  terminated  it.  In 
this,  the  treaty  of  Quillan  was  confirmed,  and  the  odi 
ous  title  of  Captains  of  the  friends  was  abolished. 

The  next  occasion  of  war  was  caused  by  the  en 
deavour  of  the  Spanish  governor,  Gonzaga,  to  compel 
the  Araucanians  to  live  in  cities.  At  this  time  also,  the 
Pehuenches,  who  at  the  commencement  of  the  war  were 
allies  of  the  Spaniards,  having  been  defeated  by  the 
Araucanians,  resolved  to  change  sides,  and  have  ever 
since  been  firmly  allied  with  this  brave  people.  Vari 
ous  battles  were  fought,  and  among  others,  a  bloody  one 
in  the  beginning  of  the  year  1773.  The  same  year, 
however,  peace  was  agreed  upon,  and  the  Araucanians 
were  allowed  to  have  a  minister  resident  in  the  city  of 
St.  Jago.  The  treaties  of  Quillan  and  Negrete  were 
revived,  and,  under  the  wise  administration  of  the  Span 
ish  viceroys,  Jauqui  and  Benavides,  the  country  for  a 
long  time  enjoyed  the  blessings  of  unbroken  tranquillity. 

The  Araucanians  have  thus  by  their  courage  and 
pei-severance  been  enabled  to  maintain  their  liberties 
against  some  of  the  best  disciplined  troops  of  Spain, 
even  those  who  had  served  in  the  Low  Countries  during 
the  reigns  of  Charles  the  Fifth  and  Philip  the  Second, 
and  who  were  armed  with  weapons  before  unknown  and 
calculated  to  strike  terror  into  all  the  native  tribes. 
They  remain  still  secure  in  their  mountain  fastnesses, 
enjoying  the  blessings  of  liberty,  and  determined  as 
ever  never  to  be  subjugated  by  any  foreign  foe. 


SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH 
AMERICA. 


THE  whole  interior  of  the  southern  portion  of  South 
America,  from  Terra  del  Fuego  up  to  Paraguay,  was 
long  occupied  by  numerous  savage  tribes  of  Indians. 
Of  these  little  was  known  till  long  after  the  occupation 
of  portions  of  the  country  by  the  Spaniards.  They 
soon  obtained  horses,  and  were  divided  by  the  Euro 
peans  into  equestrian  and  pedestrian  tribes.  They  were 
generally  ferocious  in  their  character,  and  engaged  in 
almost  perpetual  wars  with  each  other.  The  eques 
trian  tribes,  especially,  were  accustomed  to  make  long 
excursions  for  the  purpose  of  plunder  oV  revenge. 
Many  of  these  nations  have  since  been  swept  oft'  by 
that  dreadful  scourge  of  the  Indian  race,  the  small-pox, 
and  many  have  been  driven  still  farther  back  by  the 
Europeans. 

Our  knowledge  of  their  history,  which  is,  indeed,  but 
scanty,  is  derived  from  the  accounts  furnished  by  the 
Catholic  missionaries,  who  labored  long  and  with  some 
degree  of  success  among  them.*  The  views  they  give 

*  For  an  account  of  the  operations  of  the  missionaries  in  Par 
aguay,  see  "  Lights  and  Shadows  of  American  History." 


SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH   AMERICA.         113 

of  their  manners  and  customs  is  often  most  interesting, 
and  will  be  treated  of  in  our  sketch  of  the  manners 
and  customs  of  the  American  Indians.  The  vast  plains, 
or  pampas,  as  they  are  called,  which  lie  southwest 
of  Buenos  Ayres,  were  inhabited  by  the  equestrian 
savages,  who,  with  the  Araucanians,  and  other  tribes 
which  dwelt  in  the  mountains,  were  termed  by  the 
Peruvians,  AUCAS,  or  rebels,  probably  from  some 
event  in  their  former  history.  It  would  seem,  indeed, 
that  several  of  the  tribes  originally  came  from  the 
Northwest,  and  perhaps  there  gained  the  knowledge  of 
horsemanship,  in  which  they  are  so  expert,  from  the 
earlier  European  invaders. 

Similar  groups  of  Indians  were  found  through  all  that 
vast  tract  of  land  east  of  the  Andes,  and  reaching  up 
from  Buenos  Ayres  to  Brazil.  Of  these,  perhaps,  the 
most  distinguished  were  the  Abipones  and  Guaranies, 
who  inhabited  what  formerly  bore  the  name  of  Paraguay, 
— now  Paraguay  and  Uruguay.  Dobrizhoffer,  a  Ger 
man  Catholic  priest,  who  resided  many  years  among 
them,  has  given  a  full  description  of  the  most  remarka 
ble  events  of  their  history  which  occurred  while  he 
was  with  them,  from  which  we  extract  a  few  scattered 
notices,  adding  some  facts  gathered  from  other  sources. 

Formerly  these  tribes  seem  to  have  been  numerous, 
but  now  they  are  dwindled  away  to  a  small  remnant. 
Some  idea  may  be  formed  of  their  decrease,  when  it  is 
stated  that  the  Guaranies,  who  in  1752  numbered 
141,252,  lost  30,000  soon  after  by  the  small-pox,  and 
afterwards,  11,000  more.  In  1767,  there  were  only 
about  100,000  left.  They  suffered  great  oppression 
from  the  Spaniards,  and,  though  they  fought  bravely  to 
8 


114         SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH   AMERICA. 

avoid  expulsion  from  their  native  land,  they  were 
finally  driven  out.  Thirty  thousand,  it  is  said,  were 
expelled  by  the  Spaniards  from  seven  towns. 

The  zealous  missionaries  penetrated  the  forests,  and 
visited  the  most  barbarous  tribes.  They  were  often 
unexpectedly  received  with  kindness  and  hospitality, 
where  they  least  had  reason  to  hope  for  it.  In  one 
of  these  visits,  when  one  of  the  missionaries,  or 
fathers,  went  among  them,  and  had  gained  their 
favor,  the  old  cacique  said  that  he  had  a  daughter,  the 
prettiest  girl  in  the  world,  and  was  resolved  to  marry 
her  to  the  father,  that  he  might  always  stay  in  the 
family.  On  being  informed  that  the  fathers  never  mar 
ried,  the  old  man  was  thunderstruck,  and,  with  his  to 
bacco  reed  suspended  in  the  air,  he  exclaimed,  "  What 
strange  thing  is  this  you  tell  me  ?  " 

The  Indians  watched,  with  great  jealousy,  the  intru 
sion  of  the  Spaniards  on  their  territory.  Some  of  them, 
on  a  certain  occasion,  having  sent  out  men  into  the 
forest  to  gather  mate,  or  Paraguay  tea,  by  some  mis 
fortune  their  hut  caught  fire,  and  eighteen  of  them 
perished  in  the  flames.  The  Indians  beheld  the  con 
flagration  at  a  distance  ;  finally,  one  of  them,  armed 
with  arrows  and  a  club,  stole  into  the  only  remaining 
Spanish  hut,  where  a  single  man  had  taken  refuge. 
"  So,"  said  the  savage,  with  a  stern  aspect,  "  you  have 
dared  to  enter  these  woods  which  were  never  yours. 
Know  you  not  this  is  our  soil,  left  us  by  our  fathers  ? 
Are  you  not  content  with  having  usurped  immense 
tracts  and  innumerable  woods,  in  spite  of  the  opposition 
of  our  fathers  ?  Should  any  one  of  us  invade  your 
domains,  would  he  return  alive  ?  No ;  and  we  will 


SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH   AMERICA.          115 

imitate  your  example.  If,  then,  you  are  wise,  if  life 
is  dear  to  you,  haste  away,  and  advise  your  countrymen 
carefully  to  shun  our  woods,  unless  they  would  be  the 
cause  of  their  own  death."  The  Spaniard,  to  save 
his  life,  offered  knives,  axes,  garments,  and  other 
trifles  ;  pacified  by  these  gifts,  the  savage  returned  to 
his  comrades.  The  former,  deeming  any  further 
stay  perilous,  ran  off,  leaving  many  thousand  pounds 
of  the  mate  which  had  been  gathered. 

The  Guaycuras  or  Albayas  were  very  expert  horse 
men,  and  were  in  the  highest  degree  hostile  to  the 
Spaniards  ;  they  were  brave,  and  exceedingly  skilful  in 
the  use  of  their  arms.  The  Calchaquis,  also,  were  for 
merly  famous  for  their  military  ferocity,  and  their  ir 
reconcilable  enmity  to  the  Europeans.  A  branch  of 
the  Guaranies  were  said  to  wander  over  the  remote 
forests,  on  the  banks  of  one  of  the  rivers  of  the  interior, 
and  leap  from  tree  to  tree  like  monkeys,  in  search  of 
honey  and  little  birds.  The  Guaranies  were  noted  for 
their  voracity.  After  fasting  a  few  hours,  it  is  said 
that  one  of  them  would  devour  a  young  calf.  These  In 
dians  were  accustomed,  before  they  lay  down  to  sleep, 
to  place  a  piece  of  meat  before  the  fire,  that  it  might 
be  ready  for  them  to  eat  immediately  upon  waking. 

The  havoc  made  by  the  Europeans  among  this 
tribe,  as  well  as  other  Indians,  especially  those  near 
Brazil,  is  almost  incredible.  It  is  supposed,  that, 
in  130  years,  2,000,000  Indians  were  slain,  or  car 
ried  into  captivity ;  and  it  is  stated,  that,  in  five  years, 
300,000  Paraguayans  were  carried  off  to  Brazil ;  and 
that  more  than  1,000  leagues  of  country,  extending  as 
far  as  the  River  Amazon,  were  stripped  of  their  inhab- 


116          SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH   AMERICA. 

itants.  In  the  years  1628-  1630,  600,000  Indians  were 
sold  as  slaves  at  Rio  Janeiro.  Upwards  of  400  Indian 
towns  were  utterly  destroyed,  and  such  was  the  devas 
tation,  that  King  Joseph  was  obliged  to  make  a  decree, 
on  the  6th  of  July,  1755,  forbidding  further  ravages. 
This,  however,  is  but  a  small  part  of  the  evils  which 
the  Spaniards  and  Portuguese  inflicted  on  those  unhap 
py  regions. 

Among  the  equestrian  tribes,  the  horse  was  the  great 
dependence  of  the  Indians  for  various  comforts.  He 
supplied  them  with  food,  clothes,  lodging,  bed,  arms, 
medicine,  and  thread.  Of  the  hides  they  made  their 
couch,  clothing,  boots,  tents,  saddles,  and  thongs  which 
served  for  bridle  and  weapons.  The  sinews  they  used 
for  thread.  They  drank  melted  horse-fat,  washed  their 
heads  with  the  blood,  and  afterwards  with  water,  to 
strengthen  them ;  and  twisted  the  hair  into  ropes. 
They  were  almost  constantly  on  horseback,  and  their 
highest  delight  was  to  display  their  peculiar  ability  to 
manage  the  most  spirited  animals. 

The  Abipones,  especially,  were  an  extraordinary 
people,  and  almost  realized  in  themselves  the  fabulous 
centaurs,  —  so  completely  did  they  seem  identified  with 
the  horses  they  bestrode.  No  account  of  them  is  given 
in  history  before  they  settled  in  the  province  of  Chaco 
in  the  sixteenth  century.  In  the  year  1641,  they  pos 
sessed  horses,  and  had  become  formidable  to  the  Span 
iards,  with  whom  they  carried  on  long  and  bloody  wars. 
They  first  obtained  horses,  it  is  said,  by  stealing  them 
from  Santa  Fe,  and  in  the  space  of  fifty  years  they  car 
ried  off  100,000  of  these  animals  from  the  estates  of 
the  Spaniards.  Sometimes  not  less  than  4,000  were 


SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH   AMERICA.          117 

taken  in  a  single  assault.  They  settled  on  the  ter 
ritory  formerly  possessed  by  the  Calchaquis,  who  had 
fallen  victims  to  the  small-pox.  Here  they  formed  al 
liances  with  other  equestrian  nations,  especially  the 
Mocobios  and  Tobos,  savage  tribes,  formidable  on  ac 
count  of  their  numbers  and  bravery.  The  confederates 
harassed  the  province  of  Asuncion  for  a  long  time,  and 
also  the  colonies  of  St.  Jago  del  Estero  and  Cordoba. 
Various  expeditions  were  planned  against  them  with 
various  results ;  but  still  they  continued  their  incur 
sions  for  plunder  or  revenge.  Many  battles  and  heroic 
actions  are  narrated  by  Dobrizhoffer,  who  describes 
some  of  their  caciques  as  men  of  uncommon  bravery, 
and  as  having  manifested  great  ability  in  leading  their 
people  to  war. 

The  Abipones  were  divided  into  three  classes,  the 
Rickahes,  who  inhabited  extensive  plains,  the  Nakai- 
getergehes,  who  were  fond  of  the  lurking-places  in  the 
woods,  and  the  Yaaucanigas,  who  were  formerly  a  dis 
tinct  nation,  and  used  a  separate  language.  The  Span 
iards  almost  destroyed  them,  and  the  few  who  survived 
fled  to  the  Abipones,  with  whom  they  became  incor 
porated.  The  Abipones,  as  also  the  other  equestrian 
tribes  of  Chaco,  boast  themselves  to  be  grandsons  of 
the  evil  spirit.  Their  language  and  that  of  the  Tobos 
and  Mocobios,  likewise  equestrian  Indians,  is  said  to 
have  a  similarity  that  betrays  a  common  origin ;  the 
same  appears  to  be  the  case  with  that  of  the  Guaranies 
and  Chiriguanas,  though  500  miles  apart  from  each  other. 

Many  fruitless  efforts  were  for  a  long  time  made 
by  the  Jesuits  to  reduce  the  Abipones  to  submission  to 
the  king  of  Spain,  and  to  convert  them  to  the  Catholic 


118          SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH   AMERICA. 

religion.  But  they  prized  their  independence,  and  their 
own  wild  way  of  living,  too  much  to  be  willing  to  re 
nounce  them  for  the  benefits  which  were  promised 
in  agricultural  pursuits.  At  last,  however,  a  colo 
ny  was  founded  for  the  Mocobios,  the  allies  of  the 
Abipones  ;  finally,  the  latter  were  induced  to  follow  their 
example,  and  colonies  were  likewise  established  among 
them.  The  first  of  these  was  founded  for  the  Abipones 
Rickahes.  All  the  tribes,  however,  did  not  readily 
come  into  the  project.  A  portion  of  them  preferred  to 
remain  as  they  were.  This  brought  on  long  and  bloody 
contests  among  them.  Those  who  remained  wild  in 
the  woods  often  attacked  the  colonies,  and  carried  off 
their  cattle  and  other  plunder.  The  Jesuits  were  also 
exposed  to  no  little  danger  in  some  of  these  invasions. 
The  Spaniards  joined  the  Abipones,  and  finally  sub 
dued  the  Charruas,  a  fierce  equestrian  nation,  whom 
they  instructed  and  converted.  The  Jesuits  carried 
on  their  labors  for  a  long  time  among  the  colonies, 
whither  they  had  induced  the  Abipones  to  remove, 
and  many  instances  of  strong  attachment  towards  them 
were  exhibited  by  the  caciques  or  chiefs,  whom  they 
had  instructed  and  baptized.  Their  efforts,  however, 
were  terminated  by  the  breaking  out  of  a  war  between 
the  Spaniards  and  the  Guaranies,  in  which  the  Abi 
pones  finally  became  engaged.  The  result  of  this  was  to 
disperse  them  again  from  their  settlements,  and  many 
of  them  relapsed  from  their  more  civilized  habits  into 
those  of  savage  life. 

It  is  a  remarkable  fact  in  the  history  of  the  Abi 
pones,  that  they  should  have  first  learned  the  use  of 
the  horse  from  the  Europeans,  and  afterwards  have 


SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH    AMERICA. 


119 


become  so  dexterous  in  its  management.  They  still 
exist,  it  is  said,  in  South  America,  but  whether  they 
are  a  distinct  people,  and  addicted  as  before  to  their 
wild  forest-life,  or  whether  they  have  mingled  with 
the  nations  which  have  sprung  up  from  the  Spanish 
settlements,  and  bear  a  Christian  name,  we  have  no 
means  of  determining.  Some  curious  practices  among 
them  will  be  related  hereafter,  in  describing  the  man- 
ners,  customs,  and  antiquities  of  the  Indian  tribes  of 
this  part  of  South  America. 

A  remarkable  incident,  respecting  an  Indian  chief 
of  a  powerful  tribe  near  Buenos  Ayres,  is  related  to 
have  occurred  in  the  year  1745.  Orellana,  as  he  is 
named  in  the  account,  with  ten  of  his  followers,  having 
been  taken  captive  by  the  Spaniards,  was  placed  on 
board  a  Spanish  ship  of  66  guns  and  500  men,  and 
there  treated  with  great  cruelty.  Finding  means  to 
communicate  his  plan  to  his  men,  they  watched  their 
time,  and  when  a  favorable  opportunity  occurred,  they 
suddenly  rose,  armed  with  thongs  of  leather  loaded 
with  double-headed  shot,  prepared  beforehand,  and 
drove  the  Spaniards  below.  They  then  killed  forty  of 
them,  and  kept  possession  of  the  ship  for  two  hours,  in 
spite  of  all  the  efforts  of  the  Spaniards  to  regain  it ; 
but  Orellana  being  at  last  wounded  by  a  random  shot 
through  the  cabin  doors,  and  seeing  the  Spaniards  on 
the  point  of  success,  he,  with  his  brave  men,  leaped 
overboard,  and  they  were  all  drowned. 

Of  the  several  Indian  tribes  that  inhabit  that  large 
tract  of  territory  known  by  the  name  of  Patagonia,  and 
which  terminates  in  the  cold  and  desolate  regions  of 
Terra  del  Fuego,  we  can  give  no  history.  They  are 


120 


SOUTHERN    INDIANS    OF    SOUTH   AMERICA. 


now,  as  when  first  discovered,  mere  savages,  and  have 
continued  to  occupy  the  soil  with  little  disturbance 
from  Europeans.  Their  country  is  too  poor  and  re 
pulsive  to  tempt  the  cupidity  of  civilized  man,  hence 
it  has  remained  in  the  possession  of  its  original  masters. 
As  they  have  no  history  worthy  of  remembrance,  so 
they  have  no  means  of  preserving  the  memory  of 
events ;  and  thus,  like  the  leaves  of  the  forest,  they 
live,  pass  away,  and  then  slumber  in  oblivion  for  ever. 
Their  manners  and  customs  alone  are  worthy  of  record, 
and  these  will  be  given  in  their  proper  place. 


INDIANS   OF  BRAZIL. 


BRAZIL  was  discovered  in  1500.  The  first  Span 
iard  who  ventured  to  cross  the  equator  was  Vincent 
Pinzon.  He  landed  at  a  point  on  the  coast  of  Brazil, 
about  twenty  miles  south  of  Pernambuco.  A  fleet 
was  soon  after  sent  out  from  Portugal,  in  which  sailed 
that  fortunate  adventurer,  Americus  Vespucius,  who 
has  given  his  name  to  the  New  World. 

The  Indians  of  Brazil  were  real  savages,  perfidious, 
cruel,  and  cannibals,  and  appear  to  have  had  scarcely 
a  single  noble  or  generous  trait  in  their  characters.  The 
dreadful  depravity  of  these  tribes  seems  to  have  in 
fused  the  spirit  of  furies  into  the  hearts  of  the  fe 
males  ;  and  when  the  women  of  a  people  are  rendered 
ferocious,  there  is  little,  if  any,  chance,  that  the  nation 
will  ever,  by  its  own  efforts,  become  civilized.  The 
following  account  of  the  first  interview  between  the 
Portuguese  and  the  Brazilian  Indians  is  sufficient  to 
show  the  character  of  the  latter. 

When  the  ships  arrived  on  the  coast,  in  Lat.  5C  S., 
a  party  of  natives  was  discovered  on  a  hill  near 
the  seaside.  Two  sailors  volunteered  to  go  ashore, 


122  INDIANS    OF    BRAZIL. 

and  several  days  passed  without  their  return.  At 
length  the  Portuguese  landed,  sent  a  young  man  to 
meet  the  savages,  and  returned  to  their  boats.  Some 
women  came  forward  to  meet  him,  apparently  as  ne 
gotiators.  They  surrounded  him,  and  seemed  to  be 
examining  him  with  curiosity  and  wonder.  Presently 
another  woman  came  down  from  the  hill,  having  a 
stake  in  her  hand,  with  which  she  got  behind  him,  and 
dealt  him  a  blow  that  brought  him  to  the  ground.  Im 
mediately  the  others  seized  him  by  the  feet,  and 
dragged  him  away,  and  then  the  Indian  men,  rushing 
to  the  shore,  discharged  their  arrows  at  the  boats. 

The  sailors  finally  escaped,  but  they  had  to  witness 
the  horrid  spectacle  of  their  poor  comrade  destroyed 
by  the  ruthless  savages.  The  women  cut  the  body  in 
pieces,  and  held  up  the  mutilated  limbs  in  mockery ; 
then,  broiling  them  over  a  huge  fire,  which  had  been 
prepared,  as  it  seemed,  for  that  purpose,  they  devoured 
them,  with  loud  rejoicings,  in  presence  of  the  Por 
tuguese.  The  Indians  also  made  signs  that  they  had 
eaten  the  other  two  sailors  ! 

It  will  be  neither  pleasant  nor  useful  to  give  any 
more  minute  accounts  of  the  practice  of  cannibalism. 
It  is  sufficient  to  say,  that  the  tribes  inhabiting  the  eastern 
part  of  South  America  appear  to  have  been  sunk  in  the 
grossest  ignorance  and  most  deplorable  state  of  vice  and 
misery  to  which  human  beings  can  be  reduced.  They 
were  more  like  tigers  and  serpents  than  men  ;  for  they 
used  poisoned  arrows,  deadly  as  the  "  serpent's  tooth," 
in  battle ;  and  they  tore  and  devoured  their  enemies 
with  the  voracity  of  beasts  of  prey. 

The  Europeans,  who  first  settled  in  Brazil,  had  to 


INDIANS    OF   BRAZIL.  123 

gain  all  their  possessions  by  the  sword ;  and  few  would 
go  voluntarily  to  such  a  place  ;  the  Portuguese  settlers 
being  mostly  convicts,  banished  for  their  crimes.  As 
might  be  expected,  this  class  of  men,  rendered  des 
perate  by  their  situation,  and  often  hardened  in  crime, 
were  not  very  merciful  to  the  natives,  who,  in  turn, 
showed  them  no  mercy.  The  bloody  conflicts  and  the 
atrocities  on  both  sides  were  awful ;  yet  we  can  hardly 
feel  the  same  sympathy  for  the  cannibal  Indian  as  for 
the  gentle  Peruvian,  when  his  country  is  laid  waste 
by  the  invader. 

It  was  about  fifty  years  from  the  time  of  the  first 
landing  of  the  Portuguese,  before  a  regular  administra 
tion  was  established  and  a  governor  appointed  by  the 
king  of  Portugal.  The  Jesuits  then  settled  in  Brazil,  and 
began  their  labor  of  Christianizing  the  savages.  Sev 
eral  tribes  had  entered  into  alliance  with  the  colonists, 
and  these  Indians  were  forbidden,  by  the  governor,  to 
eat  human  flesh.  To  conquer  this  propensity  was  the 
great  aim  of  the  Jesuits ;  but  finding  that  they  could 
not  reclaim  those  who  had  grown  old  in  this  vice,  they 
'  set  themselves  to  instructing  the  children. 

One  gentle  propensity  these  Brazilian  savages 
showed,  which  seems  hardly  compatible  with  their  cruel 
and  vindictive  characters,  —  they  were  passionately 
fond  of  music,  —  so  fond,  that  one  Jesuit  thought  he 
could  succeed  in  Christianizing  them  by  means  of 
songs.  He  taught  the  children  to  sing ;  and  when 
he  went  on  his  preaching  excursions,  he  usually  took 
a  number  of  these  little  choristers  with  him,  and  on 
approaching  an  inhabited  place,  one  child  carried  the 
crucifix  before  them,  and  the  others  followed,  singing 


124  INDIANS    OF    BRAZIL. 

the  litany.  The  savages,  like  serpents,  were  won  by 
the  voice  of  the  charmer,  and  received  the  Jesuit 
joyfully.  He  set  the  catechism.,  creed,  and  ordinary 
prayers,  to  sol  fa ;  and  the  pleasure  of  learning  to  sing 
was  such  a  temptation,  that  the  children  frequently  ran 
away  from  their  parents  to  put  themselves  under  the 
care  of  the  Jesuits. 

These  priests  labored  with  devoted  zeal  to  convert 
the  natives.  Their  exertions  were  productive  of  great 
effect ;  a  change  has  been  gradually  wrought,  and  the 
cannibal  propensities,  among  those  tribes  that  still  re 
main  independent,  are  no  longer  indulged. 

Many  missions,  as  they  are  called,  that  is,  villages, 
where  a  priest  resides  and  instructs  the  Indians  in  agri 
culture  and  the  most  essential  arts  of  civilized  life,  as 
well  as  in  their  Catholic  duties,  were  established  by  the 
Jesuits,  and  are  still  continued.  One  very  unfortunate 
circumstance  has  done  much  to  alienate  the  indepen 
dent  tribes  from  their  white  neighbours.  It  was  thought 
best  to  make  slaves  of  the  savages,  in  order  to  civilize 
them.  Walsh  thus  describes  the  decree  and  its  ef 
fect. 

"  The  Indians  were,  as  late  as  1798,  the  occupants 
of  the  woods,  and  were  generally  found  resident  on 
the  banks  of  the  rivers  and  streams  which  intersected 
the  country.  An  elderly  gentleman,  who  was  secre 
tary  to  the  undertaking,  informed  me  that  it  was  neces 
sary  for  the  commissioners  and  workmen  to  go  con 
stantly  armed,  to  be  protected  against  their  hostility. 
The  Puvis  lay  on  the  River  Parahiba,  and  others  on 
the  streams  which  fall  into  it. 

"  By  a  mistaken  humanity,  however,  permission  was 


INDIANS    OF    BRAZIL.  125 

afterwards  given  to  the  Brazilians  to  convert  their 
neighbours  to  Christianity  ;  and  for  this  laudable  ob 
ject,  they  were  allowed  to  retain  them  in  a  state  of 
bondage  for  ten  years,  and  then  dismiss  them  free, 
when  instructed  in  the  arts  of  civilized  life,  and  the 
more  important  knowledge  of  Christianity.  This  per 
mission,  as  was  to  be  expected,  produced  the  very  op 
posite  effects. 

"  A  decree  for  the  purpose  was  issued  so  late  as  the 
year  1808,  by  Don  John,  and  it  was  one  of  the  meas 
ures  which  he  thought  best  to  reclaim  the  aborigines, 
who  had  just  before  committed  some  ravages.  He 
directed  that  the  Indians,  who  were  conquered,  should 
be  distributed  among  the  agriculturists,  who  should 
support,  clothe,  civilize,  and  instruct  them  in  the  prin 
ciples  of  our  holy  religion,  but  should  be  allowed  to 
use  the  services  of  the  same  Indians  for  a  certain 
number  of  years,  in  compensation  for  the  expense  of 
their  instruction  and  management. 

"  This  unfortunate  permission  at  once  destroyed  all 
intercourse  between  the  natives  and  the  Brazilians. 
The  Indians  were  everywhere  hunted  down  for  the 
sake  of  their  salvation ;  wars  were  excited  among  the 
tribes,  for  the  laudable  purpose  of  bringing  in  each 
other  as  captives,  to  be  converted  to  Christianity  ;  and 
the  most  sacred  objects  were  prostituted  to  the  base  cu 
pidity  of  man,  by  even  this  humane  and  limited  per 
mission  of  reducing  his  fellow-creatures  to  slavery. 

"  In  the  distant  provinces,  particularly  on  the  banks 
of  the  Maranhao,  it  is  still  practised,  and  white  men  set 
out  for  the  woods  to  seek  their  fortunes  ;  that  is,  to 
hunt  Indians  and  return  with  slaves.  The  consequence 


126  INDIANS    OF    BRAZIL. 

was,  that  all  who  could  escape  retired  to  the  remotest 
forests ;  and  there  is  not  one  to  be  now  found  in  a 
state  of  nature  in  all  the  wooded  region. 

"  It  frequently  happened,  as  we  passed  along,  that 
dark  wreaths  of  what  appeared  like  smoke  arose  from 
among  distant  trees  on  the  sides  of  the  mountains, 
and  they  seemed  to  us  to  be  decisive  marks  of  Indian 
wigwams  ;  but  we  found  them  to  be  nothing  more 
than  misty  exhalations,  which  shot  up  in  thin,  circum 
scribed  columns,  exactly  resembling  smoke  issuing 
from  the  aperture  of  a  chimney. 

"  We  met,  however,  one,  in  the  woods,  with  a 
copper-colored  face,  high  cheek-bones,  small  dark  eyes 
approaching  each  other,  a  vacant,  stupid  cast  of  coun 
tenance,  and  long,  lank,  black  hair  hanging  on  his 
shoulders.  He  had  on  him  some  approximation  to  a 
Portuguese  dress,  and  belonged  to  one  of  the  aldeas 
formed  in  this  region  ;  but  he  had  probably  once  wan 
dered  about  these  woods  in  a  state  of  nature,  where  he 
was  now  going  peaceably  along  on  a  European  road. 

"  We  had  passed,  in  going  through  Valencia,  one  of 
these  aldeas  of  the  Indians  of  the  valley  of  Parahiba, 
Christianized  and  instructed  in  the  arts  of  civilized  life. 
Another,  called  the  Aldea  da  Pedra,  is  situated  on  the 
river,  nearer  to  its  mouth,  where  the  people  still  retain 
their  erratic  habits,  though  apparently  conforming  to 
our  usages. 

"  They  live  in  huts,  thatched  with  palm-leaves ; 
and  when  not  engaged  in  hunting  and  fishing,  which 
is  their  chief  and  favorite  employment,  they  gather 
ipecacuanha,  and  fell  timber.  They  are  docile  and 
pacific,  having  no  cruel  propensities,  but  are  disposed 


INDIANS    OF    BRAZIL.  127 

to  be  hospitable  to  strangers.  Their  family  attach 
ments  are  not  very  strong,  either  for  their  wives  or 
children,  as  they  readily  dispose  of  both  to  a  traveller 
for  a  small  compensation." 

One  of  the  most  ferocious  tribes  of  Brazil  was  the 
Botocudos,  thought  to  be  the  remains  of  a  powerful 
and  most  cruel  race,  which  the  early  settlers  called 
Aymores.  This  tribe  disfigured  themselves  by  making 
a  large  hole  in  the  under-lip,  and  wearing  therein  a 
piece  oC  white  wood,  or  some  ornament.  They  also 
cut  large  holes  in  their  ears,  and  stuck  feathers  in  the 
aperture  for  ornaments.  They  used  to  go  entirely 
naked,  and,  brown  as  the  beasts  of  the  forest,  were 
frightful  objects  to  behold. 

"  The  Brazilian  government,"  says  Mr.  Walsh,  "  de 
serves  credit  for  the  manner  in  which  it  has  managed 
these  Indians.  They  lived  on  the  Rio  Doce,  and  laid 
waste  every  settlement  attempted  in  that  beautiful  and 
fertile  region.  In  1809,  a  party  of  Europeans  were 
sent  up  the  river,  and  they  found  one  hundred  and  fifty 
farms  in  ruins,  whose  proprietors  had  either  perished 
or  fled.  Detachments  were  accordingly  ordered  in  all 
directions,  to  restrain  the  inroads  of  the  savages,  and  to 
punish  their  aggressions  ;  and  every  encouragement  was 
held  out,  to  establish  new  settlements  and  civilize  them. 

"  Every  village  consisting  of  twelve  huts  of  Indians 
and  ten  of  whites  was  to  be  considered  a  villa,  with  all 
its  benefits  and  privileges ;  and  sesmarios,  or  grants  of 
land,  were  made  to  such  as  would  become  cultivators, 
giving  all  the  privileges  and  advantages  of  original  do- 
notorios.  New  roads  were  then  opened  to  form  a  more 
easy  communication,  and  considerable  effect  was  pro- 


128 


INDIANS    OF    BRAZIL. 


duced  on  these  intractable  natives.  The  Puvis,  a 
neighbouring  tribe,  to  the  number  of  one  thousand, 
were  located  in  villages,  called  aldeas ;  and  the  arts 
and  industry  of  civilized  life  made  more  progress  among 
them,  in  a  few  years  from  this  period,  than  they  had 
before  done  in  so  many  centuries." 


UNIVERSITY, 


THE  INDIANS  OF  FLORIDA. 


THE  peninsula  of  Florida  was  discovered  and  named 
by  a  Spanish  adventurer,  called  Ponce  de  Leon,  who, 
on  his  second  voyage,  was  mortally  wounded  in  a  con 
flict  with  the  natives.  A  few  years  after  this,  a  small 
vessel  was  driven  on  the  coast  by  severe  weather,  and 
a  traffic  commenced  with  the  natives  for  silver  and  gold. 
Other  adventurers  began  to  turn  their  attention  to  this 
supposed  land  of  wealth,  and  Lucas  Vasquez  de  Ayll- 
on  fitted  out  two  vessels  to  cruise  among  the  islands, 
and  kidnap  the  Indians  for  laborers  in  the  mines.  The 
ships  were  driven  to  the  shore,  near  a  cape,  which  was 
named  St.  Helena.  When  the  natives  of  the  country, 
which  bore  the  name  of  Chicorea,  first  saw  the  ves 
sels,  they  fancied  them  to  be  huge  sea-monsters  ;  but 
when  they  saw  white,  bearded  men,  clad  in  armor, 
come  forth  from  them,  they  were  so  terrified  that  they 
ran  away.  Their  fears,  however,  were  soon  dispelled, 
and  a  trade  was  begun,  in  which  they  received  trinkets 
hi  exchange  for  pearls,  skins,  gold,  and  silver. 

When,  at  length,  the  Spaniards  were  ready  for  sail 
ing,  the  Indians  were  invited  on  board  of  the  ships  ; 
and  while  many  of  them  crowded  the  vessels,  gazing 
9 


130  THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA. 

in  wonder  at  all  they  saw,  the  adventurers  treacher 
ously  closed  the  hatches  on  those  who  were  below, 
and  set  sail  for  St.  Domingo.  The  natives,  thus  en 
trapped,  remained  sullen  and  gloomy,  and  refused  to 
partake  of  food,  so  that  most  of  them  perished  on  their 
voyage. 

Ayllon  now  determined  to  make  an  expedition  to 
Florida  in  person,  and  fitted  out  three  large  vessels, 
taking  with  him  a  former  adventurer  as  a  guide.  The 
latter,  however,  was  unable  to  find  the  place  sought 
for,  and  they  finally  landed  near  Chicorea,  where 
they  were  so  well  received  that  the  chief  allowed 
two  hundred  of  the  men  to  visit  his  principal  vil 
lage,  three  leagues  in  the  interior.  The  natives  feasted 
them  for  three  days,  and  having  thus  thrown  them  off 
their  guard,  rose  upon  them  by  night,  and  massacred 
the  whole.  After  this,  they  repaired,  early  in  the 
morning,  to  the  harbour,  where  they  surprised  Ayllon 
and  his  guards.  The  few  who  survived  speedily  got 
on  board  the  vessel,  and  hastened  back  to  St.  Domingo. 

In  1628,  Panfilo  Narvaez  reached  the  coast  of  Flor 
ida  with  a  squadron  of  four  barks  and  a  brigantine. 
He  landed  four  hundred  men  and  fifty  horses,  and  took 
possession  of  the  country  in  the  name  of  the  king  of 
Spain,  unopposed  by  the  natives.  On  penetrating  into 
the  interior,  in  search  of  gold,  he  and  his  men  found 
the  principal  village  deserted  ;  and  not  only  were 
they  disappointed  of  finding  the  chief  object  of  their 
wishes,  but  the  warlike  natives  harassed  them  on  their 
march  through  swamps  filled  with  decayed  trees,  where 
they  had  often  to  wade  in  the  water  up  to  their  breasts. 
The  Indians  seemed  of  giant  height ;  they  had  enor- 


THE  INDIANS  OF  FLORIDA.          131 

mous  bows,  and  discharged  their  arrows  with  such 
prodigious  force  as  to  penetrate  steel  armor  at  the  dis 
tance  of  two  hundred  yards.  After  a  most  disastrous 
march,  the  greater  part  of  the  Spaniards  finally  reached 
the  shore,  and  embarked,  but  they  were  lost  at  sea. 
Five  of  the  party,  who  had  set  out  in  another  direction, 
crossed  Northern  Florida,  the  Mississippi,  the  desert 
and  mountains  beyond,  and,  after  some  years,  succeed 
ed  in  reaching  the  Spanish  settlements  in  Mexico. 

But  the  most  important  exploration  of  Florida,  and 
the  territory  north  and  west,  was  made  at  an  early 
period  by  Hernando  de  Soto  and  his  band.  He  left 
Cuba  on  the  12th  of  May,  1539,  with  a  squadron  of 
eight  large  vessels,  a  caravel,  and  two  brigantines ;  his 
armament,  besides  the  ships'  crews,  consisting  of  not 
less  than  one  thousand  men  and  three  hundred  and 
fifty  horses.  On  the  thirteenth  day,  he  arrived  in  the 
bay  which  he  called  Espiritu  Santo.  The  natives, 
alarmed  at  the  sight  of  such  an  invading  force,  imme 
diately  kindled  fires  all  along  the  coast,  to  summon 
their  warriors.  The  troops,  on  landing,  the  last  day 
of  the  month,  did  not  encounter  a  single  Indian,  and 
they  remained  all  night  on  shore  in  a  state  of  careless 
security. 

At  break  of  day,  however,  a  sudden  onset  was  made 
upon  them  by  a  vast  army  of  the  Indians.  Several  of 
the  troops  were  wounded,  others  were  panic-struck, 
and  retreated  to  the  shore.  Relief  was  sent  from  the 
ships,  and  the  Indians  were  finally  put  to  flight.  Land 
ing  the  remainder  of  his  forces,  De  Soto  found  the 
villages  deserted,  and  learned,  from  some  prisoners  he 
took,  that  the  hostility  he  had  encountered  was  occa- 


132          THE  INDIANS  OF  FLORIDA. 

sioned  by  outrages  committed  by  Narvaez  on  a  cacique 
of  the  village,  called  Hivrihigua.  Having  gained  his 
friendship,  and  formed  a  treaty  with  him,  the  treacher 
ous  Spaniard,  in  a  fit  of  passion,  ordered  the  cacique's 
nose  to  be  cut  off,  and  his  mother  to  be  torn  in  pieces 
by  dogs.  De  Soto  endeavoured,  by  sending  presents 
to  the  mutilated  chief,  to  gain  his  favor  ;  but  he  in 
dignantly  replied  to  the  messages,  "  I  want  none  of 
their  speeches  and  promises  ;  bring  me  their  heads, 
and  I  will  joyfully  receive  them." 

Juan  Ortiz,  a  follower  of  Narvaez,  who  had  been 
captured  by  Hivrihigua,  was  obtained  as  an  interpreter. 
This  man  was  one  of  four  on  whom  the  cacique  had 
determined  to  wreak  his  vengeance,  on  account  of  the 
treatment  he  had  received.  The  others  were  stripped 
naked,  led  out  into  the  public  square,  and  set  at  liberty, 
to  be  shot  to  death  by  arrows.  To  prolong  their  torture, 
only  one  Indian  was  allowed  to  shoot  at  a  time,  and  in 
this  manner  they  were  all  killed,  with  the  exception  of 
Juan  Ortiz.  This  was  a  youth  hardly  eighteen  years 
old,  and  his  appearance,  as  he  was  led  forth  to  execu 
tion,  so  touched  the  hearts  of  the  wife  and  daughters 
of  the  cacique,  that,  at  their  intercession,  he  was  spar 
ed.  He  was,  however,  reduced  to  a  state  of  slavery, 
made  to  bear  burdens,  and  be  the  object  of  barbarous 
amusements.  At  one  time,  he  was  bound  down  on  a 
wooden  frame,  over  a  bed  of  live  coals,  to  be  roasted 
alive.  Again  his  pitying  protectors  came  to  his  relief, 
and,  by  their  entreaties,  he  was  once  more  spared. 

After  various  adventures,  he  was  committed  to  a 
neighbouring  cacique,  by  the  daughter  of  Hivrihigua, 
and  remained  there  till  sent  for  by  De  Soto  to  act  as 


THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA.  133 

an  interpreter.  The  cacique  under  whose  protection  he 
had  been,  named  Mucozo,  also  came  to  the  Spanish 
camp  with  his  warriors,  and,  in  reply  to  the  assurances 
of  De  Soto  that  he  should  be  kindly  treated,  he  magnan 
imously  said,  "  What  I  have  done  to  Ortiz  is  but  little  ; 
he  came  commended  to  me,  and  threw  himself  on  my 
protection.  There  is  a  law  of  our  tribe  which  forbids 
our  betraying  a  fugitive  who  asks  of  us  an  asylum. 
But  his  own  virtue  and  dauntless  courage  entitled  him 
to  all  the  respect  which  was  shown  him.  That  I  have 
pleased  your  people,  I  rejoice  exceedingly,  and  by  de 
voting  myself  henceforth  to  their  service,  I  hope  to 
merit  their  esteem." 

The  mother  of  Mucozo,  distressed  with  fears  for  her 
son,  also  came,  and  begged  De  Soto  to  deliver  him 
up.  "  He  is  young,"  said  she  ;  "  only  give  him  his 
liberty,  and  take  me,  who  am  a  poor  old  woman,  and 
do  with  me  as  you  please.  I  will  bear  any  punishment 
for  both."  Though  treated  with  kindness,  she  still  con 
tinued  anxious  and  suspicious.  She  would  eat  nothing 
at  the  governor's  table  till  Ortiz  had  first  tasted  it ;  and 
when  asked  how  it  happened  that  she,  who  so  feared 
death,  should  offer  to  die  for  her  son,  she  replied,  "  I 
love  life  as  others  do,  but  I  would  willingly  lose  it  to 
save  a  son  who  is  far  dearer  to  me  than  life  itself." 
Though  assured  by  her  son  that  he  was  entirely  at 
liberty,  she  returned  home  in  sorrow. 

By  means  of  kindness  to  some  of  his  captives,  whom 
he  allowed  to  go  home  loaded  with  presents,  De  Soto 
tried  to  soften  the  stern  cacique,  Hivrihigua.  His 
reply  was,  "  The  memory  of  my  injuries  forbids  my 
sending  a  kind  answer,  and  a  harsh  one  your  courtesy 


134  THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA. 

will  not  allow  me  to  return."  Learning  that  Hivrihigua 
was  concealed  in  a  forest  not  far  from  the  camp,  one 
of  De  Soto's  followers  undertook  to  capture  him.  He 
had  not  gone  far,  before  he  met  a  messenger  from  the 
cacique,  who  begged  him,  in  the  name  of  his  master, 
not  to  proceed  any  further,  as  the  old  cacique  was 
secure  in  his  fortress,  and  he  could  not  reach  him, 
while  he  would  be  exposed  to  great  danger  in  the  mo 
rasses  and  forests  which  lay  in  his  way.  The  event 
proved  according  to  the  warning ;  for,  notwithstanding 
repeated  messages  to  the  same  effect,  the  foolhardy 
cavalier  persisted,  and  was  finally  compelled  to  return 
home  without  having  accomplished  his  purpose. 

As  the  Spaniards  advanced  into  the  interior  of  the 
country,  they  found  warlike  Indians  hanging  about 
their  path,  and  harassing  them  at  every  step.  The 
savages  assailed  their  enemy  with  great  fury,  and 
fought  bravely  ;  but  they  were  no  match  for  horsemen 
so  armed  at  all  points  that  the  arrows  could  make  no 
impression  on  them.  On  the  approach  of  De  Soto, 
the  caciques  fled  into  the  woods,  and  prepared  for  re 
sistance.  One  of  these,  named  Acuera,  being  invited 
to  a  peaceable  interview,  replied,  "  Others  of  your 
accursed  race  have,  in  years  past,  poisoned  our  peace 
ful  shores.  They  have  taught  me  what  you  are.  What 
is  your  employment  ?  To  wander  about,  like  vaga 
bonds,  from  land  to  land  ;  to  rob  the  poor  ;  to  betray 
the  confiding  ;  to  murder,  in  cold  blood,  the  defence 
less.  No ;  with  such  a  people  I  want  no  peace,  no 
friendship.  War,  never-ending,  exterminating  war,  is 
all  that  I  ask.  You  boast  yourselves  valiant,  and  so 
you  may  be ;  but  my  faithful  warriors  are  not  less 


THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA.  135 

brave,  and  this,  too,  you  shall  one  day  know  ;  for  I 
have  sworn  to  maintain  an  unsparing  hostility,  while 
one  white  man  remains  in  my  borders.  Not  openly  in 
the  battle,  — though  even  thus  we  fear  not  to  meet 
you,  —  but  by  stratagem,  and  ambush,  and  midnight 
surprisal,  shall  you  be  met.1' 

To  the  demand  of  obedience  to  the  emperor  of 
Spain,  the  Indian  replied,  "  I  am  king  in  my  own 
land,  and  will  never  become  the  vassal  of  a  mortal  like 
myself.  Vile  and  pusillanimous  is  he  who  will  submit 
to  the  yoke  of  another,  when  he  may  be  free.  As  for 
me  and  my  people,  we  choose  death,  yes,  a  hundred 
deaths,  before  the  loss  of  our  liberty,  and  the  subjuga 
tion  of  our  country." 

De  Soto  sent  out  persons  in  every  quarter  to  explore 
the  country,  but  the  Indians  lurked  in  ambush,  and 
cut  off  every  Spaniard  who  strayed  from  the  camp ; 
and  though  De  Soto  caused  the  bodies  to  be  buried, 
yet  the  Indians  always  returned  in  the  night,  dug  them 
up,  cut  them  in  pieces,  and  hung  them  on  the  trees. 
Fourteen  Europeans  thus  perished,  and  many  more 
were  wounded.  In  this  manner  the  natives  fulfilled  their 
threats.  "  Keep  on,  robbers  and  traitors,"  said  they  ; 
"  in  Acuera  and  Apalachee,  we  will  treat  you  as  you 
deserve.  Every  captive  will  we  quarter  and  hang  up 
on  the  highest  trees  along  the  road." 

As  De  Soto  advanced  still  further,  he  was  attacked 
by  some  of  the  subjects  of  the  cacique,  Ocali.  The  ad 
ventures  of  the  Spaniards  with  Vitachuco  were  remark 
able,  but  we  cannot  detail  them  here.*  In  the  fierce 

*  See*"  Lives  of  Famous  Indians." 


I.'NJ  TIIK  iNnrAN:;  OF  FF.OHIDA. 


bullies  fought  with  Do  Solo,  tin;  Indian  warriors  uhow- 
cd  great  bravery,  but  they  were  finally  defeated,  and 
nearly  exterminated.  Tin1  same  determined  spirit  of 
resiNianco  WUH  manifested  by  altnoit  every  tribe  of  the 
Florida  Indian  . 

After  many  bailies  and  skirmiHbe.s,  tin;  Spaniards 
approached  a  village  railed  Atdiayea.  The  Indians 
had  lied,  but  ii  was  found  i<>  contain  two  hundred  and 
fifty  large  and  commodious  houses  ;  besides  which, 
lln  ii  were  said  to  be  many  others  in  the  province, 
consisting  of  from  liCiy  to  a  hundred  houses.  There 
weiv,  al:.o,  many  dwellings  scattered  about  the  coun 
try.  I  )<•  Solo,  to  relievo  himself  from  the  harassing 
attacks  of  the  Indians  in  this  quarter,  formed  a  plan 
to  gel  possession  of  the  cacique,  ('apali.  Tins  person 
was  so  fut  and  unwieldy,  that  he  could  neither  walk 
nor  Htand.  When  lie  went  about  his  dwelling,  he  was 
obliged  lo  move  on  his  hands  and  knees,  and  in  going 
fn  'i  1  1  place  lo  place  was  borne  in  a  litter  on  the  shoul 
der.  of  his  subjects.  Learning  that  lie  was  in  the  midst 
of  a  dense  and  vast  forest,  about  eight  leagues  ofF, 
fortified  in  the  strongest  manner  known  to  this  people, 
and  garrisoned  by  a  band  of  bis  bravest  and  choicest 
warriors,  so  that  ho  fell  himself  lo  be  impregnable,  I  )e 
Solo  determined  lo  attack  him. 

The  Spaniards  met  with  a  strong  resistance  at  tlio 
enhance  of  (In-  defile  which  led  to  the  open  place 
when?  the  cacique  had  taken  up  his  abode,  ll  was  so 
narrow  that  but  two  could  go  in  abreast.  The  pali 
sades  were,  however,  gained  in  succession,  and  the 
plan-  i.f  ihr  cacique's  refuge  finally  reached.  Here  a 
desperale  conflict  look  place.  IVivt-ivinjj;  the  danger 


•i  in:  mm  \NS  or   rr,oFtn>A.  1*17 

of  their  chief,  the  Indian;  threw  themselves  on  the 
.swords  and  spears  of  the  Spaniards.  Many  were  the 
valiant  feats  performed  on  both  sides  ;  but  as  the  In 
dian,  were  without,  defensive  armor,  most  ofih«-m  were 
at  last  cut  down,  and  the  cacique,  knowing  that  further 
resistance  was  vain,  called  on  the  survivors  to  surren 
der.  They  therefore  threw  thenrelv  before  the 
Spanish  leader,  and  offered  their  own  livCH,  but  1)0- 
Hougbt  him  to  spare  that  of  iheir  cacique. 

|)e  Solo  assured  them  of  pardon,  and  that  he  would 
henceforth  consider  them  as  his  friend-;.  (!apafi,  una 
ble  to  walk,  was  taken  up  on  the  arms  «l  In  attend- 
?tnls  to  kiss  |)c  Solo's  hands,  who  treated  him  with 
urbanity  and  kindness.  The  wily  chief,  however,  on 
the  return  to  the  village  of  Anlmyca,  found  means  to 
escape.  This  was  effected  in  the  following  manner. 
The  Indians,  notwithstanding  the  captivity  of  their 
chief,  did  not  cease  their  efforts  to  annoy  the  Span 
iards.  De  Sot.o  reproached  the  cacique  with  ingrati 
tude,  and  threatened  a.  war  of  extermination.  The 
cacique  expressed  his  grief,  and  said,  thai  as  the  chief 
assailants  were  concealed  in  a  thick  forent,  five  or  six 
leagues  off,  ho  would  go  there  under  guard  of  Homo 
Spaniards,  and  persuade  them  to  submit. 

De   Roto  sent   him,  attended  by  a  company  of  horse 
arid  foot,  who  wen;  ordered  to  watch    him   close! 
not   allow    him    to   escape.      On    reachin;'   the  foi 
sunset,  the  cacique    sent    some    Indians    to  the 

who  were  there  concealed,  with  orders  to 
before  him  the  next  morning.  The  Spania 
fieri  that  the  order  of  the  cacique,  would  b< 
betook  themselves  to  rest,  having  stationed  0 


138  THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA. 

nels,  and  placed  a  guard  over  the  chief;  but,  owing  to 
the  fatigue  of  their  long  march,  they  all  fell  asleep. 
Perceiving  this,  the  cacique  watched  his  opportunity, 
crawled  on  his  hands  and  knees  through  the  camp,  and 
soon  fell  in  with  a  party  of  his  warriors,  who  took  him 
on  their  shoulders  and  carried  him  away.  The  Span 
iards,  mortified  with  the  result  of  their  expedition,  re 
turned,  and  on  their  march  were  taunted  by  the  In 
dians  for  the  failure  of  their  schemes.  They  pretended 
to  De  Soto  that  they  had  lost  their  captive  by  some  art 
of  necromancy,  and  he,  though  aware  of  the  truth,  ap 
parently  yielded  to  the  story,  saying,  that  the  Indians 
were  such  wonderful  necromancers  that  they  might 
have  performed  still  greater  feats  of  skill. 

In  an  attempt  made  by  a  garrison  left  behind  at 
Hivrihigua  to  reach  De  Soto,  a  terrible  battle  ensued 
in  a  morass,  which  came  near  proving  fatal  to  the 
whole  party.  Nothing  but  the  fall  of  the  Indian  chief 
who  led  the  onset  saved  them  from  destruction.  The 
battle  took  place  in  the  water,  and  the  Indians  rushed 
with  wild  yells  from  behind  bushes,  brakes,  and  the 
trunks  of  trees,  discharging  showers  of  arrows  at  their 
enemy.  The  horses,  being  wounded,  became  furious, 
and  threw  off  the  foot-soldiers,  who  were  mounted 
behind  the  horsemen.  They  were  thus  exposed  to  the 
arrows  of  the  enemy,  who  perceived  their  fall,  and 
rushed  forward  to  despatch  them. 

In  front  of  the  assailants  was  an  Indian  entirely 
naked,  bold  and  fearless,  with  a  large  plume  of  feath 
ers  on  his  head.  He  sought  to  gain  the  shelter  of  a 
great  tree  which  lay  between  him  and  the  Spaniards. 
One  of  these,  bearing  a  crossbow,  sent  an  arrow  with 


THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA.  139 

so  true  an  aim,  that  it  pierced  him  through  the  breast. 
He  staggered  forward  a  few  paces,  crying  out  to  his 
followers,  "  These  traitors  have  slain  me  !  "  His  com 
rades  then  rushed  to  his  aid,  received  him  in  their 
arms,  and,  passing  him  on  from  one  to  another,  carried 
him  away. 

In  another  part  of  the  morass,  the  battle  was  not 
less  bloody,  and  the  Spaniards  were  losing  ground, 
when,  at  the  most  critical  moment,  the  news  came  to 
the  Indians  that  their  chief  was  mortally  wounded  ; 
this  checked  their  ardor,  and  they  began  to  retreat. 
The  Spaniards  halted  for  the  night,  and  it  is  said  that 
scarcely  a  man  among  them  had  escaped  without  a 
wound. 

On  resuming  their  march,  every  inch  of  ground  was 
disputed  by  the  enemy,  till  the  adventurers  came  to  an 
open  plain,  where  the  cavalry  could  act  with  effect. 
The  Indians  then  departed,  but,  when  night  came, 
they  hovered  round  the  camp  with  dreadful  yells  and 
bowlings,  taunting  their  foes,  and  launching  against 
them  clouds  of  arrows,  thus  forcing  them  to  keep  in 
perpetual  motion.  Frequently,  the  Spaniards  were 
obliged  to  remove  barriers  and  palisades  which  ob 
structed  their  march,  and  to  cut  their  way  through  the 
tangled  thicket ;  while  the  Indians,  from  their  ambush, 
cried  out,  "  Where  are  you  going,  robbers  ?  We  have 
already  killed  your  chief  and  all  his  warriors  !  " 

The  Spaniards  having  spent  the  winter  of  1539  in 
Apalachee,  where  they  were  perpetually  annoyed  by 
the  bold  and  warlike  savages,  resumed  their  march  on 
the  arrival  of  spring.  As  they  advanced,  they  came 
to  the  deserted  village  of  Achese,  where  they  made 


140  THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA. 

prisoners  of  two  warriors,  who,  being  brought  before 
De  Solo,  demanded,  in  a  bold  and  fearless  mariner, 
"What  seek  you  in  our  land,  peace  or  war?"  De 
Soto  replied,  "  We  seek  not  war  with  any  one  ;  but 
our  wish  is  to  cultivate  peace  and  friendship.  We  are 
in  search  of  a  distant  province,  and  all  we  ask  is  food 
by  the  road."  The  warriors  promised  to  supply  all 
necessary  food,  and  an  embassy  being  sent  to  the  ca 
cique  of  Cofa,  he  returned  a  deputation  of  two  thou 
sand  Indians,  with  a  present  of  rabbits,  partridges,  and 
maize,  and  a  great  number  of  dogs.  The  cacique  also 
gave  the  Spaniards  a  generous  welcome,  and  set  apart 
his  own  dwelling  for  De  Soto,  providing,  likewise, 
quarters  for  the  army.  The  province  is  said  to  have 
been  very  extensive,  fertile,  and  populous.  The  na 
tives  were  peaceful,  domestic,  and  affable,  treating  the 
strangers  with  great  kindness. 

De  Soto,  who  had  brought  with  him  a  piece  of  ord 
nance,  showed  its  power  by  prostrating,  with  ten  shots, 
a  large  oak-tree.  The  cacique  and  his  people  mani 
fested  great  amazement  as  well  as  pleasure  ;  and  when 
the  Spaniards  departed,  the  chief  sent  messengers  to 
his  brother  Cofaqui,  the  cacique  of  an  adjoining  prov 
ince,  still  more  opulent  and  powerful  than  his  own, 
begging  him  to  receive  the  strangers  kindly.  He  like 
wise,  in  company  with  his  warriors,  escorted  the  army 
one  day's  march,  and,  having  bidden  them  farewell, 
charged  some  of  his  people  to  go  on  further,  and  do 
all  in  their  power  to  serve  them. 

The  cacique  Cofaqui,  on  receiving  his  brother's 
message,  sent  four  chiefs,  with  a  train  of  Indians,  to 
welcome  De  Soto  and  his  band.  As  they  drew  near, 


THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA.  141 

he  went  out,  richly  decorated,  to  receive  them  ;  taking 
with  him  a  company  of  warriors  who  carried  their 
bows  and  arrows  in  their  hands,  and  wore  tall  plumes 
on  their  heads,  with  rich  mantles  of  martin-skin,  finely 
dressed,  over  their  shoulders.  Four  thousand  warriors 
were  appointed  to  escort  the  strangers,  with  an  equal 
number  of  retainers  to  carry  supplies  and  clothing. 
These  Indians  depended  on  the  chase  for  animal  food  ; 
but  their  principal  articles  of  provision  were  maize, 
dried  plums,  grapes,  walnuts,  and  acorns. 

A  short  time  before  the  Spaniards  departed,  the  ca 
cique  called  his  chief  warrior  to  him  in  the  public 
square,  and  there,  in  the  presence  of  De  Soto  and  his 
officers,  said,  "  You  well  know  that  a  perpetual  enmity 
has  existed  between  our  fathers  and  the  Indians  of  Co- 
fachiqui.  That  bitter  hatred,  you  are  aware,  has  not 
abated  in  the  least ;  the  deep  wrongs,  the  notorious  in 
juries,  we  have  suffered  from  that  vile  tribe,  still  rankle 
in  our  hearts,  unrevenged !  The  present  opportunity 
must  not  be  lost !  You,  the  leader  of  my  warriors, 
must  accompany  this  chief  and  his  braves,  and  under 
their  protection  wreak  vengeance  on  our  enemies  !  I 
need  say  no  more  to  you  ;  I  leave  our  cause  and  our 
honor  in  your  hands." 

The  Indian  chief,  to  whom  this  message  was  ad 
dressed,  was  called  Patofa;  he  had  a  graceful  form 
and  striking  features,  with  a  noble  expression  of  coun 
tenance  ;  and  his  whole  demeanour  showed  that  he  was 
worthy  of  the  trust  confided  in  him.  Rising  up,  he 
threw  off  his  mantle  of  skin,  seized  a  broadsword  of 
palm- wood,  and  performed  an  exercise  with  it  which 
excited  the  admiration  of  even  the  Spanish  cavaliers. 


142          THE  INDIANS  OF  FLORIDA. 

After  many  singular  evolutions,  he  stopped  before  the 
cacique,  and,  with  a  profound  reverence,  said,  "  I 
pledge  my  word  to  fulfil  your  commands,  so  far  as 
I  am  able  ;  and,  by  the  favor  of  these  strangers,  I 
promise  to  revenge  the  insults,  the  deaths,  and  losses 
that  our  fathers  have  sustained  from  the  people  of  Co- 
fachiqui.  My  vengeance  shall  be  such  that  the  mem 
ory  of  your  past  evils  shall  be  for  ever  wiped  away. 
My  daring  again  to  appear  in  your  presence  will  be  a 
token  that  your  commands  have  been  executed.  For 
if  the  fates  deny  my  hopes,  never  again  shall  you  be 
hold  me,  never  again  shall  the  sun  shine  upon  me.  If 
the  enemy  deny  me  death,  my  own  hand  will  find  it. 
I  will  inflict  upon  myself  the  punishment  my  cowar 
dice  or  evil  fortune  will  merit." 

The  cacique  rose  up  and  embraced  him,  and,  taking 
from  his  own  shoulders  a  beautiful  mantle  of  martin- 
skins,  placed  it  on  Patofa's  shoulders,  and  said,  "  I 
consider  that  what  you  have  promised  is  as  certain  as 
if  it  were  already  done  ;  therefore  do  I  reward  you  as 
for  services  already  rendered." 

The  march  now  commenced,  and  soon  after  an 
Indian  deserted.  Patofa  sent  some  men  in  pursuit 
of  him,  and  he  was  brought  back  in  fetters.  The 
chief  ordered  him  to  be  led  to  the  banks  of  a  small 
stream,  where  he  was  stripped,  thrown  on  the  ground, 
and  commanded  to  drink  the  streamlet  dry.  The  cul 
prit  drank  till  he  could  swallow  no  more ;  but  the  mo 
ment  he  raised  his  head  from  the  water,  five  Indians, 
who  were  stationed  near,  belabored  him  with  their 
clubs  till  he  began  again.  Some  of  his  comrades  hur 
ried  to  De  Soto,  and  begged  his  interposition  ;  and  he 


THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA.  143 

was  accordingly  released,  though  half  dead  with  the 
water  he  had  swallowed. 

The  army,  as  they  advanced  on  the  high  road,  at 
length  came  to  a  dense  forest,  and,  as  the  Indians  pro 
fessed  to  be  as  ignorant  of  the  way  as  the  Spaniards,  De 
Soto  suspected  treachery,  and  called  upon  Patofa  to  ex 
plain  how  it  was,  that,  of  his  eight  thousand  men,  not 
one  knew  the  way  to  Cofachiqui,  with  the  people  of 
which  they  had  been  so  often  engaged  in  war  ?  Pato 
fa  declared  his  ignorance  of  the  place,  saying,  that  the 
wars  referred  to  had  been  carried  on  solely  by  skir 
mishes  ;  and  as  the  natives  of  Cofachiqui  were  the 
most  powerful  and  had  been  most  frequently  victorious, 
his  people  were  afraid  to  pass  beyond  their  own  fron 
tiers.  "  But,"  said  he,  "  do  you  suspect  that  I  have  led 
your  army  into  these  deserts  to  perish  ?  If  so,  take 
what  hostages  you  please..  If  my  head  will  suffice, 
take  it ;  if  not,  you  may  behead  every  individual  of 
my  band,  as  they  will  obey  me  even  to  the  death.'1 

At  length,  they  came  in  sight  of  a  country  studded 
with  numerous  villages.  Here  Patofa  and  his  men 
stole  out  of  the  camp  by  night,  assaulted  a  temple, 
and  massacred  every  Indian  in  it,  taking  their  scalps 
as  trophies,  to  be  carried  to  their  cacique,  Cofaqui. 
After  laying  waste  the  country  for  many  leagues,  slay 
ing  and  scalping  every  man,  woman,  and  child, 
sacking  and  pillaging  villages  and  temples,  and  even 
breaking  into  the  sepulchres, —  Patofa  and  his  follow 
ers  returned  home,  laden  with  spoils,  and  pleased 
with  having  fulfilled  the  promise  made  to  the  cacique. 

De  Soto  had  now  reached  the  dominions  of  the  kind 
princess  Cofachiqui,  which  doubtless  formed  a  part 


144          THE  INDIANS  OF  FLORIDA. 

of  the  present  State  of  Georgia  ;  *  but  as  the  Indians 
here,  and  even  farther  on,  belonged  to  the  Florida 
tribes,  and  as  the  country  itself  constituted  a  portion  of 
the  territory  originally  called  Florida,  it  will  be  proper 
to  give  some  account  of  them  in  this  connection.  We 
therefore  pursue  the  narrative  of  De  Soto's  march 
through  this  region. 

The  next  place  mentioned  in  the  story  of  the  adven 
turers  is  the  province  of  Achalaque,  said,  by  the  nar 
rator,  to  be  the  most  wretched  in  all  Florida.  The 
inhabitants  were  a  feeble,  peaceful  race,  nearly  naked, 
living  chiefly  on  herbs,  roots,  and  wild  fowl.  Be 
yond  this,  was  a  province  called  Xuala.  Crossing 
a  chain  of  low  mountains  which  were  uninhabited, 
the  Spaniards  next  reached  the  province  of  Guaxule. 
When  within  a  league  of  the  principal  town,  they 
were  met  by  the  cacique,  with  500  warriors  richly 
dressed  in  mantles  of  various  kinds  of  skins,  and 
adorned  with  gay  feathers.  His  village  consisted  of 
about  300  houses.  His  own  dwelling,  into  which 
he  received  De  Soto,  stood  on  a  mound,  and  was 
encircled  by  a  terrace  wide  enough  for  six  men  to 
walk  upon  it  abreast. 

Still  farther  on,  after  passing  through  a  desert  coun 
try,  they  came  to  a  village  named  Ichiaha,  standing 
at  the  extremity  of  an  island  more  than  five  leagues 
in  length,  the  cacique  of  which  gave  them  a  po 
lite  and  friendly  welcome.  After  another  day's  march, 
they  came  to  a  village  called  Acoste,  the  cacique  of 
which  was  a  fierce  warrior.  He  placed  himself  in 

*  For  an  account  of  Cofachiqui,  see  "  Lives  of  Famous  In 
dians." 


THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA.  145 

battle  array  at  the  head   of   1,500   of  his  men,  who 
were  decorated  with  war  plumes,  and  equipped  with 
arms.     After   some    difficulties,   a   good    understand 
ing  was  established,  and  the  Spaniards  were  received 
with  hospitality.     Continuing   their   march,  they  met 
with  numerous  tribes,  and   encountered   a  great  va 
riety   of  adventures.     From  the  giant  chieftain,  Tus- 
caloosa,*  they  received   the  fiercest  resistance ;   and 
the   Chickasaws,  who   were   a   brave    and    numerous 
people,  assailed  them  with  desperate  resolution.     As 
they  proceeded,  new  enemies  sprang  up  to  meet  them, 
who    either   gave    them   open    battle,   or   hung   upon 
their   skirts,   and   harassed   them   with   perpetual   at 
tacks.     At  one  time,  they  came  in  sight  of  a  fortress, 
garrisoned  by  Indians,  whose  bodies  were   painted  in 
stripes  of  white,  black,  and  red,  and  their  faces  black 
ened,  with  red  circles   about   their  eyes.      Some   of 
them  wore  feathers,  and  some  horns  on  their  heads, 
so  that  they  looked  more  like  devils  than  men.     Hav 
ing  kindled  a  fire  in  front  of  their  fort,  they  pretended 
to  knock  one  of  their  companions  on  the  head  with  a 
club,  and  then  swung  him  by  the  feet  and  shoulders, 
as  if  they  were  throwing  him  into  the   flames ;  thus 
intimating  to  the  Spaniards  the  kind  of  treatment  they 
might   expect   if  any  of  them  fell  into  their  hands. 
The  fortress  was,  however,  stormed  and  carried  after 
a  desperate  fight,  and  a  fearful  scene  of  blood  and  ear- 
nage  ensued,  in  which  multitudes  of  the  Indians  were 
slaughtered. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  give  further  details  respecting 

*  See  "  Lives  of  Famous  Indians." 
10 


146  THE    INDIANS    OF    FLORIDA. 

the  adventures  of  De  Soto  and  his  companions.  We 
need  only  say,  that,  having  proceeded  westward  till  he 
had  crossed  the  Mississippi,  this  daring  leader  was 
seized  with  fever,  of  which  he  died  after  an  illness 
of  seven  days.  His  band  of  followers,  after  experi 
encing  great  vicissitudes,  succeeded  in  descending  the 
Mississippi,  amid  hosts  of  enemies,  and,  though  greatly 
reduced  in  numbers,  they  at  length  reached  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico  in  1543.  Thus  terminated  this  celebrated 
expedition,  which  occupied  four  years,  and  in  which 
the  troops  are  said  to  have  marched  between  four  and 
five  thousand  miles. 

The  subsequent  history  of  the  original  Indian  tribes 
of  Florida  affords  nothing  of  interest.  Under  the  op 
pression  of  the  Spanish  dominion,  many  of  them  were 
destroyed,  and  others  driven  off,  so  that  but  few  re 
mained.  Most  of  them  seem  to  have  been  conquered, 
incorporated  with  the  later  Seminoles,  and  intermin 
gled  with  fugitive  negroes.  The  recent  painful  his 
tory  of  these  we  shall  hereafter  notice.  The  greater 
part  have  been  removed  across  the  Mississippi,  by  the 
United  States  government,  and  only  a  remnant  are 
left  to  occupy  what  is  now  the  Territory  of  Florida. 


THE  INDIANS  OF  VIRGINIA, 


WHEN  the  Europeans  began  their  settlements  in 
what  is  now  the  territory  of  the  United  States,  the 
whole  country  was  occupied  by  a  great  number  of 
separate  and  independent  tribes.  Upon  the  investiga 
tion  of  their  languages,  it  has  been  found  that  they 
consisted  of  a  few  great  families,  or  nations,  which 
have  been  thus  distributed  by  learned  writers. 

The  Algonquins,  or  Chippewas,  were  spread  over  the 
entire  continent  east  of  the  Mississippi  and  north  of  Cape 
Hatteras,  with  the  exception  of  the  regions  inhabited 
by  the  Esquimaux,  far  to  the  north,  and  the  territory 
claimed  by  the  Huron*,  or  Wyandots.   This  latter  fam 
ily,  which  included  the  Iroquois,  or  Six  Nations,  spread 
themselves  over  the  space  now  occupied  by  New  York, 
a  part   of  Ohio,  and   the   whole   of  Upper   Canada. 
The  Mobilian,  or  Florida  nations,  included  the  tribes 
south  of  Cape  Fear  and  west  of  the  Mississippi,  ex 
cepting  the  Natchez,  inhabiting  the  country  around  the 
modern  city  of  that  name,  and  the  Uchees,  who  held  the 
country  contiguous  to  the  present  town  of  Augusta,  in 
Georgia.     The  Cherokees,  Tuscaroras,  and  Catawlas, 
three  considerable  nations,  occupied  the  territory  of  the 


148 


THE    INDIANS    OF    VIRGINIA. 


Carolinas,  Virginia,  and  Tennessee.  The  Sioux,  or 
Dahcotahs,  dwelt  along  the  western  borders  of  the 
Mississippi. 

These  families,  or  nations,  as  we  have  already  said, 
were  broken  into  a  multitude  of  distinct  tribes,  each 
having,  for  the  most  part,  its  particular  dialect,  and 
carrying  on  war  against  every  other  tribe.  In  some 
instances,  several  tribes  were  confederated  together, 
either  for  the  purposes  of  defence  or  aggression.  Their 
whole  number  has  been  variously  estimated,  but  it 
probably  did  not  exceed  500,000  at  the  time  of  the 
settlement  at  Jamestown,  in  1607. 

When  our  ancestors  came  to  these  shores,  they 
found  the  Indians  thinly  scattered  over  the  country, 
though  occasionally  gathered  in  considerable  groups 
in  the  more  fertile  valleys,  and  along  the  banks  of 
rivers,  lakes,  and  bays.  They  were  in  the  rudest  state 
of  society,  without  science,  without  arts,  without  any 
metallic  instruments,  without  domestic  animals.  They 
raised  a  little  corn,  which  the  women  cultivated  with 
a  clam-shell,  or  the  shoulder-blade  of  the  buffalo.  De 
vouring  this  with  savage  improvidence,  they  obtained  a 
precarious  supply  for  the  rest  of  the  year  by  gathering 
nuts  and  roots,  or  by  hunting  and  fishing.  Half  clad 
in  skins,  or  entirely  naked,  they  roamed  from  place  to 
place,  passing  their  lives,  alternately,  in  stupid  idleness, 
and  the  fiercest  excitements  of  war  and  the  chase.  Ig 
norant  of  the  past,  and  improvident  of  the  future,  most 
of  these  tribes  were  sunk  in  the  lowest  depths  of  hu 
man  degradation. 

Such  were  the  occupants  of  the  soil,  when  the  Eu 
ropean   settlers   came   to   establish   themselves    here. 


THE    INDIANS    OF   VIRGINIA.  149 

Throughout  the  continent,  the  Indians  appear  to  have 
been  at  first  disposed  to  give  a  hospitable  reception  to 
the  strangers  who  visited  their  shores ;  but  they  were 
soon  taught  to  dread,  and  then  to  hate,  a  people,  who 
shot  them  down,  subjected  them  to  slavery,  and  robbed 
them  of  their  property  and  lands,  without  mercy  or 
scruple.  When  the  settlements  began  along  our  At 
lantic  coast,  more  than  a  century  had  passed  since  the 
discovery  of  the  continent  by  Columbus,  and  ample 
time  had  elapsed  for  many  of  the  tribes  to  experience, 
and  all  to  know,  the  oppressive  and  formidable  charac 
ter  of  these  European  invaders. 

Though  the  number  of  the  Indians  in  this  quarter 
was  not  great,  yet  their  skill  in  war,  and  the  deep- 
seated  jealousy  and  hatred  of  the  white  race,  which 
had  grown  up  with  them,  rendered  them  a  fearful  foe 
to  feeble  colonies,  separated  by  a  wide  ocean  from  the 
protection  and  succour  of  their  native  land.  The  con 
tests  of  our  forefathers  with  the  Indians,  therefore, 
were  full  of  the  deepest  interest  to  them,  and  abound 
in  incidents  which  cannot  fail  to  arrest  the  attention  of 
every  reader. 

When  the  Europeans  first  planted  themselves  at 
Jamestown,  according  to  Captain  Smith's  account,  the 
country,  from  the  sea-coast  to  the  mountains,  was  in 
habited  by  forty-three  different  tribes.  Thirty  of  these 
spread  over  the  tract  of  country  south  of  the  Potomac, 
within  a  space  of  about  8,000  square  miles.  Within 
sixty  miles  of  Jamestown,  it  is  said,  there  were  5,000 
of  these  natives.  There  were  several  confederacies 
among  them,  the  chief  of  which  owere  the  Powhatan 
confederacy,  the  confederacy  of  the  Mannahoacks,  and 


150  THE    INDIANS    OF   VIRGINIA. 

that  of  the  Monacans.  These  last  two  were  united  in 
a  grand  alliance  against  the  Powhatan  league.  Long 
and  bloody  wars  were  maintained  between  these  rival 
sovereignties.  The  Mannahoack  confederacy  embrac 
ed  thirteen  tribes,  eight  of  whom  were  under  the  Man- 
nahoacks,  and  five  under  the  Monacans.  Besides  these, 
there  were  also  the  independent  tribes  of  the  Notto- 
ways,  Meherriks,  Tuteloes,  and  various  others. 

These  tribes,  especially  the  Powhatan  confederacy, 
were  not  disposed  to  allow  the  English  to  settle  down 
among  them  unmolested.  Though  at  times  preserving 
a  show  of  peace,  feelings  of  hostility  rankled  in  their 
hearts,  and  the  colonists  were  obliged  to  be  always  on 
their  guard.  Nor  can  we  blame  the  Indians  that  they 
felt  inimical  to  the  settlers.  Hitherto,  they  had  remain 
ed  sole  lords  and  proprietors  of  the  vast  territory  over 
which  they  roamed,  undisturbed  except  by  the  wars 
which  they  carried  on  with  each  other.  To  break  in 
upon  this  supremacy,  and  to  appropriate  their  lands, 
the  white  man  came  and  planted  himself  down,  not 
only  assuming  a  superiority  of  intelligence  and  power, 
but  of  right.  The  means  of  communication  with  dis 
tant  tribes  were  evidently  greater  than  has  sometimes 
been  imagined,  and  doubtless  the  story  of  Cortes,  De 
Soto,  and  other  invaders,  had  reached  the  ears  of  these 
savages.  We  shall  not  be  surprised,  therefore,  to  find 
that  Powhatan,  the  chief  of  the  tribe  of  that  name,  soon 
began  to  grow  hostile  to  his  new  neighbours  at  James 
town,  after  their  settlement  in  1607.  The  enemy 
he  had  to  oppose,  however,  was  the  undaunted  and 
chivalrous  Captain  Smith,  whose  earlier  history  seems 
almost  like  a  romance,  appropriately  followed  out  by 


THE    INDIANS    OF   VIRGINIA.  151 

the  strange  incidents  of  his  residence  in  the  col 
ony.  * 

The  Indians,  in  the  course  of  numerous  attacks  and 
skirmishes,  learned  to  regard  Smith  as  a  foe  by  no 
means  to  be  despised  ;  and  when,  in  one  of  his  expedi 
tions,  he  was  taken  captive,  their  joy  knew  no  bounds. 
After  being  led  from  one  chief  to  another,  Captain 
Smith  was  finally  presented  to  Powhatan  himself. 
Opechancanough,  who  was  his  successor,  seems  to 
have  cherished  strong  feelings  of  dislike  to  Smith,  and 
had  Powhatan  felt  disposed  to  spare  him,  he  would 
have  found  himself  opposed  by  his  chief  warriors. 
Finally,  when  he  had  been  seen  by  all  the  Indians, 
and  experiments  had  been  tried  on  his  courage,  it  was 
determined,  in  a  council  of  chiefs,  that  he  should  have 
his  brains  beaten  out  with  a  club. 

The  appointed  day  arrived.  Powhatan  and  his 
warriors  were  present,  exulting  in  the  scene.  The 
captive  was  brought  forth ;  two  large  stones  were 
placed  in  a  suitable  position,  and  he  was  laid  upon 
them.-  At  this  moment,  the  compassionate  Pocahontas, 
the  darling  daughter  of  Powhatan,  sprang  forward,  and, 
clasping  Smith  in  her  arms,  shielded  his  head  with  her 
person,  and  declared  that  he  should  not  be  killed,  un 
less  she,  too,  fell  beneath  the  same  blow.  So  strange 
an  event  appears  to  have  made  a  deep  impression  on 
the  father.  His  daughter  persisting  in  her  determina 
tion  to  die  with  the  captive,  the  chief  yielded,  Smith 


*  For  the  details  of  Smith's  life,  see  "  Curiosities  of  Human 
Nature,"  and  "  Lives  of  Celebrated  American  Indians,"  article 
"  Pocahontas." 


152  THE    INDIANS    OF   VIRGINIA. 

was  saved,  and  sent  home  to  Jamestown.  This  strik 
ing  event  took  place  in  1607. 

Still,  Powhatan,  for  a  considerable  time,  remained 
the  foe  of  the  whites,  and  at  various  times  designed 
evil  against  the  colony  ;  but  his  schemes  were  frus 
trated  by  the  vigilance  of  Smith,  aided  by  the  cautions 
of  Pocahontas,  who  proved  herself,  on  many  occasions, 
his  friend.  The  heroic  girl  herself  was  afterwards 
taken  prisoner,  and  during  her  residence  at  Jamestown 
was  married  to  Mr.  Rolfe,  a  gentleman  of  great  re 
spectability.  Powhatan  was  then  induced  to  relinquish 
his  hostility,  and  become  the  friend  of  the  whites.  His 
daughter  and  her  husband  went  to  England,  where  she 
was  admitted  to  see  the  queen,  but  she  died  as  she  was 
about  to  return. 

Opechancanough,  the  successor  of  Powhatan,  was 
said  to  be  originally  from  the  south,  and  some  have 
conjectured  that  he  was  of  Mexican  descent,  as  his 
appearance  is  described  to  have  differed  from  that  of 
the  other  Indians  of  the  Powhatan  confederacy.  He 
was  a  man  of  more  than  ordinary  abilities,  and  burned 
with  a  desire  to  rid  his  country  of  those  whom  he 
viewed  as  invaders  of  her  soil.  In  1622,  he  concerted 
a  plan  for  a  general  massacre,  hoping  even  to  effect 
the  entire  extermination  of  the  colony.  The  plot  was 
deeply  laid,  and  planned  with  great  skill.  All  the 
members  of  the  confederacy  had  their  several  parts 
assigned  them.  At  the  time  the  plot  was  formed,  many 
of  the  Indians  mingled  with  the  whites  for  the  purpose 
of  ascertaining  the  avenues  by  which  to  gain  access  to 
the  town,  and  the  means  of  striking  the  blow  with 
most  effect. 


THE    INDIANS    OF    VIRGINIA.  153 

On  the  appointed  day,  the  22d  of  March,  about  noon, 
while  the  people  were  at  work,  and  mostly  unarmed,  the 
Indians  rushed  upon  them,  and  at  once  massacred  three 
hundred  and  forty-seven  men,  women,  and  children. 
So  well  devised  was  the  plan,  that,  but  for  its  being 
betrayed,  the  whole  colony,  including  Jamestown,  must 
have  been  cut  off  at  a  blow.  A  Christian  Indian,  who 
had  been  solicited  by  his  brother  to  kill  a  Mr.  Pace, 
with  whom  he  then  lived,  informed  him  of  the  plot, 
and,  though  not  in  season  to  save  hundreds  from  fall 
ing  victims  to  the  savage  enemy,  yet  intelligence  was 
sent  to  Jamestown,  and  the  people,  in  many  instances, 
were  seasonably  put  upon  their  guard.  The  Indians, 
finding  they  were  betrayed,  did  not  attempt  an  attack 
upon  the  town,  but  plundered  and  burned  the  unde 
fended  houses,  the  mills  and  iron  works,  and  whatever 
else  came  in  their  way. 

The  next  autumn,  the  Virginians,  in  their  turn,  at 
tacked  the  Indians,  burned  several  of  their  towns,  and 
took  many  thousand  bushels  of  corn,  which  they  found 
stored  up  for  the  winter.  The  consequence  of  this  was, 
that  the  Indians  were  greatly  distressed,  and  suffered 
much  for  want  of  food  and  the  necessaries  of  life.  The 
succeeding  July,  the  war  was  carried  on  with  still  more 
vigor ;  four  or  five  separate  parties  were  appointed  to 
attack  the  Indians  at  different  points,  and  many  were 
slain,  among  whom  were  some  of  their  kings  and  war- 
captains.  These  disasters  at  once  disheartened  and 
weakened  them.  Still,  they  continued  to  seize  upon 
every  advantage  that  offered,  and,  in  1630,  Opechan- 
canough,  observing  that  the  colony  was  in  a  state  of 
disunion  and  anarchy,  formed  a  plan  for  another  sur 
prise  and  massacre. 


154  THE    INDIANS    OF   VIRGINIA. 

The  experience  they  had  so  dearly  bought  should 
have  made  the  colonists  vigilant,  and  put  them  upon 
their  guard  at  all  times.  But  they  seem,  at  this  period, 
to  have  relapsed  into  a  state  of  fatal  confidence  or  in 
difference.  The  Indians  fell  upon  the  settlers,  princi 
pally  on  the  south  side  of  James  River,  and  at  the 
head  of  York  River,  and  so  carefully  had  they  con 
cealed  their  design,  so  well  was  it  arranged,  and  so 
resolutely  executed,  that  they  cut  off  five  hundred  of 
the  colonists  at  a  blow.  This  was  a  dreadful  event  to 
the  infant  settlement,  and  seems,  at  first,  to  have  almost 
entirely  disheartened  the  survivors.  A  long  and  bloody 
war  followed,  with  various  results,  till,  finally,  the  In 
dians  being  defeated,  and  tired  of  the  strife,  a  peace 
was  once  more  made,  which  continued  unbroken  for 
many  years.  The  death  of  Opechancanough,  the  mas 
ter  spirit  of  the  savages,  and  the  implacable  foe  of 
the  colony,  doubtless  contributed  to  this  end.  Every 
contest  also  taught  the  Indians  the  power  of  European 
discipline,  and  they  at  last  learned  that  the  field  of 
battle  was  the  grave  of  their  warriors,  and  that  even  a 
successful  war  always  resulted  in  a  diminution  of  their 
strength. 

No  very  striking  event  succeeded,  in  the  history  of 
the  Virginia  colony,  till  the  year  1675,  when  the  In 
dians  again  began  to  rob  and  murder  the  colonists. 
Intestine  divisions  raged,  and  they  seemed,  in  their 
broils,  to  forget  that  an  enemy  lurked  around  thems 
who  might  take  fatal  advantage  of  their  unguarded  and 
feeble  condition.  Although  the  Indians  dared  not  ap 
pear,  as  they  had  formerly  done,  in  the  very  heart  of 
the  settlements, — for  these  had  increased,  and  the  tribes 


THE    INDIANS    OF    VI^INIA. 

had  been  driven  back  into  the  intenfrsyt  jTet  they 
attacked  those  who  dwelt  on  the  frontiers,  wasted  their 
fields,  burned  their  houses,  and  committed  other  rava 
ges.  The  colonists  were  in  no  condition  to  avenge 
themselves  of  these  outrages.  Had  the  Indians,  indeed, 
known  the  full  extent  of  their  weakness,  they  might 
have  been  emboldened  to  still  more  daring  invasions  ; 
but,  being  successfully  attacked  by  the  whites,  after  a 
brief  conflict,  they  were  glad  to  accept  of  peace. 
The  ascendency  of  the  English  being  once  established, 
the  tribes  gradually  wasted  away,  and  it  would  now  be 
difficult  to  find  a  remnant  of  the  once  powerful  people 
by  which  the  eastern  portion  of  Virginia  was  formerly 
inhabited. 

The  tract  of  country  first  called  Virginia  embraced 
more  than  is  now  comprised  in  the  limits  of  the  State ; 
and  as  a  part  of  North  Carolina  was  included  in  its 
boundaries,  it  may  be  proper,  in  this  connection,  to  no 
tice  the  history  of  the  Indians  who  occupied  this  region. 

North  Carolina  was  first  discovered  by  Sir  Walter 
Raleigh,  in  1584.  In  the  account  given  by  him,  it 
seems  the  Indian  name  of  this  region  was  Winganda- 
coa,  the  king  being  called  Wingina.  His  chief  town 
was  six  dpys'  journey  from  Wococon.  His  brother, 
Ganganameo,  resided  at  a  village  on  the  Roanoke.  The 
third  day  after  the  English  arrived,  some  natives  ap 
peared,  and  one  of  them  went  on  board  of  the  ships. 
The  English  gave  him  a  shirt,  some  wine,  and  plenty 
to  eat.  He  paddled  away,  and,  having  laden  his  boat 
with  fish,  returned,  and  divided  them  into  two  parts, 
meaning  one  portion  for  one  ship,  and  the  rest  for  the 
other.  The  next  day  Ganganameo  came  to  see  them, 


156  THE    INDIANS    OF    VIRGINIA. 

with  fifty  men,  spread  out  his  mat  on  the  point,  without 
any  apparent  fear,  and,  sitting  down,  made  signs  to  the 
English  to  sit  down  with  him.  He  then  stroked  his 
head  and  breast,  and  theirs  also  in  a  gentler  manner, 
thus  signifying,  that,  henceforth,  their  heads  and  hearts 
should  be  one.  He  made  a  long  speech,  and  they  pre 
sented  him  with  some  toys,  which  greatly  pleased  him. 
They  then  opened  a  trade,  and  he  gave  them  twenty 
deer-skins  for  a  pewter  basin ;  a  sample  of  the  deal 
ings  between  the  English  and  natives.  The  chief  made 
a  hole  through  the  basin,  and  hung  it  about  his  neck 
for  a  breastplate.  He  also  gave  fifty  more  skins  for 
a  copper  kettle. 

Some  days  after  this  interview,  Ganganameo  came 
again  with  his  wife  and  children.  They  were  of  a  low 
stature,  but  quite  handsome.  His  wife  wore  a  coat 
and  short  apron  of  leather,  and  a  band  of  white  coral 
about  her  forehead,  with  ear-rings  of  pearls  as  large  as 
peas,  and  hanging  down  to  her  waist.  He  was  him 
self  dressed  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  his  hair 
was  long  on  one  side,  and  cut  short  on  the  other.  The 
English,  in  return,  went  to  see  him ;  but,  as  the  chief 
was  absent,  his  wife  ran  to  meet  them,  and,  as  they 
approached  the  shore,  ordered  her  people  to  take 
them  on  their  backs  to  the  land.  The  season  being 
rainy,  she  had  their  boat  drawn  up  on  the  bank.  Her 
visiters  were  then  taken  into  her  house,  where  she 
washed  their  clothes  and  feet.  After  they  had  warm 
ed  and  dried  themselves  by  a  fire,  she  took  them  into 
another  room,  where  a  dinner  was  prepared,  consisting 
of  various  dishes,  —  boiled  venison,  roots,  melons,  and 
other  fruits.  When  they  returned  to  their  boats,  she 


THE    INDIANS    OF   VIRGINIA.  157 

gave  them  mats  to  shield  them  from  the  rain.  Well 
might  these  voyagers  say,  as  they  did,  "  A  more  kind 
and  loving  people  cannot  be." 

Notwithstanding  this  favorable  view,  it  appears,  that, 
subsequently,  the  North  Carolina  Indians  were  more  or 
less  enlisted  in  the  various  enterprises  of  the  natives 
against  the  colony  of  Virginia,  of  which  an  account  has 
already  been  given,  and,  to  some  extent,  shared  the 
fortunes  of  their  countrymen.  In  1712,  a  part  of  them, 
the  Corees,  Tuscaroras,  and  others,  formed  a  league 
for  the  purpose  of  expelling  the  colonists,  who  had  now 
encroached  upon  their  territories.  Their  plan  was  ar 
ranged  with  great  secrecy  and  cunning.  To  secure 
their  own  families,  they  surrounded  their  principal  town 
with  a  breastwork.  Here  the  warriors  of  the  different 
tribes  met,  to  the  number  of  twelve  hundred  bowmen. 
The  plan  was  matured,  and  the  time  fixed  for  the 
massacre.  When  the  fatal  night  came,  small  parties 
went  out  by  different  roads,  and,  under  the  mask  of 
friendship,  were  admitted  to  the  houses  of  the  colon 
ists.  Rising  at  a  preconcerted  signal,  they  slaughtered 
men,  women,  and  children,  without  distinction.  To  pre 
vent  discovery  or  alarm,  they  ran  as  speedily  as  possi 
ble  from  house  to  house,  hastening  the  bloody  work. 
In  the  vicinity  of  Roanoke,  they  thus  butchered  one 
hundred  and  thirty-seven  persons  in  a  single  night.  A 
few  escaped  and  gave  the  alarm,  by  which  means  the 
settlements  were  preserved  from  extinction.  Nearly 
one  thousand  troops  were  immediately  raised  in  South 
Carolina,  by  whom  the  Indians  were  pursued.  On 
coming  up  with  them,  a  severe  battle  was  fought,  in 
which  three  hundred  Indians  were  slain,  and  one  hun- 


158  THE    INDIANS    OF    VIRGINIA. 

dred  taken  prisoners.  It  was  supposed  that  nearly 
one  thousand  of  the  Indians  were  finally  killed,  wound 
ed,  and  captured.  After  this  event,  the  remnant  of 
the  Tuscaroras  fled  to  the  Five  Nations,  with  whom 
they  became  incorporated.  From  this  period,  the 
northern  confederacy  assumed  the  title  of  the  Six  Na 
tions. 

In  Pennsylvania,  Delaware,  New  Jersey,  and  the 
part  of  New  York  below  the  Highlands,  there  were 
likewise  numerous  tribes  of  Indians.  It  is  said  that 
there  were  not  less  than  thirty  kings  within  these  lim 
its,  and  the  whole  number  of  Indians  is  computed  by 
Dr.  Trumbull  to  have  been  about  10,000,  and  the  war 
riors  2,000.  The  principal  tribes  were  the  Manhattans 
and  the  Delawares,  or,  as  they  are  often  termed,  the 
Lenni  Lenape.  The  peaceful  policy  of  William  Penn 
prevented  any  Indian  wars  in  the  early  settlement  of 
Pennsylvania,  though  another  cause  doubtless  contrib 
uted  to  this  result.  The  Five  Nations  had  subdued  the 
Lenni  Lenape,  obliged  them  to  put  themselves  under 
their  protection,  deprived  them  of  the  power  of  making 
war,  and  confined  them  to  the  raising  of  corn,  hunting, 
and  fishing.  To  use  the  Indian  phrase,  they  had  been 
thus  reduced  to  the  state  of  women.  The  interior  por 
tion  of  Virginia  had  also  been  subjected  to  the  same 
sway. 

Many  of  the  Indians  of  whom  we  are  now  speaking 
were  greatly  benefited  by  the  missionary  labors  of 
David  Brainerd,  who  instructed  them  in  Christianity. 
Numbers  became  professors  of  religion,  and  were 
bright  examples  of  the  power  of  the  gospel  even  over 
the  savage  heart.  The  Moravians,  also,  at  a  still  later 


THE    INDIANS    OF   VIRGINIA.  159 

date,  were  not  less  successful,  and  the  account  of  their 
residence  among  the  Indians,  as  related  by  Hecke- 
welder  and  others,  deserves  a  careful  perusal.  The 
history  of  these  Indians,  however,  is  similar  to  that  of 
the  tribes  in  other  quarters,  when  brought  in  contact 
with  the  whites.  They  wasted  away  in  the  competi 
tion  with  a  master  race,  and  not  a  vestige  of  them 
is  left  upon  their  original  domains. 


THE    SOUTHERN  INDIANS. 


THE  Southern  Indians,  in  the  Carolinas,  Georgia, 
and  Florida,  were  composed  of  many  different  tribes. 
Of  these,  the  most  distinguished  were  the  Catawbas, 
Cherokees,  Choctaws,  Chickasaws,  and  Creeks.  In 
1671,  the  Cherokees  in  South  Carolina  were  estimated 
at  6,000  bowmen.  It  is  thought  that  the  Corees,  Sto- 
noes,  Westoes,  Savannas,  Yamassees,  Catawbas,  and 
Congarees  could  not  have  been  less  numerous,  and  that, 
in  this  colony  alone,  there  were  as  many  as  35  or 
36,000  Indians,  including  12,000  warriors.  The  Creeks 
numbered  about  25,000.  The  Chickasaws,  Alabamas, 
and  Natchez  were  computed  at  10,476  fighting  men, 
and  the  whole  population  at  31,128  souls.  The  Natchez 
were  once  a  great  nation,  and  were  able,  at  one  time, 
to  raise  not  less  than  4,000  warriors. 

These  Indians,  as  well  as  the  others,  viewed  with 
jealousy  the  settlements  of  the  whites,  and  were,  from 
time  to  time,  more  or  less  engaged  in  attacks  upon  the 
colonists,  whom  they  greatly  annoyed  in  their  infant 
state.  They  also  carried  on  war  with  the  Five  Na 
tions,  and  many  remarkable  feats  of  their  valor  are 
related.  One  of  these  deserves  to  be  mentioned.  A 


THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS.  161 

party  of  Senecas,  in  an  excursion  far  south,  near  the 
territories  of  the  Catawbas,  discovered  a  young  hunter 
in  a  light  summer  dress.  They  intercepted  him,  and 
he  ran  towards  a  hollow  for  the  purpose  of  conceal 
ing  himself.  He  was  swift  of  foot,  and  so  skilful  in 
archery,  that  he  shot  down  seven  of  his  pursuers  before 
they  were  able  to  capture  him.  They  then  took  him 
to  their  own  country,  and  there  he  was  condemned,  in 
a  council  of  warriors,  to  die  by  torture. 

On  being  led  out  to  the  stake  where  he  was  to  be 
burned  alive,  he  suddenly  collected  his  strength,  dashed 
down  his  nearest  enemies,  sprang  to  the  waters  of  a 
neighbouring  stream,  plunged  in,  and  swam  underneath, 
rising  only  at  intervals  to  take  breath,  till  he  reached  the 
shore.  The  Senecas  followed  him  through  the  water, 
and  fired  their  guns,  but  they  were  at  such  a  distance 
they  could  not  reach  him.  He  stopped  for  a  moment 
or  two,  contemptuously  set  them  at  defiance,  and  then 
fled  into  the  forest.  Closely  pursued,  he  ran  on  till 
midnight,  and  then  lay  by  among  the  bushes,  hiding 
himself  under  some  logs. 

Five  of  his  enemies  came  near,  and,  kindling  their 
fire,  lay  down  to  sleep.  He  watched  them  earnestly, 
till  they  were  all  in  a  sound  slumber.  He  then  silently 
crawled  to  the  place,  seized  a  tomahawk,  and,  by  a 
sudden  attack,  killed  them,  and  scalped  them.  He 
then  clothed  himself  in  the  dress  of  one  of  them,  took 
their  guns,  ammunition,  and  provisions,  and  pursued  his 
wav.  Still  he  was  not  satisfied  with  his  revenge,  but 
went  directly  to  the  spot  where  he  had  killed  the  seven 
Senecas,  dug  up  the  bodies  from  their  graves,  scalped 
them,  burned  them  to  ashes,  and  went  home  in  tri 
ll 


162  THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS. 

umph.  Another  party  of  the  Senecas  afterwards 
came  up,  but  finding  the  five  warriors  whom  he  had 
killed  and  scalped,  they  gave  up  the  pursuit.  A  war- 
council  was  called,  and  it  was  determined,  that  a  man 
who  could  do  such  things  must  be  a  wizard,  whom 
it  was  vain  to  pursue  or  oppose. 

In  1715,  there  was  a  general  conspiracy  and  rising 
of  the  Southern  Indians,  especially  those  in  South 
Carolina.  The  league  comprised  the  Yamassees,  a  pow 
erful  tribe,  the  Creeks,  Cherokees,  Apalachians,  Ca- 
tawbas,  Congarees,  and  all  the  Indians  from  Florida  to 
Cape  Fear  River.  The  object  of  this  extensive  con 
spiracy  was  the  total  destruction  of  the  Carolinians. 
The  15th  of  April  was  the  day  fixed  upon  for  its  exe 
cution.  The  whole  plot  was  managed  with  such  se 
crecy  and  under  such  a  guise  of  friendship,  that  the 
English  had  not  the  least  suspicion  of  treachery.  Even 
traders  among  them  slept  the  very  night  before  with 
the  king  and  his  war-captains,  in  the  chief  town  of  the 
Yamassees. 

All  was  peace  and  silence  until  the  morning.  They 
then  burst  forth,  fell  on  the  traders,  and  killed  them 
all- at  a  single  volley,  except  one  man  and  a  boy.  The 
nation  immediately  rose  in  arms,  and  proclaimed  their 
designs  of  vengeance.  The  chiefs  stimulated  the  young 
warriors,  who  caught  their  spirit,  and  poured  forth  like 
a  torrent  on  the  unsuspecting  settlers.  In  a  few  hours 
they  massacred  a  hundred  men  in  the  town  of  Pocatali- 
go  and  the  neighbouring  plantations.  The  man  and 
boy,  who  were  not  killed  at  the  first  fire,  made  their 
escape  to  Port  Royal,  and  the  inhabitants  generally  fled 
on  board  a  ship  for  Charleston.  Some  other  families, 
who  were  unable  to  escape,  were  murdered. 

* 


THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS.  163 

While  the  Yamassees  were  thus  desolating  the  south- 
thern  frontiers,  the  Congarees,  Catawbas,  and  Chero- 
kees  came  down  in  great  force  on  the  north.  The 
southern  division  of  the  Indians  in  this  war  was  com 
puted  at  6,000  bowmen,  and  the  northern  at  600  or 
1,000.  A  company,  which  was  sent  against  the  northern 
division,  was  betrayed  by  the  treachery  of  an  Indian  ; 
the  captain  was  slain,  and  his  party  defeated.  In  one 
place,  seventy  whites  and  about  forty  negroes,  having 
bravely  defended  their  post  against  the  northern  di 
vision,  capitulated,  and,  after  their  surrender  are  said 
to  have  been  perfidiously  massacred.  Flushed  with  their 
success,  the  Indians  went  on  burning,  murdering,  and 
plundering.  They  were  soon,  however,  met  by  a  band 
of  militia,  raised  on  the  emergency,  and  totally  defeated. 

The  governor  of  South  Carolina  advanced  with  an 
army,  and,  at  a  place  called  Saltcalches,  a  bloody  battle 
was  fought.  The  Indians,  uttering  fearful  war-cries 
and  yells,  sometimes  retired  behind  the  bushes,  and 
then,  when  the  English  were  beginning  to  be  encour 
aged  with  the  hope  of  success,  they  returned  to  the 
fight  with  redoubled  fury.  They  were,  however,  at 
last  wholly  defeated,  and  driven  across  the  Savannah 
River.  The  Yamassees,  despairing  of  being  able  to 
expel  or  exterminate  the  whites,  and  cherishing  a  spirit 
of  bold  independence,  fled  to  Florida,  where  they 
were  afterwards  troublesome  to  the  settlements  in  that 
vicinity. 

In  April,  1730,  a  commissioner  was  sent  to  treat 
with  the  Cherokees.  A  general  assembly  of  the  chiefs 
was  thereupon  summoned,  who  swore  allegiance  to 
King  George.  A  treaty  was  made,  which  was  kept  in- 


164  THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS. 

violate  by  the  Indians  for  thirty  years.  In  1760,  they 
again  made  war  on  the  English.  Parties  of  them 
had  assisted  in  the  expedition  against  Fort  du  Quesne. 
In  that  enterprise  they  were  treated  with  coldness  and 
neglect,  and  felt  themselves  insulted.  Returning  home, 
as  many  of  the  warriors  had  lost  their  horses,  they 
caught  and  appropriated  such  as  they  found  loose  in 
the  woods.  The  Virginians,  roused  by  these  aggres 
sions,  fell  on  them,  killed  twelve  or  fifteen,  and  took 
several  prisoners. 

The  Cherokees  were  at  once  kindled  into  rage  ; 
they  went  home,  and  told  their  wrongs  to  their  nation. 
The  relatives  of  those  who  were  slain  breathed  noth 
ing  but  revenge.  The  French  emissaries  secretly 
fanned  the  flame,  and  added  fresh  fuel  to  their  angry 
passions.  The  young  warriors  rushed  down  on  the 
frontier  settlements,  and  committed  ravages  on  the  de 
fenceless  inhabitants.  They  attacked  the  troops  sta 
tioned  at  Fort  Loudon,  a  portion  of  whom  were  killed, 
and  the  remainder  confined  within  the  fort.  Still,  the 
nation  generally  were  averse  to  war,  particularly  as 
they  heard  that  the  English  were  making  great  prepara 
tions  to  attack  them.  They  therefore  sent  thirty-two 
of  their  chief  men  to  settle  the  difficulties  in  an  amicable 
manner.  The  governor  of  North  Carolina  received 
them  haughtily,  and  overwhelmed  them  with  reproach 
es.  Ouconnostota,  who  was  considered  a  great  war 
rior  in  the  Cherokee  nation,  began  to  reply,  but  the 
governor  would  not  hear  him.  This  treatment  greatly 
exasperated  the  Indians,  who  had  now  a  new  insult  ad 
ded  to  their  other  wrongs.  The  governor  soon  after 
marched  for  the  country  of  the  Congarees,  140  miles 


THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS.  165 

from  Charleston,  taking  with  him  the  Cherokee  sachems, 
who  were  detained  as  prisoners,  a  guard  being  set  over 
them.  On  reaching  Fort  George,  they  were  shut  up 
in  a  hut  scarcely  fit  to  accommodate  a  dozen  soldiers, 
and  were  not  allowed  to  see  their  friends,  or  even 
enjoy  the  light  of  day. 

Here  the  governor  opened  a  conference  with  the 
Indians,  who  had  been  assembled  for  the  purpose. 
He  had  sent,  among  others,  for  Attakullakulla,  or  Little 
Carpenter,  who  was  esteemed  the  wisest  man  in  the 
nation,  and  the  most  attached  of  all  to  the  English. 
By  his  request,  Ouconnostota  and  two  more  of  the 
chiefs  were  set  free.  Two  others,  who  were  delivered 
up  as  hostages,  being  put  in  irons,  the  Cherokees 
were  alarmed  and  fled.  Attakullakulla  returned  home 
to  await  the  result.  He  was,  however,  soon  summoned 
back,  and  finally  a  treaty  was  signed  by  the  governor, 
and  the  head  men  of  the  Cherokees.  Still,  the  remem 
brance  of  the  treatment  they  had  received  lay  deeply 
buried  in  the  breasts  of  the  Indians ;  and  Attakullakulla, 
on  account  of  his  known  attachment  to  the  English, 
had  little  influence  with  them. 

Ouconnostota,  under  a  sense  of  his  wrongs,  was  im 
placable  and  vindictive.  He  collected  his  warriors, 
made  a  fierce  attack  on  the.  whites,  killed  fourteen  men 
near  Fort  George,  and  besieged  the  garrison.  He 
also  contrived  a  stratagem  to  surprise  the  fort.  He 
sent  two  Indian  women,  who  were  always  welcome  there, 
to  decoy  out  the  garrison  ;  the  lieutenant  went  forth 
to  inquire  the  news,  when  Ouconnostota  joined  them, 
saying  that  he  wished  to  see  the  commanding  officer 
on  important  business.  Accordingly,  the  captain,  lieu 
tenant,  and  ensign  went  out  to  meet  him.  The  chief 


166  THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS. 

said  he  was  going  to  Charleston  to  procure  a  release 
of  prisoners,  and  wished  a  white   man  for  a  safeguard. 

The  request  seemed  reasonable,  and  the  captain 
told  him  he  should  have  one.  No  sooner  was  the 
answer  returned,  than  Ouconnostota  gave  the  signal 
agreed  on,  and  nearly  thirty  guns  were  at  once  dis 
charged  on  the  English.  The  captain  was  killed,  and 
the  lieutenant  and  ensign  were  wounded.  This  treach 
ery  so  exasperated  the  garrison,  that  the  hostages  in  the 
fort  were  immediately  put  to  death.  In  the  evening, 
the  Indians  approached  the  fort,  and,  after  firing  their 
guns,  and  crying  out  in  the  Cherokee  language,  "  Fight 
manfully  and  you  shall  be  assisted,"  they  made  a  most 
furious  attack,  which  they  kept  up  all  night.  But  they 
were  so  well  met  by  the  fire  of  the  troops  within  the 
fort,  that  they  were  obliged  to  retire. 

Disappointed  in  this  project,  they  turned  their  rage 
upon  the  Indian  traders,  and  massacred  them.  The 
war  now  became  general ;  large  parties  of  warriors 
fell  on  the  defenceless  frontiers,  and  cut  off  many 
families.  About  200  of  them  attacked  the  fort  at 
Ninety-Six,  but  were  obliged  to  retire  with  .loss.  In 
the  mean  time  an  expedition  was  planned  against  the 
Indians;  and  presents  were  given  to  such  Creeks, 
Chickasaws,  and  Catawbas,  as  joined  in  the  war  against 
the  Cherokees.  Their  towns  in  the  lower  settlement 
were  attacked  and  destroyed,  and  many  of  the  natives 
slain.  After  this,  a  message  was  sent  to  Fort  Loudon, 
requesting  the  commanding  officers  to  use  their  best 
endeavours  to  obtain  peace  with  the  Cherokees  of  the 
upper  towns.  But  they  were  unsuccessful,  and  an  at 
tack  on  the  middle  settlements  was  therefore  resolved 
upon. 


THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS.  167 

On  the  third  day,  as  the  army  were  advancing,  the 
Cherokees  made  a  most  furious  assault  upon  them.  A 
long  and  obstinate  fight  ensued,  but,  finally,  the  In 
dians  gave  way,  and  fled.  The  army  immediately 
pressed  forward  to  Etchowa,  but  the  Indians  had  re 
moved  their  property,  and  forsaken  the  town.  Again 
an  attack  was  made,  and  the  English,  after  a  se 
vere  contest,  though  claiming  the  victory,  found  them 
selves  forced  to  retreat.  Soon  after  this,  Fort  Loudon 
surrendered,  and  the  Indians  fell  upon  the  garrison  as 
they  were  marching  homeward.  All  were  slain  ex 
cept  Captain  Stewart,  whom  Attakullakulla  ransomed 
and  sent  home,  at  the  price  of  nearly  all  he  possessed. 
The  conduct  of  the  chief,  in  this  case,  forms  a  bright 
and  beautiful  passage  in  Indian  history. 

The  war  with  the  Cherokees  still  continued,  and  the 
French  sought  with  all  their  art  to  engage  the  Creeks 
and  Choctaws  against  the  English.  A  force  of  Scotch 
Highlanders,  and  a  provincial  regiment,  with  numbers 
of  Chickasaws  and  Catawbas,  who  had  been  induced, 
by  presents,  to  engage  in  the  service,  —  the  whole  con 
sisting  of  2,600  men,  —  were  now  sent  forward  to  Fort 
Prince  George.  Here  Attakullakulla  met  them,  and 
besought  the  commander  to  proceed  no  farther  till  he 
had  used  his  endeavours  to  bring  about  a  peace  with 
his  countrymen.  But  his  entreaties  were  vain.  The 
officer  proceeded,  and  the  troops  were  attacked  by  the 
Cherokees,  who  rushed  down  from  the  high  grounds 
with  great  fury.  The  battle  was  long  and  dubious  ; 
the  Indians,  when  repulsed  at  one  point,  assailed  anoth-. 
er,  and  the  fight  was  maintained  from  nine  to  eleven 
o'clock,  when  the  Cherokees,  overpowered  by  superior 
discipline,  fled,  and  were  pursued  till  two  o'clock. 


168  THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS. 

Etchowa,  and  fourteen  other  towns  of  the  middle  set 
tlements,  were  now  utterly  destroyed,  together  with 
several  magazines  of  corn,  and  1,400  acres  of  corn 
fields.  After  ravaging  the  country,  far  and  wide,  the 
English  returned  to  Fort  Prince  George. 

Soon  after  this,  Attakullakulla  and  several  chiefs 
went  to  the  camp  and  expressed  earnest  wishes  for 
peace.  Articles  were  drawn  up  and  interpreted,  and 
Attakullakulla  agreed  to  accept  all  but  one,  which  he 
had  no  power  from  his  nation  to  grant.  This  was,  that 
four  Cherokees  should  be  delivered  up,  and  put  to 
death  in  front  of  the  army.  As  they  could  not  accede 
to  this  cruel  demand,  the  chiefs  were  sent  to  Charles 
ton  to  confer  with  the  governor.  He  met  them  at 
Ashley  Ferry,  and  gave  them  a  welcome.  The  fire  was 
kindled,  and  the  pipe  of  peace  was  lighted  and  smok 
ed,  in  silence  and  great  solemnity.  Then  Attakulla 
kulla  rose  up  and  made  an  eloquent  and  manly  speech, 
saying,  "  that  he  came  as  a  messenger  of  peace  ;  that 
his  people  were  in  great  distress  ;  that,  though  the 
English  were  their  superiors,  and  lived  in  light,  while 
they  were  in  darkness,  yet  that  one  God  was  the  Father 
of  both  ;  that  they  lived  in  one  country,  and  that  he 
wished  what  had  happened  might  now  be  forgotten,  and 
that  they  might  be  as  one  people." 

A  peace  was  thereupon  established,  and  both  parties 
expressed  their  wish  that  it  might  last  as  long  as  the 
rivers  should  run,  or  the  sun  shine.  This  was  at  the 
close  of  the  year  1761. 

The  Natchez  were  a  powerful  tribe  of  Indians,  who 
inhabited  that  part  of  our  country  now  called  Louisi 
ana.  They  differed,  in  many  respects,  from  the  rest 
of  the  Southern  Indians,  and  many  of  their  customs 


THE    SOUTHERN    INDIANS.  169 

were  singular.  In  their  worship  of  the  sun,  they  bore 
a  strong  resemblance  to  the  ancient  Peruvians,  and 
may,  perhaps,  have  had  a  common  ancestry  with 
them.  But  they  were  much  more  warlike,  and  occa 
sioned  great  trouble  to  the  French  settlements  in  that 
vicinity.  On  one  occasion,  they  formed  a  deep  plan 
for  the  extermination  of  every  Frenchman  among 
them.  A  considerable  time  was  taken  in  maturing  it, 
and  it  was  so  complete  in  its  details,  that  nothing  but 
its  discovery  by  a  female,  who  was  attached  to  the 
French,  could  probably  have  defeated  its  execution. 

A  day  was  fixed  upon,  when  the  savages  were  to 
rise  simultaneously  and  massacre  the  whites.  Those 
who  planned  the  enterprise,  in  order  to  insure  unity  of 
action,  furnished  a  number  of  rods  to  each  tribe  ;  one 
rod  was  to  be  taken  from  the  collection  every  day,  till 
there  remained  but  one,  and  this  was  to  indicate  the 
time  for  the  massacre.  The  woman,  to  whom  we  have 
alluded,  in  order  to  defeat  the  scheme  of  her  people, 
took  away  one  of  these  rods,  and,  as  the  Indians  never 
counted  them,  a  part  of  the  Natchez  began  the  massa 
cre  one  day  too  soon.  The  French  were  thus  apprized 
of  the  hostile  design,  and  took  measures  to  defeat  it. 
Still,  many  of  them  fell  victims  to  the  fury  of  the  In 
dians.  In  revenge,  the  whites  attacked  them,  and,  in 
the  end,  this  powerful  tribe  were  nearly  all  destroyed, 
and  their  habitations  reduced  to  ashes.  These  events 
took  place  in  1729. 

The  settlements  of  the  French  on  the  Yazoo  and 
Washita  rivers  were  subjected  to  an  attack  similar  to 
that  just  related,  and  with  the  like  result.  The  Natchez, 
who  survived  the  French  retaliation  of  their  massacres, 
fled  to  the  Chickasaws. 


INDIANS  OF  NEW  ENGLAND. 


THE  tract  of  country  known  by  the  name  of  New 
England  was  formerly  inhabited  by  numerous  bands  of 
Indians,  though  none  of  them  equalled  the  more  south 
ern  tribes.  They  were,  however,  warlike,  and  were 
led  by  chiefs  of  great  ability.  Dr.  Trumbull  computes 
the  New  England  Indians  as,  at  one  time,  amounting 
to  123,000.  In  the  winter  of  1617,  the  plague,  or 
some  other  mortal  disease,  broke  out  among  them,  and 
almost  depopulated  the  country. 

When  the  English  first  landed  at  Plymouth,  they 
saw  few  indications  of  inhabitants.  Yet  the  number 
of  Indians  in  Massachusetts  was  probably  not  less  than 
10,000  or  12,000,  and  in  Rhode  Island  not  less  than 
8,000.  The  Pequods  and  Mohegans,  in  Connecticut, 
had  about  1,000  warriors  ;  these,  with  others,  made 
the  Indian  population  there  equal  to  about  12,000.  In 
New  Hampshire,  there  were  probably  about  4,000. 
The  whole  number  of  warriors  in  New  England  might 
be  estimated  at  12,000,  upon  the  arrival  of  our  ances 
tors  at  Plymouth.  Had  these  been  all  united  in  hostil 
ity  against  the  strangers,  they  must  have  proved  formi 
dable  enemies,  indeed,  to  the  little  company  landing  on 
the  coast  in  the  bleak  month  of  December. 


INDIANS    OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  171 

The  Pequods  were  the  most  warlike  of  all  the  In 
dians  in  New  England.  More  than  twenty  kings  were 
their  tributaries.  It  was  fortunate  for  the  colonies  that 
this  tribe  was  not  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  Ply 
mouth.  Their  chief  seat  was  in  Connecticut. 

The  Indians  in  the  western  part  of  this  region  were 
so  often  exposed  to  the  incursions  of  the  Mohawks, 
that  they  were  not  only  weakened,  but  they  lived  in 
constant  dread  of  their  fierce  and  savage  foe.  This  ter 
rible  enemy  was  wont  to  burst  suddenly  and  unexpect 
edly  into  their  country,  and,  as  they  rushed  upon  their 
victims,  they  yelled  in  their  ears,  "  Hadree,  hadree 
succomce,  succomce"  We  come,  we  come  to  suck 
your  blood !  The  cry  of  "  The  Mohawks !  the  Mo 
hawks  ! "  was  the  most  appalling  sound  that  could 
assail  the  ears  of  these  people. 

The  Indians  of  Massachusetts  were  greatly  exasper 
ated  by  the  conduct  of  a  Captain  Hunt,  previous  to  the 
arrival  of  the  pilgrims.  He  had  enticed  twenty-seven 
Indians  on  board  of  his  ship,  carried  them  off,  and  sold 
them  as  slaves.  After  they  heard  of  the  arrival  of  the 
colonists,  they  meditated  their  extermination,  and  held 
a  powow,  or  council,  in  a  swamp,  where,  for  three 
days,  they  deliberated  as  to  what  they  should  do.  Ac 
cording  to  their  usage,  they  cursed  the  white  men  ;  but, 
not  being  aware  of  their  weak  condition,  they  did  not 
venture  to  attack  them.  An  overruling  hand  withheld 
them,  and  a  voice  spoke  to  them,  though  they  knew 
not  whence  it  came,  "  Touch  not  my  people,  and  do 
my  servants  no  harm  !  " 

The  landing  at  Plymouth  took  place  on  the  22d  of 
December,  1620.  On  the  16th  of  March,  1621,  Sam- 


172  INDIANS    OF    NEW   ENGLAND. 

oset  —  one  of  the  Indians  who  had  been  kidnapped  by 
the  English,  and  found  his  way  back  to  his  people,  and 
who  had  acquired  some  knowledge  of  our  language  — 
came  to  Plymouth,  and  saluted  the  colonists  with  the 
agreeable  words,  "  Welcome,  Englishmen  !  "  We 
may  imagine  how  joyfully  they  listened  to  his  story,  as 
he  portrayed  to  them  the  kindly  character  of  Massasoit, 
the  sachem  who  bore  rule  in  that  vicinity.  For  days 
exposed  to  cold,  hunger,  and  sickness,  they  had  waited 
the  opening  of  spring,  doubtless  with  many  anxious 
fears  as  to  what  evils  might  threaten  them  from  the 
savages  of  the  wilderness ;  and  to  be  now  assured  that 
the  principal  chief  was  kindly  disposed  must  have  been 
cheering  indeed. 

Samoset  was  soon  despatched  to  the  sachem,  charg 
ed  with  a  message  of  peace,  and  Massasoit  himself, 
and  his  brother  Quadequina,  with  sixty  armed  men, 
came  to  pay  a  visit  to  Governor  Carver.  After  ex 
changing  hostages,  Massasoit  advanced  to  a  brook  with 
twenty  unarmed  men,  where  he  was'  met  by  a  file  of 
musketeers,  and  was  conducted  to  a  house  and  seated 
on  a  green  rug,  with  a  number  of  cushions.  Here  the 
two  chiefs  saluted  each  other,  kissed  hands,  and  enter 
ed  into  a  league  of  friendship,  commerce,  and  mutual 
defence.  This  treaty  gave  peace  to  all  that  part  of 
the  country,  and  Massasoit  always  continued  to  be  a 
firm  friend  to  the  colonists. 

The  first  attack  on  the  Europeans,  by  the  Indians 
of  New  England,  was  at  Connecticut,  in  1636,  by  the 
Pequod  tribe.  They  felt  jealous  of  the  strangers  who 
had  come  upon  their  ancient  soil,  over  which  they  had 
so  long  roamed  as  the  sole  possessors.  With  the  hope, 


INDIANS    OF    NEW   ENGLAND.  173 

therefore,  of  expelling  or  exterminating  the  intruders, 
they  attacked  the  fort  at  Saybrook,  and  slew  and  took 
captive  the  inhabitants  of  that  early  settlement.  De 
termined  on  more  extensive  and  fatal  measures  against 
the  colonists,  the  Pequods  sought  to  gain  over  the  adja 
cent  tribe  of  the  Narragansets,  with  whom  they  had 
before  carried  on  a  bloody  warfare.  They  represented 
to  them  that  these  foreigners  were  mere  intruders,  dis 
possessing  the  original  inhabitants,  and  that,  unless,  by 
a  general  combination,  they  were  driven  off  or  destroy 
ed,  they  would  become  masters  of  the  whole  country. 
They  also  bade  them  reflect,  that,  if  the  English  should 
destroy  the  Pequods,  they  would  soon  root  out  the  Nar 
ragansets  themselves. 

In  consequence  of  their  attacks,  the  colonists  felt 
it  necessary  to  take  vigorous  measures  for  carrying 
the  war  even  into  the  intrenchments  of  the  enemy. 
Captain  Mason,  with  ninety  Englishmen  and  seventy 
Mohegan  and  River  Indians,  who  had  been  secured  as 
allies,  was  accordingly  despatched  from  Hartford,  to 
search  out  the  enemy,  and  give  them  battle.  These 
were  joined  by  Captain  Underbill,  of  Saybrook,  with 
nineteen  men. 

On  the  26th  of  May,  1637,  Mason,  after  a  fatiguing 
march,  surprised  Mystic,  near  the  present  town  of 
Stonington,  one  of  the  principal  Indian  forts.  After 
a  volley  from  their  fire-arms,  they  entered  the  place, 
sword  in  hand,  their  Indian  allies  leaving  them  to  make 
the  assault  alone.  Captain  Mason,  with  his  company, 
had  approached  on  the  east  side,  and  Captain  Under 
bill,  with  his  men,  on  the  west  side.  When  they  were 
within  about  a  rod  of  the  fort,  the  barking  of  a  dog 


174  INDIANS    OF    NEW   ENGLAND. 

awakened  the  sleeping  sentinel,  who  cried  out,  "  Owan- 
nux!  Owannu.x ! '"  Englishmen!  Englishmen!  The 
Indians,  roused  by  the  cry,  rallied,  and  fought  hravely, 
and  victory  for  a  time  hung  in  suspense,  till  Captain 
Mason,  observing  that  the  wigwams  were  covered  with 
mats,  or  other  combustible  materials,  had  recourse  to 
the  expedient  of  setting  them  on  fire. 

This  decided  the  fate  of  the  Pequods.  In  an  hour, 
about  seventy  wigwams  were  destroyed,  and  most  of 
the  Indians,  estimated  at  four  or  five  hundred,  were 
burned  to  death,  shot  down,  or  slain  by  the  sword. 
Sassacus,  the  Pequod  sachem,  and  his  warriors,  were 
so  panic-struck  by  the  loss  of  their  fort  and  the  de 
struction  of  their  men,  that  they  burned  their  remain 
ing  wigwams  and  the  royal  fortress,  and  fled  towards 
the  Hudson  River.  They  were  pursued  to  a  swamp 
near  Fairfield,  where  another  battle  took  place,  in 
which  the  Pequods  were  entirely  vanquished.  The 
Mohawks,  treacherously  hired,  as  has  been  supposed, 
by  the  Narragansets,  then  fell  upon  the  remnant  of  the 
tribe,  and  cut  them  to  pieces.  It  was  calculated,  that, 
in  the  whole,  not  less  than  seven  hundred  Indians  fell 
in  this  war.  A  few,  who  still  lingered  on  their  ancient 
grounds,  at  last  united  with  the  Mohegans,  under  Un- 
cas.  This  chief  had  shown  himself  a  friend  to  the 
English,  and  some  of  his  descendants  have  remained, 
till  within  a  few  years,  among  the  few  Mohegans  who 
still  hold  lands  in  the  vicinity  of  Norwich,  Connecticut. 

This  effort  of  the  Pequods,  under  the  renowned  Sas 
sacus,  was  the  first  great  attempt  of  the  Indians  to 
destroy  the  settlers  of  New  England.  So  speedy  and 
terrible  was  the  retribution  which  followed  this  attempt, 


. 

INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAf^gk,  175 

^^^^L^  *     ***         **   *• 

that  the  humbled  Indians  remained  at  peace  for  many 
years  after.  Other  circumstances  aided  to  promote 
this  state  of  things.  Sassacus,  the  monarch  of  the 
country,  reigning  over  twenty  Indian  kings,  had  main 
tained  a  long  and  successful  war  with  Miantonimoh, 
the  sachem  of  the  Narragansets,  and  was  an  object 
of  terror  to  that  people.  Miantonimoh  and  his  nation, 
therefore,  desired  a  league  with  the  colonists,  to  defend 
them  against  the  Pequods.  Massasoit,  also,  and  his 
people,  had  sought  the  same  alliance  as  a  defence 
against  their  bitter  and  dangerous  foes,  the  Torratines 
of  Maine  ;  and  all  the  New  England  Indians  desired, 
especially,  to  secure  themselves  against  the  attacks 
of  the  terrible  Mohawks.  Thus  mutual  weakness  and 
mutual  fears  led  to  general  peace. 

Attempts  were  early  made  by  the  colonists  to  in 
struct  the  Indians  in  the  Christian  religion.  About  the 
year  1644,  Mr.  Mayhew  and  Mr.  Eliot  began,  success 
fully,  to  engage  in  labors  for  the  conversion  of  the 
Indians  on  Martha's  Vineyard  and  at  Natick.  At  first, 
there  was  great  opposition  by  the  sachems  and  powows, 
or  priests,  who  used  every  effort  to  baffle  and  discour 
age  the  devoted  missionaries.  But,  in  1660,  there 
were  whole  towns  of  "  praying  Indians,"  and  in  1687, 
there  were  more  than  twenty  assemblies  of  these  sav 
ages  who  worshipped  the  true  God.  Eliot,  with  vast 
labor,  translated  the  Bible  into  the  language  of  those 
among  whom  he  preached.  This  was  printed,  and  a 
copy  of  it  may  occasionally  be  found  treasured  up  as 
a  curiosity  in  our  public  libraries.  In  1695,  there  were 
not  less  than  3,000  adult  Indians,  reckoned  as  converts 
to  the  Christian  religion,  in  the  islands  of  Martha's 
Vineyard  and  Nantucket. 


176  INDIANS    OF    NEW   ENGLAND. 

About  the  year  1675,  another  Indian  war  began, 
which  proved  the  most  serious  contest  in  which  the 
colonists  had  ever  been  engaged.  For  several  years 
previously,  the  Indians  had  been  silently  forming  a 
general  conspiracy  for  the  extermination  of  the  New 
England  colonies.  Massasoit,  the  good  friend  of 
the  English,  was  dead,  and  his  grandson  Philip,  sa 
chem  of  the  Wampanoags,  whose  chief  seat  was  in 
Rhode  Island,  did  not  inherit  the  kindly  feeling  of  his 
ancestor  toward  the  whites.  He  was  a  man  of  great 
abilities,  and,  had  his  means  been  equal  to  his  skill  and 
bravery,  the  result  might  have  proved  fatal  to  the  now 
flourishing  colonies. 

A  Christian  Indian,  named  John  Sausaman,  discov 
ered  to  the  English  the  mischiefs  he  was  plotting 
against  them.  Philip,  burning  with  rage  that  his 
plan  should  be  revealed,  caused  Sausaman  to  be  mur 
dered.  The  English  detected  the  murderers,  appre 
hended  them,  and  after  a  trial,  in  which  their  guilt  was 
sufficiently  apparent,  executed  them.  This  still  further 
incited  Philip  to  revenge.  On  the  20th  of  June,  he 
commenced  open  hostilities  on  the  town  of  Swansey, 
near  his  territory. 

The  torch  of  war,  thus  lighted,  continued  to  rage 
over  the  whole  extent  of  New  England,  for  several 
years,  with  unabated  fury.  Its  details  would  fill  a 
volume.  Philip,*  who  was  the  master  spirit  of  the 
league  against  the  whites,  displayed  a  courage,  sagaci 
ty,  and  perseverance,  worthy  of  a  king  and  a  patriot. 
Nor  was  he  ill  seconded  by  the  tribes  whom  he  drew 

*  For  the  life  of  Philip  and  an  account  of  the  war,  see  "  Lives 
of  Famous  Indians." 


INDIANS    OF   NEW    ENGLAND.  177 

into  the  conspiracy  by  his  eloquence  and  his  intrigues. 
Though  often  defeated,  he  was  never  discouraged,  and, 
while  his  foe  seemed  about  to  trample  him  to  the 
earth,  he  frequently  arose  with  renewed  vigor  and  more 
desperate  resolution.  He  was  at  length  slain,  and,  though 
the  struggle  was  maintained  for  some  time  longer,  it  at 
last  resulted  in  a  general  defeat  of  the  Indians,  from 
which  they  never  recovered.  The  war  had  extended 
from  Rhode  Island  to  Maine,  and,  throughout  the  whole 
extent  of  this  region,  the  smoke  of  the  dwellings  and 
the  cries  of  the  victims  were  seen  and  heard  on  every 
hand.  Many  of  the  most  flourishing  English  villages 
were  laid  in  ashes.  The  struggle  was  not  finished 
till  the  spring  of  1678.  Six  hundred  of  the  flower  of 
the  colonists  perished,  and  three  hundred  houses  were 
consumed.  The  Mohegans  and  a  few  other  tribes  re 
mained  friendly,  but  the  rest  shared  in  the  war  and  its 
fatal  consequences. 

The  next  efforts  of  the  Indians  against  the  New 
England  colonies  took  place  during  the  long  and  bloody 
wars  between  the  French  and  English,  called  the  wars 
of  William  and  Queen  Anne.  In  June,  1689,  insti 
gated  by  the  French,  they  surprised  Cocheco,  part  of 
the  town  of  Dover,  New  Hampshire,  and  killed  and 
took  captive  about  fifty  of  the  inhabitants.  They  be 
gan  depredations,  also,  in  various  parts  of  Maine,  plun 
dering,  burning,  and  carrying  off  captives,  wherever 
they  were  able.  For  ten  years  the  provinces  of  New 
Hampshire  and  Massachusetts  were  subjected  to  the  fu 
ry  of  the  savages.  Deerfield,  on  the  Connecticut  River, 
was  surprised  and  burnt,  forty  persons  were  killed, 
and  nearly  a  hundred  men,  women,  and  children 
12 


178  INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND. 

led  away  captive.  The  eastern  settlements,  also,  were 
again  ravaged  and  depopulated.  A  treaty  was  at  last 
concluded  in  the  year  1699.  From  time  to  time, 
however,  the  war  was  renewed,  as  the  French  often 
succeeded  in  engaging  the  Indians  in  their  plans.  In 
1713,  a  peace  having  been  agreed  upon  between  the 
French  and  English,  the  Eastern  Indians,  who  had 
again  been  involved  in  hostilities  with  the  colonists, 
sent  a  flag,  desiring  peace.  A  general  pacification 
ensued,  to  the  great  joy  of  all  parties. 

We  must  now  turn  our  attention  to  the  severe  con 
test  with  the  Indians  along  the  northeastern  border, 
which  commenced  in  1722.  Before  the  subjugation 
of  Canada  by  the  British,  the  New  England  settlements, 
as  we  have  seen,  were  exposed  to  the  hostilities  of  the 
Eastern  Indians,  and  a  spirit  of  jealousy  and  revenge 
was  kept  up,  not  only  between  the  different  nations,  but 
between  individuals.  The  boundaries  of  the  different 
territories  being  loosely  defined,  both  sides  were  left  ex 
posed  to  real  or  fancied  encroachments,  so  that  pre 
texts  for  .war  were  always  at  hand.  The  French 
Jesuits  had  planted  themselves  among  the  Indian  tribes 
at  an  early  period  ;  and  at  the  beginning  of  the  eight 
eenth  century,  they  had  two  churches  among  the  East 
ern  Indians,  —  one  at  Penobscot,  and  the  other  at 
Norridgewock,  within  the  boundaries  of  the  present 
State  of  Maine. 

At  the  latter  settlement  resided  the  Jesuit,  Sebastian 
Kasle,  a  man  of  talent,  learning,  and  address,  who,  by 
accommodating  himself  to  the  Indian  mode  of  life,  and 
maintaining  a  gentle,  condescending  deportment,  had 
completely  won  the  affection  of  the  savages,  and  his  in- 


INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND.  179 

fluence  over  them  was  supreme.  Knowing  the  power 
of  superstition  over  their  minds,  he  took  advantage  of 
this,  and  of  their  prejudice  against  the  English,  to 
strengthen  the  interest  of  the  French  among  them. 
He  even  made  the  offices  of  devotion  serve  as  incen 
tives  to  their  ferocity  ;  he  kept  a  banner,  on  which  was 
depicted  a  cross  surrounded  by  bows  and  arrows, 
which  he  was  accustomed  to  hoist  on  a  pole  at  the 
door  of  his  church,  and  gave  the  Indians  absolution, 
previous  to  their  setting  out  on  a  warlike  expedition. 
The  governor  of  Canada  held  a  constant  correspon 
dence  with  this  Jesuit,  and  received  through  his  hands 
information  of  every  thing  that  transpired  among  the 
tribes  in  that  quarter.  From  these  individuals  the 
savages  received  every  encouragement  to  assert  their 
title  to  lands  occupied  by  the  English,  and  to  molest 
the  settlers,  by  killing  their  cattle,  burning  their  hay 
stacks,  and  robbing  and  insulting  them.  Many  of  the 
inhabitants,  alarmed  by  these  demonstrations  of  hostili 
ty,  removed  from  the  frontiers  in  1720.  The  garri 
sons  were  reinforced,  and  scouting  parties  were  sent 
abroad,  which  checked  for  a  time  the  hostile  move 
ments  of  the  Indians,  who  were  compelled,  the  same 
year,  to  give  hostages  for  their  good  behaviour.  This 
last  requisition  was  highly  disrelished  by  the  governor 
of  Canada,  who  renewed  his  efforts  to  keep  up  the 
quarrel,  and  secretly  promised  to  supply  the  Indians 
with  arms  and  ammunition,  although,  as  Great  Britain 
and  France  were  not  then  at  War,  he  could  not  openly 
assist  them.  The  New  England  governments  obtained 
information  of  these  intrigues ;  yet,  though  highly  in 
censed,  they  judged  it  best  not  to  rush  into  hostilities. 


180  INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND. 

The  main  dispute  lay  between  the  Indians  and  the 
proprietors  of  the  eastern  lands,  and  the  public  were 
not  directly  concerned  in  it.  No  blood  had  as  yet 
been  shed  within  the  limits  of  the  English  territory. 

Rasle  was  considered  the  principal  instigator  of  the 
Indians,  and  it  was  thought,  that,  if  he  were  removed, 
all  would  be  quiet.  A  proposal  was  made  to  send  the 
sheriff  of  York  County  with  a  posse  of  a  hundred  and 
fifty  men,  to  seize  him  and  bring  him  to  Boston,  but 
this  bold  stroke  was  not  ventured  upon.  In  the  sum 
mer  of  1721,  Rasle,  in  company  with  the  Count  de 
Castine  from  Penobscot,  and  Croisil  from  Canada,  ap 
peared  at  one  of  the  English  garrisons,  and  presented 
a  letter,  written  in  the  name  of  the  several  Indian 
tribes  to  Governor  Shute  of  Massachusetts,  declaring, 
that,  "  if  the  English  did  not  remove  in  three  weeks, 
they  would  kill  them  and  their  cattle,  and  burn  their 
houses."  The  lands  in  question  were  comprehended 
within  the  limits  of  the  English  patents,  and  the  set 
tlers  were  considered  the  only  legal  proprietors.  They 
had  been  accustomed  to  obtain  regular  deeds  of  sale 
from  the  Indians,  and  pay  them  a  valuable  considera 
tion  ;  but  some  of  these  titles  were  from  an  obscure  and 
questionable  source  ;  and  the  memory  of  such  transac 
tions  is  soon  lost  among  people  possessing  no  written 
records.  The  Indians  easily  forget  the  sales  made  by 
their  ancestors,  or  imagine  that  such  bargains  are  not 
binding  upon  their  posterity. 

The  Massachusetts  government,  on  receiving  this 
menacing  epistle,  sent  an  additional  force  to  the  Maine 
frontiers ;  and,  being  desirous  to  avoid  a  rupture,  invited 
the  Indians  to  a  conference,  from  which  the  French 


INDIANS    OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  181 

emissaries  were  to  be  excluded.  This  invitation  was 
treated  with  neglect ;  and  in  the  succeeding  winter,  a 
party  under  Colonel  Westbrooke  was  ordered  to  Nor- 
ridgewock  to  seize  Rasle.  They  reached  the  village 
undiscovered :  but,  before  they  could  surround  his  house, 
he  had  escaped  into  the  woods,  leaving  his  papers  in 
his  strong  box,  which  they  brought  away,  without  com 
mitting  any  act  of  violence.  Among  these  papers 
were  his  letters  of  correspondence  with  the  governor 
of  Canada,  which  afforded  positive  proof  that  he  was 
deeply  engaged  in  intrigues  to  incite  the  Indians  to 
hostilities.  The  savages  were  enraged  at  this  attempt 
to  seize  their  spiritual  father,  and  resolved  upon  re 
venge.  In  the  summer  of  1722,  they  made  a  descent 
upon  the  settlements  at  Merry-Meeting  Bay,  and  cap 
tured  nine  families ;  dismissing  some  of  the  prisoners, 
they  retained  enough  to  secure  the  redemption  of  their 
hostages  in  the  hands  of  the  English,  and  sent  them 
off  to  Canada.  Their  next  attack  was  on  the  fort  at 
St.  George,  on  the  Androscoggin,  where  they  were  re 
pulsed  with  considerable  loss.  They  afterwards  sur 
prised  some  fishing  vessels  in  the  eastern  harbours, 
and  at  length  made  a  furious  attack  on  the  town  of 
Brunswick,  which  they  destroyed.  These  hostilities 
determined  the  government  of  Massachusetts  to  issue  a 
declaration  of  war  against  them,  which  was  published 
in  form,  at  Boston  and  Portsmouth,  on  the  25th  of  July, 
1722. 

Troops  were  raised  and  enlisted  for  two  years'  ser 
vice,  and  the  government  had  no  scruples  in  offering 
a  bounty  of  forty  pounds  sterling  for  every  Indian 
scalp.  This  war  obtained  the  name  of  "  Lovewell's 


182  INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND. 

War,"  from  Captain  John  Love  well,  of  Dunstable,  in 
New  Hampshire,  who  was  the  most  prominent  com 
mander  in  the  enterprise  against  the  enemy,  and  was 
killed  in  a  severe  engagement.  Various  incursions 
were  made  upon  the  settlements  by  the  Indians  during 
the  year  1723,  and  several  of  the  inhabitants  were 
killed  and  carried  into  captivity.  On  the  10th  of  June, 
1724,  a  farmer  and  his  son,  being  at  work  on  Oyster 
River,  planting  corn,  went  to  a  brook  to  drink,  and  dis 
covered  three  Indian  packs.  They  immediately  ran 
to  give  information  to  a  company  of  volunteers,  which 
had  lately  been  raised  in  the  neighbourhood,  for  the 
defence  of  the  frontier.  The  company  marched  to 
wards  the  spot,  but  were  fired  upon  from  an  ambush, 
and  the  farmer  and  his  son,  who  acted  as  guides,  were 
both  killed.  The  company  then  fired  and  killed  one 
of  the  Indians,  and  wounded  two  others  who  made 
their  escape,  though  they  were  pursued  and  tracked 
by  their  blood  to  a  considerable  distance.  The  slain 
Indian  was  a  person  of  distinction,  and  wore  a  species 
of  coronet,  made  of  fur,  dyed  scarlet,  with  an  appen 
dage  of  four  small  bells,  by  the  sound  of  which  the 
others  might  follow  him  through  the  thickets.  His 
hair,  contrary  to  what  is  almost  universal  among  the 
natives,  was  remarkably  soft  and  fine  ;  and  he  had 
about  him  a  devotional  book,  and  a  muster-roll  of  one 
hundred  and  eighty  Indians.  From  these  various  cir 
cumstances,  it  was  supposed  that  he  was  a  natural  son 
of  the  Jesuit,  Rasle,  by  an  Indian  woman,  who  served 
him  as  a  domestic. 

Garrison-houses  were  built  among  the  frontier  set 
tlements,  to  which  the  inhabitants  were  warned  to  re- 


INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND.  183 

pair  in  time  of  danger.  At  Dover  there  were  many 
families  of  Quakers,  who,  doubting  the  lawfulness  of 
war,  could  not  be  persuaded  to  use  any  means  for  their 
defence,  although  the  Indians  never  spared  them  on  that 
account.  One  of  these,  John  Hanson,  lived  remote  from 
the  garrison,  and  refused  to  take  shelter  in  it  with  his 
family,  although  he  had  a  large  number  of  children. 
A  party  of  thirteen  Indians,  called  French  Mohawks, 
had  marked  his  house  for  their  prey,  and  lay  several 
days  in  ambush,  waiting  for  an  opportunity  to  attack 
it.  On  the  27th  of  June,  while  Hanson  and  his  eldest 
daughter  were  gone  to  attend  the  weekly  meeting,  and 
his  two  eldest  sons  were  at  work  in  a  meadow  at  some 
distance,  the  Indians  entered  the  house,  killed  and 
scalped  two  small  children,  and  took  his  wife,  with  her 
infant  of  fourteen  days  old,  her  nurse,  two  daughters, 
and  a  son,  and,  after  rifling  the  house,  carried  them  off. 
This  was  done  so  suddenly  and  secretly,  that  the  first 
person  who  discovered  it  was  the  eldest  daughter,  on 
her  return  from  the  meeting.  Seeing  the  two  children 
dead  at  the  door,  she  uttered  a  shriek  of  distress, 
which  was  distinctly  heard  by  her  mother,  then  in 
the  hands  of  the  enemy  among  the  bushes,  and  by 
her  brothers  in  the  meadow.  The  people,  being  soon 
alarmed,  went  in  pursuit  of  the  enemy ;  but  the  In 
dians,  cautiously  avoiding  all  beaten  paths,  went  off 
with  their  captives  undiscovered.  The  mother,  though 
of  a  tender  constitution,  had  a  firm  and  vigorous  mind, 
and  passed  through  the  various  hardships  of  an  Indian 
captivity  with  much  resolution  and  patience.  When 
her  milk  failed,  she  supported  her  infant  with  water 
warmed  in  her  mouth,  till  the  squaws  taught  her  to 


184  INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND. 

beat  the  kernel  of  walnuts  and  boil  it  with  bruised 
corn,  which  proved  a  nourishing  food  for  the  babe. 
The  prisoners  were  all  sold  to  the  French  in  Canada. 
Hanson  redeemed  them  the  following  year,  one  daugh 
ter  remaining  behind. 

These  and  other  outrages  of  the  enemy  caused  the 
government  of  Massachusetts  to  resolve  on  an  expe 
dition  against  the  Indian  town  of  Norridgewock.  Two 
hundred  men,  under  Captains  Moulton  and  Harman, 
marched  from  York  in  August.  They  left  forty  of 
their  men  at  Teconic  Falls,  on  the  Kennebec,  and,  di 
viding  the  remainder  into  two  bodies,  one  of  them, 
under  Harman,  took  a  circuitous  route,  hoping  to  sur 
prise  some  of  the  enemy  in  their  cornfields,  while  the 
other,  under  Moulton,  marched  directly  for  the  village 
of  Norridgewock,  which,  being  surrounded  by  trees, 
could  not  be  seen  till  they  were  close  upon  it.  All  the 
Indians  were  in  their  wigwams,  and  the  English  ad 
vanced  cautiously  and  in  perfect  silence.  When  they 
had  approached  very  near,  an  Indian  came  out  of  his 
wigwam,  and,  discovering  the  English,  set  up  the  war- 
whoop,  ran  in,  and  seized  his  gun.  In  a  few  minutes 
the  warriors  were  all  in  arms,  and  advanced  to  meet 
them.  Moulton  gave  orders  not  to  fire  till  the  Indians 
had  made  the  first  discharge.  This  was  done,  and, 
as  he  expected,  they  overshot  the  English,  who  then 
immediately  fired  with  great  execution.  After  another 
volley  had  been  exchanged,  the  savages  fled  with 
precipitation  to  the  river.  They  were  pursued  and 
slaughtered  in  every  quarter,  and  their  wigwams  set  on 
fire.  Moulton  wished  to  take  Rasle  alive,  and  gave 
strict  orders  that  no  one  should  kill  him.  But  the 


INDIANS    OF    NEW   ENGLAND.  185 


Jesuit  having  shut  himself  up  in  his  house,  from  which 
he  continued  to  fire  upon  the  English,  one  of  them 
burst  into  it,  and  shot  him  through  the  head.  They 
then  set  fire  to  the  church,  which  was  a  handsome 
structure,  and  brought  away  the  plate  and  furniture  of 
the  altar,  with  the  devotional  banner,  as  trophies  of 
their  victory.  Eighty  of  the  Indians  were  killed  in  this 
attack,  and  three  English  captives  rescued. 

The  fate  of  Norridgewock  struck  great  terror  into 
the  savages,  and  they  no  longer  thought  themselves 
safe  at  any  of  their  former  places  of  abode,  but  occu 
pied  them  as  resting-places  only,  when  they  were 
scouting  or  hunting.  This  successful  undertaking,  and 
the  large  premium  offered  for  scalps,  brought  several 
volunteer  companies  into  the  field.'  In  December,  Cap 
tain  Lovewell,  with  thirty  men,  made  an  excursion  to 
the  north  of  Lake  Winnipiseogee.  They  discovered  an 
Indian  wigwam,  in  which  were  a  man  and  a  boy. 
They  killed  and  scalped  the  man,  and  brought  the  boy 
alive  tc  Boston,  where  they  received  the  reward  prom 
ised  by  the  government,  and  a  considerable  gratuity 
besides.  This  company  was  soon  increased  to  seven 
ty,  and  Lovewell  marched  again,  early  in  1725,  toward 
the  head  of  Salmon-Fall  River.  Their  provision  fall 
ing  short,  thirty  of  them,  selected  by  lot,  were  dis 
missed,  and  returned  home.  The  remaining  forty 
continued  their  march  till  the  20th  of  February,  when 
they  discovered  a  track,  which  they  followed  till  they 
saw  a  smoke,  just  before  sunset ;  from  this  they  judged 
that  the  enemy  were  encamped  for  the  night.  They 
kept  themselves  concealed  till  after  midnight,  when 
they  cautiously  advanced,  and  discovered  ten  Indians 


186  INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND. 

asleep  round  a  fire,  by  the  side  of  a  frozen  pond. 
Lovewell  now  determined  to  make  sure  work,  and, 
stationing  his  men  conveniently,  ordered  five  of  them 
to  fire  in  rapid  succession,  and  the  remainder  to  re 
serve  their  shot.  He  gave  the  signal  by  discharging  his 
own  gun,  which  killed  two  Indians  ;  and  the  men,  firing 
according  to  order,  despatched  five  more  on  the  spot. 
The  remaining  three  started  up  from  their  sleep,  but 
two  of  them  were  immediately  shot  dead  by  the  re 
serve,  and  the  other  was  wounded.  He  attempted  to 
escape  across  the  pond,  but  was  seized  by  a  dog,  who 
held  him  fast  until  the  English  came  up  and  despatch 
ed  him.  Thus,  in  the  space  of  a  few  minutes,  the 
whole  party  was  destroyed,  and  an  attempt  against 
the  frontiers  of  New  Hampshire  prevented  ;  —  for  these 
Indians  were  marching  from  Canada,  well  furnished 
with  new  guns  and  plenty  of  ammunition  for  that  ob 
ject  ;  they  had  also  a  number  of  spare  blankets,  moc 
casins,  and  snow-shoes,  for  the  use  of  the  prisoners 
whom  they  expected  to  take.  The  pond  near  which 
these  events  transpired  is  now  known  as  Lovewell's 
Pond.  The  company,  with  their  ten  scalps  stretched 
on  hoops,  in  the  Indian  fashion,  marched  to  Boston  in 
great  triumph,  and  received  their  bounty  out  of  the 
public  treasury.  The  English  spoke  of  this  enterprise 
with  great  exultation,  and  pronounced  it  a  capital  ex 
ploit.  In  the  light  of  the  present  day,  the  barbarity 
of  giving  a  premium  for  scalps  would  be  justly  cen 
sured. 

This  brilliant  success,  as  it  was  then  termed,  encour 
aged  Lovewell  to  his  last  and  fatal  undertaking.  Early 
in  March,  he  again  took  the  field,  intending  to  attack  the 


INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND.  187 

Indian  villages  of  Piguacket,  on  the  upper  part  of  the 
Saco,  where  a  formidable  tribe  had  anciently  a  settled 
habitation,  though  at  this  period  they  only  paid  occa 
sional  visits  there.  His  company  consisted  of  forty-six 
men,  including  a  chaplain  and  a  surgeon.  Two  of  them 
became  lame,  and  returned.  Another  falling  sick, 
they  halted,  and  built  a  stockade  fort  on  the  west  side 
of  Great  Ossipee  Lake,  partly  for  the  accommodation 
of  the  sick  man,  and  partly  for  a  stronghold  in  case  of 
any  reverse.  Here  the  surgeon  was  left  with  the  in 
valid  man,  and  eight  of  the  company  for  a  guard. 
Love  well,  with  his  thirty-four  men,  advanced  to  the 
northward  about  twenty-two  miles,  and  encamped  on 
the  shore  of  a  pond  in  the  evening  of  the  7th  of  May. 
Early  the  next  morning,  while  the  men  were  at  prayer, 
they  heard  the  report  of  a  gun,  and  discovered  an  In 
dian  about  a  mile  distant,  standing  on  a  point  of  land 
jutting  out  into  the  water.  They  had  been  alarmed 
during  the  night  by  noises  round  their  camp,  which 
they  imagined  were  made  by  Indians,  and  now  sus 
pected  that  the  one  whom  they  saw  was  placed  there 
to  decoy  them,  and  that  a  body  of  the  enemy  was 
in  their  front.  A  council  of  war  was  held,  and  they 
decided  to  go  forward,  and,  by  marching  round  the 
pond,  to  gain  the  spot  where  the  Indian  stood.  That 
they  might  be  ready  for  action,  they  disencumbered 
themselves  of  their  packs,  and  left  them,  without  any 
guard,  in  a  pine  plain,  where  the  trees  were  too  thinly 
set  to  hide  them. 

Lovewell,  on  his  march,  had  crossed  a  carrying- 
place,  by  which  two  parties  of  Indians,  consisting  of 
forty-one  warriors,  commanded  by  the  noted  chiefs 


188  INDIANS    OF    NEW   ENGLAND. 

Paugus  and  Wahvva,  who  had  been  on  a  scout  down 
the  Saco,  were  returning  to  the  lower  village  of 
Piguacket,  about  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  pond. 
Having  fallen  on  Lovewell's  track,  they  followed  it, 
and  came  at  last  to  the  baggage,  which  they  carried  off. 
On  counting  the  packs,  they  found  the  number  of  the 
English  to  be  less  than  that  of  their  own  force.  They 
therefore  placed  themselves  in  ambush  to  attack  them 
on  their  return.  The  Indian  who  had  stood  on  the 
point,  and  was  returning  to  the  village  by  another  path, 
met  the  English  and  received  their  fire,  which  he  re 
turned,  and  wounded  Lovewell  and  another  person  with 
small  shot.  By  a  second  fire  the  Indian  was  killed, 
and  they  took  his  scalp.  Seeing  no  other  enemy,  the 
company  returned  toward  their  packs,  and,  while  they 
were  searching  for  them,  the  Indians  sprang  from  their 
ambush  and  ran  towards  them  with  a  horrid  yell.  A 
smart  firing  commenced  on  both  sides,  and  Lovewell 
was  speedily  slain,  with  eight  others.  Several  of  the 
Indians  fell,  but,  being  superior  in  numbers,  they  were 
by  no  means  daunted,  and  endeavoured  to  surround  the 
English,  who,  perceiving  their  design,  retreated,  hop 
ing  to  gain  a  shelter  behind  a  point  of  rocks  and  some 
large  pine-trees  on  the  shore  of  the  pond.  Here  they 
took  their  station,  having  on  their  right  the  mouth  of  a 
brook,  and  on  their  left  the  rocky  point,  —  their  front 
being  partly  covered  by  a  deep  bog,  with  the  pond  in 
their  rear. 

The  battle  now  recommenced.  The  Indians  poured 
in  their  fire  from  front  and  flank,  and  had  so  much  the 
advantage  of  position,  that,  by  a  little  skill,  they  might 
have  shot  down  every  man  of  the  English,  or  com- 


INDIANS    OF    NEW   ENGLAND.  189 

pelled  them  to  surrender  at  discretion,  as  they  were 
totally  unahle  to  extricate  themselves,  and  were  entirely 
destitute  of  provisions.  Under  the  conduct  of  Lieutenant 
Wyman,  the  latter  kept  up  their  fire,  and  maintained  a 
resolute  countenance  the  remainder  of  the  day,  —  the 
action  having  begun  a  little  after  ten  in  the  morning. 
The  chaplain  and  three  others  were  mortally  wounded. 
The  Indians  invited  them  to  surrender  by  holding  up 
ropes  to  them,  and  endeavoured  to  intimidate  them  by 
hideous  yells  ;  but  they  determined  to  die.  rather  than 
yield,  and,  by  their  welt  directed  fire,  the  number  of 
the  savages  was  reduced,  and  their  cries  became  faint 
er,  till,  just  before  night,  they  quitted  their  advanta 
geous  ground,  carrying  off*  their  killed  and  wounded, 
and  leaving  the  dead  bodies  of  Love  well  and  his  men 
unscalped.  The  shattered  remnants  of  this  brave  com 
pany,  on  coming  together,  found  three  of  their  num 
ber  unable  to  move  from  the  spot,  eleven  wounded, 
but  able  to  march,  and  nine  unhurt.  It  was  melan 
choly  to  leave  their  dying  companions  behind,  but 
there  was  no  possibility  of  removing  them.  One  of 
these,  Ensign  Robbins,  desired  them  to  lay  his  gun 
beside  him  loaded,  that,  if  the  Indians  should  return 
before  his  death,  he  might  be  able  to  kill  one  more. 

After  the  rising  of  the  moon,  those  who  were  able 
quitted  the  fatal  spot,  and  directed  their  march  toward 
the  fort  where  the  surgeon  and  guard  had  been  left.  To 
their  great  surprise,  they  found  it  abandoned.  In  the 
beginning  of  the  action,  one  man  had  deserted  and  fled 
to  the  fort,  where,  in  the  style  of  Job's  messengers,  he 
informed  them  of  LovewelPs  death  and  the  defeat  of 
the  whole  company,  upon  which  they  made  the  best 


190  INDIANS    OF    NEW    ENGLAND. 

of  their  way  home,  leaving  a  quantity  of  provisions, 
which  proved  a  seasonable  relief  to  the  retreating  sur 
vivors.  From  this  place  they  endeavoured  to  get 
home.  Lieutenant  Farwell,  and  the  chaplain,  who  had 
the  journal  of  the  march  in  his  pocket,  and  one  other, 
perished  in  the  woods,  for  want  of  a  dressing  for  their 
wounds.  The  others,  after  enduring  the  most  severe 
hardships,  reached  the  settlements,  one  after  another. 
There  were  no  white  residents  within  fifty  miles  of  the 
scene  of  the  battle. 

A  party  from  the  New  Hampshire  frontier  was  or 
dered  out  to  bury  the  dead.  Fourteen  bodies  were 
found,  which  were  interred,  and  their  names  carved 
on  the  trees.  Three  Indian  graves  were  discovered 
and  opened  ;  one  of  them  contained  the  body  of  the 
warrior-chief,  Paugus.  Tracks  of  blood  were  traced 
to  a  great  distance  from  the  scene  of  action,  but  the 
exact  loss  of  the  enemy  never  was  known.  After 
this  battle,  the  Indians  abandoned  the  neighbourhood 
of  Piguacket,  and  did  not  return  till  the  war  was  over. 

A  doggerel  ballad,  on  the  subject  of  "  Lovewell's 
Fight,"  made  its  appearance  the  same  year  that  these 
events  happened,  and  was  for  a  long  time  very  popular 
in  New  England.  As  the  reader  may  wish  to  see  a 
specimen  of  it,  we  quote  the  opening  stanza,  which  is 
as  follows. 

"  Of  worthy  Captain  Lovewell  I  purpose  now  to  sing, 
How  valiantly  he  served  his  country  and  his  king. 
He  and  his  valiant  soldiers  did  range  the  woods  full  wide, 
And  hardships  they  endured  to  quell  the  Indian's  pride." 

We  add  the  sixteenth  stanza,  as  it  notices  a  striking 
circumstance. 


INDIANS    OF   NEW   ENGLAND.  191 

"  Our  worthy  Captain  Lovewell  among  themJhere  did  die. 
They  killed  Lieutenant  Robbins,  and  wounded  good  young 

Frye, 

Who  was  our  English  chaplain  ;  he  many  Indians  slew, 
And  some  of  them  he  scalped,  when  bullets  round  him  flew." 

The  following  winter,  four  chiefs  came  to  Boston  to 
ratify  the  treaty  which  followed  these  hostilities.  The 
government  of  the  colonies  prohibited  all  private  traffic 
with  the  Indians,  as  it  had  been  the  cause  of  many 
troubles.  Truck-houses  were  established  in  convenient 
places,  at  which  they  were  supplied  with  all  the  neces 
saries  of  life  on  advantageous  terms.  Though  the 
government  was  a  loser  by  the  trade,  this  was  deemed 
the  most  economical  method  of  preserving  peace,  and 
it  seems  fully  to  have  accomplished  its  purpose. 

The  natives  throughout  the  New  England  provinces, 
now  thinned  and  weakened,  while  the  English  had 
gained  strength  and  extended  their  settlements  in  every 
direction,  made  no  more  serious  attempts  upon  the 
peace  of  the  country.  In  the  French  wars,  even  down 
to  the  period  just  preceding  the  Revolution,  it  is  true 
that  incursions  were  occasionally  made,  but  they  pro 
duced  no  lasting  results. 

There  are  few  Indians  now  remaining  in  the  New 
England  States.  A  small  number  of  Mohegans  still 
reside  in  the  vicinity  of  Norwich,  Connecticut,  where 
they  have  a  neat  little  church,  and  a  missionary  has 
labored  among  them  with  some  success.  A  few  Pe- 
nobscot  Indians,  too,  are  found  in  Maine,  and  here  and 
there,  in  other  places,  may  be  met  one  or  more  of  the 
descendants  of  the  aborigines  ;  but  they  are  like  the  last 
scattered  leaves  of  autumn,  —  withered,  decaying,  and 
frozen  by  the  wintry  blasts  ;  spring  finds  them  not  again. 


THE  FIVE  NATIONS,  &c. 


THIS  noted  confederacy  consisted  of  the  Mohawks, 
Oneidas,  Onondagas,  Cayugas,  and  Senecas.  The 
name  given  them,  by  the  French  writers,  is  the  Iro- 
quois.  Each  nation  was  divided  into  three  tribes  or 
families,  distinguished  by  their  ensigns,  as  the  Tortoise, 
the  Bear,  and  the  Wolf.  Their  original  seat  was  the 
island  of  Montreal  and  its  vicinity.  Many  years  be 
fore  the  French  discovered  Canada,  they  employed 
themselves  in  the  peaceful  pursuits  of  agriculture. 
The  Adirondacks,  who  then  dwelt  about  300  miles 
from  Trois  Rivieres,  where  the  Ottawas  afterwards 
lived,  pursued  hunting,  and  exchanged  their  venison 
for  the  corn  raised  by  the  Five  Nations. 

The  Adirondacks,  or,  as  they  are  more  frequently 
called  by  the  French,  the  Algonquins,  despised  the 
Five  Nations,  as  a  weak  people,  occupied  with  business 
fit  only  for  women.  But  on  a  certain  occasion,  their 
game  failed,  and  they  employed  some  of  the  young  men 
of  the  Five  Nations  to  assist  them  in  hunting.  These 
soon  became  expert  and  capable  of  enduring  fatigue 
beyond  the  Adirondacks  themselves.  The  latter  conse 
quently  became  jealous  of  them,  and,  fearing  that  they 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC.  193 

would  throw  off  the  yoke  to  which  they  were  subjected, 
murdered  them  in  cold  blood.  Not  having  any  serious 
fears  of  the  resentment  of  so  unwarlike  a  people,  they 
ordered  a  small  compensation  to  be  paid  to  the  Five 
Nations,  whom  they  looked  upon  as  incapable  of 
avenging  the  atrocity  which  had  been  perpetrated. 
These  were,  however,  greatly  exasperated,  and  resolved 
to  be  revenged.  The  Adirondacks,  when  informed  of 
this,  deemed  it  a  good  occasion  to  subject  them  to 
their  sway,  and  accordingly  attacked  them.  The  Five 
Nations  at  first  defended  themselves  faintly  against 
their  fierce  and  warlike  assailants,  and  were  forced  to 
leave  their  own  country,  and  fly  to  the  shores  of  the 
Lakes.  This  occurred"  about  the  beginning  of  the 
seventeenth  century.  Here  they  applied  themselves  to 
the  exercise  of  arms,  and  became  daily  more  and  more 
expert  in  the  use  of  them.  Their  sachems,  to  remove 
the  dread  of  the  Adirondacks,  entertained  by  their 
people,  and  to  inspire  them  with  some  degree  of  con 
fidence,  first  led  them  against  the  Satanas,  who  then 
occupied  what  are  now  the  central  parts  of  the  State 
of  New  York.  They  subdued  these,  and  drove  them 
out  of  the  country,  to  the  banks  of  the  Mississippi. 

Having  thus  proved  their  courage,  the  Five  Na 
tions  next  successfully  withstood  the  whole  force  of 
the  Adirondacks.  They  then  carried  the  war  into 
the  heart  of  their  country,  and  forced  them  to  leave 
it,  and  fly  towards  Quebec.  The  Adirondacks  were 
now  joined  by  the  French,  who  had  just  commenced 
their  settlements  in  Canada.  The  combatants  met 
at  Corlaer's  Lake,  since  called,  after  the  French 
commander,  Lake  Champlain.  The  Five  Nations  had 
13 


194  THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC. 

never  seen  fire-arms,  and  the  French,  keeping  them 
selves  concealed  till  the  Indians  were  engaged,  rose 
suddenly  up  and  poured  a  deadly  volley  upon  them. 
Panic-struck  at  the  fearful  character  and  deadly  effect 
of  the  attack,  they  fled,  with  great  loss,  from  the  field. 
By  the  influence  of  the  French,  the  Hurons  and 
other  neighbouring  nations  now  joined  in  the  war 
against  the  Five  Nations.  The  Adirondacks,  thus  re 
inforced,  and  having  been  furnished  with  fire-arms, 
proposed  utterly  to  destroy  their  enemies.  But  their 
young  men,  fond  of  adventure,  and  refusing  obedience 
to  their  captains,  often  attacked  the  foe  rashly  ;  and  the 
latter,  observing  this,  soon  began  to  profit  by  it.  They 
sent  out  small  parties,  who,  meeting  greater  numbers 
of  the  enemy,  retreated,  while  the  Adirondacks  pursued 
with  fury,  and  carelessly  suffered  themselves  to  be 
drawn  into  ambuscades.  Thus  many  of  them  were 
cut  off  with  little  loss  to  the  victors.  In  this  manner 
the  Adirondacks  were  wasted  away,  while  the  prac 
tice  of  the  Five  Nations,  of  adopting  into  their  tribes 
the  prisoners  taken  from  the  Satanas,  increased  their 
strength  and  numbers. 

The  Five  Nations  appear  to  have  delighted  in  strat 
agem,  and  amused  the  Adirondacks,  and  the  Hurons, 
their  allies,  by  messages  to  the  French,  pretending  to 
wish  for  peace,  and  to  have  some  priests  come  among 
them.  When,  accordingly,  some  Jesuits  came,  they 
kept  them  as  hostages,  in  order  to  force  the  French  to 
remain  neutral  in  their  wars  with  the  Adirondacks. 
They  then  attacked  and  defeated  the  latter  within  two 
leagues  of  Quebec,  and,  had  they  known  its  weak 
ness,  might  have  destroyed  even  the  French  colony. 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,   ETC.  195 

The  allies  of  the  Adirondacks,  now  struck  with  ter 
ror,  fled  in  different  directions.  Soon  after,  the  Five 
Nations  collected  1,000  or  1,200  men,  and  set  out  to 
pay  a  visit  to  the  governor  of  Canada.  On  their  way, 
they  met  Piskaret,  captured  him,  and,  learning  from 
him  that  the  Adirondacks  were  divided  into  two  bod 
ies,  they  fell  upon  them  and  cut  them  to  pieces.  When 
the  French  first  settled  in  Canada,  the  Adirondacks 
had  1,500  warriors  within  a  league  of  Quebec,  but, 
after  this  last  battle,  they  never  possessed  any  conse 
quence  as  a  nation. 

Piskaret,  whom  we  have  just  mentioned,  was  a  great 
warrior,  and  famous  for  his  exploits  and  stratagems. 
On  one  occasion,  he  set  out  for  the  country  of  the 
Five  Nations,  about  the  time  of  the  spring  thaws.  He 
put  the  back  part  of  his  snow-shoes  forward,  and  went 
along  the  ridges  and  high  grounds,  where  the  snow 
was  melted,  so  that  he  might  leave  no  track.  Corning 
near  a  village  of  the  Five  Nations,  he  hid  himself  till 
night.  Then  stealing  into  a  wigwam,  he  murdered  the 
whole  family  while  asleep,  scalped  them,  and  again  hid 
himself.  The  next  day,  the  murderer  was  sought  for 
in  vain.  At  midnight,  he  came  out  and  repeated  his 
bloody  deed.  The  third  night,  a  watch  was  kept. 
Piskaret  bundled  up  his  scalps,  and  then  stole  on  till 
he  discovered  an  Indian  asleep.  Him  he  despatched 
at  a  blow,  but,  being  discovered,  he  was  obliged  to  flee. 
As  he  was  the  swiftest  of  all  the  Indians,  he  suffered 
his  pursuers  to  approach  him,  and  then  darted  away. 
In  the  evening,  he  hid  himself  and  lay  down  ;  his  pur 
suers  also  stopped  and  went  to  sleep.  Piskaret  turned 
about,  knocked  them  on  the  head,  scalped  them,  and 


196 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC. 


returned  home.     Such  were  the  bloody  feats  which 
secured  renown  among  the  Indians. 

The  Five  Nations  having  thus  established  their  as 
cendency  over  the  adjacent  tribes,  rapidly  advanced  in 
power.  Though  checked  by  the  French,  they  still 
extended  their  sway  in  every  direction,  and  especially 
towards  the  south.  They  conquered  the  whole  territory 
of  the  Delawares,  or  Lenapes,  and  obliged  them  to  put 
themselves  under  their  protection.  They  spread  their 
victorious  bands  over  all  the  remote  parts  of  Virginia, 
and  down  as  far  as  the  mouth  of  the  Ohio,  while 
they  subdued  the  nations  eastward  to  Connecticut  River. 
They  often  travelled  singly,  or  in  small  parties,  three 
or  four  hundred  miles,  and  lurked  about  the  villages  of 
their  enemies  to  shed  blood,  and  revenge  the  real  01 
imputed  wrongs  of  their  friends.  Their  sway  at  length 
extended  to  South  Carolina  on  the  south,  and  on  the 
west  to  the  Mississippi,  a  tract  of  territory  1,200  miles 
in  length,  and  600  in  breadth.  In  1667,  they  formed 
a  treaty  with  the  governor  of  Maryland,  which  was 
afterwards  broken,  and  troubles,  both  with  that  colony 
and  Virginia,  ensued.  At  last,  Lord  Howard,  as  agent 
of  the  latter,  met  the  chiefs  of  the  tribes  at  Albany, 
and,  after  a  long  conference,  a  peace,  which  was  well 
observed  on  both  sides,  was  entered  into  by  the  con 
tracting  parties. 

In  1684,  the  French  made  great  efforts  to  detach  the 
Five  Nations  from  the  English.  They  invited  them  to 
a  conference  at  an  appointed  place.  The  Onondagas 
complied,  and  sent  one  of  their  sachems  and  thirty  war 
riors  ;  the  Senecas  and  others  refused.  The  French 
commander,  after  reproaching  the  Indians,  threatened 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC.  197 

them  with  vengeance,  if  they  did  not  conform  to  his 
views  ;  but  the  sachem  replied  boldly,  and  avowed  his 
determination  to  preserve  peace,  and  the  Frenchman 
went  home  disappointed  and  enraged. 

The  Five  Nations,  soon  after  this,  subdued  the  tribe 
of  the  Illinois,  who  had  fought  against  them,  and  then 
prepared  to  go  against  the  Miamis.  The  French  de 
termined  to  support  their  allies,  and  sent  an  order  to 
all  the  Indians  around  Michilimackinac  to  assemble  at 
Niagara  and  join  them  in  an  attack  on  the  Senecas. 
The  Potawatomies  and  others  assembled  at  the  place 
of  rendezvous  ;  but  here  the  Ottawas  sought  to  divert 
them  from  the  enterprise,  not  being  willing  to  lose  a 
gainful  trade  they  now  enjoyed  with  the  English. 
After  various  preparations,  the  French,  with  their  In 
dian  allies,  marched  toward  the  Seneca  towns.  The 
warriors  of  the  latter  tribe  were,  however,  on  the  alert. 
Five  hundred  or  more  of  them  lay  in  ambush,  while 
the  French  scouts  passed  within  pistol-shot,  and,  not 
seeing  them,  reported  that  they  could  not  find  the 
enemy.  The  French  pressed  boldly  forward,  but, 
when  they  were  about  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  their 
village,  the  Senecas  suddenly  rose  upon  them  with  a 
discharge  of  their  fire-arms,  attended  by  the  appalling 
war-whoop.  This  threw  the  militia,  as  well  as  the 
regular  troops,  into  a  fright,  and  such  was  the  confu 
sion,  that  they  fired  on  one  another.  The  Senecas, 
perceiving  their  disorder,  fell  upon  them,  till  the  French 
Indians,  at  last,  rallied  and  repulsed  them.  This  action 
so  dispirited  the  French  commander,  that  he  could  not 
be  induced  immediately  to  pursue  his  object ;  he  halted 
till  the  next  day,  when  he  marched  forward  to  burn  the 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC. 

village.  But  he  now  found  that  the  Senecas  had  al 
ready  laid  it  in  ashes  and  disappeared.  After  destroy 
ing  two  other  villages,  and  the  corn  he  found  there,  he 
returned  home  to  Canada. 

Instigated  by  new  causes  of  dissatisfaction,  the  Five 
Nations  invaded  Canada  with  a  large  force,  and  pushed 
the  war  with  such  vigor  as  to  take  Montreal  and  lay  it 
in  ashes.     One  thousand   of  the   French  are  said  to 
have  been  killed,  and  twenty-six  taken  prisoners,  with 
the  loss  of  only  three  men  on  the  part  of  the  Indians, 
who  got  drunk  and  remained  behind.     Had  they  un 
derstood  the  feeble  condition  of  the  French,  and  been 
relieved  from  the  influence  of  the  priests  that  were 
among  them,  especially  the  Oneidas,  Onondagas,  and 
Cayugas,  the    French   settlements   in   Canada   would 
probably  have  been  totally  ruined. 
^  Influenced    by    the   advice    of  an   English   officer, 
Colonel  Dogan,  in  whom  they  confided,  the  Five  Na 
tions,  so  far  as  they  could,  formed  treaties  with  the 
Western  Indians.     At  this  period,  war  between  the 
English  and  the  French  again  broke  out,  and  Count 
Frontenac,  the  new  governor  of  Canada,  sent  a  message 
to  the  tribes  by  a  sachem  who  had  been  a  prisoner  and 
had  been  carried  to  France,  but  who  had  just  returned 
with  the  Count.     The  object  of  this  mission  was  to 
invite  the  Five  Nations  to  a  conference,  for  the  pur 
pose  of  making  peace.     After  holding  a  general  coun 
cil,  consisting  of  eighty  sachems,  at  Onondaga,  on  the 
27th  of  December,  1689,  at  which  they  requested  the 
mayor  of  Albany  to  be   present,  in  order  to  advise 
them,  they  sent  to  Count  Frontenac  their  answer.    This 
was  quite  chajacteristic.     Its  conclusion  ran  thus  :  — 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC.  199 

"  Yonondio,"  (the  name  they  always  gave  the  French 
governor,)  "  you  desire  to  speak  with  us  at  Cadarackui. 
Do  n't  you  know  that  your  fire  there  is  extinguished  ? 
It  is  extinguished  with  blood.  You  must  send  home 
the  prisoners  in  the  first  place. 

"  We  let  you  know  that  we  have  made  peace  with 
the  Wagunhas  [probably  the  Ottawas].  You  are  not 
to  think  that  we  have  laid  down  the  axe  because  we 
return  no  answer  ;  we  intend  no  such  thing.  Our  far- 
fighters  shall  continue  the  war  till  our  countrymen  re 
turn.  When  our  brother  is  returned,  then  we  will 
speak  to  you  of  peace." 

The  Five  Nations  were  now  engaged  in  frequent 
skirmishes  with  the  French,  whom  they  annoyed  great 
ly  by  their  war-parties,  killing  some,  and  carrying  off 
others  as  prisoners,  sometimes  even  from  the  vicinity 
of  Montreal.  The  Mohawks,  however,  not  finding 
the  English  earnest  in  furnishing  them  aid,  as  they 
had  promised,  began  to  incline  to  make  peace  with  the 
French.  They  accordingly  despatched  some  of  their 
sachems  to  Count  Frontenac  for  this  purpose,  and 
entered  into  a  treaty  with  him.  The  English,  being 
made  aware  of  this,  renewed  their  covenant  with  the 
other  nations,  and  gave  them  presents.  The  Mohawks 
also  renewed  their  alliance  with  the  English  colonies, 
saying,  "  Though  an  angry  dog  has  endeavoured  to 
bite  the  chain  in  pieces,  we  are  resolved  to  keep  it 
firm,  both  in  peace  and  in  war.  We  now  renew  the 
old  chain,  that  so  the  tree  of  peace  and  prosperity  may 
flourish  and  spread  its  roots  through  all  the  country." 

During  the  whole  of  this  war,  the  Five  Nations  re 
mained  faithful  to  the  English  colonies,  notwithstand- 


200  THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC. 

ing  the  intrigues  of  the  French  to  lure  them  over  to 
their  side.  They  contributed  essentially  to  the  protec 
tion  of  our  frontiers,  and  greatly  harassed  the  enemy 
along  the  whole  Canadian  border.  The  contest  drew 
forth  many  acts  of  extraordinary  skill  and  bravery,  on 
both  sides,  as  well  as  others  of  shocking  atrocity.  The 
French  seemed  often  to  forget  their  civilization  in  their 
fury  against  their  savage  foe.  At  last,  the  treaty  of 
Ryswick,  between  England  and  France,  which  termi 
nated  the  war  in  other  quarters,  brought  peace  also  to 
the  Indian  tribes. 

During  Queen  Anne's  War,  the  Five  Nations  were 
prevailed  on  by  the  French,  as  they  refused  their  alli 
ance,  to  stand  neutral,  for  they  could  not  be  induced  to 
make  war  against  the  English.  They  were,  however, 
more  or  less  engaged  in  incursions  into  Virginia,  and 
harassing  the  friendly  Indians  there.  In  1712,  they 
received  into  their  confederacy  the  Tuscaroras,  who 
fled  from  North  Carolina,  as  we  have  related  ;  so  that, 
afterwards,  they  bore  the  title  of  the  Six  Nations.  The 
peace  of  Utrecht,  in  1713,  put  an  end  to  the  hostilities 
between  the  English  and  French.  The  Indians  were 
now,  for  a  number  of  years,  engaged  in  trade,  both  at 
Montreal  and  Albany. 

In  1743,  several  chiefs  of  the  Six  Nations  met  the 
English  commissioners  at  Philadelphia.  They  there 
made  a  cession  of  their  lands  on  both  sides  of  the  Sus- 
quehannah,  in  Pennsylvania,  and,  in  view  of  the  ex 
pected  war  with  the  French,  renewed  their  bond  of 
alliance  with  them.  Similar  meetings  and  treaties  oc 
curred  in  1744,  between  the  Six  Nations  and  the  gov 
ernors  of  Maryland  and  Virginia.  The  Delawares 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC.  201 

were  required  by  the  Six  Nations  to  remove  to  the 
west  side  of  the  River  Delaware,  and  not  to  sell  lands 
hereafter,  "as  they  were  no  better  than  women."  A 
peace  was  made  with  the  Cherokees,  with  whom  they 
were  at  war,  but  not  with  the  Catawbas,  whom  they 
threatened  tvith  their  vengeance,  because  they  did  not 
come  and  join  them  at  the  council.  In  the  year  1746, 
they  met  the  governor  of  New  York  and  renewed 
their  alliances  ;  and,  from  time  to  time,  they  sent  out 
parties  to  harass  the  French,  in  which  they  were  joined- 
by  the  Susquehannah  Indians. 

Subsequently  to  this,  the  Six  Nations,  and  especially 
the  Mohawks,  were  brought  peculiarly  under  the  influ 
ence  of  an  English  officer,  afterwards  celebrated  in 
history  as  Sir  William  Johnson.  Hendrick,  the  re 
nowned  king  of  the  Mohawks,  and  his  warriors,  accom 
panied  their  patron  in  his  various  military  excursions 
against  the  French,  which  terminated  in  the  surren 
der  of  Canada  to  the  English.  The  chief  himself  seal 
ed  his  fidelity  with  his  blood,  having  fallen  at  the 
battle  of  Lake  George.  Many  instances  of  his  sa 
gacity  are  related.  A  council  of  war  having  been 
called,  on  a  certain  occasion,  and  the  proposition  made 
to  send  out  a  detachment  to  meet  the  enemy,  Hen 
drick,  being  consulted,  said,  "  If  they  are  to  fight^  they 
are  too  few  ;  if  they  are  to  be  killed,  too  many." 
Another  proposition  being  made  to  send  out  three  par 
ties,  the  old  chief  took  three  sticks  and  said,  "  Put 
these  together,  and  you  cannot  break  them ;  one  by 
one,  you  can  do  it  easily."  His  sagacity  was  admitted, 
his  advice  followed,  and  the  victory  was  won. 

It  appears  that  this  famous  chief  received  the  title 


202  THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC. 

of  King  ;  the  occasion  is  said  to  have  been  as  follows. 
The  Mohawks  and  the  River  Indians,  called  Mohegans, 
had  a  contest  which  should  have  the  honor  of  naming 
their  king.  Both  nations  gathered  in  their  strength, 
and  met  at  a  place  called  Woton  Island,  in  the  Hud 
son  River,  to  decide  the  question.  A  pitched  battle 
was  fought,  which  lasted  through  the  day.  Towards 
night,  the  Mohawks,  fearing  that  the  Mohegans  were 
likely  to  gain  the  victory,  suddenly  took  to  flight,  and 
gained  another  island.  In  the  evening,  they  kindled  a 
great  number  of  fires,  and  spread  their  blankets  on 
some  bushes,  as  though  they  had  encamped  beneath 
them.  The  Mohegans,  pursuing,  landed  on  the  island 
in  the  night,  and,  imagining  the  Mohawks  to  be  asleep, 
crept  up  as  silently  as  possible,  and  poured  a  heavy 
fire  on  the  spot ;  they  then  rushed  forward  with  their 
knives  and  tomahawks,  raising  their  yells,  and  cutting 
and  slashing  in  every  direction.  At  this  moment,  the 
Mohawks,  who  lay  flat  on  the  ground,  rose  from  their 
ambush  at  a  little  distance,  and  poured  in  a  murderous 
fire  on  their  foes,  whom  they  could  distinguish  by  the 
light  of  the  fires.  Most  of  them  were  killed,  or  borne 
down  and  taken  prisoners.  A  treaty  was  then  made, 
by  which  the  Mohawks  were  to  appoint  the  king,  and 
the  Mohegans  were  to  hold  them  in  reverence,  and  call 
them  "  Uncle."  Hendrick  was  the  monarch  first 
named  by  the  Mohawks.  He  lived  to  a  great  age,  and 
was  killed,  as  has  been  related,  at  the  battle  of  Lake 
George. 

The  Six  Nations  were  accustomed  now  to  make 
temporary  removals  from  place  to  place,  paying  visits 
to  the  Miamis,  Hurons,  and  Wyandots.  Some  of  them 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC.  203 

also  resided  on  the  Susquehannah,  in  Pennsylvania,  and 
received  instruction  from  Count  Zinzendorf  and  the 
Moravians.  To  this  party  belonged  the  Cayuga  chief, 
Shikellimus,  the  father  of  Logan,  the  Mingo  chief, 
whose  sorrows  and  whose  eloquence  have  become  so 
celebrated.  The  Mohawks  accompanied  Sir  William 
Johnson  in  his  expedition  to  Niagara,  in  1759,  and 
contributed  to  the  victory  gained  over  the  French, 
when,  after  the  death  of  General  Prideaux,  the  com 
mand  devolved  on  Sir  William.  In  this  battle,  their 
afterwards  celebrated  chief,  Brant,  though  but  a  youth, 
greatly  distinguished  himself. 

The  Mohawks  received  Protestant  missionaries  among 
them,  as  the  Oneidas,  Onondagas,  and  Cayugas  had 
received  the  French  Catholics.  They  had  churches 
built,  and  some  of  their  young  men  were  sent  into 
Connecticut,  to  be  educated  there  under  the  care  of 
Dr.  Wheelock. 

In  the  fierce  wars  which  broke  out  at  the  West,  of 
which  we  have  elsewhere  given  an  account,  the  Six 
Nations,  in  general,  took  no  active  part,  though  some 
of  the  Cayugas,  and  the  warriors  on  the  banks  of  the 
Susquehannah  and  Shamokin,  occasionally  became 
parties  to  therri.  Still,  the  feelings  of  the  Six  Nations 
were  considerably  alienated  from  the  English,  as  well 
as  those  of  the  whole  Indian  race,  unless  we  may 
except  the  Oneidas.  The  reason  of  this  probably  was, 
that  the  English  did  not  take  equal  pains  with  the 
French  to  win  them  with  presents.  Sir  William  John 
son's  influence  with  them,  however,  was  very  great, 
and,  so  long  as  he  lived,  they  looked  up  to  him  as 
their  protector  and  father.  He  died  just  before  the 


204 


THE    FIVE    NATIONS,    ETC. 


commencement  of  the  American  War  of  Independence. 
His  sons,  Sir  John  Johnson  and  Colonel  Guy  Johnson, 
—  the  former  of  whom  was  the  Indian  agent  for  the 
British  government,  —  succeeded  to  his  influence,  and 
their  interference  was  the  cause  of  many  interruptions 
of  the  peace  and  happiness  of  the  settlers  in  New  York 
and  Pennsylvania  during  the  great  struggle  for  free 
dom.  But  the  account  of  these  transactions,  with  the 
further  history  of  the  Six  Nations,  must  be  reserved 
.for  another  chapter. 


THE  SIX  NATIONS. 


ON  the  breaking  out  of  the  War  of  Independence, 
the  Six  Nations  were  in  alliance  with  the  British  gov 
ernment,  and  under  the  influence  of  Sir  John  and 
Colonel  Guy  Johnson.  As  before  intimated,  they  were 
led  to  take  part  in  the  hostilities  against  the  colonies. 
The  Indians  were  now  living  on  the  extended  tract  of 
country  up  the  Mohawk  valley,  and  reaching  beyond 
the  small  lakes  in  the  western  part  of  the  State  of  New 
York.  The  Mohawks  had  their  principal  seat  in  the 
vicinity  of  Johnstown  ;  that  of  the  Oneidas  was  near 
Lake  Oneida,  and  called  Oneida  Castle  ;  the  Onondagas 
dwelt  in  the  country  around  the  lake  which  bears 
their  name.  Onondaga  Castle,  as  it  was  called,  was 
the  centre  of  the  confederacy,  and  here  was  the  grand 
council-house  where  the  council-fire  was  kept  perpetu 
ally  burning.  The  Cayugas  were  still  further  west, 
near  Lake  Cayuga,  and  the  Senecas  beyond  them. 

These  nations  had  villages  of  well  constructed  huts, 
fine  orchards,  and  fruitful  fields.  Through  the  influ 
ence  of  the  English,  they  had  considerably  advanced 
in  civilization,  and  had  gathered  round  them  many 
comforts.  The  colonists  felt  a  deep  interest  as  to  the 


206 


THE    SIX    NATIONS. 


part  which  these  nations  were  to  take  in  the  opening 
contest ;  and  negotiations  were  early  entered  into  with 
them,  to  secure,  if  not  their  alliance  and  friendship,  at 
least   their   neutrality.      This    was,   undoubtedly,   the 
wisest  position  for  the  Six  Nations  to  take,  and   the 
Oneidas,  influenced  by  the  persuasions  of  their  good 
missionary,  Kirkland,  agreed  to  adopt  it.    The  other 
nations,  no  doubt,  might   have   been   induced   to   do 
the  same,  had  it  not   been    for  the  great  weight  of 
Sir  John  Johnson's  influence  with  them,  enforced  by 
the  presents  received  from   the  British   governor  of 
Canada,  while  the  colonists  were  poor,  and  unable  to 
win  them,  by  the  same  means,  to  their  cause.     The 
early  successes  of  the  Americans,  however,  kept  them 
quiet  for  a  time,  as  they  were  afraid  to  venture  on 
open  hostilities.    The  Mohawks  met  in  council,  in  1775, 
at  Guy  Park,  the  seat  of  Colonel  Guy  Johnson,  near 
the  Mohawk.    Their  principal  speaker  there  was  Little 
Abraham,  the   brother  of  Hendrick.     Delegates,  also, 
from  Albany  and   Tryon  counties  attended.      These 
expressed  their  desire  to  maintain  friendship  with  the 
inhabitants ;    but   still  the    influence  of  Colonel  John 
son  operated  unfavorably  for  the  interest  of  the  colo 


nies. 


The  Oneidas  and  Tuscaroras,  likewise,  met  at  Ger 
man  Flats,  with  a  committee  from  the  two  counties, 
and  the  pledge  of  neutrality  was  there  given.  Colonel 
Johnson  convened  another  council  soon  after,  compos 
ed  chiefly  of  the  Cayugas  and  Senecas,  the  most  nu 
merous  of  the  Six  Nations.  At  this  meeting,  the  minds 
of  the  Indians  were  seriously  alienated  from  the  Amer 
icans  ;  still,  they  continued  to  receive  the  various  com- 


THE    SIX    NATIONS.  207 

missioners  sent  them  by  Congress,  and  professed  a  de 
termination  to  preserve  a  neutrality  in  the  opening  war. 
The  Mohawk  leader,  at  this  period,  was  Thayandane- 
ca,  or  Joseph  Brant,*  so  famous  in  the  history  of  the 
time.  His  first  active  participation  in  the  contest  was 
in  1776,  on  the  St.  Lawrence,  at  the  battle  of  the  Ce 
dars,  ten  miles  above  Montreal.  He  appeared  there, 
it  is  said,  at  the  head  of  600  Indians,  principally  the 
Caughnawagas,  and  other  tribes  not  including  the  Six 
Nations.  The  fact  was  scarcely  known  at  that  time  by 
the  Americans,  who  yet  hoped  to  be  able  to  preserve 
themselves  from  the  open  attacks  of  so  formidable  a 
foe. 

The  division  of  opinion  and  feeling  among  the 
tribes,  on  the  subject  of  the  part  to  be  taken  in  the 
war,  was  the  cause  of  the  dissolution,  in  1777,  of 
the  confederacy  of  the  Six  Nations,  which  had  so 
long  existed,  and  which  had  contributed  so  much  to 
their  strength  and  civilization.  The  announcement  of 
the  rupture  was  made  in  a  characteristic  manner.  Ad 
dressing  Colonel  Elmore,  the  officer  in  command  at 
Fort  Stanwix,  the  Oneida  chiefs  said,  "  Brother,  we 
are  sent  here  by  the  Oneida  chiefs  in  conjunction 
with  the  Onondagas.  They  arrived  at  our  village  yes 
terday.  They  have  brought  us  the  melancholy  news 
that  the  grand  council- fire  at  Onondaga  is  extin 
guished.  We  have  lost  out  of  their  town  ninety, 
among  whom  are  three  principal  sachems.  We,  the 
remaining  part  of  the  Onondagas,  do  now  inform  our 
brethren  that  there  is  no  longer  a  council-fire  at  the 

*  For  an  account  of  Brant,  see  "  Lives  of  Famous  American 
Indians." 


208  THE    SIX    NATIONS. 

capital  of  the  Six  Nations."  They  then  requested  that 
this  intelligence  should  be  forwarded  to  various  Ameri 
can  officers,  and  also  to  the  Mohawks. 

We  cannot  but  feel  a  melancholy  regret  at  thus 
witnessing  the  dissolution  of  this  ancient  confedera 
tion,  which  had  so  long  bound  them  together  like 
brethren,  and  under  the  influence  of  which  they  had 
made  a  more  rapid  advance  in  improvement  than  any 
of  the  contemporaneous  nations  of  their  race.  Hence 
forth  they  appear  as  separate  tribes,  and  often  in  arms 
against  each  other.  From  this  point  may  be  dated 
their  degeneracy,  which  has  at  last  left  them  but  the 
recollection  of  their  former  greatness,  while  they  are 
scattered  far  from  their  ancient  seats  of  power  and  the 
graves  of  their  sires. 

Our  history,  hereafter,  is  more  especially  concerned 
with  the  Mohawks,  Onondagas,  Cayugas,  and  Senecas. 
A  great  council  was  held  at  Oswego,  in  which  these 
Indians,  with  Brant,  as  their  now  acknowledged  leader, 
took  part  with  other  tribes  from  the  west.  Engage 
ments  to  aid  the  British  cause  were  entered  into,  and, 
consequently,  Colonel  St.  Leger,  about  the  time  that 
General  Burgoyne  began  his  invading  expedition  by 
way  of  Lake  Champlain,  also  set  out  with  his  force  of 
British  and  Canadian  troops  and  Indian  allies  from 
Oswego,  to  cooperate  with  Burgoyne,  by  passing  down 
the  Mohawk  valley,  and  meeting  him  near  Albany. 
As  Fort  Schuyler  lay  in  his  way,  it  was  besieged  on 
the  3d  of  August,  1777.  The  Indians,  concealing 
themselves  behind  clumps  of  trees,  greatly  annoyed 
the  garrison  with  their  fire,  while  throwing  up  parapets 
for  their  defence.  To  relieve  Fort  Schuyler,  thus  as- 


THE    SIX   NATIONS.  209 

sailed,  General  Herkimer  was  sent  forward  from  be 
low.  He  apprised  Colonel  Gansevoort,  the  commander, 
of  his  approach,  and  urged  his  cooperation.  Measures 
for  this  purpose  were  concerted,  but  delay  prevented 
the  union  being  effected  before  the  enemy  made  their 
appearance  at  Oriskany.  Here  a  severe  battle  was 
fought,  and  greatly  to  the  disadvantage  of  the  Ameri 
cans  in  the  outset,  though  they  were  finally  victorious. 
The  Indians  bore  a  prominent  part  in  this  dreadful 
contest.  It  is  said  the  Senecas  were  first  intoxicated, 
and  in  this  condition  lured  into  the  battle,  under  the 
idea  that  they  were  only  to  smoke  their  pipes,  and  see 
the  British  whip  the  rebels.  Their  loss  was  great, 
many  of  them  being  killed  and  wounded.  It  is  sup 
posed,  that,  on  this  occasion,  a  large  force  was  led  on 
by  Brant,  consisting  principally  of  Cayugas,  Senecas, 
arid  Mohawks. 

On  the  3d  of  December  in  the  same  year,  Congress 
made  another  effort  to  divert  the  Six  Nations  from  the 
British  service,  but  without  effect.  The  Indians  now 
wholly  threw  off  the  mask,  and  sent  out  various  parties 
to  attack  the  settlements.  Severe  skirmishes  took  place, 
among  which  may  be  mentioned  the  battle  of  Cobels- 
kill  between  a  party  of  regular  troops  and  Schoharie 
militia,  fifty-two  in  all,  and  a  body  of  Indians  450  strong. 
The  latter  were  victorious,  and  the  Americans  retreat 
ed,  with  the  loss  of  fourteen  killed,  eight  wounded, 
and  two  missing.  The  Indians  then  burned  several 
houses,  destroyed  all  the  horses  and  cattle  which  they 
could  not  drive  away,  and  took  considerable  other 
plunder.  Strolling  bands  were  continually  prowling 
about  the  valley  of  Schoharie  and  other  exposed  situa- 
14 


210  THE    SIX    NATIONS. 

tions,  and  many  persons  were  killed  or  carried  off 
as  captives. 

Among  the  expeditions  of  this  period,  in  which  Brant 
and  the  Six  Nations,  as  they  were  still  called,  though 
embracing  only  four  of  the  tribes,  were  engaged,  in 
alliance  with  the  British,  we  may  particularly  notice 
those  which  resulted  in  the  destruction  of  the  Ger 
man  Flats,  and  the  massacre  at  Cherry  Valley.  Yet 
the  dreadful  scenes  at  this  latter  place,  as  they  are  re 
corded  in  history,  are  too  skocking  for  detail.  Neither 
beauty,  nor  youth,  nor  innocence,  nor  age,  nor  piety, 
formed  the  slightest  protection  against  the  ferocity  of 
the  savages  and  their  worse  than  savage  instigators. 
Every  dwelling  and  barn  in  the  village  was  set  on 
fire,  and  thirty  or  forty  prisoners,  of  all  classes  and 
both  sexes,  were  marched  off,  half- naked  and  shivering, 
through  the  woods,  to  the  distant  post  of  Fort  Niagara. 
On  their  return  to  the  Seneca  country,  the  savages 
celebrated  their  exploits  by  a  dance  of  thanksgiving, 
sacrificing,  as  usual,  a  dog,  and  going  through  the  va 
rious  ceremonies  of  the  scalp-yell,  while  brandishing 
their  knives,  and  recounting  their  achievements  in 
song. 

In  the  autumn  of  1778,  occurred  the  celebrated  mas 
sacre  in  the  beautiful  vale  of  Wyoming.  This  lovely 
spot  was  peopled  with  Germans  and  emigrants  from 
New  England,  who  lived  in  a  state  of  enviable  peace, 
comfort,  and  content.  On  the  first  of  July,  a  force 
of  1,200  British  and  tories,  with  400  Indians,  appeared 
on  the  Susquehannah,  and  began  their  hostile  opera 
tions.  A  brave  resistance  was  made  by  the  settlers, 
but  they  were  at  last  overcome,  and  the  whole  valley 


THE    SIX    NATIONS.  211 

became  a  scene  of  the  most  fearful  desolation.  These 
terrific  events  have  acquired  immortality  from  the  pen 
of  Campbell,  who  has  made  them  his  theme  in  the  pa 
thetic  poem  of  "  Wyoming."  * 

The  year  1779,  which  was  distinguished  by  the  war 
of  the  Western  Indians,  and  the  Shawanese  and  Dela- 
wares  in  the  remote  parts  of  Virginia,  was  also  marked 
by  the  project  of  Brant  for  a  combined  attack  on  the 
friendly  Oneidas.  This  led  to  an  -expedition  to  Onon- 
daga,  by  the  Americans,  against  that  hostile  tribe. 
The  Indians  abandoned  their  villages  on  the  approach 
of  the  enemy,  yet  thirty-three  of  them  were  taken 
prisoners,  and  a  few  slain.  Three  villages,  consisting 
of  nearly  fifty  houses,  were  burned  to  the  ground  ;  a 
large  amount  of  provisions  was  destroyed ;  a  hundred 
muskets  and  rifles,  with  a  considerable  quantity  of  am 
munition,  constituted  part  of  the  booty. 

The  Onondagas  now  breathed  vengeance,  and  300 
of  their  warriors  poured  down  on  the  valley  of  the 
Schoharie,  where  they  plundered  and  burnt  Cobelskill, 
which  had  been  settled  by  some  twenty  families,  since 
its  destruction  a  year  or  two  previous.  The  Mohawks 
also  burst  suddenly  on  the  town  of  Minisink,  and  laid 
waste  the  settlement,  burning,  killing,  and  plundering 
on  every  hand.  A  battle  was  fought  between  them 
and  a  force  sent  from  Goshen  and  its  vicinity.  It  last 
ed  from  11  o'clock,  A.  M.  till  nightfall.  The  Ameri 
cans,  though  superior  in  numbers,  were  defeated,  and 
forced  to  retreat,  owing  to  a  successful  ambuscade 
formed  by  the  Indians,  and  the  failure  of  ammunition. 

*  See  Life  of  Brant,  in  "  Lives  of  Famous  American  In 
dians." 


212  THE    SIX    NATIONS. 

A  vigorous  effort  was  now  made  by  the  Americans 
against  the  Senecas,  the  most  numerous  arid  ferocious 
of  the  Six  Nations.  General  Sullivan,  at  the  head  of 
a  large  force,  penetrated  into  their  country,  and  de 
stroyed  forty  towns  and  villages,  some  of  them  having 
fifty  or  a  hundred  houses,  and  one  as  many  as  a  hun 
dred  and  twenty-eight.  He  also  destroyed  160,000 
bushels  of  corn,  and  many  extensive  fields  and  beauti 
ful  orchards  of  frail,  some  of  them  containing  1,500 
trees.  The  lovely  valley  of  the  Genesee  was  thus 
transformed  into  a  scene  of  desolation,  and  the  nation 
was  left  houseless  and  destitute  to  encounter  the  severe 
winter  of  1780.  Previous  to  his  reaching  the  Seneca 
country,  however,  a  severe  battle  took  place  at  Che- 
mung,  in  which  the  Indians  fought  with  determined 
bravery,  though  they  were  defeated,  and  lost  many  of 
their  warriors.  In  another  engagement  at  Newtown 
the  whole  force  of  the  Senecas  and  the  other  Indians, 
variously  computed  at  from  800  to  1,500,  was  routed 
with  great  slaughter.  A  tragic  scene  occurred  at  this 
period  in  the  cruel  death  of  Lieutenant  Boyd,  belonging 
to  General  Sullivan's  army,  who,  with  a  small  party 
of  men,  was  sent  out  on  a  scouting  expedition.  They 
were  cut  off  by  some  Indians,  and,  being  captured,  the 
lieutenant  was  put  to  death  with  tortures  too  horrible  to 
relate. 

The  destruction  of  the  Seneca  towns  was  not,  how 
ever,  suffered  to  pass  without  retaliation.  The  hostile 
Indians,  aided  by  the  British,  in  1780,  invaded  the  vil 
lages  of  the  Oneidas,  and  entirely  destroyed  their 
castle,  church,  and  dwellings ;  the  Oneidas  were  thus 
driven,  in  their  state  of  desolation,  upon  the  white 


THE    SIX   NATIONS,  ^v 

settlements   for  protection   and   aid. 

government  gave  them  support,  fixing  them,  till  the 

close  of  the  war,  at  Schenectady  and  its  vicinity. 

Numerous  incursions  were  made,  in  the  same  year, 
by  the  Indians,  led  on  by  Brant,  who  burned  Canajo- 
harie,  and  took  fifty-two  prisoners,  besides  killing  sev 
enteen  persons.  One  hundred  and  forty  houses  and 
barns  were  burned;  twenty-four  people  killed,  and 
seventy-three  made  prisoners. 

The  towns  of  Johnstown  and  Caughnawaga  had  re 
cently  been  visited  with  the  vengeance  of  the  Indians, 
in  connection  with  Sir  John  Johnson's  invasion  of  the 
seat  of  his  ancient  residence.  The  Senecas,  however, 
were  still  unsated  with  revenge.  Under  Cornplantcr, 
a  famous  chief  of  that  nation,  joined  by  Brant  and  some 
British  troops,  they  again  made  their  appearance  in 
the  valley  of  the  Schoharie,  with  the  intention  of  com 
pleting  the  work  of  destruction  there.  Some  severe 
skirmishes  ensued,  but  their  purpose  was  in  a  great 
degree  effected,  and  the  whole  region  was  left  deso 
late.  The  Mohawk  valley  became  the  scene  of  a 
similar  incursion.  Here,  however,  the  enemy  was 
overtaken  and  defeated,  in  the  battle  of  Klock's  Farm, 
and  compelled  to  seek  safety  in  flight. 

In  1781,  the  Indians  assisted  at  the  battle  of  Dur- 
lagh,  where,  after  a  spirited  attack  and  resistance,  they 
were  routed,  leaving  nearly  forty  dead  on  the  field. 
In  October,  they  were  also  present  at  the  battle  of 
Johnstown,  and  fought  from  noon  till  sunset,  when 
they  were  finally  forced  to  retreat ;  in  the  pursuit, 
Butler,  the  notorious  leader  in  the  Cherry  Valley  mas 
sacre,  was  killed.  This  was  the  last  expedition  in 


214  THE    SIX    NATIONS. 

which  they  were  engaged  previous  to  the  close  of  the 
American  war. 

In  the  articles  of  peace  between  the  mother  country 
and  her  former  colonies,  no  provision  had  been  made 
for  the  Indian  allies  of  the  English.  The  Mohawks, 
who  had  left  their  own  country,  were  invited  by  the 
Senecas  to  take  a  tract  of  their  territory  ;  but  they 
declined  it,  choosing,  as  they  said,  to  sink  or  swim  with 
the  English.  The  latter  then  assigned  them  a  domain 
on  the  north  side  of  Lake  Ontario,  upon  the  Bay  of 
Quinte.  Not  satisfied,  however,  with  this,  another, 
by  their  request,  six  miles  on  each  side  of  the  Grand 
River,  from  the  mouth  to  its  source,  about  forty  miles 
above  the  Falls  of  Niagara,  was  bestowed  on  them. 

In  the  mean  time,  the  sachems  and  warriors  of  the 
Six  Nations  held  a  conference,  in  1784,  with  the  agents 
of  the  United  States.  There  were  present  represen 
tatives  from  the  Mohawks,  Senecas,  Onondagas,  Cay- 
ugas,  Oneidas,  and  Tuscaroras,  and  Seneca  Abeal,  or 
the  Senecas  of  Cornplanter's  clan,  on  the  Alleghany. 
In  the  treaty  that  was  concluded,  the  Six  Nations  re 
linquished  a  portion  of  their  territory,  and  were  to  be 
secured  in  possession  of  that  which  they  then  occu 
pied.  The  treaty,  however,  did  not  satisfy  the  In 
dians,  and  both  Red  Jacket,*  the  noted  Seneca  orator, 
and  Brant,  the  Mohawk  chief,  were  highly  displeased 
with  its  terms.  A  plan  was  laid  by  the  latter  for 
obtaining  assistance  from  the  English,  in  the  event  of 
a  general  Indian  war  with  the  United  States,  which  he 
evidently  had  in  contemplation. 

*  See  u  Lives  of  Famous  Indians." 


216  THE    SIX    NATIONS. 

Questions  of  boundary  originated  further  difficulties 
between  the  new  republic  and  the  Indians.  In  De 
cember,  1786,  a  grand  council  was  held  at  Huron 
village,  attended  by  the  Six  Nations,  the  Hurons, 
Ottawas,  Miamis,  Shawanese,  Chippewas,  Cherokees, 
Dclawares,  Potawatomies,  and  Wabash  confederates. 
An  address  to  the  United  States  was  agreed  upon, 
pacific  in  its  character,  but  it  closed  by  suggesting, 
that,  in  case  their  views  were  not  concurred  in,  they 
should  take  the  field  to  assert  their  claim  by  arms. 
Another  council  was  held  in  1788,  at  which  Brant  suc 
ceeded  in  making  further  advances  toward  hostilities  ; 
but  the  purpose  of  the  Mohawk  chief  was,  for  the 
present,  defeated  by  the  treaties  of  General  St.  Clair 
with  the  Western  Indians,  at  Fort  Huron,  in  1789. 

In  1791,  the  Six  Nations,  after  the  defeat  of  General 
Harmar  by  the  Western  Indians,  joined  with  them  in 
sending  a  deputation  to  the  British  governor  at  Quebec, 
to  inquire  if  British  aid  could  be  hoped  for  in  the  fur 
ther  prosecution  of  the  war.  They  received,  however, 
but  little  encouragement  from  him,  and  Cornplanter 
used  his  efforts  to  prevent  the  warriors  of  the  Six  Na 
tions  from  taking  part  in  the  contest,  and  to  persuade 
the  Miamis  to  peace.  These,  and  other  efforts,  were 
but  partially  successful ;  for,  in  the  battle  which  soon 
after  took  place,  resulting  in  the  defeat  of  General  St. 
Clair,  it  is  said  one  hundred  and  fifty  Mohawks,  with 
their  leader,  were  engaged. 

Negotiations  were  carried  on,  however,  during  the 
early  part  of  the  year  1792 ;  and  in  the  autumn, 
Cornplanter,  with  forty-eight  chiefs  of  the  Six  Nations, 
thirty  chiefs  and  warriors  of  the  Mohawks  and  Canada 


THE    SIX    NATIONS.  217 

Indians,  with  others  from  tribes  beyond  the  Canadian 
territory,  visited  the  Miamis  and  held  a  council  with 
a  view  to  dissuade  them  from  war.  They  succeeded 
only  so  far  as  to  make  them  agree  to  suspend  hostili 
ties  till  spring,  and  then  meet  the  United  States  in 
council  for  further  deliberation. 

The  account  of  the  transactions  in  Ohio,  connected 
with  these  events,  will  be  found  in  the  history  given  of 
the  Western  Indians.  The  Six  Nations  desired,  if 
possible,  to  bring  about  peace,  and  a  number  of  coun 
cils  were  held,  at  which  they  were  present ;  but  their 
efforts  were  vain.  In  consequence  of  a  claim  being  set 
up  by  Pennsylvania  on  Presque  Isle,  the  Six  Nations 
were  induced  to  assume'  a  hostile  attitude  toward  the 
United  States  in  1794,  and,  probably,  but  for  the  inter 
position  of  Washington,  withholding  Pennsylvania  from 
prosecuting  her  design,  a  collision  would  have  been 
inevitable.  The  defeat  of  the  Western  Indians  by 
General  Wayne  effectually  quieted  the  Six  Nations, 
and  Jay's  treaty  with  Great  Britain  was  soon  followed 
by  a  general  peace. 

The  Six  Nations  continued  to  reside  in  their  respec 
tive  territories.  Missionaries  were  received  among 
them,  the  Bible  was  translated  into  their  language,  and 
numbers  were  converted  to  Christianity.  The  pacific 
feelings  of  this  period  are  indicated  by  the  fact,  that  the 
Mohawks  and  Senecas  met  by  mutual  challenge  for 
athletic  exercises,  especially  for  matches  of  ball  and 
cricket,  which  they  had  learned  from  the  whites,  and 
in  which  they  had  become  remarkably  expert. 

When  the  war  between  the  United  States  and  Eng 
land  broke  out,  in  1812,  the  Mohawks,  led  by  John 


218  THE    SIX    NATIONS. 

Brant,  youngest  son  of  the  great  chief,  took  part  with  the 
latter,  and  were  present  at  a  number  of  battles  fought 
on  the  frontiers.  The  Senecas,  and  other  tribes  resid 
ing  in  the  State  of  New  York,  were  on  the  side  of  the 
Americans.  More  recently,  numbers  of  them  have  re 
moved  to  the  West.  But  a  feeble  remnant  of  the  once 
mighty  confederacy  is  now  to  be  found.  They  have, 
also,  by  repeated  transfers,  become  so  intermingled 
with  other  tribes,  that  it  is  difficult  to  trace  them.  By 
a  recent  report  of  the  Indian  Department,  it  appears, 
that,  west  of  the  Mississippi,  there  are  about  251  Sen 
ecas  from  Sandusky,  and  211  Senecas  and  Shawan- 
ese ;  the  whole  number  of  the  New  York  Indians  is 
estimated  at  3,293.  These  probably  include  the  Onei- 
das,  Onondagas,  and  Cayugas,  with  such  relics  of  other 
tribes  as  may  be  found  within  the  limits  of  the  State 
of  New  York.  By  repeated  cessions  and  sales  of 
former  reservations,  they  are  dispossessing  themselves 
of  their  ancient  abodes  ;  and  the  time  is  not  far  dis 
tant  when  scarcely  a  solitary  Indian  will  be  found 
where  they  once  spread  terror  by  their  numbers  and 
valor,  and  excited  admiration  for  their  heroism  and 
sagacity. 


WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST   OF    THE 
MISSISSIPPI. 


THE  Shawanese,  who  were  joined  with  the  Dela- 
wares  and  other  nations  in  the  Indian  wars  by  which 
the  western  section  of  the  United  States  was  disturb 
ed,  about  the  close  of  the  Revolution,  seem  to  have 
been  a  Southern  nation,  and  are  said  to  have  once  re 
sided  on  the  River  Suwaney,  in  Florida.  They  have  a 
tradition  that  their  ancestors  crossed  the  sea.  The 
Delawares  were  once  numerous  and  powerful.  Yet, 
as  has  been  mentioned,  they  were  conquered  by  the 
great  confederacy  of  the  Five  Nations  ;  so  that,  for  a 
considerable  period  afterwards,  they  make  no  great 
figure  in  history. 

At  the  grand  council  held  at  Philadelphia  in  1742, 
by  the  chiefs  and  warriors  of  the  Six  Nations  and  the 
Delawares,  on  the  one  part,  and  the  English,  on  the 
other,  the  governor  of  Pennsylvania  alleged,  that  Wil 
liam  Penn,  in  his  purchases,  had  bought  certain  lands 
of  the  Delawares,  which  they  still  retained  in  their  pos 
session,  while,  at  the  same  time,  the  Six  Nations  claim 
ed  the  ownership.  He  reminded  the  chiefs  of  the  Six 
Nations,  that,  as  they  required  him  to  remove  the 
whites  who  intruded  on  their  lands,  the  Six  Nations 


220       WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

were  under  a  similar  obligation  to  remove  the  Indians 
from  the  lands  of  which  the  English  had  acquired  the 
right  by  purchase. 

The  old  chief,  Canassatego,  after  rebuking  the  Del 
awares  sharply  for  their  dishonesty  and  duplicity,  in 
selling  land  they  did  not  own  and  still  retaining  it 
in  their  possession,  taunted  them  for  their  degradation 
in  being  conquered  and  made  women  of  by  the  Six 
Nations  ;  and  then  pronounced  it  as  the  decision  of  the 
chiefs  and  warriors,  that  they  should  leave  the  disputed 
territory,  and  remove  to  Wyoming  or  Shamokin.  The 
Delawares  did  not  dare  to  disobey,  and  at  once  retired 
to  Wyoming. 

The  Shawanese  were  already  settled  there  ;  but,  as 
they  were  in  friendship  with  the  Six  Nations,  they 
made  no  attempt  to  molest  them.  The  Shawanese  oc 
cupied,  therefore,  the  west  side  of  the  river,  while  the 
Delawares  planted  themselves  on  the  eastern  side,  and 
built  their  town.  It  was  not  long,  however,  before 
mutual  jealousies  arose,  and,  on  the  breaking  out  of  the 
old  French  War,  the  Shawanese  favored  the  French, 
while  the  Delawares,  like  the  Six  Nations,  continued 
faithful  to  the  English. 

At  first,  there  were  no  actual  hostilities,  but  the  fol 
lowing  incident  is  said  to  have  brought  on  a  desperate 
fight  between  these  rival  neighbours.  While  the  Dela 
ware  chiefs  were  one  day  engaged  in  the  chase,  on  the 
mountains,  their  women  and  children  were  occupied  in 
gathering  fruit  on  the  margin  of  the  river  below  the 
town.  Some  Shawanese  women  and  children,  seeing 
them  thus  employed,  paddled  across  the  river,  and 
joined  them.  They  all  engaged  in  sports  ;  but,  in  the 


WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.       221 

course  of  the  morning,  a  Shawanese  child  having 
caught  a  large  grasshopper,  a  quarrel  arose  as  to 
the  right  of  possession.  The  fight  among  the  young 
ones  brought  up  the  squaws,  who  took  part  with  their 
children  respectively.  From  words  they  came  to  blows ; 
the  Dela wares  said,  the  Shawanese  had  no  right  to  cross 
the  river,  and  come  upon  their  premises  ;  and  being 
the  stronger  party,  after  several  had  been  killed  on 
both  sides,  they  drove  off  the  Shawanese,  and  com 
pelled  them  to  recross  the  river  to  their  homes. 

On  the  return  of  the  warriors,  they  also  entered  into 
the  contest.  The  Shawanese  invaded  the  territory  of 
the  Dela  wares,  who  met  them  on  the  river's  brink,  and 
fought  them  as  they  landed  from  their  canoes.  Still, 
the  Shawanese,  after  a  smart  struggle, .were  enabled 
to  land,  when  a  fierce  and  bloody  battle  took  place, 
in  which  several  hundreds  were  killed  on  both  sides. 
The  Shawanese  were  routed,  and,  after  having  lost 
half  their  number,  were  compelled  to  return.  They, 
therefore,  immediately  left  Wyoming,  and  joined  the 
main  body  of  their  nation,  already  settled  on  the  Ohio. 
The  Delawares  remained. 

In  1761,  a  conference  was  held  between  several 
American  governors  and  the  Six  Nations,  at  which 
the  Delawares,  also,  were  present.  Here  a  warm  dis 
pute  arose  respecting  some  lands,  of  which  the  Dela 
ware  chief  complained  that  the  English  had  taken  pos 
session,  in  consequence  of  a  fraudulent  conveyance. 
The  Indians  being  thus  dissatisfied,  the  French  took 
care,  by  emissaries,  to  foment  disturbances.  The  re 
sentment  of  the  Shawanese  and  Delawares  was  further 
roused  by  the  suspicion  that  the  English  had  concerted 


222     WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

a  plan  for  their  extirpation.  They  therefore  united 
with  the  other  tribes  upon  the  Ohio,  and  the  nations 
about  Detroit  and  along  the  Mississippi,  for  the  pur 
pose  of  making  a  sudden  and  general  attack  on  the 
frontiers,  and  at  one  blow  to  cut  off  the  inhabitants  and 
their  means  of  subsistence.  This  plot,  in  which  the 
celebrated  Pontiac  *  was  one  of  the  master  spirits,  was 
matured  with  great  art  and  secrecy. 

In  1763,  the  storm,  which  had  been  long  gathering, 
and  of  which  the  low  muttering  had  been  heard,  burst 
forth  in  its  fury.  The  savages  broke  in  upon  the  set 
tlements,  massacred  the  inhabitants,  and  all  the  fron 
tier  country  of  Pennsylvania,  Virginia,  and  Maryland, 
for  twenty  miles  back,  was  abandoned.  The  travel 
ling  merchants,  who  were  among  the  Indians,  were 
murdered  and  plundered,  and  property  to  the  amount 
of  hundreds  of  thousands  of  pounds  was  lost.  So 
fierce  and  unexpected  was  the  onset,  that  several  forts, 
as  those  of  Le  Boeuf,  Venango,  and  Presque  Isle,  were 
captured  by  the  enemy.  They  next  attempted  Fort 
Pitt,  Detroit,  and  Niagara.  The  two  former  were  in 
vested  at  the  same  time,  though  about  three  hundred 
miles  apart. 

A  strong  detachment  was  despatched  by  the  Eng 
lish  to  relieve  these  posts.  On  reaching  the  neigh 
bourhood  of  Fort  Detroit,  an  attack  on  the  Indian 
camp,  about  three  miles  off,  was  determined  on.  But, 
before  the  English  approached,  the  Indians  them 
selves  began  the  attack,  with  the  utmost  fury,  and  the 


*  For  the  particulars  of  Pontiac's  life,  see  "  Lives  of  Famous 
American  Indians." 


WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.       223 

troops  were  compelled  to  retreat  to  the  fort,  with  the 
loss  of  seventy  killed  and  forty  wounded.  The  In 
dians,  however,  soon  despairing  of  success  in  their 
scheme  of  reducing  the  garrison,  gave  it  up  and  with 
drew. 

The  war  still  waged  with  fury  along  the  whole 
western  frontier.  The  siege  of  Fort  Pitt  was  long 
continued,  but  after  severe  fighting,  in  which  the  loss 
of  the  Indians  was  great,  they  were  beaten.  Fort 
Niagara  was  also  sharply  assailed,  but  the  enemy  were 
finally  driven  back.  At  last  the  savages  began  to  feel 
the  necessity  of  peace,  which  was  accordingly  con 
cluded  in  September,  1764,  though  the  terms,*  being 
dictated  by  the  English,  were  unfavorable  to  the  In 
dians. 

In  the  summer  of  1774,  hostilities  again  broke  out. 
This  war  had  its  immediate  origin  in  the  incursions 
and  outrages  of  the  whites.  The  earlier  stage  of  it 
is  known  in  history  as  "  Cresap's  War,"  from  the 
murder,  by  one  Cresap,  of  the  family  of  Logan,  the 
Mingo  chief,*  who  had  settled  among  the  Shawanese 
in  Ohio.  This  base  act  of  treachery  and  cruelty, 
which  occurred  in  the  spring  of  1774,  was  followed 
by  another  atrocity,  committed  by  a  man  named  Great- 
house,  who  invited  a  large  number  of  Indians  to  drink 
with  him  and  his  men,  and,  when  in  a  state  of  intoxi 
cation,  fell  upon  them  and  massacred  them.  These 
and  other  outrages  had  the  effect  to  combine  several 
tribes  in  a  war,  which  resulted  in  the  desolation  of  many 
of  the  remote  settlements.  The  governor  of  Virginia, 

*  See  "  Lives  of  Famous  American  Indians." 


224       WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

Lord  Dunmore,  sent  a  large  body  of  troops  under  Gen 
eral  Andrew  Lewis,  who  marched  towards  the  junc 
tion  of  the  Kenhawa  with  the  Ohio.  Here,  on  the 
morning  of  the  10th  of  October,  just  at  sunrise,  he 
was  attacked  by  a  body  of  Indians,  estimated  at  from 
eight  to  fifteen  hundred,  consisting  of  Shawanese, 
Delawares,  Mingoes,  Wyandots,  Cayugas,  and  other 
tribes,  led  on  by  Logan,  aided  by  Cornstalk,  his  son, 
and  the  Red  Eagle. 

The  Indians  are  said  to  have  had  the  advantage  of 
position,  and  in  the  early  part  of  the  battle  they  com 
pelled  the  Virginia  regiments  to  give  way.  But  other 
troops  being  brought  up,  the  Indians  were,  in  turn, 
forced  to  retreat,  and  fall  back  behind  a  breastwork 
of  logs  and  brushwood  which  they  had  erected. 
Here  they  made  a  valiant  stand,  and  defended  them 
selves  till  night  had  nearly  set  in.  Cornstalk  cheered 
on  his  men,  crying  out,  "  Be  strong,  be  strong ! "  and  he 
is  said  also  to  have  buried  his  tomahawk  in  the  head  of 
one  who  was  seeking  safety  in  flight.  The  Indians, 
however,  were  at  last  outflanked  by  an  unperceived 
movement  of  a  body  of  troops,  who  passed  to  their 
rear,  and  drove  them  from  their  lines.  Supposing  that 
the  Virginians  had  now  received  reinforcements,  they 
fled  across  the  Ohio,  and  retreated  to  the  Scioto. 

Pressed  with  difficulties  and  dangers,  the  inquiry 
arose  among  the  Indians,  what  was  to  be  done.  Corn 
stalk,  who  had  been  opposed  to  the  battle,  but  who  had 
been  overruled  in  the  council,  now  spoke.  "  What 
shall  we  do  ?  The  Long  Knives  are  coming  upon  us 
by  two  routes.  Shall  we  turn  out  and  fight  them  ?  " 
As  no  one  answered,  he  next  inquired,  "  Shall  we  kill 


WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.       225 

our  squaws  and  children,  and  then  fight  until  we  are 
all  killed  ourselves  ?  "  Every  one  was  silent,  —  and 
Cornstalk  struck  his  tomahawk  into  the  war-post,  ex 
claiming,  with  stern  emphasis,  "  Since  you  are  not 
for  fight,  I  will  go  and  make  peace."  He  accordingly 
repaired  to  the  English  camp,  where  negotiations  were 
opened,  and  a  treaty  concluded. 

Logan  was  not  present  at  the  council,  but  a  special 
messenger  was  despatched  to  gain  his  assent.  Corn 
stalk,  as  it  appears,  was  even  his  superior  as  an  ora 
tor.  An  American  officer,  who  was  present  at  the  in 
terview  between  this  chief  and  Lord  Dunmore,  says, 
"  I  have  heard  the  first  orators  in  Virginia,  Patrick 
Henry  and  Richard  Henry  Lee,  but  never  have  I 
heard  one  whose  powers  of  delivery  surpassed  those 
of  Cornstalk." 

On  the  breaking  out  of  the  Revolutionary  War,  the 
Delawares  took  part  with  the  colonists,  owing  greatly, 
it  is  said,  to  the  influence  of  the  chief,  White  Eyes, 
who  was  a  firm  friend  to  the  colonists,  in  opposition  to 
another  chief,  named  Pipe.  At  a  council  held  in 
Pittsburg  to  deliberate  on  the  question,  he  boldly  de 
clared  that  he  would  not  join  in  a  war,the  object  of 
which  was  to  destroy  a  people  born  on  the  same  soil 
with  himself.  The  Americans,  he  said,  were  his  friends 
and  brothers,  and  no  nation  should  dictate  to  him,  or 
his  tribe,  the  course  they  should  pursue.  In  the  course 
of  the  war  which  followed,  he  also  sent  a  message  to 
the  Shawanese,  with  whom  he  had  been  allied,  warn 
ing  them  against  taking  part  in  it.  The  language  is 
characteristic  of  the  Indian.  "  Grandchildren,"  says  he, 
"  some  days  ago,  a  flock  of  birds,  that  had  come  on 
15 


226       WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

from  the  east,  lit  at  Goschochking,  imposing  a  song  of 
theirs  upon  us,  which  song  had  well-nigh  proved  our 
ruin.  Should  these  birds,  which,  on  leaving  us,  took 
their  flight  towards  Scioto,  endeavour  to  impose  a 
song  on  you  likewise,  do  not  listen  to  them,  for  they 
lie." 

Notwithstanding  all  the  efforts  of  this  chief,  how 
ever,  the  Delawares,  as  well  as  other  Western  In 
dians,  eventually  became  hostile  in  their  feelings  to 
wards  the  Americans.  In  the  spring  of  1778,  Pipe 
nearly  succeeded  in  involving  them  in  the  contest. 
Instigated  by  the  loyalists,  he  assembled  a  great  num 
ber  of  warriors^  and  proclaimed  every  one  an  ene 
my  to  his  country,  who  should  endeavour  to  per 
suade  them  against  fighting  the  Americans,  and  de 
clared  that  all  such  ought  to  be  put  to  death.  But 
White  Eyes  also  collected  his  people,  and  addressed 
them  with  great  earnestness  and  pathos.  Seeing  that 
some  of  them  were  preparing  to  take  up  the  hatchet, 
he  told  them  that  such  a  course  was  fraught  with  de 
struction  to  themselves.  If,  however,  they  disbelieved 
him,  and  were  resolved  to  go  forth  to  the  war,  he 
would  go  with  them.  "  But,"  he  added,  "it  shall  not 
be  as  when  the  hunter  sets  his  dogs  on  the  bear  to  be 
torn  in  pieces  by  his  paws,  while  he  keeps  at  a  safe 
distance.  No  ;  I  will  lead  you  on  to  the  thickest  of  the 
fight ;  I  will  myself  be  in  the  front  rank,  and  the  first 
to  fall.  You  have  now  but  to  decide  on  your  course. 
For  my  part,  I  am  determined  not  to  survive  my 
slaughtered  and  ruined  nation.  I  will  not  spend  the 
last  lingering  of  life  in  mourning  over  the  doom  of  my 
people." 


WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.       227 

The  chief  was  now  seconded  by  the  arrival  of  a  mes 
sage  of  peace  from  the  Americans,  and  the  Indians 
determined  to  follow  his  advice.  This  state  of  things, 
however,  did  not  long  continue.  The  Shawanese  had 
been  for  some  time  carrying  on  a  warfare  with  Colonel 
Daniel  Boone  and  the  pioneers  of  the  western  settle 
ments,  and  various  skirmishes  took  place.  In  Feb 
ruary,  1778,  Boone  was  taken  prisoner,  and  adopted 
into  one  of  the  Shawanese  families  as  a  son.  But 
shortly  after,  he  found  means  to  escape,  and  returned 
home. 

During  the  summer  of  this  year,  Colonel  Clarke 
and  Captain  Bowman  performed  some  brilliant  exploits 
against  the  Indians  at  Kaskaskia  and  St.  Philip's,  in 
the  territory  of  Illinois.  In  1779,  the  Indians,  having 
suffered  severe  defeats,  held  a  conference  with  Colonel 
Brodhead  at  Fort  Pitt.  The  chiefs  of  the  Delawares, 
Wyandots,  and  Hurons,  with  the  king  of  the  Maqui- 
chees,  a  branch  of  the  Shawanese,  were  present.  A 
partial  treaty  was  formed,  but  hostilities  were  still  con 
tinued  along  the  frontier.  In  1780,  the  Indians  were 
severely  chastised,  and  portions  of  them  were  overawed 
for  a  time.  In  1782,  under  the  vigorous  operations  of 
General  Clarke,  the  war  on  the  western  border  was 
brought  to  a  close.  During  this  protracted  struggle, 
most  of  the  tribes,  from  Michilimackinac  to  the  mouth 
of  the  Ohio,  were  engaged  against  us,  and  many  events 
of  deep  interest  occurred.  The  war  was  marked  with 
those  acts  of  daring  and  atrocity  which  we  might  ex 
pect  from  exasperated  savages  and  woodsmen,  little 
accustomed  to  emotions  of  fear  or  pity. 

A  troubled  and  dubious  peace  continued  for  a  time  ; 


228       WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

but  questions  of  boundary,  about  which  the  Indians  were 
always  dull  and  confused,  soon  became  the  occasion 
of  irritation.  Hostilities  followed  in  the  western  parts 
of  the  Ohio  territory,  and  the  Indians,  being  wrought  up 
on  by  English  emissaries,  were  not  appeased  by  all  the 
efforts  of  General  Washington  at  negotiation.  Strong 
measures  became  necessary,  and  General  Harmar  was 
sent  against  them  in  September,  1790,  with  a  force  of 
1,450  men.  On  his  approach,  the  Indians  abandoned 
their  principal  town,  after  setting  it  on  fire,  but,  ral 
lying  again,  made  an  attack  on  a  detachment  of  two 
hundred  and  ten  men,  thirty  of  whom  were  regulars. 
The  militia  fled,  and  all  but  seven  of  the  regulars  were 
slain.  The  next  day,  another  bloody  battle  was  fought, 
between  three  hundred  and  sixty  men  and  a  large 
party  of  Indians,  which  resulted  in  the  defeat  of  the 
Americans,  with  the  loss  of  several  officers  and  one 
hundred  and  eighty-three  men.  The  Indians  are  said 
to  have  lost  one  hundred  and  twenty  warriors.  The 
victory  was  claimed  by  the  Americans,  though  they 
retreated,  and  the  consequences  were,  that  the  Indians 
became  more  bold  in  their  incursions  on  the  frontier 
settlements. 

Various  efforts  were  now  made  to  effect  a  general 
peace,  but,  though  several  councils  were  held,  and  the 
British  governor  and  other  officers  lent  their  influence 
to  secure  this  object,  the  Indians  still  continued  hostile. 

In  1791,  therefore,  General  St.  Glair  marched  to 
wards  the  country  of  the  Miamis.  His  army  consisted 
of  about  two  thousand  men.  The  Indians  hung  contin 
ually  on  his  path,  and,  as  he  advanced,  the  militia  be 
gan  to  desert,  till  his  whole  force  was  reduced  to  about 


WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.       229 

fifteen  hundred.  Having  approached  within  about 
fifteen  miles  of  the  Miami  villages,  the  army  halted 
and  encamped  for  the  night  beside  a  creek,  the  militia 
passing  over  to  encamp  on  the  other  side.  Here  the 
intention  was  to  throw  up  a  temporary  defence  and 
await  the  return  of  a  detachment  which  had  been  sent 
back  to  guard  the  supplies.  But  the  Indians  had  no 
idea  of  permitting  this  junction  ;  and  about  half  an 
hour  before  sunrise  they  attacked  the  militia,  who  were 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  advance.  These  troops  made 
no  stand,  but  ran  in  the  greatest  confusion  to  the  camp, 
where  they  threw  the  whole  force  into  disorder.  The 
Indians  fought  with  the  utmost  fury,  charging  the  ar 
tillery  on  all  sides,  and,  though  driven  back  by  the  regu 
lars  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet,  they  succeeded  in  sur 
rounding  the  Americans.  By  a  furious  charge  our 
troops  forced  a  passage  in  the  rear,  and  thus  effected 
their  retreat.  Yet  so  great  was  the  terror  inspired 
among  the  men,  that  many  of  them,  in  their  flight, 
threw  away  their  arms  and  accoutrements,  even  after 
the  pursuit  had  ceased. 

In  this  famous  engagement  the  Indians  lost  about 
one  hundred  and  fifty  killed,  besides  the  wounded ; 
while  of  the  Americans  above  five  hundred,  including 
officers  and  men,  were  killed,  and  two  hundred  and  sixty 
wounded.  They  also  lost  their  camp  equipage  and 
baggage,  six  or  eight  field-pieces,  and  four  hun 
dred  horses.  The  number  of  the  Indians  engaged  is 
differently  estimated  at  from  1,000  to  1,500.  Their 
commander  is  said  to  have  been  Meshecunaqua,  or 
the  Little  Turtle,  a  chief  of  the  Miamis.  It  is  also 
asserted^  that  Brant,  with  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 
Mohawks,  had  a  large  share  in  the  action. 


230       WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

For  twelve  months  subsequent  to  ihis  dreadful  de 
feat,  the  frontiers  were  exposed  to  more  ferocious  as 
saults  than  before.  Numerous  instances  are  related 
of  the  boldness  of  the  Indians  in  attacking  the  settlers, 
and  also  of  the  bravery  of  those  hardy  pioneers  of  the 
West  in  repelling  the  foe.  In  one  case,  a  party  attack 
ed  a  dwelling-house  and  wounded  severely  the  hus 
band,  so  that  the  defence  devolved  on  the  wife  and 
daughter.  These  succeeded  in  closing  the  door,  so 
that  the  Indians  had  to  cut  an  opening  by  which  to 
enter.  On  one  of  them  thrusting  in  his  head,  the  val 
iant  woman  despatched  him  with  an  axe,  and  drew  in 
the  body.  Four  others,  one  after  another,  supposing 
that  the  warriors  thus  killed  had  made  an  entrance, 
suffered  the  same  fate.  Abandoning  this  mode  of  at 
tack,  they  next  mounted  the  roof,  and  attempted  to 
come  down  the  chimney  ;  but  the  two  heroines  cast 
ing  the  contents  of  a  feather-bed  on  the  fire,  the 
enemy,  descending,  became  suffocated,  fell  down,  and 
were  beaten  to  death  by  the  maimed  husband  with 
a  billet  of  wood.  Another  Indian  still,  on  attempting 
the  door  again,  was  severely  wounded,  and  the  party, 
discouraged  at  so  obstinate  a  resistance,  and  doubtless 
imagining  the  force  within  to  be  greater  than  it  was, 
withdrew. 

After  some  ineffectual  attempts  at  negotiation,  in 
various  councils,  General  Wayne,  who  had  been  ap 
pointed  to  succeed  General  St.  Clair,  advanced  in 
to  the  Miami  country.  A  sharp  engagement  took 
place  at  Fort  Recovery,  which  had  been  thrown 
up  on  the  field  of  St.  Glair's  defeat.  The  In 
dians  were  led  on  by  Little  Turtle,  who,  having  sur- 


WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.       231 

prised  a  detachment  of  the  Americans,  drove  them  into 
the  fort.  Pressing  on,  in  the  hope  of  entering  the  fort 
in  the  pursuit,  a  heavy  fire  was  opened  on  the  Indians, 
who  were  forced  to  retreat.  They  renewed  the  as 
sault,  however,  the  next  day,  but  were  again  driven  off. 

On  the  8th  of  August,  1794,  General  Wayne  reach 
ed  the  confluence  of  the  Au  Glaize  and  Miami  of 
the  Lakes,  where  were  the  principal  Indian  villages. 
Thirty  miles  from  this  place,  the  Indian  force,  amount 
ing  to  nearly  two  thousand,  was  gathered  close  by  the 
British  fort.  Notwithstanding  Wayne's  precautions, 
the  Indian  leader  was  aware  of  his  approach,  and 
prepared  for  battle.  An  attempt  at  negotiation  was 
once  more  made  by  the  American  officers,  but  it 
proved  unsuccessful.  The  Indians  were  formed  in 
three  lines  near  the  fort,  within  suitable  distance  of 
each  other.  The  attack  commenced,  and  they  at 
tempted  to  turn  the  left  flank  of  the  American  army. 
Wayne's  disposition  of  his  forces  was  happily  so  made 
as  to  counteract  the  plans  of  the  enemy.  The  fight  was 
severe,  but  the  Indian  forces  were  soon  driven  from 
their  position,  leaving  to  the  Americans  a  complete 
victory. 

Seven  nations  are  said  to  have  been  engaged  in  this 
action,  —  the  Miamis,  Wyandots,  Potawatomies,  Dela- 
wares,  Shawanese,  Chippewas,  and  Ottawas.  Every 
Wyandot  chief  present  was  killed,  and  many  others 
also  fell.  Little  Turtle,  it  is  said,  was  averse  to  fight 
ing,  believing  that  Wayne  was  a  more  vigilant  offi 
cer  than  those  with  whom  they  had  before  contended. 
But  Blue  Jacket,  a  great  warrior  among  the  Shawa 
nese,  prevailed  in  the  council,  and  the  engagement  we 


232       WESTERN  INDIANS  EAST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

have  described,  with  the  consequent  defeat,  was  the 
result. 

The  whole  Indian  country,  which  was  thickly  peo 
pled,  was  laid  waste  for  twenty  miles  around.  "  The 
margins  of  the  rivers,"  says  Wayne,  in  his  despatches, 
"  appeared  like  one  continued  village,  and  the  fields  of 
corn  were  immense."  Yet  these  were  made  a  scene 
of  desolation.  The  year  after  this,  all  hope  of  suc 
cour  from  the  English  being  removed  by  Jay's  treaty, 
the  Indians  became  desirous  of  peace,  and  terms  were 
proposed  and  accepted  on  the  3d  of  August,  1795. 


WESTERN  AND  SOUTHERN  INDIANS. 


THE  peace,  noticed  at  the  close  of  the  last  chapter, 
continued  till  near  the  opening  of  the  last  war  with 
England.  At  that  period,  the  famous  Tecumseh  en 
tered  upon  his  design  of  embodying  the  Western  In 
dians  in  a  grand  effort  to  check  the  advance  of  the 
American  settlements.  A  plan  so  extensive  had  never 
before  been  attempted  by  an  Indian  chief.  His  broth 
er,  the  Prophet,  in  his  sacred  character,  visited  the 
distant  tribes,  even  those  beyond  the  Mississippi,  and 
poured  out  his  stirring  eloquence  upon  the  warriors  as 
far  as  the  foot  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.  Had  the  con 
federacy  been  actually  perfected,  the  history  of  events 
had  been  written  in  bloodier  lines  than  those  which 
portray  the  reality. 

While  the  Prophet  was  marshalling  the  West,  Te 
cumseh,  with  burning  words,  was  rousing  the  fiery 
passions  of  the  Southern  Indians.  Without  much  dif 
ficulty,  he  succeeded  in  inspiring  the  Creek  warriors 
with  a  portion  of  his  own  fire,  and  the  buried  hatchet 
was  once  more  lifted  in  a  fierce  attack  on  the  settle 
ments  within  their  reach.  But  a  part  of  the  Creek 
nation,  however,  were  engaged  in  these  transactions  ; 


234  WESTERN  AND  SOUTHERN  INDIANS. 

some  of  them  still  remaining  friendly  to  our  people. 
The  principal  chiefs  bore  the  names  of  Weatherford, 
Big  Warrior,  and  Little  Warrior.  The  great  argument 
which  Tecumseh  held  out  to  them  was  the  prospect 
of  an  approaching  war  between  the  United  States  and 
Great  Britain,  which,  he  said,  would  afford  to  the  In 
dians  the  opportunity  of  avenging  their  wrongs  and 
regaining  their  rights. 

The  first  onset  was  the  well  known  attack  and  cap 
ture  of  Fort  Mimms.  This  was  commanded  by  Major 
Beasley,  with  one  hundred  volunteers  ;  besides  whom,  a 
large  number  of  the  inhabitants,  foreseeing  the  storm, 
had  gathered  there  for  safety.  Though  warned  of  the 
contemplated  attack,  the  fort  was  surprised,  about  noon, 
on  the  30th  of  August,  1812.  The  sentinel  had  scarce 
ly  time  to  announce  the  approach  of  the  Indians,  when 
they  rushed,  with  a  terrific  yell,  towards  the  open  gate. 
The  garrison  was  instantly  under  arms,  and  the  com 
mander,  with  some  of  his  men,  flew  towards  the  en 
trance  to  close  it,  and  drive  out  the  enemy  ;  but  he  fell 
mortally  wounded.  The  conflict  was  desperate.  The 
gate,  however,  was  at  last  closed,  and  the  Indians,  who 
had  taken  possession  of  a  blockhouse  near,  were  final 
ly  expelled,  after  much  bloodshed.  The  assault  con 
tinued  for  an  hour,  on  the  outside  of  the  pickets,  and 
the  portholes  were  several  times  carried  by  the  assail 
ants,  and  retaken  by  the  garrison. 

The  Indians,  for  a  short  time,  withdrew,  apparently 
disheartened  ;  but,  being  urged  on  by  their  fiery  lead 
er,  Weatherford,  they  returned  to  the  attack,  cut  away 
the  gate  with  their  axes,  forced  the  pickets,  and  got 
possession  of  the  open  space  within,  compelling  the 


WESTERN  AND  SOUTHERN  INDIANS.  235 

garrison  to  retreat  to  the  buildings.  Here  they  met  a 
gallant  resistance,  but  the  Indians  at  length  succeeded 
in  setting  fire  to  the  roofs,  and  a  scene  of  carnage  en 
sued.  Women  and  children,  the  old  and  the  young, 
were  all  crowded  together  in  these  dwellings,  and,  in 
the  spirit  of  savage  warfare,  all  were  sacrificed. 
Scarcely  a  soul  escaped  from  the  terrific  scene,  and 
nearly  two  hundred  and  sixty  persons  are  said  to  have 
perished. 

This  catastrophe  taught  the  inhabitants  what  they 
had  to  expect  in  the  contest  thus  opening  upon  them, 
and  produced  immediate  efforts,  both  in  Tennessee  and 
Georgia,  to  prepare  for  the  crisis.  It  was  determined 
to  carry  the  war  at  once  into  the  enemy's  country. 
The  command  of  the  expedition  from  Tennessee  was 
committed  to  a  man  of  prompt  decision,  firm  and  un 
flinching  purpose,  —  a  conqueror  in  his  nature,  —  Gen 
eral  Andrew  Jackson.  On  marching  to  the  Coosa,  he 
despatched  a  detachment  to  attack  the  Indian  village 
of  Littafutchee,  on  a  branch  of  the  abovenamed  river. 
The  place  was  captured,  with  a  number  of  prisoners. 
The  Creeks  now  concentrated  their  forces  at  Tall us- 
hatches,  also  on  the  Coosa.  General  Coffee  was  des 
patched,  by  General  Jackson,  with  nine  hundred  cav 
alry  and  mounted  riflemen,  against  them.  The  Coosa 
was  forded,  and,  as  he  advanced,  the  Creeks  struck 
their  war-drum,  sung  their  war-songs,  and,  with  ter 
rific  yells,  sallied  forth  from  their  village,  boldly  charg 
ing  the  troops.  A  fearful  struggle  followed,  and  the 
Indians,  in  their  fury,  disdaining  to  receive  quarter, 
were  slaughtered  in  great  numbers.  Two  hundred  of 
their  warriors  fell,  and  the  women  and  children  were 


236  WESTERN  AND  SOUTHERN  INDIANS. 

taken  prisoners.  In  his  official  account,  General  Cof 
fee  says  that  the  enemy  fought  as  long  as  they  could 
stand  or  sit,  using  chiefly  the  bow  and  arrow  after  the 
first  fire,  though  occasionally  loading  and  discharging 
their  guns. 

This  bloody  engagement  was  the  first  of  a  series 
bearing  the  same  general  character.  General  Jackson 
soon  moved  forward  to  the  relief  of  the  fort  at  Talla- 
dega,  which  was  menaced  with  the  fate  of  Fort  Mimms. 
The  Creeks  were  found  encamped  within  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  of  that  place,  and,  as  the  lines  of  the  Amer 
ican  troops  advanced,  they  were  attacked  by  the  In 
dians,  who  were,  however,  compelled  to  retreat,  with 
the  loss  of  two  hundred  and  ninety  left  dead  on  the 
field,  and  many  more  wounded. 

About  the  same  time,  General  Floyd,  with  nine 
hundred  and  fifty  of  the  Georgia  militia,  and  three  or 
four  hundred  friendly  Indians,  met  the  hostile  Creeks 
of  that  region  on  the  banks  of  the  Tallapoosa  River. 
An  engagement  followed,  in  which  the  Indians  pre 
sented  themselves  at  every  point,  and  fought  with  des 
perate  bravery.  After  a  firm  resistance,  they  were 
beaten  and  driven  from  the  plain,  and  the  houses  of 
their  two  towns  were  wrapped  in  flames. 

Notwithstanding  their  ill  success,  the  Indians  were 
not  yet  prepared  for  submission,  and  another  battle 
was  fought  with  the  forces  under  General  Claiborne, 
on  the  Alabama.  Their  stronghold  was  taken,  thirty 
or  forty  warriors  were  slain,  and  two  hundred  dwel 
lings  burned.  Another  town,  also,  of  sixty  houses, 
eight  miles  above,  was  destroyed,  with  several  distin 
guished  chiefs,  and  all  the  boats  owned  by  the  Indians 
in  that  vicinity. 


WESTERN  AND  SOUTHERN  INDIANS.  237 

While  these  transactions  were  taking  place  on  the 
Georgia  side,  General  Jackson  was  advancing  from  the 
west.  Several  fierce  encounters  took  place,  but  the 
great  battle  which  broke  the  strength  of  the  Indians 
occurred  at  the  Horseshoe,  a  bend  in  the  Tallapoosa. 
Here  a  thousand  or  more  of  the  Creeks  were  gathered 
from  their  towns,  and  had  strongly  fortified  themselves. 
General  Jackson,  with  a  force  of  three  or  four  thou 
sand  men,  attacked  their  position,  having  stationed  a 
portion  of  his  troops  so  that  the  escape  of  the  enemy 
might  be  cut  off.  The  fort  was  taken  by  storm,  and 
the  Indians  were  entirely  defeated.  Five  hundred  and 
fifty-seven  were  left  dead  on  the  field,  and  a  great 
number  were  killed  by  the  cavalry  in  attempting  to 
cross  the  river. 

This  was,  indeed,  a  dreadful  battle.  The  fighting 
continued  to  rage  for  five  hours.  The  Indians  refused 
to  surrender,  answering  the  propositions  made  them  to 
this  effect  by  volleys  of  fire-arms.  Their  numbers 
were  now  greatly  reduced,  and  the  prophets,  by  whom 
they  had  been  urged  on,  had  nearly  all  fallen.  The 
humbled  savages,  at  last,  felt  it  to  be  hopeless  to  con 
tinue  the  contest,  and  accordingly  sued  for  peace.  A 
treaty  was,  therefore,  concluded  on  the  10th  of  August, 
1814,  by  which  their  territories  were  once  more  limited 
within  such  boundaries  as  might  prevent  their  disturb 
ing  the  people  of  the  United  States. 

The  chief,  Weatherford,  who  had  led  on  some  of 
the  most  daring  attacks,  spoke  on  this  occasion  with 
great  feeling.  "  I  am  in  your  power,"  said  he  to 
General  Jackson,  who  had  been  appointed  to  treat  with 
them ;  "  do  with  me  as  you  please.  I  am  a  soldier.  I 


WESTERN    AND    SOUTHERN    INDIANS. 

have  done  the  white  people  all  the  harm  I  could.  I 
fought  them  bravely.  If  I  had  an  army,  I  would  yet 
fight,  and  contend  .  to  the  last,  but  I  have  none  ;  my 
people  are  gone.  1  can  now  do  no  more  than  weep 
over  the  misfortunes  of  my  nation.  Once  I  could  ani 
mate  my  warriors  to  battle  ;  but  I  cannot  rouse  the 
dead.  My  warriors  can  no  longer  hear  my  voice. 
Their  bones  are  at  Talladega,  Tallushatches,  Emuck- 
faw,  and  Tohopeka.  I  have  not  surrendered  myself 
thoughtlessly.  Whilst  there  were  chances  of  success,  I 
never  left  my  post,  nor  supplicated  for  peace.  But  my 
people  are  weakened,  and  I  now  ask  it  for  my  nation 
and  myself.  On  the  miseries  and  misfortunes  suffered 
by  my  country  I  look  back  with  the  deepest  sorrow, 
and  wish  to  avert  still  greater  calamities.  If  I  had 
been  left  to  contend  with  the  Georgia  troops  alone,  I 
would  have  raised  my  corn  on  one  bank  of  the  river, 
and  fought  them  on  the  other  ;  but  you  have  destroyed 
my  nation.  You  are  a  brave  man  ;  I  rely  on  your 
generosity.  You  will  exact  no  terms  from  a  conquered 
people  but  such  as  they  should  accept.  Whatever  they 
may  be,  it  would  now  be  madness  and  folly  to  resist. 
You  have  told  us  where  we  might  go  and  be  safe. 
This  is  a  good  talk  ;  my  nation  ought  to  listen,  and 
they  shall  listen." 

After  this  speech,  Big  Warrior  made  an  address, 
promising  to  abide  by  the  treaty.  Since  this  time,  the 
Creeks,  as  well  as  the  Cherokees  and  Choctaws,  have 
remained  at  peace.  A  portion  of  this  nation,  who 
bear  the  name  of  Seminoles,  having  driven  out  part 
of  the  Uchees  from  Florida,  incorporated  the  rem 
nants  of  that  tribe  with  themselves.  Here,  in  the  ever- 


WESTERN    AND    SOUTHERN    INDIANS.  239 

glades  and  deep  fastnesses,  they  have  maintained  a 
long  and  bloody  warfare  with  the  United  States,  during 
which  the  Americans  expended  millions  of  money,  and 
lost  great  numbers  of  their  soldiers,  either  by  battle  or 
disease.  The  principal  leaders  of  the  Seminoles  were 
Micanopy,  Philip,  Creek  Bill,  and  Osceola.  The  lat 
ter,  a  half-breed,  was  the  master  spirit;  but,  being 
captured,  he  died  a  prisoner  to  the  Americans,  at  Fort 
Moultrie,  in  Charleston,  South  Carolina,  in  the  year 
1838.  After  a  protracted  contest,  the  Seminoles  have 
been  subdued,  and  the  greater  part  of  them,  as  well  as 
of  the  other  Southern  Indians,  have  been  removed  to 
the  west  side  of  the  Mississippi.  Agriculture  has  ad 
vanced  among  the  Creeks,  and  they  yet  number  some 
twenty  thousand,  or  more,  in  the  various  divisions  of 
their  nation. 

The  war  of  the  United  States  with  Black  Hawk,* 
and  the  Sacs,  Foxes,  and  Winnebagoes,  in  1832,  need 
not  be  detailed  here.  It  is  sufficient  to  say,  that  it  dis 
turbed  the  northwestern  frontier  for  a  time,  but  result 
ed  in  the  entire  defeat  of  the  savages,  and  the  surren 
der  of  the  chief. 

The  red  man  is  fast  disappearing  from  the  settled 
portions  of  the  United  States ;  here  and  there  a  small 
community  of  Indians  is  found  east  of  the  Missis 
sippi.  Every  year  has  witnessed  new  aggressions  on 
their  territory  by  the  whites,  who  have  continued  to 
despoil  them  of  their  property,  and  rob  them  of  their 
lands.  No  one  can  doubt  that  great  injustice  has  often 
been  done,  and  that  they  have  frequently  been  forced 

*  See  "  Lives  of  Famous  American  Indians." 


240  WESTERN    AND    SOUTHERN    INDIANS. 

to  yield  to  the  arm  of  might  rather  than  to  the  sense  of 
right.  Yet  there  is  one  compensation;  —  the  mild 
spirit  of  the  gospel  has  exerted  itself  among  them,  and 
Christian  communities,  with  devoted  and  faithful  lead 
ers,  are  found  planted  in  the  midst  of  them.  We  shall 
advert  more  fully  to  some  facts  on  this  score  in  a  sub 
sequent  page,  and  now  only  observe,  that  the  success 
which  has  recently  attended  the  benevolent  efforts  of 
the  missionaries  justifies  the  hope  that  some  remnants 
of  these  tribes  may  yet  be  preserved,  and  be  able,  here 
after,  to  testify  to  a  more  humane  policy  on  the  part 
of  their  conquerors. 


VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF   NORTHERN 
AND   WESTERN  INDIANS. 


THE  vast  territory,  which  lies  outspread  north  of 
the  great  chain  of  lakes  which  separate  the  British 
provinces  from  the  United  States,  and  far  in  the  west 
beyond  the  sources  of  the  Missouri  and  Columbia 
Rivers,  is  inhabited  by  numerous  tribes  of  Indians. 
Among  these,  in  the  British  provinces,  are  the  Chippe- 
was,  the  Assinniboins,  the  Snake,  Stone,  Beaver,  Cop 
per,  and  Hare  Indians.  These  are  wandering  tribes, 
who  have  no  history  deserving  the  name  ;  though  they 
are  more  or  less  involved,  from  time  to  time,  in  wars 
with  each  other.  The  regions  in  which  many  of  them 
dwell  are  coid  and  barren,  and  they  subsist  almost 
entirely  by  hunting  and  fishing,  furnishing  the  traders 
with  furs,  and  receiving  in  exchange  such  articles  as 
they  need.  Some  of  them  are  pensioners  on  British 
bounty,  on  account  of  services  rendered  in  former 
wars. 

Still  further  to  the  north,  on  the  coasts  of  Labrador, 

we  meet  with  the  Esquimaux,  a  singular  race,  who 

live,  during  the  long  winter  which  reigns  around  them, 

shut  up  in   their  huts,  and,  at   the  opening   of  their 

16 


242  VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF 

brief  summer,  go  forth  to  provide  the  means  of  sub 
sistence  by  fishing  and  hunting.  They  seem  to  be  a 
different  race  from  the  red  Indian,  as  they  are  general 
ly  low  in  stature,  and  of  a  complexion  approaching  to 
white.  In  the  interior,  however,  they  are  said  to  be 
taller.  They  possess  great  skill  in  the  management 
of  their  canoes  or  boats,  and  the  training  of  their  dogs 
in  sledges,  which  serve  them  as  the  reindeer  does  its 
Lapland  master.  Their  history  is  principally  com 
prised  in  the  benevolent  and  successful  efforts  of  the 
Moravians  to  extend  to  them  the  blessings  of  the 
Christian  religion.  Some  of  them,  especially  those  in 
Labrador,  have  thus  been  civilized  and  Christianized? 
The  progress  of  missionary  exertion  among  them 
has  been  most  interesting,  and  is  fully  recorded 
in  the  history  of  Moravian  missions.  For  a  long 
period,  these  self-denying  men  toiled  amid  hard 
ships  which  might  have  discouraged  others  actuated  by 
less  exalted  motives.  Year  after  year  rolled  by,  and 
still  the  frigid  hearts,  like  the  icy  rocks  of  their  native 
land,  responded  not  to  the  warm  appeals  of  the  Chris 
tian  missionary  ;  but  at  last  the  heart  was  melted,  and 
they  were  found  anxious  to  learn  yet  more  of  the 
spiritual  tidings  which  had  been  brought  to  their  frozen 
zone. 

The  adventurous  explorer  of  the  far  northern  re 
gions,  by  land  or  by  sea,  occasionally  meets  the  Es 
quimaux  roaming  over  the  ice-clad  plains  ;  but  there 
has  been  little,  in  that  land  of  wintry  barrenness,  to 
tempt  the  invasions  of  cupidity  ;  and  thus  they  have 
remained  comparatively  at  peace,  except  that  some 
prowling  bands  of  the  northern  tribes  of  Indians  have, 


NORTHERN    AND    WESTERN    INDIANS.  243 

now  and  then,  assaulted  them  while  on  their  hunting 
expeditions. 

In  the  travels  of  Mackenzie,  Hearne,  Franklin,  Back, 
and  the  voyages  of  Ross  and  Parry,  we  find  oc 
casional  notices  of  the  different  tribes  which  roam 
over  the  extended  territory  towards  the  north  pole. 
But  as  they  are  mostly  descriptions  of  individuals  or 
families,  they  scarcely  claim  a  place  in  these  pages. 

The  Chippewas,  who  were  formerly  called  Algon- 
quins,  are  an  extensive  though  scattered  band,  and 
have  heretofore  been  engaged  in  bloody  wars  with 
other  tribes,  particularly  the  Otagamies  and  Saukies. 
These  were  once  much  inferior  to  their  adversaries 
both  in  numbers  and  strength  ;  but  on  a  particular  occa 
sion,  as  related  by  Carver,  they  gained  a  great  advan 
tage  in  war,  which  resulted,  at  last,  in  an  enduring 
friendship  between  the  rival  nations. 

Bordering  on  the  Esquimaux  on  the  west,  and  also 
near  the  Chippewas,  are  the  Knistenaux,  or  Cree  In 
dians,  who  inhabit  a  wide  space  of  country.  They  are 
a  well  formed  race,  and  their  women  are  the  hand 
somest  of  the  Indian  females.  They  are  said  to  be 
hospitable,  generous,  and  mild  ;  not  very  careful  of 
speaking  the  truth,  but  otherwise  honest,  so  that  they 
are  permitted  to  go  about  the  trading  posts  without  re 
straint.  They  have  carried  on  long  and  bloody  wars 
with  the  Blackfeet.  These  are  more  powerful  in  frame, 
as  well  as  more  numerous ;  and  though  the  Knistenaux 
warriors  have  been  much  reduced,  they  have  often 
proved  themselves,  by  their  superior  agility,  a  full 
match  for  their  warlike  foes.  They  are  probably  a 
portion  of  the  Chippewas,  whom  they  are  said  much 
to  resemble  both  in  appearance  and  language. 


244  VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF 

The  Assinniboins,  or  Stone  Indians,  though  their  ap 
pearance  is  prepossessing,  are  represented  as  great 
thieves,  stealing  whatever  they  can  lay  their  hands  on, 
especially  horses.  They  are  at  perpetual  war  with 
the  Slave  Indians,  who  live  further  west,  and  whom 
they  resemble.  They  are  desperate  and  daring.  The 
Assinniboins  are  supposed  to  have  belonged  originally 
to  the  Sioux,  as  they  are  very  much  like  them  both  in 
their  features  and  manners. 

The  Chippewayans,  being  the  same  as  the  Chippe 
was  in  the  United  States,  are  divided  into  many 
tribes.  They  differ  from  the  Crees  as  to  hospitality, 
for  they  never  give  or  receive  with  a  good  grace. 
Their  disputes  are  generally  settled  by  wrestling,  and 
the  victor  of  the  match  may  carry  off  the  wife  of  the 
vanquished  as  his  prize. 

The  powerful  nation  of  the  Sioux,  or  Dahcotahs,  oc 
cupy  in  part  the  region  west  of  the  Mississippi,  near 
the  Falls  of  St.  Anthony,  though  the  main  body  of  them 
are  found  on  the  Upper  Missouri.  These  are  the  same 
Indians  whom  Carver  calls  the  Naudowessies,  and  have 
always  been  great  warriors.  They  are  divided  into 
numerous  bands,  each  called  after  the  name  of  its  chief, 
as  the  Black  Dog's  band,  the  Red  Wing's  band,  &c. 
They  have  ever  been  at  war  with  the  Chippewas, 
and  are  the  mortal  foes  of  the  Osages,  whom  they  have 
greatly  reduced,  and  who  hold  them  in  great  dread. 
They  occupy  a  wide  extent  of  country,  and  the  main 
object  of  their  contention  with  the  Chippewas,  for  two 
hundred  years,  is  stated  to  have  been  the  territory 
from  Rum  River  to  the  Riviere  de  Corbeau,  both  parties 
claiming  it  as  their  own.  They  have  conquered  and 
destroyed  vast  numbers  of  their  red  brethren,  and  have 


NORTHERN    AND   WESTERN    INDIANS.  245 

swept  the  whole  region  extending  from  the  banks  of  the 
Mississippi  to  the  mouth  of  the  Great  Platte,  together 
with  the  plains  that  lie  to  the  north,  between  the  Mis 
sissippi  and  the  Black  Hills.  They  form  six  dis 
tinct  tribes,  comprising  about  28,000  souls,  subsisting 
chiefly  on  buffalo's  meat  and  the  wild  fruits  of  the 
forest.  They  also  use  the  native  rice,  of  which  they 
gather  many  thousand  bushels.  A  revolted  b'and  of 
this  nation,  called  the  Osinpoilles,  said  to  consist  of 
8,000  persons,  live  near  the  Rocky  Mountains. 

Callin  divides  the  Sioux  nation  into  the  Mississippi 
Sioux  and  the  Missouri  Sioux.  He  says  that  they  are 
separated  into  forty-two  bands,  or  families,  each  having 
a  chief;  these  acknowledge  a  head  chief,  to  whom 
they  are  subordinate. 

The  Mississippi  branch,  being  near  to  the  white  set 
tlements,  are  somewhat  advanced  in  civilization,  yet 
form  but  an  imperfect  sample  of  the  nobler  warriors 
who  live  on  the  banks  of  the  Missouri,  and  roam  over 
the  plains  between  that  river  and  the  Rocky  Moun 
tains.  At  the  time  Catlin  visited  them,  the  head  chief 
of  the  Sioux  was  Hawanjetah,  greatly  renowned  for 
his  prowess  in  war  and  the  chase.  Of  him  we  are 
furnished  with  the  following  story. 

Hawanjetah  had,  in  some  way,  been  the  accidental 
cause  of  the  death  of  his  only  son,  a  very  fine  youth  ; 
and  so  great  was  the  anguish  of  his  mind,  at  times, 
that  he  became  frantic  and  insane.  In  one  of  these 
moods  he  mounted  his  favorite  war-horse,  with  his  bow 
and  arrows  in  his  hand,  and  dashed  off  at  full  speed 
upon  the  prairies,  repeating  the  most  solemn  oath, 
"  that  he  would  slay  the  first  living  thing  that  fell  in 


246 


VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF 


his  way,  be  it  man  or  beast,  friend  or  foe."  No  one 
dared  to  follow  him,  and  after  he  had  been  absent  an 
hour  or  two,  his  horse  came  back  to  the  village  with 

O 

two  arrows  in  his  body,  and  covered  with  blood  ! 
Fears  of  the  most  serious  kind  were  now  entertained 
for  the  fate  of  the  chief,  and  a  party  of  warriors  im 
mediately  mounted  their  horses,  and  retraced  the  ani 
mal's  tracks  to  the  scene  of  the  tragedy,  where  they 
found  the  body  of  their  chief  horribly  mangled  and 
gored  by  a  buffalo  bull,  whose  carcase  was  stretched 
by  his  side. 

A  close  examination  of  the  ground  was  then  made 
by  the  Indians,  who  ascertained  by  the  tracks,  that 
their  unfortunate  chief,  under  his  unlucky  resolve,  had 
met  a  buffalo  bull,  in  the  season  when  the  animal  is 
stubborn,  and  unwilling  to  run  from  any  one,  and  had 
incensed  the  creature  by  shooting  a  number  of  arrows 
into  him,  which  thus  brought  him  into  furious  combat. 
The  chief  had  then- dismounted,  and,  turning  his  horse 
loose,  shot  a  couple  of  arrows  into  his  body,  which 
sent  him  home  at  full  speed.  He  had  then  thrown 
away  his  bow  and  quiver,  encountering  the  infuriated 
buffalo  with  his  knife  alone,  —  the  desperate  battle  re 
sulting  in  the  death  of  both.  Many  of  the  bones  of 
the  chief  were  broken,  as  he  was  gored  and  stamped 
to  death  ;  and  his  huge  antagonist  had  laid  his  body  by 
the  side  of  him,  weltering  in  blood  from  a  hundred 
wounds,  made  by  the  chief's  long  and  two-edged 
knife. 

The  Sacs,  or  Sauks,  and  Foxes,  called  Renards  by  the 
French,  are  said  to  be  among  the  most  warlike  of  these 
northern  savages.  "  No  Indian  tribe,  except  the  Sioux, 


NORTHERN    AND   WESTERN    INDIANS.  247 

has  shown  such  daring  intrepidity  and  such  implacable 
hatred'  towards  other  tribes.  Their  enmity,  when  once 
excited,  was  never  known  to  be  appeased  till  the  arrow 
or  tomahawk  had  for  ever  prostrated  their  foes.  For 
centuries,  the  prairies  of  Illinois  and  Iowa  were  the 
theatre  of  their  exterminating  prowess  ;  and  to  them 
is  to  be  attributed  the  almost  entire  destruction  of 
the  Missouris,  the  Illinois,  Cahokias,  Kaskaskias,  and 
Peorias.  They  were,  however,  steady  and  sincere  in 
their  friendship  to  the  whites,  and  many  is  the  honest 
settler  on  the  borders  of  their  old  dominion,  who 
mentions,  with  the  warmest  feelings,  the  respectful 
treatment  he  has  received  from  them,  while  he  cut  the 
logs  for  his  cabin,  and  ploughed  his  potato-patch  on 
that  lonely  and  unprotected  frontier." 

This  tribe  formerly  owned  a  great  part  of  the  north 
ern  portion  of  Illinois  and  much  of  the  State  of  Mis 
souri.  Their  friendly  relations  to  the  United  States 
were  first  broken  in  the  year  1832.  A  treaty  had 
been  formed  between  their  chiefs  and  the  commis 
sioners  of  the  United  States,  by  which  they  sold  their 
lands  north  of  the  Rock  River  in  the  State  of  Il 
linois.  This  portion  of  the  country  contained  the  old 
villages  and  burial-places  of  the  nation.  Though  their 
chiefs  had  seen  fit  to  dispose  of  this  tract,  yet  the  tribe 
could  not,  without  a  struggle,  yield  up  the  loved  and  sa 
cred  places  where  every  thing  was  associated  with 
their  former  history.  Some  of  the  chiefs,  and  among 
them  Black  Hawk,  declared  that  they  had  been  de 
ceived  by  the  whites,  and  that  they  had  not  consented 
to  such  a  sale  as  was  attempted  to  be  enforced  upon 
them.  They  therefore  took  up  the  hatchet  for  redress ; 


248  VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF 

but  the  contest  terminated,  as  we  have  related,  in 
their  being  driven  across  the  Mississippi,  and  the  cap 
ture  of  that  noted  chief. 

Among  them  are  still  found  some  able  chiefs,  of 
whom  Catlin  has  given  portraits  and  sketches.  Keo- 
kuck,  the  head  of  the  tribe,  who  is  now  dead,  was  said 
to  possess  superior  abilities,  and  will  be  recollected  by 
many  persons  who  saw  him  on  his  visit  to  Washington 
and  some  of  the  Atlantic  cities  in  1837. 

The  Sacs  and  Foxes  were  formerly  two  distinct 
tribes,  but  have  become  incorporated,  in  the  course  of 
years,  into  one  nation.  The  following  account  is  given 
of  them,  by  the  commanding  officer  of  Fort  Armstrong, 
in  1820.  "  Question  to  Masco,  a  Sauk  chief.  l  What  is 
the  name  of  your  nation?'  Answer.  'Since  we  can 
remember,  we  have  never  had  any  other  name  than 
Saukie  or  Saukie-uck '  (Saukie  is  singular,  Saukie-uck, 
plural).  Question.  '  What  is  its  original  name  ?  '  An 
swer.  '  Since  the  Great  Spirit  made  us,  we  have  had 
that  name  and  no  other  ? '  Question.  '  What  is  the 
name  by  which  it  has  been  known  among  Europeans  ?  ' 
Answer.  '  The  French  called  us  by  that  name  ;  but 
since  then,  the  white  people  have  called  us  Sauks.' 

"  Question  to  Wahballo,  principal  chief  of  the  Fox 
nation.  '  What  is  the  name  of  your  nation  ?  '  An 
swer.  l  Musquak-kie,  or  Musquak-kie-kuck.'  Question. 
4  What  is  its  original  name  ?  '  Answer.  *  Since  the 
Great  Spirit  made  us,  we  have  had  that  name  and  no 
other.'  Question.  '  What  are  the  names  by  which  it 
has  been  known  among  Europeans  ?  '  Answer.  '  The 
French  called  us  Renards,  and  since,  the  white  people 
have  called  us  Foxes.'  Question.  '  Are  any  portion 


NORTHERN    AND   WESTERN    INDIANS.  249 

of  your  tribes  scattered  in  other  parts  ? '  Answer. 
4  Yes.'  Question.  '  Where  ? '  Answer.  '  There  are 
some  of  our  people  on  the  Missouri,  some  near  Fort 
Edwards,  and  some  among  the  Potawatomies.'  Ques 
tion.  '  To  what  nations  are  you  related  by  language  ?  ' 
Answer.  '  The  Sauk,  Fox,  and  Kickapoo  are  related 
by  language.'  Question.  'By  manners  and  customs?' 
Answer.  '  The  Sauk,  Fox,  and  Kickapoo's  manners  and 
customs  are  alike,  except  those  who  have  intercourse 
with  the  whites.'  One  of  the  chiefs  added,  that  the 
Shawanese  descended  from  the  Sauk  nation.  Ques 
tion.  ;  What  tribes  do  you  call  grandfather  ? '  An 
swer.  4  The  Delawares  call  us  and  all  other  Indians 
grandchildren,  and  we,  in  return,  call  them  grand 
father  ;  but  we  know  of  no  relationship  between  them 
and  us.'  Question.  '  What  tribes  are  grandchildren  ?  ' 
Answer.  '  There  are  no  tribes  or  nations  we  call  grand 
children.'  Question.  '  Where  is  the  great  council-fire 
for  all  the  tribes  connected  with  your  own  tribes  ?  ' 
Answer.  ;  We  have  no  particular  place ;  when  we 
have  any  business  to  transact,  it  is  done  at  some  one 
of  our  villages.'  v 

The  Otoe  Indians  consist  in  part  of  Missouri's,  to 
whom  they  became  united  after  the  Sacs  and  Foxes 
had  succeeded  in  dispersing  that  tribe.  When  the 
French  first  came  into  the  country,  the  Missouris 
were  the  most  numerous  tribe  in  the  vicinity  of  St 
Louis.  They  are  said  to  have  been  an  energetic 
race,  till  they  were  nearly  all  cut  off  by  their  Indian 
foes  and  the  small-pox.  This  disease  has  reduced 
and  destroyed  many  an  Indian  nation,  and  is  still,  from 
time  to  time,  performing  its  part  in  wasting  them 


250  VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF 

away.  The  site  of  the  ancient  village  of  the  Missouris 
is  yet  to  be  seen  on  the  north  bank  of  the  river  which 
bears  their  name,  just  below  the  point  at  which  the 
Grand  River  enters  it.  Their  territory  is  said  to  have  em 
braced  the  fertile  country  lying  a  considerable  distance 
along  the  Missouri  above  their  village,  and  down  to 
the  mouth  of  the  Osage,  and  thence  to  the  Mississippi. 

One  of  the  most  celebrated  chiefs  of  this  tribe  was 
Shongmunecuthe,*  or  the  letan.  The  following  par 
ticulars  relate  to  scenes  which  occurred  during  a  tour 
of  the  United  States  commissioner,  in  the  year  1833. 
The  party  were  approaching  the  Otoe  village.  "  The 
old  warrior,"  says  the  narrator,  "  welcomed  us  cor 
dially  ;  then,  turning  round,  he  rode  with  us  in  the  di 
rection  of  the  village.  While  he  was  speaking  with 
the  commissioner,  several  dusky  forms  clambered  the 
high  bluff  before  us,  and  stood  upon  its  dizzy  verge, 
watching  our  movements.  Suddenly  the  letan  gal 
loped  a  few  yards  in  front,  and  waved  his  arm,  utter 
ing  a  long,  shrill  yell.  It  was  answered  by  a  whoop 
from  those  on  the  hill,  who  instantly  commenced  whirl 
ing  their  blankets  around  their  heads.  Then  all  was 
silent. 

"  For  a  few  moments,  we  were  in  doubt  as  to  the 
meaning  of  the  manoeuvre ;  but  suddenly  a  loud  roar 
rose  from  behind  the  bluff,  and  a  dark  troop  of  wild 
horsemen  burst  round  its  base,  and  came  pouring  down 
upon  us.  There  must  have  been  several  hundred  of 
them.  Every  man  was  naked,  but  glaring  with  paint. 
They  dashed  onward,  pealing  out  scream  upon  scream, 

*  See  "  Lives  of  Famous  American  Indians." 


NORTHERN    AND   WESTERN    INDIANS.  251 

brandishing  their  spears,  and  whirling  their  tomahawks 
around  their  heads.  The  old  chief  was  unmoved,  and 
sat  like  a  statue  upon  his  horse.  The  soldiers  who 
accompanied  us,  unaccustomed  to  such  an  Indian  wel 
come,  began  to  prepare  for  action.  The  band  had  now 
approached  within  a  hundred  yards.  We  could  per 
ceive  the  flashing  eyes  of  the  straining  horses,  with 
the  bare  teeth,  scowling  brows,  and  starting  muscles 
of  the  riders.  Bow  clattered  against  bow,  tomahawk 
clashed  against  tomahawk,  and  voice  was  blended  with 
voice,  until  the  whole  din  rose  in  the  air,  like  the  wild, 
tumultuous  roar  of  a  raging  sea.  They  were  close 
upon  us,  —  another  moment,  and  it  might  seem  that 
we  were  lost ;  yet  at  that  moment,  at  a  signal  from  le- 
tan,  the  wild  horde  separated,  and,  whirling  round, 
were  enveloped  in  a  cloud  of  dust. 

"  The  old  chief  smiled,  with  an  air  of  grim  satisfac 
tion,  as  he  observed  the  effect  produced  upon  us  by  his 
warriors  ;  then,  raising  his  voice,  he  joined  in  the  wild 
melee  around  us.  Horse  dashed  against  horse,  as  the 
band  swept  onward  in  a  large  circle.  Some  were  hurled 
from  their  seats ;  others  clung  to  the  manes  of  the 
maddened  horses.  The  strong  poured  down  upon  the 
weak,  and  brushed  them  from  their  paths.  Ever  and 
anon,  some  little  pepper-spirited  horse,  vexed  with  the 
hustling,  would  pause  to  discharge  his  heels  into  the 
ribs  of  his  next  neighbour ;  but  before  it  could  be  done, 
the  crowd  would  pass  on,  and  he  would  be  borne  for 
ward,  in  the  rushing  course  of  the  whirlpool.  No  one 
regarded  his  neighbour  ;  each  was  under  the  influence 
of  a  mad  excitement.  A  giant  Indian  was  dashing 
around,  upon  a  horse  as  powerful  as  himself,  at  the 


252  VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF 

inner  verge  of  the  ring.  In  front  of  him  was  another, 
on  a  little  nag,  who  kept  near  the  border  for  safety. 
Suddenly  they  came  in  contact.  The  powerful  steed 
swept  onward  as  if  he  had  met  with  no  obstacle.  The 
little  horse  spun  out  of  his  path,  and  his  rider  threw  a 
somerset  in  the  air,  landing  in  the  very  midst  of  the 
throng.  Fifty  hoofs  clattered  over  his  head ;  but  he 
scrambled  out,  caught  his  horse,  bounded  on  his  back 
with  a  whoop  and  a  flourish  of  his  tomahawk,  and 
pursued  his  course  as  if  nothing  had  happened. 

"  After  this  scene  of  hubbub  and  confusion  had  con 
tinued  for  about  fifteen  minutes,  the  crowd  gradually 
ceased  its  clamor,  and  formed  in  a  large  circle  round 
us,  with  their  horses'  heads  towards  the  party.  Pres 
ently  the  ring  broke,  and  was  extended  in  two  lines, 
through  which  a  band  of  about  thirty  warriors  slowly 
advanced,  to  a  long,  solemn  chant,  sung  by  the  whole 
troop,  and  accompanied  by  a  kind  of  drum.  This 
band  was  formed  of  the  flower  of  the  Indian  village. 
None  were  admitted  except  those  who  could  boast  of 
having  taken  a  certain  number  of  scalps,  or  of  having 
performed  an  equally  honorable  service  in  stealing  a 
large  number  of  horses."  In  this  manner  was  the 
commissioner  welcomed  to  the  Indian  village. 

A  singular  story  is  related  by  the  writer  of  the  above 
extract,  respecting  one  of  the  braves  of  the  Otoes. 
"  One  squaw  attracted  our  attention,  from  her  gigantic 
height.  As  we  approached  her,  there  was  a  mascu 
line  coarseness  in  the  features  of  her  face,  which  ren 
dered  her  hideously  ugly,  and  formed  a  contrast  highly 
in  favor  of  the  group  around  her.  We  afterwards 
learned  that  this -strange  being,  though  now  clad  in  the 


NORTHERN   AND   WESTERN    INDIANS.  253 

garb  of  a  female,  and  performing  the  most  menial  of 
their  offices,  was  in  reality  a  man,  and  had  once  rank 
ed  among  the  proudest  braves  of  the  Otoe  nation. 
His  name  had  once  stood  foremost  in  war  and  in 
council.  He  had  led  on  many  an  expedition  against 
their  noble,  but  bitter  foes,  the  Osages.  In  the  midst 
of  his  bright  career,  a  change  came  over  him.  The 
cause  was  this.  He  had  been  for  several  weeks  ab 
sent  upon  a  war  expedition  against  the  enemies  of 
his  tribe.  At  a  little  before  sunset,  on  a  fine  after 
noon,  this  band  of  Indians  were  seen  coming  over  the 
hills,  returning  towards  their  village.  The  troop  of 
way-worn  warriors  counted  less  than  when  they  start 
ed  ;  but  their  bundle  of  scalps,  and  their  fierce  brows, 
declared  that  their  lost  comrades  had  been  avenged. 
In  front  of  them  strode  the  form  of  the  giant  brave. 
He  was  wearied  with  toil  and  fasting,  and,  without 
staying  to  receive  the  greetings  of  his  fellow-towns 
men,  he  hastened  to  his  lodge  and  threw  himself  upon 
one  of  the  bear-skins  which  form  an  Indian  bed. 

"  He  remained  for  the  night.  In  the  morning  he 
arose  from  his  couch ;  but  he  was  an  altered  man.  A 
change,  fearful  and  thrilling,  had  come  over  him.  His 
eye  was  quenched  ;  his  proud  step  wavered  ;  and  his 
haughty  frame  seemed  almost  sinking  beneath  the  pres 
sure  of  some  heavy  calamity.  He  collected  his  family 
around  him.  He  told  them  that  the  Great  Spirit  had 
visited  him  in  a  dream,  and  had  said  to  him  that  he 
had  now  reached  the  height  of  his  fame  ;  that  no  voice 
had  more  weight  at  the  council-fire  than  his  ;  that  no 
arm  was  heavier  in  battle  ;  and  concluded  by  com 
manding  him  henceforth  to  relinquish  all  claim  to  the 


254  VARIOUS    TRIBES    OF 

rank  of  a  warrior,  and  assume  the  dress  and  duties  of 
a  female.  The  communication  was  listened  to  with 
deep  sorrow,  but  with  implicit  confidence.  He  then 
made  known  his  determination  to  the  nation.  They, 
too,  listened  gravely  and  sadly,  but  admitted  the  just 
ness  of  his  views.  He  next  returned  to  his  lod^e, 

O     * 

took  down  his  bow,  broke  it  into  atoms,  and  threw 
them  in  the  fire.  He  buried  his  tomahawk  and  rifle, 
washed  the  war-paint  from  his  face,  and  took  out  the 
eagle-plume  from  his  scalp-lock.  After  this,  he  was 
seen  no  more  among  the  warriors,  and  took  no  part  in 
the  councils  ;  but,  attired  as  a  female,  occupied  himself 
in  the  most  servile  and  degrading  employments,  and 
lived  abject,  neglected,  and  scorned  by  those  who  once 
gloried  in  being  his  followers  !  " 

The  Osages  are  said  to  have  been  formerly  a  brave 
and  Warlike  people,  and  in  good  circumstances.  But 
disease,  and  the  attacks  of  the  Sioux,  of  whom  they 
were  once  the  hardiest  and  fiercest  enemies,  have 
reduced  their  tribe  so  that  not  more  than  5,500 
now  remain.  Treaties  have  been  made  with  them, 
and  various  efforts  have  been  used,  but  with  small 
success,  to  civilize  and  teach  them.  They  have  se 
cured  to  them,  for  the  education  of  their  tribe,  by 
an  arrangement  for  the  sale  of  their  lands  to  the 
United  States,  about  seventy  thousand  dollars.  Stipu 
lations  have  also  been  entered  into  to  teach  them  agri 
cultural  pursuits. 

This  tribe  are  still  distinguished  for  their  tall,  fine 
forms,  though  they  have  lost  their  fame  as  warriors. 
They  have  repeatedly  moved  and  jostled  along  from 
the  head- waters  of  the  White  River,  and  even  from 


NORTHERN    AND   WESTERN    INDIANS.  255 

the  banks  of  the  Mississippi,  to  the  Indian  territory 
bordering  on  the  Creeks,  where  they  now  are.  The 
Kansas,  formerly  a  portion  of  this  nation,  have  seceded 
from  them,  and  thus  impaired  their  strength.  They 
have  been,  till  recently,  engaged  in  war  with  the 
Pawnees  and  Camanches,  and,  though  thereby  reduced, 
they  have  a  number  of  able  men  as  chiefs  and  war 
riors. 


THE   INDIANS   WEST  OF  THE  MIS 
SISSIPPI. 


THE  Omahaws  are  said  to  have  formerly  been  a 
much  larger  tribe  than  they  are  at  present,  and  a  terror 
to  their  neighbours,  being  able  to  muster  not  less  than 
a  thousand  warriors.  But  in  the  year  1802,  they  were 
attacked  by  the  small-pox,  and  the  tribe  was  reduced 
to  about  three  hundred  souls.  The  survivors,  unwilling 
to  remain  in  a  place  that  had  proved  so  fatal  to  them, 
burned  their  village,  and  became,  for  a  time,  a  wan 
dering  people.  But  they  have  since  returned  to  their 
country,  north  of  the  River  Platte,  and  built  a  village 
on  the  southwest  bank  of  the  Missouri.  The  Pancas, 
having  been  nearly  destroyed  by  the  Sioux,  after  sev 
eral  removals  from  the  Red  River  of  Lake  Winnipeg, 
joined  the  Omahaws,  and,  for  a  time,  were  merged  in 
that  tribe,  but  have  now  resumed  their  separate  exist 
ence.  These  two  tribes  are  allied  with  the  Pawnees, 
and,  some  twenty  years  since,  their  chiefs  accompanied 
some  Pawnees  and  other  Indian  warriors  to  Washing 
ton,  where  Big  Elk,  the  Omahaw  chief,  thus  addressed 
the  President. 

"  My  great  father,  look  at  me  !   look  at  me,  my 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  257 

father  !  My  hands  are  unstained  with  your  blood  ;  my 
people  have  never  struck  the  whites,  and  the  whites 
have  never  struck  them.  It  is  not  the  case  with  other 
red-skins.  Mine  is  the  only  nation  that  has  spared  the 
Long  Knives.  I  am  a  chief,  but  not  the  only  one  in  my 
nation  ;  there  are  other  chiefs  who  raise  their  crests  by 
my  side.  I  have  always  been  the  friend  of  the  Long 
Knives,  and,  before  this  chief"  (pointing  to  Major 
O'Fallon)  "  came  among  us,  I  suffered  much  in  sup 
port  of  the  whites.  I  was  often  reproached  for  being 
their  friend  ;  but  when  my  father  came  among  us,  he 
strengthened  my  arms,  and  I  soon  towered  over  the 
rest." 

In  reference  to  the  proposition  made  him  to  have 
people  come  among  them  to  teach  them  the  arts  of 
agriculture,  he  said  :  — "  The  Great  Spirit  made  my 
skin  red,  and  he  made  us  to  live  as  we  do  now  ;  and  I 
believe,  that,  when  the  Great  Spirit  placed  us  upon  this 
earth,  he  consulted  our  happiness.  We  love  our  coun 
try,  we  love  our  customs  and  habits.  I  wish  that  you 
would  permit  us  to  enjoy  them  as  long  as  I  live.  When 
we  become  hungry  and  naked  ;  when  the  game  of  the 
country  becomes  exhausted,  and  misery  encompasses 
our  families ;  then,  and  not  till  then,  do  I  want  those 
good  people  among  us.  Then  they  may  lend  us  a 
helping  hand  ;  then  show  us  the  wealth  of  the  earth  ; 
the  advantages  and  sustenance  to  be  derived  from  its 
culture." 

In  the  recent  report  of  the  Commissioner  for  Indian 
Affairs,  he  says,  "  The  agent  states  that  the  Omahaws 
waited  on  him,  previous  to  their  starting  on  their  sum 
mer  hunt,  and  most  earnestly  begged   for  arms  and 
17 


258  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

ammunition  to  enable  them  to  defend  themselves  against 
their  enemies,  declaring,  '  If  our  great  father  will  now 
furnish  us  arms  and  ammunition,  we  will  defend  our 
selves.'  The  agent  remarks,  further,  '  The  Sioux, 
from  all  that  we  can  learn,  are  resolved  on  extermi 
nating  this  little  band  of  Indians.  Some  few  days 
after  the  visit  of  the  Omahaws,  above  spoken  of,  I  was 
called  on  by  an  express  from  the  Omahaw  camp,  ask 
ing  for  the  assistance  of  the  troops  to  defend  them 
against  their  enemies,  and  to  retake  thirty-six  horses, 
which  the  Sioux  had  taken  in  a  skirmish,  a  few  days 
previous.'  He  adds,  that, l  until  the  fierce  and  bloody 
war  now  prosecuted  by  the  Sioux  shall  subside,  it  will 
be  in  vain  to  try  to  prosper  the  Omahaws  in  agricul 
tural  pursuits.  —  Owing  to  the  game  receding,  the 
Omahaws  have  to  seek  food  in  the  more  distant  prair 
ies,  which  makes  them  the  more  accessible  ;  and  unless 
they  can  be  provided  for  in  agricultural  pursuits,  where 
they  will  be  more  remote  from  their  harassing  ene 
my,  the  same  fierce  and  cruel  war,  in  all  probability, 
will  continue.  The  Omahaws  have  this  season  return 
ed  to  their  old  village,  near  the  Missouri  River,  and, 
from  present  appearances,  they  will  have  to  abandon 
it  again.'  '' 

The  Pawnees  own  an  extensive  country  on  the  Great 
Platte  River,  lying  west  of  the  Otoes  and  Omahaws. 
They  still  retain  their  fondness  for  savage  life,  and 
keep  up  among  them  many  of  their  old  customs.  Va 
rious  treaties  have  been  formed  with  them,  but,  as  yet, 
they  evince  no  desire  for  civilization.  They  are  divid 
ed  into  the  Grand  Pawnees,  the  Tapage  Pawnees, 
the  Wolf  Pawnees,  or  Pawnee  Loups,  and  the  Re- 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  259 

publican  Pawnees.  They  were  formerly  a  numerous 
nation  ;  but  the  small-pox  being  introduced  in  1832, 
by  the  fur-traders  and  whisky-sellers,  swept  off  ten 
thousand  or  more  of  them,  in  a  few  months,  so  that 
they  do  not  now  number  more  than  ten  or  twelve 
thousand.  They  are  a  warlike  people,  and  live  in  four 
villages,  several  miles  apart,  having  their  allies,  the 
Omahaws  and  Otoes,  so  near  them,  that  they  may  act  in 
concert  in  case  of  invasion.  The  Pawnee  chief  who 
visited  Washington,  at  the  time  before  alluded  to,  in 
company  with  Major  O'Fallon,  like  the  Omahaw  chief, 
declined  the  offer  of  teachers,  on  the  ground  that  the 
Great  Spirit  made  them  for  the  chase,  and  intended 
them  "to  go  to  war,  to  take  scalps,  steal  horses,  and 
triumph  ove  their  enemies." 

One  of  the  delegation,  at  this  time,  was  a  Pawnee 
brave,  of  a  noble  size,  figure,  and  countenance.  At  the 
early  age  of  twenty-one,  his  heroic  deeds  acquired  for 
him  the  rank  of  the  "  bravest  of  the  braves."  The 
following  incident  was  related  of  him.  An  unfortu 
nate  female  of  the  Paduca  nation,  as  the  Camanches 
are  called  by  them,  having  been  taken  prisoner,  was 
destined  to  torture.  The  fatal  hour  arrived  ;  the 
trembling  victim,  far  from  her  home  and  her  friends, 
was  fastened  to  the  stake  ;  the  whole  tribe  was  assem 
bled  on  the  surrounding  plain  to  witness  the  awful 
scene.  Just  when  the  funeral  pile  was  to  be  kindled, 
and  the  whole  multitude  of  'spectators  were  excited 
with  expectation,  this  young  warrior,  having  prepared 
two  fleet  horses,  with  the  necessary  provisions,  sprang 
from  his  seat,  rushed  throngh  the  crowd,  liberated  the 
victim,  seized  her  in  his  arms,  placed  her  on  one  of 


260  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

the  horses,  mounted  the  other  himself,  and  made  the 
utmost  speed  towards  the  nation  and  friends  of  the 
captive.  The  multitude,  struck  dumb  and  nerveless 
by  the  boldness  of  the  deed,  made  no  effort  to  rescue 
their  intended  victim  from  her  deliverer.  They  view 
ed  it  as  the  immediate  act  of  the  Great  Spirit,  submit 
ted  to  it  without  a  murmur,  and  quietly  retired  to  their 
village.  The  young  chief  accompanied  the  released 
captive  three  days,  through  the  wilderness,  towards  her 
home.  He  then  gave  her  the  horse  on  which  she  rode, 
with  sufficient  food  for  the  remainder  of  the  journey, 
and  they  parted.  On  his  return  to  the  village,  no 
inquiry  was  made  into  his  conduct,  and  no  censure 
was  passed  on  it.  Since  this  transaction,  no  human 
sacrifice  has  been  offered  in  this  or  any  other  of  the 
Pawnee  tribes,  and  the  practice  has  been  thus  aban 
doned. 

On  the  occasion  of  the  visit  of  this  Pawnee  chief  to 
Washington,  the  young  ladies  of  a  seminary  in  that 
city,  having  heard  of  the  anecdote  just  related,  pre 
sented  him  a  handsome  silver  medal,  in  token  of 
commendation  of  his  noble  act  in  rescuing  one  of  their 
sex  from  a  cruel  death,  closing  their  address  with  these 
words  :  —  "  Brother,  accept  this  token  of  our  esteem  ; 
always  wear  it  for  our  sakes  ;  and  when  again  you 
have  the  power  to  save  a  poor  woman  from  death  and 
torture,  think  of  this  and  of  us,  and  fly  to  her  relief 
and  her  rescue." 

His  reply  was  to  this  effect :  —  "  Sisters,  I  am  glad 
you  have  heard  of  the  good  deed  I  have  done.  I  did  it 
partly  in  ignorance  ;  but  your  gift  makes  me  feel  happy, 
and  enables  me  more  fully  to  see  that  I  did  right.  I 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  261 

shall  now  be  even  more  ready  to  listen  to  the  words 
of  the  white  man,  for  they  tell  me  what  is  good." 

The  following  speech  of  a  Pawnee  chief  was  made 
at  Fort  Gibson  in  1833,  and  addressed  to  Mr.  Ells- 
worth,  the  United  States  commissioner,  on  taking  leave 
of  him  to  return  home,  after  having  accompanied  him 
on  a  part  of  his  tour. 

44 1  have  travelled  with  my  grandfather  many  miles 
on  foot.  He  came  to  our  village.  We  ran  to  meet 
him.  We  followed  him  here.  We  came  through 
many  villages  of  hostile  bands,  whom  we  never  have 
met  before.  All  treated  us  kindly,  and  peace  is  made. 
My  heart  is  glad.  I  am  a  wild  man,  and  come  naked 
to  follow  my  grandfather  ;  but  I  am  not  ashamed.  A 
bird  hovers  over  her  young,  and  takes  care  of  them ; 
so  does  our  Great  Father  pity  and  care  for  us.  I  feel 
now  as  though  I  was  born  again.  I  used  to  worship 
the  Great  Spirit  as  my  forefathers  did  ;  but  now  I  will 
worship  him  as  the  white  men  do.  Every  day,  when  I 
speak  to  you,  I  look  to  the  Great  Spirit  to  help  me 
speak  the  truth,  and  what  I  say  is  true.  I  go  out  alone 
and  speak  to  the  Great  Spirit,  and  ask  his  aid ;  but  we 
now  look  to  him  together.  I  am  now  going  home. 
The  wild  Indians  will  be  glad  to  hear  how  we  have 
been  treated  by  our  enemies,  and  how  our  great  father 
has  spoken  to  us.  Our  ears  are  bored  out,  and  noth 
ing  shall  be  forgotten." 

Mr.  Murray,  an  English  gentleman,  who  travelled 
among  the  Indians  about  eight  years  since,  gives  us  the 
following  sketch. 

"  Within  twenty  or  thirty  miles  of  Fort  Leavenworth 
are  settled  a  great  variety  of  Indian  tribes,  most  of 


262  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

them  emigrants  from  the  country  now  inhabited  by  the 
whites,  especially  from  the  States  of  Illinois  and  Mich 
igan.  The  nearest  to  the  fort  are  the  Kickapoos,  who 
are  settled  in  a  village  distant  from  it.  about  four  miles. 
They  are  a  weak  and  daily  decreasing  tribe  ;  their 
natural  properties  are  much  changed  by  constant  com 
munication  with  the  whites.  There  is  a  Methodist 
missionary  resident  among  them. 

"  The  fort  is  supplied  with  beef  and  other  meat, 
chiefly  by  a  farmer  who  lives  in  the  Great  Bottom, 
immediately  opposite  to  it.  Among  other  articles  for 
the  supply  of  the  table,  one  of  the  most  abundant  to 
be  met  with  here,  is  the  cat-fish.  I  found  it  some 
what  coarse,  but  not  unpalatable  eating.  These  fish 
are  caught,  of  a  most  enormous  size,  and  in  great 
quantities,  by  the  settlers  on  the  banks  of  the  river ; 
one  of  whom  told  me  that  he  caught  four  in  the  course 
of  one  morning,  weighing  above  fifty  pounds  each. 

"  On  the  4th  of  July,  the  usual  commemoration  took 
place,  of  firing  twenty-four  guns  ;  after  which  cere 
mony  we  adjourned  to  an  excellent  dinner,  and  madei 
ra  and  champagne  were  the  order  of  the  day.  We 
had  spent  an  hour  or  two  in  the  festivities  of  the  table, 
when  news  was  brought  in  that  a  hundred  and  fifty 
Pawnees  had  arrived,  under  the  guidance  of  Mr. 
Dougherty,  one  of  the  principal  Indian  agents  ;  and, 
upon  an  invitation  from  the  officers,  twelve  or  fourteen 
of  their  chief  warriors  came  into  the  mess-room.  I 
had  already  seen  many  Indians,  but  none  so  wild  and 
unsophisticated  as  these  genuine  children  of  the  wil 
derness.  They  entered  the  room  with  considerable 
ease  and  dignity,  shook  hands  with  us  all,  and  sat  down 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  263 

comfortably  to  cigars  and  madeira.  I  was  quite  as 
tonished  at  the  tact  and  self-possession  of  these  Indians, 
two  thirds  of  whom  had  never  been  in  a  settlement  of 
white  men  before,  nor  had  ever  seen  a  fork,  or  table, 
or  chair  in  their  lives  ;  yet,  without  asking  questions, 
or  appearing  to  observe  what  was  passing,  they  caught 
the  idea  with  intuitive  readiness,  and  during  the  whole 
dinner  were  not  guilty  of  a  single  absurdity  or  breach 
of  decorum. 

"  The  dress  of  these  Indians  consisted  of  a  belt  of 
deer-skin  round  the  middle,  with  a  flap  passing  be 
tween  the  legs,  and  fastened  again  to  the  belt  behind. 
Their  legs  were  covered  with  tight  leggins  of  deer 
skin,  and  their  feet  by  moccasins  ;  while  their  should 
ers  were  loosely  and  gracefully  covered,  or  half  cov 
ered,  by  a  blanket  or  buffalo-skin.  Most  of  them  had 
ear-rings,  bead-necklaces,  and  armlets  ;  and  the  two 
principal  chiefs  wore  round  their  necks  a  large  medal 
each,  on  which  was  engraved  the  head  of  the  late 
president  of  the  United  States.  The  greater  part  of 
them  were  lusty,  and  a  few  even  fat,  giving  no  out 
ward  evidence  of  the  privations  to  which  their  mode 
of  life  renders  them  so  liable.  Generally  speaking, 
they  were  of  middle  height,  with  fine  chests,  arms 
well  proportioned,  but  not  muscular,  and  remarkably 
fine-shaped  legs.  I  do  not  think  there  was  a  counte 
nance  among  them  that  could  be  pronounced  hand 
some,  though  several  were  pleasing  and  good-humor 
ed  ;  but  the  prevalent  character  of  their  expression 
was  haughty,  impenetrable  reserve,  easily  distinguish 
able  through  the  mask  of  frank  conciliation,  which 
their  present  object  rendered  it  expedient  for  them  to 
wear. 


264  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

"  As  we,  in  our  mirth,  sang  one  or  two  choral  songs, 
we  called  upon  our  red  brethren.  They  rose  all  at 
once  ;  and  I  never  shall  forget  the  effect  of  that  first 
Indian  chorus  which  I  ever  heard.  Each  singer  began, 
by  strange  and  uncouth  sounds,  to  work  his  mind  and 
lungs  up  to  the  proper  pitch  of  excitement ;  and  when, 
at  length,  their  shrill  and  terrible  cry  rose  to  its  full 
height,  its  effect  was  astounding,  and  sufficient  to  deaf 
en  a  delicate  ear.  Then,  again,  they  would  allow 
their  strain  to  fall  into  a  monotonous  cadence,  to  which 
they  kept  time  with  inflections  of  the  head  and  body, 
and  again  burst  forth  into  full  chorus  of  mingled  yell 
and  howl." 

During  Mr.  Murray's  stay  among  the  Pawnees,  he 
witnessed  the  following  scene. 

"  While  I  was  sitting  near  my  packs  of  goods,  like 
an  Israelite  in  Monmouth  Street,  an  elderly  chief  ap 
proached,  and  signified  his  wish  to  trade.  Our  squaws 
placed  some  meat  before  him,  after  which  I  gave  him 
the  pipe  ;  and,  in  the  meantime,  had  desired  my  ser 
vant  to  search  my  saddle-bags,  and  to  add  to  the  heap 
of  salable  articles  every  thing  of  every  kind  beyond 
what  was  absolutely  necessary  for  my  covering  on  my 
return.  A  spare  shirt,  handkerchief,  and  waistcoat 
were  thus  draughted  ;  and,  among  other  things,  was  a 
kind  of  elastic  flannel  waistcoat,  made  for  wearing 
next  to  the  skin,  and  to  be  drawn  over  the  head,  as  it 
was  without  buttons  or  any  opening  in  front.  It  was 
too  small  for  me,  and  altogether  so  tight  and  uncom 
fortable,  although  elastic,  that  I  had  determined  to  part 
with  it. 

"  To  this  last  article  my  new  customer  took  a  great 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  265 

fancy  ;  and  he  made  me  describe  to  him  the  method 
of  putting  it  on,  and  the  warmth  and  comfort  of  it 
when  on.  Be  it  remembered  that  he  was  a  very  large, 
corpulent  man,  probably  weighing  sixteen  stone.  I 
knew  him  to  be  very  good-natured,  as  I  had  hunted 
once  with  his  son  ;  and,  on  returning  to  his  lodge,  the 
father  had  feasted  me,  chatted  with  me  by  signs,  and 
taught  me  some  of  that  most  extraordinary  Indian 
method  of  communication.  He  said  he  should  like  to 
try  on  the  jacket ;  and  as  he  threw  the  buffalo-robe  off 
his  huge  shoulders,  I  could  scarcely  keep  my  gravity, 
when  I  compared  their  dimensions  with  the  garment 
into  which  we  were  about  to  attempt  their  introduction. 
However,  by  dint  of  great  industry  and  care,  we  con 
trived  to  get  him  into  it.  In  the  body,  it  was  a  foot  too 
short,  and  fitted  him  so  close  that  every  thread  was 
stretched  to  the  uttermost ;  the  sleeves  reached  a  very 
little  way  below  his  elbow.  However,  he  looked  upon 
his  arms  and  person  with  great  complacency,  and 
elicited  many  smiles  from  the  squaws  at  the  drollery  of 
his  attire  ;  but,  as  the  weather  was  very  hot,  he  soon 
began  to  find  himself  too  warm  and  confined,  and  he 
wished  to  take  it  off  again.  He  moved  his  arms,  —  he 
pulled  the  sleeves,  —  he  twisted  and  turned  himself  in 
every  direction,  but  in  vain.  The  woollen  jacket  was 
an  admirable  illustration  of  the  Inferno  of  Dante  and 
Virgil,  and  of  matrimony  as  described  by  many  poets ; 
it  was  easy  enough  to  get  into  it,  sed  revacare  gradum 
was  a  difficult  matter  indeed.  The  old  man  exerted 
himself  till  the  drops  of  perspiration  fell  from  his  fore 
head  ;  but  had  I  not  been  there,  he  must  either  have 
made  some  person  cut  it  open,  or  have  sat  in  it  until 
this  minute. 


266  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

"  For  some  time,  I  enjoyed  this  scene  with  malicious 
and  demure  gravity,  and  then  I  showed  him  that  he 
must  try  and  pull  it  off  over  his  head.  A  lad,  who 
stood  by,  then  drew  it  till  it  enveloped  his  nose,  eyes, 
mouth,  and  ears  ;  his  arms  were  raised  above  his  head, 
and  for  some  minutes  he  remained  in  that  melancholy 
plight,  blinded,  choked,  and  smothered,  with  his  hands 
rendered  useless  for  the  time.  He  rolled  about,  sneez 
ing,  sputtering,  and  struggling,  until  all  around  were 
convulsed  with  laughter  ;  and  the  squaws  shrieked,  in 
their  ungovernable  mirth,  in  a  manner  that  I  had  never 
before  witnessed.  At  length  I  slit  a  piece  of  the  edge, 
and  released  the  old  fellow  from  his  straight-waistcoat 
confinement.  He  turned  it  round  often  in  his  hands, 
and  made  a  kind  of  comic-grave  address  to  it,  of  which 
I  could  only  gather  a  few  words.  I  believe  the  import 
of  them  was,  that  it  would  be  a  '  good  creature  in  the 
ice-month  at  the  village.'  I  was  so  pleased  with  his 
good  humor,  that  I  gave  it  to  him,  and  told  him  to 
warm  his  squaw  with  it  in  the  ice-month." 

Mr.  Murray  gives  us,  also,  the  following  sketch. 

"  On  the  6th,  I  rode  out  with  Captain  Hunter  to  the 
Kickapoo  village,  which  is  about  five  miles  from  the 
fort.  The  Kickapoos  are  a  branch  of  the  great  north 
ern  nation  of  Indians,  which  includes  the  Potawatomies, 
the  Chippewas,  and  other  numerous  tribes.  Their  for 
mer  territory  has  been  bought  by  the  United  States, 
and  this  tract  of  country,  along  the  southern  bank  of 
the  Missouri,  allotted  in  its  stead  ;  beside  which,  the 
United  States  .engaged  to  supply  them,  for  a  certain 
time,  with  a  stipulated  quantity  of  provisions,  clothes, 
&c.  Living  so  near  the  settlements,  they  have  lost 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  Mlf 


J-  267 


most  of  the  traits  of  their  original  character,  arfd  are  a 
reduced,  debased  race  ;  nevertheless,  they  are  now  in 
teresting  in  a  religious  point  of  view.  A  miniature 
Mahomet  has  arisen  among  them,  and  the  tribe  is  di 
vided  into  two  sects,  the  religious  and  irreligious  ; 
these  are  pretty  equal  in  number,  and  the  former  ac 
knowledge  and  obey,  as  secular  chief,  the  prophet  who 
teaches  the  new  creed.  This  man  preaches  very  good 
and  enlightened  morality.  He  pretends  to  have  seen 
the  Great  Spirit  in  a  vision,  and  to  have  received  his 
command  to  proclaim  his  truths  and  precepts  to  the 
Indians.  I  should  have  been  astonished  at  the  excel 
lence  of  his  doctrine,  and  the  soundness  of  his  religious 
views,  if  I  had  not  learned  from  a  gentleman,  long  res 
ident  among  them,  the  fountain  from  which  he  drew 
his  knowledge.  It  appears,  that,  when  very  young,  he 
learned  the  English  language  thoroughly,  and,  in  re 
mote  parts  of  the  State  of  Illinois,  attended  many 
Christian  meetings.  He  thus  became  acquainted  with 
the  outlines  of  the  Christian  scheme,  and  with  the  mo 
rality  which  the  Bible  inculcates  ;  and  afterward  graft 
ing  the  knowledge  thus  acquired  upon  his  Indian  preju 
dices  and  superstitions,  he  has  used  it  as  an  engine  of 
personal  aggrandizement,  and  become  priest,  prophet, 
and  chief  of  half  his  nation. 

"  I  attended  a  preaching,  which  was  held  under  a 
large,  open,  reed-thatched  shed.  The  meeting  was 
conducted  with  the  greatest  decorum  ;  all  the  men  un 
der  or  near  the  shed  stood  uncovered  ;  but  in  this,  as 
in  all  the  Christian  churches  that  I  have  seen  in  any 
country,  the  greater  part  of  the  assembly  were  females. 
Each  was  supplied  with  a  flat  board,  on  which  were 


268  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

carved  symbols,  which  answered  the  purpose  of  letters, 
and  enabled  them  to  chime  in  with  the  prayer  or  hymn 
of  the  preacher. 

"  I  regretted  to  find  that  the  officiating  preacher  was 
not  the  4  great  prophet  himself,'  but  one  of  his  favorite 
disciples.  He  was  a  man  of  middle  age,  with  a  quiet 
and  earnest  expression  of  countenance,  and  a  voice 
capable  of  much  modulation  and  variety  of  tone  ;  he 
spoke  without  the  slightest  hesitation.  I  placed  myself 
within  hearing,  and,  keeping  at  my  elbow  the  half-breed 
French  interpreter,  took  down  in  pencil  the  following 
scraps  from  his  lecture  :  — l  Look  up  at  the  heavens  ! 
look  around  you  at  the  earth  fertile  with  fruit,  and  the 
animals  given,  for  our  use.  All  these  show  the  good 
ness  of  the  Great  Spirit.  If  he  were  not  good,  much 
better  than  any  of  us,  he  would  be  angry  with  us,  for 
we  are  all  bad,  and  disobey  him  ;  he  would  punish, 
and  not  forgive  us.  But  if  we  are  good  and  obey  him, 
we  are  happier  and  more  flourishing  here  ;  all  goes 
well  with  us.  We  are  but  half-taught  children  ;  we 
are  poor  Indians.  It  is  only  a  few  years  since  we 
learned  his  will  and  commands,  through  his  prophet ; 
but  if  we  ask  him,  and  obey  him,  we  shall  daily  grow 
wiser  and  happier ' ;  —  and  so  on  in  a  similar  strain. 
After  this  sermon,  a  hymn  was  sung.  It  was  a  low, 
melancholy,  and  not  unmusical  air,  and  was  rendered 
wild  and  peculiar  by  the  closing  of  each  verse  in  the 
minor  key.  I  left  the  scene  with  strong  emotions  of 
interest  and  compassion,  and  must  own  that  I  entertain 
hopes,  though  but  faint  ones,  that  this  twilight  may  be 
the  forerunner  of  the  sunrise  of  the  gospel  among 
them." 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  269 

There  is  another  tribe  of  Indians,  called  Pawnee 
Picts,  who  live  on  the  banks  of  the  Red  River,  in  alli 
ance  with  the  Camanches,  and  are  sometimes  reckoned 
as  belonging  to  the  Pawnees,  though  a  thousand  miles 
from  them.  Catlin  asserts  that  "  there  is  no  family 
resemblance,  nor  any  similarity  in  their  language  and 
customs."  Their  village  is  described  as  being  a  large 
one,  containing  some  five  or  six  hundred  wigwams. 
The  nation  consists  of  from  eight  to  ten  thousand  per 
sons.  At  a  council  held  while  Catlin  was  present, 
Colonel  Dodge  restored  to  them  two  Pawnee  girls,  who 
had  been  purchased  from  their  captors,  the  Osages, 
and  received  in  return  a  little  boy,  the  son  of  Judge 
Martin,  whose  family  had  been  murdered  on  the  False 
Washita.  On  this  occasion,  "  the  heart  of  the  venera 
ble  old  chief  seemed  to  melt  at  the  evidence  of  the 
white  man's  friendship  ;  he  rose  on  his  feet,  and,  taking 
Colonel  Dodge  in  his  arms,  and  placing  his  left  cheek 
against  the  left  cheek  of  the  Colonel,  held  him  for 
some  minutes  without  saying  a  word,  whilst  tears  were 
flowing  from  his  eyes.  He  then  embraced  each  offi 
cer  in  turn,  in  the  same  silent  and  affectionate  man 
ner."  The  chief,  with  two  others,  accompanied  Col 
onel  Dodge  to  Fort  Gibson,  and  formed  a  treaty  with 
the  United  States.  Their  residence  is  among  the  Rocky 
Mountains. 

Close  by  the  Pawnee  Picts  are  the  Kioways,  who 
are  described  as  being  a  fine  looking  race  of  men, 
very  tall,  some  of  them  being  seven  feet  high,  and 
having  a  Roman  outline  of  head.  They  are  decidedly 
distinct  from  the  Pawnee  Picts  and  the  Camanches,  and 
also  differ  from  them  in  language  and  customs. 


270  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

The  Camanches  arc  supposed  to  be  at  least  twenty 
thousand  strong.  Catlin  even  estimates  them  as  high 
as  thirty  or  forty  thousand,  and  says  they  are  able  to 
show  some  six  or  seven  thousand  warriors,  well  mount 
ed  and  well  armed.  They  are  a  very  warlike  tribe, 
traversing  the  immense  space  of  country  extending  far 
north  and  south,  and  east  and  west,  from  the  Red  River 
to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  They  were  long  the  dreaded 
enemy  of  the  Spaniards,  as  they  now  are  of  the  Mex 
icans,  on  whom  they  make  frequent  incursions,  and 
bear  off  prisoners,  especially  female  children,  whom 
they  adopt  and  marry.  About  sixty  y*ears  ago,  the 
daughter  of  the  governor-general  of  Chihuahua  was 
stolen  by  them.  The  father,  by  an  agent,  some  weeks 
after,  was  allowed  to  ransom  her.  But  she  refused  to 
return  to  her  parents,  and  sent  them  word  that  the  In 
dians  had  tattooed  her  face,  and  given  her  to  be  the 
wife  of  a  young  man  of  their  tribe  ;  that  her  husband 
treated  her  well,  and  had  reconciled  her  to  his  mode 
of  life.  In  her  present  circumstances,  therefore,  she 
preferred  remaining  where  she  was.  She  continued 
in  the  nation,  and  raised  a  family  of  children. 

The  Camanches  have  fought  many  a  bloody  battle 
with  their  enemies,  and  have  always  succeeded  in 
preserving  their  independence.  They  particularly  ex 
cel  in  catching  and  taming  for  use  the  wild  horses  of 
the  plains,  and  form  a  terrible  cavalry  in  war,  par 
ticularly  as  they  are  able,  in  a  moment,  to  throw 
themselves  over  to  the  opposite  side  of  the  horse, 
so  as  to  be  screened  from  their  enemy,  while  they 
can  shoot  their  arrows,  either  over  or  under  the 
horse's  neck,  with  such  force  as  to  pierce  through 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  271 

a  buffalo.  They  also  carry,  in  war,  a  shield,  and 
a  larice  of  fourteen  feet  in  length,  which  they  use 
with  great  effect.  Numerous  instances  of  their  in 
trepidity  are  on  record.  The  following  incident  is 
related  by  Farnham  in  his  travels.  About  the  middle 
of  June,  1839,  a  band  of  fifty  or  sixty  crossed  the  river 
in  the  night,  and  concealed  themselves  near  where 
the  animals  of  the  establishment  were  feeding  during 
the  day.  As  they  concealed  themselves  in  the  bushes, 
they  were  not  perceived  by  the  Mexican  horse-guard, 
who,  after  having  driven  out  his  charge  within  reach 
of  the  guns  of  the  fort,  took  his  station,  as  usual, 
beyond  them,  holding  his  horse  by  a  long  rope,  and 
suffering  him  to  graze  around  him.  While  here  on 
duty,  the  Indians  suddenly  rose,  and  ran  towards  the 
animals  with  horrible  yells,  seeking  to  drive  them 
across  the  river.  "  The  guard,  however,  nothing  daunt 
ed,  mounted  quickly,  and  drove  his  horse  at  full  speed 
among  them.  The  mules  and  horses,  hearing  his 
voice  amidst  the  frightening  yells  of  the  savages,  im 
mediately  started  at  a  lively  pace  for  the  fort ;  but  the 
Indians  were  on  all  sides,  and  bewildered  them.  The 
guard  still  pressed  them  onward  and  called  for  help, 
and  on  they  rushed,  despite  of  the  Indians  to  the  con 
trary.  The  battlements  were  covered  with  men.  They 
shouted  encouragement  to  the  brave  guard,  '  Onward, 
onward  ! '  and  the  injunction  was  obeyed.  He  spurred 
his  horse  to  his  greatest  speed  from  side  to  side,  and 
whipped  the  hindermost  of  the  band  with  his  leading 
rope.  He  had  saved  every  animal ;  he  was  within  twen 
ty  yards  of  the  open  gate,  when  he  fell ;  three  arrows 
from  the  bows  of  the  Camanches  had  cloven  his  heart. 


272          THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

And,  relieved  of  him,  the  lords  of  the  quiver  gathered 
their  prey,  and  drove  them  to  the  borders  of  Texas, 
without  injury  to  life  or  limb.  Thus  forty  or  fifty 
mules,  and  their  best  servant's  life,  were  lost  to  the 
Messieurs  Bents  in  a  single  day." 

The  Appachees  are  a  numerous  tribe  of  Indians,  es 
timated  at  20,000,  who  inhabit  the  country  lower  down 
than  the  Camanches.  But  little  is  known  of  them. 
The  Eutaws,  estimated  at  19,200,  dwell  in  the  midst 
of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  occupying  alternately  both 
sides  of  the  Eutaw  or  Anahuac  range.  They  are 
continually  migrating  from  one  side  to  the  other,  still 
holding  the  superstitions  of  their  fathers,  though  a  few 
of  them,  principally  half-breeds,  have  embraced  the 
Catholic  faith. 

The  Arrapahoes  reside  on  the  western  side  of  the 
Rocky  Mountains,  and  are  said  to  number  about  3,000 
souls.  They  wander,  in  the  winter  season,  around 
the  head-waters  of  one  branch  of  the  Colorado  of  the 
West,  and  in  summer  hunt  the  buffalo  farther  east. 
They  are  said  to  be  a  brave,  thrifty,  and  hospitable 
people.  They  derive  their  name,  which  signifies  dog- 
eaters,  from  fattening  and  eating  that  animal.  They 
admit  whites,  who  desire  it,  to  the  privilege  of  citizen 
ship  on  certain  conditions. 

The  Shoshonies,  or  Snakes,  reside  north  of  the  Ar 
rapahoes,  and  are  also  a  wandering  tribe,  who  inhabit 
that  part  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  which  lies  on  the 
Grand  and  Green  River  branches  of  the  Colorado  of 
the  West,  the  valley  of  the  Great  Bear  River,  the  hab 
itable  shores  of  the  Great  Salt  Lake,  and  a  tract  of 
country  on  the  Snake  River.  Some  of  them  subsist 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.          273 

principally  on  roots  ;  while  others  live  on  fish.  They  are 
said  to  own  many  horses,  and,  from  their  first  acquaint 
ance  with  the  whites,  to  have  been  averse  to  war  and 
cruelty.  They  have,  however,  been  obliged  to  fight  with 
the  Blackfeet,  Crows,  Sioux,  and  Eutaws,  to  defend 
portions  of  their  territory  ;  and  these  tribes  have  former 
ly  been  much  accustomed  to  send  parties  to  rob  them 
of  their  horses.  They  are  described  as  being  an  intelli 
gent  race,  possessing  many  domestic  comforts,  and 
opposed  to  immorality.  They  refuse  the  use  of  intox 
icating  liquor,  saying,  "  It  unmans  us  for  the  hunt  and 
for  defending  ourselves  against  our  enemies  ;  it  causes 
unnatural  divisions  among  ourselves ;  it  makes  the 
chief  less  than  his  Indian ;  and  by  its  use,  imbecility 
and  ruin  would  come  upon  the  Shoshonie  tribe." 

The  Nezperces  and  Chinnooks,  or  Flatheads,  with 
the  Skyuse  Indians,  are  found  near  the  mouth  and 
branches  of  the  Columbia  River.  Catlin  thinks  the 
Chinnooks  are  related  to  the  Choctaws,  and  tells  a  tra 
dition  of  the  latter  which  seems  to  favor  this  opinion. 
The  Nezperces  excited  much  interest  a  few  years 
ago,  in  consequence  of  a  delegation  which  came  from 
them  across  the  Rocky  Mountains,  saying  they  had 
heard  from  a  white  man  that  the  religion  of  the  whites 
was  better  than  theirs,  and  they  would  be  lost  if  they 
did  not  embrace  it,  and  they  came  to  inquire  for  teach 
ers.  Missionaries  were  sent  among  them,  who  are 
said  to  be  in  some  measure  successful  in  their  efforts. 

The  code  of  laws  existing  among  this  tribe,  as 
given  in  the  last  report  of  the  Commissioner  of  In 
dian  Affairs,  is  very  strict,  and  exhibits  a  determination 
on  the  part  of  the  people  to  have  justice  truly  admin- 
18 


274  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

istered.  Murder  and  arson  are  punished  with  death ; 
the  burning  of  an  outbuilding  with  six  months'  im 
prisonment,  fifty  lashes,  and  the  payment  of  all  dam 
ages.  Careless  burning  of  a  house  subjects  the  person 
doing  it  to  the  payment  of  damages. 

The  Chiens  are  a  small  tribe,  about  3,000  in  num 
ber,  neighbours  to  the  Sioux  on  the  west.  They  are 
a  fine  race  of  men,  scarcely  a  man  in  the  tribe  being 
less  than  six  feet  in  height.  They  are  said  to  be  the 
richest  in  horses  of  any  tribe  on  the  continent,  living, 
as  they  do,  where  the  greatest  herds  are  grazing  on 
the  prairies ;  these  they  catch  in  great  numbers,  and 
vend  to  the  Sioux,  Mandans,  and  other  tribes,  as  well 
as  to  the  fur-traders.  They  are  described  as  dexterous 
horsemen  and  fierce  warriors,  having  carried  on  an  un 
ceasing  contest  with  the  Pawnees  and  the  Blackfeet. 

The  Crows  are  a  wandering  tribe,  usually  found  in 
the  upper  plains  around  the  head- waters  of  the  Great 
Platte,  Snake,  and  Yellowstone  Rivers.  They  are  va 
riously  estimated  at  from  5,500  to  7,000.  The  general 
opinion  seems  to  be,  that  they  are  the  most  arrant 
rascals  among  the  western  mountains.  The  traders 
say,  "  They  have  never  been  known  to  keep  a  promise, 
or  do  an  honorable  act."  No  white  man  or  Indian 
trusts  them.  Murder  and  robbery  are  their  principal 
employments.  Catlin  is  disposed  to  modify  this  view 
of  the  tribe,  though  he  admits  that  such  is  their  repu 
tation.  He  says  they  are  distinguished  for  their  ele 
gant  lodges,  and  their  beautiful  skin  dresses.  They 
are  always  at  war  with  the  Blackfeet,  in  consequence 
of  which  they  suffer  greatly  in  battle. 

The  Blackfeet  are  a  well  known  numerous  and  war- 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  275 

like  tribe  of  Indians  residing  on  the  branches  of  the 
Missouri  above  the  Great  Falls.  Various  estimates  have 
been  made  of  their  numbers.  Catlin  supposes  that  they 
may  reckon  as  many  as  40,000  or  50,000.  In  the 
year  1828,  they  suffered  very  severely  by  the  small-pox, 
which  was  introduced  among  them  in  consequence  of 
their  stealing  a  blanket  from  the  steamboat  of  the 
American  Fur  Company  on  the  Yellowstone,  which 
had  belonged  to  a  man  who  had  died  of  that  disease. 
The  infected  article,  being  carried  to  their  encamp 
ment  upon  the  left  fork  of  the  Missouri,  spread 
the  dreadful  infection  among  the  whole  tribe.  They 
were  amazed  at  the  appearance  of  the  disease.  The 
red  blotch,  the  bile,  the  congestion  of  the  lungs,  liver, 
and  brain,  were  all  new  to  their  medicine-men ;  and 
the  corpse,  falling  in  pieces  while  they  buried  it,  struck 
horror  into  every  heart.  In  their  frenzy  and  igno 
rance,  they  increased  the  number  of  their  sweat-ovens 
upon  the  banks  of  the  stream ;  and  whether  the  burn 
ing  fever  or  the  want  of  nervous  action  prevailed, 
whether  frantic  with  pain,  or  tottering  in  death,  they 
were  placed  in  them,  sweated  profusely,  and  plunged 
into  the  snowy  waters  of  the  river.  The  mortality 
which  followed  this  treatment  was  like  that  of  the 
great  plague  in'  London.  They  endeavoured  for  a 
time  to  bury  the  dead,  but  these  were  soon  more  nu 
merous  than  the  living.  Mad  with  superstition  and 
fear,  brother  forsook  sister ;  father  his  son  ;  mother 
her  sucking  child.  They  fled  to  the  elevated  vales 
among  the  western  heights,  where  the  influences  of  the 
climate,  operating  on  the  already  well-spent  energies 
of  the  disease,  restored  the  remainder  of  the  tribe  to 


276  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

health.  To  this  hour  do  the  bones  of  seven  or  eight 
thousand  Blackfeet  lie  unburied  among  the  decaying 
lodges  of  their  deserted  village  on  the  banks  of  the 
Yellowstone. 

The  Blackfeet  are  a  ferocious  tribe,  numbering 
among  their  enemies  all  the  nations  within  their  reach. 
They  roam  about,  seeking  their  foes  wherever  they 
are  to  be  found.  To  show  the  hostility  of  the  other  tribes 
to  the  Blackfeet,  Catlin  relates  the  following  event  as 
having  occurred  when  he  was  present.  A  party  of 
Knistenaux  came  from  the  north  for  the  purpose  of 
making  their  summer's  trade  at  the  station  of  one  of 
the  fur  companies  ;  and  whilst  there,  a  party  of  Black- 
feet  came  from  the  west,  also  to  trade.  They  en 
camped  on  opposite  sides  of  the  fort,  and  spent  some 
weeks  together  in  apparent  good-fellowship,  their  arms, 
according  to  the  regulation  at  the  fort,  being  locked  up 
in  the  arsenal.  The  Knistenaux  had  completed  their 
trade,  yet  loitered  about  the  premises,  until  all,  both 
Indians  and  white  men,  were  getting  tired  of  their  com 
pany,  and  wished  them  quietly  away.  When  they 
were  ready  to  start,  with  'their  goods  packed  on  their 
backs,  their  arms  were  given  them,  and  they  started, 
bidding  every  body,  both  friends  and  foes,  a  hearty 
farewell.  They  went  out  of  the  fort,  and  though  the 
party  gradually  moved  off,  one  of  them,  undiscovered, 
loitered  about,  until  he  got  an  opportunity  to  poke 
the  muzzle  of  his  gun  between  the  pickets.  He 
then  fired  it  at.  one  of  the  chiefs  of  the  Blackfeet, 
who  stood  within  a  few  paces,  talking  with  Mr.  Mc'Ken- 
zie,  and  shot  him  with  two  musket-bullets  through  his 
body !  The  Blackfeet  and  the  Frenchmen  in  the  fort 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  277 

ran  forth  with  their  arms,  and,  after  several  shots  were 
exchanged,  drove  off  the  Knistenaux,  they  having  lost 
one  man,  and  having  several  others  wounded. 

The  Blackfeet  are  described  as  of  a  Herculean 
make,  though  of  middling  stature  ;  they  have  broad 
shoulders,  and  t  great  expansion  of  chest.  They  prob 
ably  acquired  their  name  from  the  black  leggins  or 
moccasins  which  they  wear.  They  are  divided  into 
four  bands  or  families,  the  Pe-a-gans,  of  five  hundred 
lodges,  the  Blackfoot  band,  of  450  lodges,  the  Blood 
band,  of  450  lodges,  and  the  Small  Robes,  of  250 
lodges.  These  four  bands  comprise  about  1,650  lodges, 
and,  probably  averaging  ten  to  a  lodge,  amount  to  about 
16,500  souls.  There  are  also,  in  the  vicinity,  the 
Grosventres  des  Prairies,  430  lodges  ;  Circees,  of 
220  lodges  ;  and  Cotornes,  of  250  lodges.  These  have 
languages  distinct. from  each  other  and  from  the  Black- 
feel,  yet  they  seem  to  be  their  confederates,  and  hunt, 
eat,  fight,  and  intermarry  with  them. 

The  Minetarees,  a  small  tribe  of  about  1,500  souls, 
reside  in  three  villages,  consisting  of  earth-covered 
lodges,  on  the  banks  of  the  Knife  River,  a  branch  of 
the  Missouri.  This  people  are  supposed  to  be  a  part 
of  the  Crows,  who,  at  some  remote  period,  being  cut 
off  by  their  enemies,  and  unable  to  return,  threw 
themselves  upon  the  hospitality  of  the  Mandans,  with 
whom  they  became,  in  a  measure,  joined.  In  language 
and  customs  they  are  said  much  to  resemble  the  Crows, 
though  they  have  also  become  somewhat  assimilated  to 
the  Mandans.  They  have  a  tradition  to  the  following  ef 
fect.  They  came  to  the  vicinity  of  the  Mandans,  poor, 
and  without  wigwams  or  horses.  They  were  nearly 


278  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

all  women,  as  their  warriors  had  been  killed  off  in 
fight ;  the  Mandans  would  not  take  them  into  their 
village,  nor  let  them  come  nearer  than  where  they  are 
now  living,  but  they  assisted  them  to  build  wigwams. 

Their  chief,  Black  Moccasin,  who  treated  Lewis  and 
Clarke  with  great  kindness,  when  thej  crossed  the 
Rocky  Mountains,  in  1819,  was  still  living  when  Cat- 
lin  was  among  them,  though  probably  more  than  a 
hundred  years  old.  Lewis  and  Clarke  constituted  him 
chief  of  the  tribe,  and  such  has  he  been  ever  since. 
He  remembered  and  inquired  very  earnestly  after  Red 
Hair  and  Long  Knife,  as  he  called  those  officers,  from 
the  fact  that  one  had  red  hair  and  the  other  wore  a 
broadsword.  The  Minetarees  are  a  bold  and  daring 
tribe,  often  carrying  war  into  their  enemies'  country, 
and  thus  greatly  diminishing  their  numbers. 

Mr.  Catlin  gives  an  account  of  the  following  scene 
which  occurred  while  he  was  with  this  tribe.  "  The 
sensation  I  created,"  says  he,  "  among  the  Minetarees, 
while  on  the  Upper  Missouri,  by  taking  from  amongst 
my  painting  apparatus  an  old  number  of  the  New  York 
Commercial  Advertiser,  edited  by  my  kind  and  tried 
friend,  Colonel  Stone,  was  extraordinary.  The  Min 
etarees  thought  that  I  was  mad,  when  they  saw  me, 
for  hours  together,  with  my  eyes  fixed  upon  its  pages. 
They  had  different  and  various  conjectures  about  it ; 
the  most  current  of  which  was,  that  I  was  looking  at 
it  to  cure  my  sore  eyes,  and  they  called  it  '  the  medi 
cine-cloth  for  sore  eyes.'  I,  at  length,  put  an  end  to 
this  and  several  equally  ignorant  conjectures,  by  read 
ing  passages  in  it,  which  were  interpreted  to  them,  and 
the  object  of  the  paper  fully  explained  ;  after  which, 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  279 

it  was  looked  upon  as  a  much  greater  mystery  than 
before,  and  several  liberal  oners  were  made  me  for  it, 
which  I  was  obliged  to  refuse,  having  already  received 
a  beautifully  garnished  robe  for  it  from  the  hands  of  a 
young  son  of  Esculapius,  who  told  me,  if  he  could 
employ  a  good  interpreter  to  explain  every  thing  in  it, 
he  could  travel  amongst  the  Minetarees,  and  Mandans, 
and  Sioux,  and  exhibit  it  after  I  was  gone,  getting  rich 
with  presents,  and  adding  greatly  to  his  list  of  medi 
cines,  as  it  would  make  him  a  great  medicine-man.  I 
left  with  the  poor  fellow  his  painted  robe  and  the  news 
paper  ;  and  just  before  I  departed,  I  saw  him  unfold  it 
to  show  some  of  his  friends,  when  he  took  from  around 
it  some  eight  or  ten  folds  of  birch-bark  and  deer-skins, 
all  of  which  were  carefully  enclosed  in  a  sack  made 
of  the  skin  of  a  polecat,  and  undoubtedly  destined  to 
become,  and  to  be  called,  his  mystery  or  medicine- 
bag." 

The  Ricarees  are  esteemed  a  part  of  the  tribe  of 
the  Pawnees,  as  their  language  is  nearly  the  same. 
They  received  Lewis  and  Clarke  with  great  cordiality ; 
but,  owing  to  the  abuses  which  they  have  suffered 
from  the  traders,  they  now  harbour  the  most  inveterate 
feelings  of  hostility  towards  the  whole  civilized  race. 

We  come  now  to  the  Mandans,  a  tribe,  a  few  years 
since,  numbering  about  two  thousand,  but  who  are 
said  to  be  now  extinct.  They  appear  to  have  been 
a  remarkable  and  peculiar  people,  differing  greatly 
from  most  other  Indians.  The  impression  has  pre 
vailed  among  many  individuals  who  became  acquaint 
ed  with  them,  that  they  were  the  descendants  of  Ma- 
doc,  the  Welsh  chief,  who  is  supposed  to  have  landed 


The  Four  Bears. 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  281 

on  the  coast  with  a  colony.  This  opinion  is  sus 
tained  by  Mr.  Catlin,  who  has  given  a  full  and  inter 
esting  account  of  the  peculiarities  of  the  nation.  He 
claims  to  have  traced  them  up  from  the  banks  of  the 
Ohio  to  their  last  residence,  where  he  found  them.  In 
support  of  his  views,  he  urges  that  there  is  a  diversity 
of  complexion  among  them,  some  being  dark,  and 
some  light ;  that  blue  and  gray  eyes  are  often  met 
with  ;  and  that  striking  resemblances  to  the  Welsh,  in 
language,  manners,  and  customs,  are  to  be  found. 

Dr.  Morse,  in  his  Indian  Report,  tells  us  that  he  was 
informed  by  a  French  priest  at  Detroit,  that,  in  1793, 
he  was  told  at  Fort  Chartres,  that  twelve  years  before, 
Captain  Lord,  who  commanded  at  this  post,  had  heard 
some  of  the  old  people  observe,  that  the  Mandan  In 
dians,  who  visited  the  post,  could  converse  intelligibly 
with  some  Welsh  soldiers  in  the  British  army.  It  is 
to  be  regretted  that  more  attention  was  not  devoted  to 
the  solution  of  this  interesting  question,  before  the  last 
remnant  of  this  people  had  become  extinct.  The  ac 
count  which  Mr.  Catlin  gives  of  their  warriors  shows 
that  there  were  many  valiant  men  among  them.  The 
robe  of  one  of  their  chiefs,  called  Mah-to-toh-pa,  or 
the  Four  Bears,  by  means  of  its  pictured  records,  set 
forth  that  he  had  been  engaged  in  numerous  encoun 
ters  with  the  Sioux,  Chiens,  Ricarees,  and  Assinni- 
boins.  The  following  is  the  substance  of  his  adven 
tures.  His  brother  having  been  killed  by  a  noted 
Ricaree  brave,  whose  spear  was  found  in  his  body, 
he  drew  out  the  lance  and  kept  it  four  years,  with 
the  blood  dried  on  its  blade.  He  then,  according  to 
an  oath  he  had  taken,  prepared  to  avenge  his  broth- 


282  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

er's  death,  with  the  spear  by  which  he  had  fallen. 
Sallying  forth,  he  brandished  the  weapon  through  the 
village,  uttering  these  words  :  —  "  Let  every  Mandan 
be  silent !  Let  no  one  sound  the  name  of  Mah-to-toh- 
pa ;  let  no  one  ask  for  him,  nor  where  he  is  gone, 
until  you  hear  him  sound  the  war-cry  in  front  of  the 
village  ;  he  will  then  enter  it,  and  show  you  the  blood 
of  Won-ga-tap.  The  blade  of  this  lance  shall  drink 
the  heart's  blood  of  Won-ga-tap,  or  Mah-to-toh-pa  shall 
mingle  his  shadow  with  that  of  his  brother !  " 

He  then  directed  his  course  toward  the  Ricaree 
village.  When  he  approached  it,  he  loitered  about  the 
wigwam  of  his  destined  victim,  and,  looking  through 
the  chinks,  observed  him  smoking  his  last  pipe.  He 
saw  him  retire  to  bed.  The  village  was  silent,  and 
wrapt  in  darkness.  He  now  crept  softly  into  the  lodge, 
and  seated  himself  by  the  fire,  where  he  satisfied  his 
appetite  from  the  contents  of  a  pot  hanging  over  it ; 
he  then  lighted  his  pipe,  after  which,  stirring  up  the 
embers  until  he  clearly  saw  his  way,  with  lance  in 
hand,  he  rose  and  drove  it  through  the  body  of  his 
enemy.  Snatching  his  scalp  from  his  head,  he  now 
darted  from  the  lodge,  and  hurried  across  the  prairie. 
The  whole  village  was  roused,  but  no  one  knew  who 
had  dealt  the  blow.  He  ran  all  night,  and  lay  by 
during  the  day.  On  the  sixth  morning,  at  sunrise,  he 
entered  his  village,  showing  the  blood  of  his  victim 
dried  upon  his  spear,  over  that  of  his  brother,  while 
the  scalp  was  suspended  from  the  handle  of  the 
weapon. 

On  a  certain  occasion,  a  band  of  one  hundred  and 
fifty  Chien  warriors  made  an  assault  on  the  Mandan 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.          283 

village  at  early  dawn,  drove  off  a  number  of  horses, 
and  took  one  scalp.  Mah-to-toh-pa,  though  a  young 
man,  yet,  as  one  of  the  most  valiant  of  his  tribe,  pur 
sued  with  a  party  of  fifty.  About  noon  of  the  second 
day,  they  came  in  sight  of  the  enemy.  Finding  them 
more  numerous  than  was  imagined,  the  Mandans  were 
about  to  return,  when  their  young  leader  galloped  out 
in  front,  and,  after  wheeling  in  a  circuit,  plunged  his 
lance  into  the  ground.  The  blade  was  driven  up  to 
the  hilt.  He  then  made  another  circuit,  tore  from  his 
breast  his  red  sash,  and  hung  it  on  the  lance  as  a  flag. 
He  now  called  out  to  the  retreating  Mandans,  "  What! 
have  we  come  to  this  ?  Have  we  dogged  the  enemy 
three  days,  and  found  them,  now  to  go  back  like  cow 
ards  ?  Mah-to-toh-pa's  lance,  which  is  red  with  the 
blood  of  brave  men,  has  led  you  to  the  sight  of  your 
enemy  ;  it  now  stands  firm  in  the  ground,  where  the 
earth  will  drink  its  owner's  blood  ;  you  may  all  go 
back,  and  Mah-to-toh-pa  will  fight  these  warriors  alone." 
The  Chiens  had  now  turned  back  to  give  the  Man- 
dans  battle,  and  their  leader,  admiring  the  gallant  con 
duct  of  Mah-to-toh-pa,  galloped  forward  within  hailing 
distance,  and  demanded  who  it  was  that  had  thus 
stuck  down  his  lance,  and  alone  defied  his  enemies  ? 
The  answer  was,  "  I  am  Mah-to-toh-pa,  the  second  in 
command  of  the  brave  and  valiant  Mandans  !  "  The 
Chien  chief  then  said,  "  I  have  heard  often  of  Mah- 
to-toh-pa  ;  he  is  a  great  warrior.  Dares  he  come  for 
ward  and  fight  with  me  alone,  while  our  warriors  look 
on  ?  "  "  Is  he  a  chief  who  speaks  to  Mah-to-toh-pa  ?  " 
was  the  reply.  The  Chien  answered,  "  My  scalps 
you  see  hanging  to  my  horse's  bits  ;  and  here  is  my 


284  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

lance,  with  the  ermine-skins  and  the  war-eagle's  tail." 
"  It  is  enough,"  said  Mah-to-toh-pa. 

The  Chien  chief,  mounted  on  a  fierce  white  horse, 
now  made  a  circuit  at  full  gallop,  and  stuck  his  lance 
into  the  ground,  leaving  it  standing  by  the  side  of  Mah- 
to-toh-pa's,  and  with  a  red  flag  also  waving  from  it. 
They  now  drew  near  each  other,  and  discharged  their 
guns.  They  then  passed  each  other,  and,  as  they  wheel 
ed,  Mah-to-toh-pa  held  up  his  powder-horn,  and  showed 
his  antagonist  that  a  bullet  had  shattered  it  in  pieces. 
He  then  threw  aside  his  firelock,  drew  out  his  bow  and 
an  arrow,  and  hung  his  shield  on  his  left  arm.  The 
Chien  did  the  same,  and  both  dashed  on,  sending 
their  whizzing  shafts  at  each  other  in  quick  succession. 
Mah-to-toh-pa's  horse  received  an  arrow  through  the 
heart,  and  fell  to  the  ground.  The  rider  sprang  to  his 
feet,  and  was  instantly  prepared  for  his  antagonist. 
The  Chien  dismounted,  drove  back  his  horse,  and 
presented  his  shield,  inviting  the  Mandan  to  come  on. 
After  a  few  shots  from  the  bow,  the  Chien  held  up 
his  empty  quiver,  and,  dashing  it  with  his  bow  and 
shield  to  the  ground,  drew  his  knife,  and  brandished  it 
aloft  in  air.  "  Yes  !  "  cried  out  Mah-to-toh-pa,  exult- 
ingly,  throwing  away  also  his  quiver  and  shield  ;  but, 
on  feeling  for  his  blade,  it  was  missing,  —  he  had 
not  brought  it  in  his  belt !  He  had  only  his  bow  in 
hand,  but  with  this  he  parried  the  blows  of  his  assail 
ant,  and  at  last  struck  him  to  the  ground.  After  a  des 
perate  struggle  for  the  knife,  in  which  the  blade  was 
several  times  drawn  through  Mah-to-toh-pa's  right  hand, 
he  gained  possession  of  it,  and  plunged  it  into  the 
heart  of  the  Chien.  Holding  it  up,  the  Mandan  claim- 


THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI.  285 

ed  it  as  his  own,  and,  taking  the  scalp  of  his  valiant 
enemy,  he  departed  in  triumph. 

Such  are  some  of  the  feats  of  the  Four  Bears. 
But  he  and  his  tribe  are  now  no  more.  In  the  sum 
mer  of  1838,  the  small-pox,  that  curse  of  the  red 
race,  was  introduced  among  them  by  the  fur-traders. 
The  Mandans  were  then  surrounded  by  several  war- 
parties  of  the  Sioux,  so  that  they  could  not  scatter  into 
the  plains,  but  were  confined  to  their  village.  The  dis 
ease  became  so  malignant,  that,  after  a  person  was  at 
tacked,  death  ensued  in  a  few  hours.  Despair  and  mad 
ness  seemed  to  seize  upon  the  people,  and  a  large 
number  destroyed  themselves  with  knives  and  guns,  or 
by  dashing  out  their  brains  in  leaping  headlong  from  a 
ledge  of  rocks  in  front  of  their  village.  None  thought 
of  burying  their  dead,  and  whole  families  were  left  in 
ghastly  heaps  in  the  wigwams. 

Mr.  Catlin  gives  the  following  account  of  the  melan 
choly  fate  of  Mah-to-toh-pa.  "  He  sat  in  his  wigwam 
and  saw  every  one  of  his  family  die  about  him,  —  his 
wives  and  his  little  children.  He  was  attacked  with 
the  disease  himself,  but  he  recovered.  He  then  walk 
ed  out,  and,  passing  around  the  village,  wept  over  the 
destruction  of  his  tribe.  His  braves  and  warriors, 
whose  sinewy  arms  once  seemed  to  defy  danger,  were 
now  but  as  heaps  of  clay.  He  came  back  to  his  lodge, 
and  covered  the  bodies  of  his  family  in  a  pile  with  a 
number  of  robes  ;  he  threw  another  around  himself, 
and  went  out  upon  a  hill  at  a  little  distance  and  sat 
down.  Despite  the  entreaties  of  some  traders  who 
chanced  to  be  there,  he  utterly  refused  to  eat.  He 
remained  on  the  earth  till  the  sixth  day,  when,  faint 


286  THE  INDIANS  WEST  OF  THE  MISSISSIPPI. 

and  exhausted,  he  staggered  back  to  the  village,  and 
entered  the  horrid  gloom  of  his  own  wigwam.  Lay 
ing  his  body  down  beside  the  group  of  his  sleeping 
wife  and  children,  he  drew  his  robe  over  his  face,  and, 
lingering  for  three  days,  at  last  died." 

Thus,  in  the  course  of  two  months,  the  whole  tribe 
of  Mandans  perished,  with  the  exception  of  some  thirty 
or  forty,  that  were  taken  as  slaves  by  the  Ricarees, 
who  moved  from  their  own  abodes  and  took  pos 
session  of  the  Mandan  village.  This  remnant  of  the 
valiant  Mandans  could  not  endure  a  state  of  bondage. 
Some  months  after  they  had  been  reduced  to  captivity, 
when  the  Ricarees  were  altacked  by  their  enemies, 
the  Sioux,  they  ran  out  together  upon  the  prairie,  call 
ing  to  the  Sioux  to  kill  them.  "  We  are  Ricaree 
dogs  !  "  said  they.  "  Our  friends  are  dead,  —  our  war 
riors  are  no  more,  —  our  villages  are  in  the  hands  of 
strangers.  We  will  not,  we  cannot  live!"  Then, 
brandishing  their  weapons  in  a  manner  to  provoke  the 
enemy,  they  were  all  cut  in  pieces.  Not  one  escaped, 
and  the  Mandans  are  no  more.  Where  is  there  a  sad 
der  page  of  history  than  this  ? 


PRESENT  CONDITION  OF  THE  WESTERN 
INDIANS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


FROM  our  previous  pages  it  will  be  seen  that  nu 
merous  causes  have  contributed  to  reduce  the  number 
of  the  aboriginal  inhabitants  of  this  country,  so  that 
but  a  remnant  are  now  found  in  the  States  and  Territo 
ries  of  this  republic.  By  the  most  recent  report  of  the 
Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs  to  Congress,  the  fol 
lowing  is  the  estimated  number  of  Indians  in  the  United 
States.  Of  tribes  indigenous  to  the  country  west  of 
the  Mississippi  River,  168,909 ;  of  those  removed, 
82,594  ;  present  western  population  of  the  tribes  whol 
ly  or  partially  removed,  89,288  ;  remaining  east  of  the 
Mississippi,  22,846, 

From  this  it  seems  that  there  were  but  about  300,000 
of  the  various  tribes  specified  yet  remaining.  But  this 
includes  only  a  small  portion  of  some  of  the  most  nu 
merous  native  tribes,  as,  for  instance,  the  Blackfeet 
and  others. 

The  evils  attending  the  proximity  of  the  whites  to 
the  Indians,  while  the  latter  remained  within  the  bounds 
of  the  States,  have  induced  the  general  government 
to  adopt  the  policy  of  their  removal  to  an  extensive 
country  west  of  the  Mississippi.  The  measure  was 


288  PRESENT  CONDITION  OF  THE 

one  which  was,  indeed,  attended  by  great  present  in 
convenience  and  injustice  to  those  tribes  which  had 
become,  in  a  degree,  somewhat  civilized,  as  they  were 
forcibly  torn  from  their  loved  homes,  and  compelled  to 
commence  their  journey  to  an  untried  country,  where 
they  must,  as  it  were,  begin  life  anew.  Many  perished 
during  their  march,  from  fatigue  and  disease.  But 
resistance  was  hopeless,  and  the  only  chance  that 
remained  of  their  preservation,  as  distinct  tribes,  was 
in  their  consent  to  go  ;  and  so  they  obeyed  the  man 
date,  and  departed  far  from  their  ancient  seats  of 
power,  and  the  burial-places  of  their  fathers.  They 
left  behind  them,  in  many  instances,  good  houses, 
well  cultivated  fields,  and  various  improvements,  which 
were  the  fruit  of  the  labor  of  years ;  and,  to  the 
great  disgrace  of  the  whites,  they  were  subjected,  in 
some  cases,  to  outrage  and  rapine,  dispossessed  of  their 
property,  and  even  wounded,  or  put  to  death,  while 
defending  it. 

The  Indian  Territory,  as  it  is  called,  is  a  tract  of 
country  bounded  on  the  south  by  the  Red  River,  east 
by  the  States  of  Arkansas  and  Missouri,  on  the  north 
and  northeast  by  the  Missouri  and  Punch  Rivers,  and 
west  by  the  western  limit  of  habitable  country  on  this 
side  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.  This  has  been  purchas 
ed,  at  various  prices,  of  the  indigenous  tribes.  The 
soil  is  said  to  be  most  excellent,  abounding  in  fine 
water,  timber,  mines  of  coal,  iron,  and  lead ;  at  the 
same  time,  it  is  the  resort  of  numerous  buffaloes,  so  that 
it  seems  well  adapted  for  the  purposes  to  which  it  is 
destined. 

The  plan  adopted  by  the  government  has  been  by 


WESTERN  INDIANS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES.         289 

purchase  to  extinguish  the  Indian  title  to  those  lands 
which  they  leave,  give  them  others  within  the  new 
territory,  transport  them  thither,  and  erect  a  portion  of 
their  dwellings,  plough  and  fence  a  part  of  their  fields, 
furnish  them  teachers  in  agriculture,  and  tools,  horses, 
cattle,  &c.,  build  school-houses  and  provide  instructers, 
and  make  arrangements  for  the  support  of  those  who 
have  not  the  means  at  hand,  at  the  outset,  for  this  pur 
pose. 

By  treaty,  the  lands  are  perpetually  guarantied  to 
them,  and  stipulations  have  been  entered  into,  by  which 
they  receive  annual  sums  of  money,  and  other  sums 
are  also  to  be  expended  in  useful  articles,  and  for  the 
purposes  of  education.  Agents  are  stationed  among 
them,  who,  as  well  as  the  teachers  provided  for  them, 
make  annual  reports  to  the  Commissioner  of  Indian 
Affairs,  who  includes  these  documents  in  his  own  an 
nual  report  to  Congress.  Governments,  properly  con 
stituted  by  themselves,  are  also  guarantied  to  them, 
and  it  is  understood  to  be  the  design  to  lead  them  to 
establish  elective  governments  in  each  tribe,  similar  to 
our  own  State  governments ;  all  to  be  united  in  a  kind 
of  federal  republic.  Some  of  the  tribes  have  adopted 
the  preliminary  measure,  and  have  already  made  im 
portant  advances  towards  civilization. 

The  relative  position  of  the  various  tribes  is  as  fol 
lows.  Immediately  on  the  Red  River,  beginning  at 
the  south,  are  the  Chickasaws  ;  then  follow,  in  order, 
towards  the  north,  the  Choctaws,  Seminoles,  Creeks, 
Cherokees,  Shawanese,  Senecas,  Quapaws,  Oneidas 
and  Tuscaroras,  Piankeshaws  and  Weahs,  Peorias  and 
Kaskaskias-Shawanese,  Kansas,  Delawares,  Kickapoos ; 
19 


290          PRESENT  CONDITION  OF  THE 

then,  north  of  these,  the  Omahaws  and  Otoes,  Missouris, 
Pancas,  and  Pawnees  ;  north  of  the  Missouri,  the  Sacs 
and  Foxes  ;  and  west  of  the  Peorias  and  Oneidas  are 
the  Osages. 

The  Chickasaws  have  become,  in  a  great  degree, 
merged  in  the  Choctaws.  Their  district,  called  the 
Chickasaw  District,  they  purchased  of  the  Choctaws 
for  $  530,000.  By  the  treaty  of  24th  of  May,  1834,  it 
is  provided,  that  $3,000  shall  annually,  for  fifteen 
years,  be  expended,  under  the  direction  of  the  Secre 
tary  of  War,  for  the  education  of  the  Chickasaws. 
They  are  a  wealthy  people,  having  invested  nearly 
$2,000,000,  from  which  they  will  soon  receive  interest ; 
they  have  also  a  large  fund  for  various  objects,  8  10,000 
of  which  is,  at  the  present  time,  applied  to  the  pur 
poses  of  civilization. 

The  Choctaw  country  embraces  19,200,000  acres 
of  good  soil,  and  some  6,000,000  more  of  a  poorer 
quality.  This  people  are  said  now  to  be  improving 
in  civilization  and  comfort.  They  have  many  large 
farms,  and  much  live  stock,  three  flouring  mills,  ten  or 
twelve  cotton-gins,  eighty-eight  looms,  and  two  hundred 
and  twenty  spinning-wheels. 

The  Choctaw  nation  has  adopted  a  written  constitu 
tion,  similar  to  that  of  the  United  States.  Their  legis 
lative  body  is  said  to  transact  its  business  with  great 
decorum  and  propriety.  Their  journals  are  kept  in 
the  English  language,  but,  in  the  progress  of  business, 
are  also  read  off  in  the  Choctaw.  They  have  four 
judicial  districts,  and  the  usual  officers  of  justice.  They 
are  likewise,  says  the  agent  among  them,  fast  ap 
proaching  to  the  division  of  lands,  and  carefully  seize 


WESTERN  INDIANS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES.         291 

and  destroy  whisky  illegally  introduced  among  them. 
By  the  treaty  of  1830,  forty  Choctaw  youths  are  to  be 
kept  at  school,  under  the  direction  of  the  president  of 
the  United  States,  for  the  term  of  twenty  years.  Also, 
the  sum  of  $  2,500  is  to  be  applied  for  the  support  of 
three  teachers  of  schools  among  them,  for  the  same 
number  of  years.  They  have,  likewise,  a  balance  of 
$  25,000  of  unexpended  annuities,  which  is  to  be  ap 
plied  to  the  support  of  schools  at  twelve  different 
places  ;  and,  by  the  treaty  of  1825,  they  have  a  further 
annuity  of  $  6,000,  for  the  support  of  schools. 

There  are  among  them,  as  appears  from  the  last 
report  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs,  fifteen 
teachers  and  four  hundred  and  five  scholars.  The 
missions  there  are  under  the  direction  of  the  American 
Board  of  Commissioners  at  Boston,  and  in  their  last 
report  they  state  that  the  churches  have  all  been  en 
larged,  the  aggregate  increase  having  been  somewhat 
more  than  one  hundred.  The  whole  number  now 
connected  with  five  churches  is  four  hundred  and  sev 
enty-one.  The  number  of  Choctaws  able  to  read  is 
steadily  increasing,  and  the  demand  for  books  is  be 
coming  greater  every  year. 

The  Creeks  are  not  so  well  organized,  in  respect  to 
their  government,  as  the  Choctaws  or  Cherokees.  There 
are  two  bands  or  parties,  one  under  Mclntosh,  the 
other  under  Little  Doctor.  The  first  of  these  brought 
from  their  former  home  their  old  laws  ;  the  latter  have 
framed  theirs  since  their  removal.  Both  of  them  have 
their  general  councils,  who  combine  the  legislative, 
executive,  and  judicial  departments  in  one.  They 
own  salt-springs,  cultivate  the  ground,  and  follow  other 


292          PRESENT  CONDITION  OF  THE 

pursuits  of  civilization.  Many  of  them,  also,  are  said 
to  have  large  stocks  of  cattle.  Before  the  crops  of 
1837  had  been  gathered,  it  is  stated  that  they  had  sold 
corn  to  the  amount  of  upwards  of  8  39,000,  and  that 
vast  quantities  then  remained  unsold  ;  and  even  the 
emigrants,  who  arrived  in  the  country  during  the 
winter  and  spring  previous  to  the  harvest  of  that 
year,  broke  the  turf,  fenced  their  fields,  raised  their 
crops  for  the  first  time,  and  sold  their  surplus  of 
corn  for  $  10,000.  By  the  treaty  of  the  6th  of  March, 
1832,  it  is  stipulated  that  an  annuity  of  $  3,000  shall 
be  expended  by  the  United  States,  under  the  direction 
of  the  president,  for  twenty  years,  in  the  education  of 
their  children.  Besides  this,  8  1,000,  by  the  treaty  of 
the  14th  of  February,  1833,  is  to  be  annually  expended, 
during  the  pleasure  of  Congress,  for  the  same  object. 
A  great  number  of  the  Creeks,  and  of  the  Seminoles 
who  are  now  merged  in  that  tribe,  died  on  the  way,  or 
shortly  after  their  removal  to  the  Indian  Territory. 

The  Cherokees  have  probably  made  the  greatest  ad 
vances  in  civilization  of  any  of  the  Indian  nations  on 
our  western  border.  They  own  numerous  salt-springs, 
which  are  worked  by  themselves,  and  in  which  they 
manufacture,  it  is  said,  one  hundred  bushels  of  salt, 
daily.  They  also  own  two  lead-mines.  The  eastern 
portion  of  their  country,  which  embraces  the  settle 
ments,  contains  about  2,500,000  acres.  They  have  a 
large  stock  of  cattle,  wagons,  ploughs,  looms,  and  spin 
ning-wheels  ;  their  lands  are  well  inclosed  with  rail- 
fences  ;  and  they  have  comfortable  log-houses,  with 
stone  chimneys  and  plank  floors,  which  are  well  fur 
nished.  They  have,  likewise,  seven  native  merchants, 
and  one  regular  physician. 


WESTERN  INDIANS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES.         293 

Their  settled  country  is  divided  into  four  districts, 
each  of  which,  every  two  years,  elects  two  mem 
bers  of  the  national  council,  which  is  called  "  The 
General  Council  of  the  Cherokee  Nation."  They  have 
three  chiefs,  whose  approval  is  necessary  for  the  pas 
sage  of  a  law ;  though  an  act,  notwithstanding  their 
veto,  may  be  passed  by  a  vote  of  two  thirds  of  the 
council.  They  have,  also,  judicial,  and  other  appro 
priate  officers.  By  the  treaty  of  the  6th  of  JVfay,  1823, 
it  is  stipulated  that  the  United  States  shall  pay,  annu 
ally,  8  2,000  for  ten  years,  to  be  expended,  under  the 
direction  of  the  president,  in  the  education  of  their 
children,  in  their  own  country,  in  letters  and  the  me 
chanic  arts  ;  also,  $  1,000  towards  the  purchase  of  a 
printing-press  and  types.  By  the  treaty  of  December 
29,  1835,  the  sum  of  $  150,000  is  provided  for  the 
support  of  common  schools,  and  such  a  literary  insti 
tution,  of  a  higher  order,  as  may  be  established  in 
the  Indian  country.  To  this  is  also  added  an  educa 
tion  fund  of  $50,000,  making,  in  all,  a  permanent 
school-fund  of  $  200,000,  only  the  interest  of  which  is 
used. 

From  the  last  report  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian 
Affairs,  it  appears  that  the  Cherokees  are  steadily  ad 
vancing  in  knowledge  and  civilization.  Many  of  them 
are  said  to  be  men  of  decided  talents  and  learning. 
The  constitution  and  laws  of  the  nation  are  printed  and 
circulated  among  the  people.  Education  is  popular 
among  them,  and  it  is  probable  that  they  will  adopt  the 
suggestion  of  the  agent  in  their  territory,  and  divide 
their  lands  into  farms,  as  individual  property.  Some 
unhappy  feuds  have  existed,  and,  to  a  certain  degree, 


294  PRESENT  CONDITION  OF  THE 

still  exist  among  them,  which  have  resulted  in  the  death 
of  two  or  three  of  their  prominent  men,  especially  John 
Ridge  and  Elias  Boudinot.  Their  principal  chief  is 
John  Ross,  a  man  of  fine  appearance,  of  considerable 
ability,  and  a  gentleman. 

According  to  the  last  report  of  the  American  Board 
of  Commissioners,  the  mission  among  the  Cherokees 
consists  of  eighteen  persons.  There  are  five  churches, 
comprising  two  hundred  and  thirty  members,  twenty- 
six  of  whom  have  been  added  within  a  few  months. 
The  temperance  society  organized  there  reckons  among 
its  members  at  least  1,560  Cherokees. 

One  of  the  most  remarkable  events  in  the  history 
of  this  people  is  the  invention  of  a  Cherokee  alphabet, 
by  George  Guess,  a  native  Cherokee.  In  the  account 
of  the  mission,  this  alphabet  is  said  to  furnish,  prob 
ably,  the  most  perfect  orthography  in  the  world. 
There  has  been  a  paper  published  in  the  Cherokee 
nation,  partly  in  the  English,  and  partly  in  the  native 
language,  and  edited  with  considerable  ability.  Three 
presses  are  employed  by  the  mission  in  printing  books, 
principally  for  this  tribe,  though  some  are  struck  off  in 
other  languages.  Since  1835,  besides  the  Gospels  of 
John  and  Matthew,  and  the  Epistles  of  John,  there 
have  been  printed,  at  one  press,  not  less  than  thirty- 
two  different  works,  nearly  all  of  which  were  above 
twenty  pages  each,  making  an  aggregate  of  upwards 
of  2,000,000  pages.  The  whole  number  of  pages 
printed  among  the  Cherokees  since  1828,  as  appears 
by  the  last  report  of  the  American  Board,  is  4,725,000. 

Five  schools,  under  the  care  of  the  mission,  con 
tain  about  one  hundred  and  sixty  Cherokee  children. 


WESTERN  INDIANS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES.         295 

Some  interesting  cases  of  improvement  have  occurred 
among  this  nation,  on  which,  were  there  space  for  it, 
it  would  be  pleasing  to  dwell.  The  Cherokees  bid  fair, 
if  no  untoward  events  occur,  to  realize  the  most  san 
guine  expectations  of  their  friends.  Much  sympathy 
has  been  excited  for  them,  at  various  periods,  during 
the  last  thirty  years,  and  especially  when  they  were 
driven  from  their  loved  homes,  and  the  territory  guar 
antied  to  them  by  so  many  treaties ;  and  words  of 
burning  eloquence  were  called  forth. from  some  of  the 
most  eloquent  speakers  in  the  halls  of  Congress,  in  de 
picting  the  injustice  and  cruelty  with  which  they  have 
been  treated.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  experiment 
they  are  now  making  may  be  permitted  to  go  on  to  its 
completion,  without  any  further  invasions  of  their  rights 
and  happiness. 

Besides  these  principal  tribes,  who  are  deriving  ben 
efit  from  missionaries  and  schools  among  them,  there 
are  missionary  stations  among  the  Pawnees,  the  Sioux, 
Shawanese,  Ottawas,  Potawatomies,  and  other  tribes. 
By  treaty,  large  portions  of  land,  or  annual  sums,  have 
been  set  apart  for  the  purposes  of  education,  agri 
culture,  and  such  other  aids  to  their  civilization  as  ap 
pear  most  desirable.  The  aversion  to  labor  among 
some  of  these  nations  is  said  to  be  gradually  wearing 
off,  and  idolatry  and  superstition  are  becoming  eradi 
cated.  They  still  retain  their  ancient  forms  of  govern 
ment  by  chiefs. 

The  Stockbridge  Indians,  within  the  limits  of  Wis 
consin,  have  recently  been  admitted  to  the  rights  of 
citizenship,  and  during  the  last  winter  (1843-44)  the 
Ottawas  within  the  State  of  Michigan  have  petitioned 


296       PRESENT  CONDITION  OF  THE  WESTERN  INDIANS. 

the  legislature  of  that  State  for  the  same  privilege. 
Many  interesting  particulars  respecting  the  state  of  the 
schools  and  missions  among  the  several  Indian  tribes, 
and  their  present  prospects,  may  be  found  in  the  re 
ports  of  the  various  missionaries  and  agents  of  govern 
ment,  some  of  which  are  also  appended  to  the  report 
of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs,  annually  sub 
mitted  to  Congress. 

From  all  these  sources  we  derive  the  hope,  that  a 
more  successful  experiment  is  to  be  made  respecting 
the  aborigines  of  our  country  than  has  ever  before  been 
attempted,  and  that  the  time  may  soon  arrive  when  they 
shall  be  allowed  to  form  a  State  of  this  vast  republic. 
The  wrongs  they  have  suffered  demand  the  best  repara 
tion  which  a  Christian  nation  can  make  ;  and  the  prayer 
of  many  a  pious  and  sympathizing  heart  is  daily  breath 
ed  forth,  that  they  may  henceforth  be  permitted,  without 
molestation,  to  learn  and  practise  the  virtues  of  peace, 
cheered  and  encouraged  in  every  honest  endeavour  to 
do  well. 

Such,  then,  as  we  have  attempted  to  sketch  it,  is 
the  history  of  the  aborigines  of  America.  It  is  sad  to 
reflect  that  so  many  pages  of  it  have  been  written,  as 
it  were,  in  blood,  and  that  such  multitudes  have  per 
ished  in  the  vain  attempt  to  resist  outrage  and  op 
pression. 


THE  PROSPECTS  OF  THE  WESTERN 
TRIBES. 


COLUMBUS,  speaking  of  the  American  Indians,  said  : 
—  "I  swear  to  your  Majesties  that  there  is  not  a  bet 
ter  people  in  the  world  ;  they  love  their  neighbours 
as  themselves ;  their  language  is  the  sweetest,  softest, 
and  most  cheerful,  for  they  always  speak  smiling ;  and, 
although  they  go  naked,  let  your  Majesties  believe  me, 
their  customs  are  very  becoming ;  and  their  king,  who 
is  served  with  great  majesty,  has  such  engaging  man 
ners,  that  it  gives  great  pleasure  to  see  him ;  and  also 
to  consider  the  great  retentive  faculty  of  that  people, 
and  their  desire  of  knowledge,  which  incites  them  to 
ask  the  causes  and  effects  of  things." 

After  the  dark  and  bloody  account  we  have  given 
of  the  history  of  the  Indians,  —  especially  those  within 
the  compass  of  our  own  country,  —  we  may  smile  at 
the  flattering  picture  presented  by  the  discoverer  of 
the  New  World.  But  we  must  consider  that  the  na 
tives  of  the  West  Indies,  of  whom  Columbus  speaks, 
were  the  mildest  portion  of  the  great  Indian  family ; 
and,  besides,  at  the  time  to  which  he  refers,  they  had 
not  become  exasperated  by  the  repeated  and  cruel 
wrongs  of  the  Europeans. 


298       THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

In  estimating  the  native  capacities  of  the  aborigines, 
and  especially  their  fitness  for  civilization,  we  must 
take  into  consideration  the  long  train  of  influences 
which  has  been  moulding  them,  for  centuries,  into  their 
present  condition.  The  history  of  Peru,  as  well  as 
that  'of  Mexico,  abundantly  proves  that  a  portion  of 
them  had  an  aptitude  for  improvement,  evinced  by  the 
progress  they  made  in  various  arts ;  and  it  may  be 
added,  that,  under  the  instructions  of  Eliot  and  May- 
hew,  even  the  tribes  of  New  England,  regarded  as 
among  the  most  savage  and  irredeemable,  made  rapid 
strides  in  Christianity  and  the  peaceful  arts  of  civilized 
life. 

If,  therefore,  in  our  picture  of  these  Northern  nations, 
we  have  been  called  upon  to  delineate  them  chiefly  as 
warriors,  revelling  in  blood,  and  delighting  in  the  ter 
rific  scenes  of  slaughter,  pillage,  and  conflagration,  it 
must  not  be  inferred  that  such  is  their  intrinsic  and 
necessary  character.  An  experiment  is,  indeed,  now 
making,  on  a  large  scale,  and  under  favorable  auspices, 
having  for  its  object  to  bring  them  into  the  family  of 
civilized  man  ;  and  in  our  view  of  the  present  condition 
of  the  Indians  in  the  United  States,  we  have  exhibited 
the  hopeful  advances  already  made  by  some  of  the 
tribes  in  refinement  and  the  Christian  virtues. 

The  question,  then,  as  to  the  possibility  of  civilizing 
the  Indians  within  our  borders,  seems,  at  first  view,  to 
be  favorably  determined.  The  subject  is  one  of 
deep  interest,  and  claims  the  attention  of  enlightened 
minds  throughout  our  republic.  Our  ancestors  have 
inflicted  fearful  wrongs  upon  this  race ;  for  centuries, 
their  blood  has  cried  to  heaven  for  vengeace.  Nor  is 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.       299 

our  own  generation  free  from  similar  guilt,  or  similar 
accountability.  But  besides  the  deep  debt  thus  in 
curred,  and  which,  in  this  age  of  light,  we  should  be 
earnest  to  discharge  in  behalf  of  the  remnants  of  these 
people,  their  numbers  are  still  considerable,  and,  from 
their  own  importance  in  this  point  of  view,  they  may 
well  claim  the  attention  of  the  philanthropist. 

And  there  is  still  another  aspect  in  which  this  sub 
ject  becomes  one  of  deep  interest.  The  tribes  within 
the  Indian  Territory  can  now  muster  fifty  thousand  war 
riors.  They  have  a  fine  country,  and,  in  the  aggregate, 
possess  a  considerable  amount  of  property.  Stretching 
along  our  defenceless  western  frontier,  they  may  render 
themselves  indeed  formidable,  whenever  they  choose 
to  combine  against  us.  They  have  horses  in  abun 
dance,  and  can  transfer  themselves,  with  the  fleetness 
of  the  Arab,  from  one  point  to  another.  They  have 
fire-arms,  in  addition  to  the  spear,  the  bow  and  arrow, 
and  the  tomahawk.  They  have,  contiguous  to  them,  the 
Camanches  on  the  south,  and  numerous  other  tribes  on 
the  north  and  west.  These  can  easily  be  made  their 
allies,  in  case  of  need. 

The  position  of  these  tribes  is,  therefore,  one  of 
great  strength.  Let  us  now  consider  that  their  minds 
must  be  full  of  bitter  remembrances  towards  our 
people.  The  story  of  Philip,  Sassacus,  and  Logan 
may  not  have  descended  in  their  traditions  to  the  pres 
ent  day,  but  the  general  story  of  their  race  is  familiar 
to  them  all.  When  Keokuck  replied  to  Governor 
Everett  in  the  State-house  in  Boston,  in  1837,  he  said 
he  had  been  told  by  the  old  men  of  his  tribe,  that  the 
ancestors  of  the  Indians  once  owned  and  occupied  the 


300      THE    PROSPECTS    OF   THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

lands  to  the  shores  of  the  Atlantic.  Tt  must  be  a  fa 
miliar  fact  to  the  Indians,  from  the  Mississippi  to  the 
borders  of  the  Pacific,  that  they  were  lords  of  this  con 
tinent,  and  that  the  white  man  has  dispossessed  them 
of  their  inheritance.  They  must  not  only  know  this 
general  truth,  but  they  must  also  know  and  deeply  feel 
the  violence  and  injustice  of  that  process  by  which  their 
nations  have  been  wasted,  and  the  inheritance,  which 
God,  and  nature,  and  their  ancestors  had  bequeathed 
to  them,  was  wrenched  from  their  hands. 

The  particular  experience  of  many  of  them  must 
also  contribute  to  increase  their  store  of  bitter  recol 
lections.  The  fate  of  Tecumseh  is  familiar  to  many 
of  them,  for  those  still  live  who  fought  by  his  side. 
The  story  of  the  Everglades,  and  the  doom  of  Osceola, 
must  be  often  repeated  by  those  who  participated  in 
the  scenes  of  the  late  Florida  war.  The  bloodhounds, 
imported  from  Cuba  to  hunt  them  down  in  the  thick 
ets,  will  be  introduced  to  give  effective  coloring  to  the 
picture  of  suffering,  to  embitter  the  feeling  of  indigna 
tion,  and,  if  need  be,  to  rouse  the  soul  to  acts  of  retri 
bution. 

While,  therefore,  the  tribes  are  now  placed  by  treaty 
within  the  Indian  territory,  and  are  adopting,  by  de 
grees,  the  arts  of  civilization,  under  the  auspices  of  the 
United  States,  it  must  be  remembered  that  they  are 
there  not  willingly,  and  that  they  have  carried  with 
them  the  long  accumulated  remembrances  of  their  pain 
ful  history. 

"  I  yield,"  said  Weatherford  to  General  Jackson, 
"  by  necessity,  not  by  choice.  My  warriors  are  dead ; 
my  people  slain ;  it  is  vain  to  resist ;  but  if  I  had  an 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.       301 

army,  I  would  still  be  in  the  field  against  you."  It  is 
with  such  a  feeling  that  many  of  the  tribes  have  re 
tired  to  their  present  abodes ;  and  can  we  doubt  that 
there  is  many  a  daring  and  independent  soul  among 
them,  that  would  rejoice  in  the  opportunity  to  balance 
the  heavy  reckoning  which  stands  summed  up  in  their 
minds  against  us  ? 

It  has  often  happened  that  the  wrath  of  man  has 
been  made  to  work  out  the  will  of  Providence.  Who 
can  tell  that  the  time  is  not  yet  to  come,  in  which 
these  Indian  tribes  shall  wreak  signal  vengeance  upon 
us,  and  furnish  another  lesson  to  the  world,  in  assu 
rance  of  the  fact,  that,  in  the  history  of  nations,  great 
crimes  are  usually  followed,  sooner  or  later,  by  ade 
quate  retribution  ?  It  seems  evident  that  this  concentra 
tion  of  the  Indian  tribes  in  the  West  must  issue  in  great 
events, — either  in  their  civilization,  and  their  final  ac 
cession,  as  citizens,  to  our  republic,  or  in  future  strug 
gles,  in  which  their  power  will  be  made  the  instrument 
of  chastising  our  country  for  its  former  course  of  in 
justice. 

In  this  case,  there  is  but  one  line  of  conduct  for  us 
to  pursue,  and  that  is  alike  dictated  by  policy  and  right 
feeling.  Let  us  do  all  in  our  power  to  bestow  upon 
these  three  hundred  thousand  Indians  the  benefits  of 
our  own  religion  and  civilization,  and  prepare  them,  as 
speedily  as  may  be,  to  come  within  the  fold  of  our  own 
government,  as  members  of  the  Union.  Let  us  do 
this  in  atonement  for  former  aggression,  as  a  measure 
of  future  safety,  and  as  the  obvious  dictate  of  common 
philanthropy. 

Let  us  not  permit  the  common  suggestion,  that  the 


302      THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

Indian  is  incapable  of  receiving  the  benefits  of  civili 
zation,  to  hinder  us  from  adopting  this  course.  Up 
on  what  basis  does  this  idea  of  Indian  character 
rest  ?  Upon  no  better  foundation,  we  apprehend, 
than  prejudice,  —  and  a  prejudice,  too,  inculcated,  if  not 
engendered,  by  the  desire  of  finding  apologies  for  the 
harsh  and  desolating  policy  which  has  been  pursued  to 
ward  the  race.  The  Indians  are  incorrigible,  —  there 
fore  let  them  be  swept  away.  This  is  the  ready  logic 
of  those  who  wish  to  possess  their  lands,  or  who  desire 
to  excuse  acts  of  plunder  and  aggression. 

Let  us  not  adopt  conclusions  too  hastily  in  this  im 
portant  matter.  If,  hitherto,  many  of  the  efforts  to  civil 
ize  the  Indians  have  failed,  we  must  not  thence  infer 
that  they  have  a  nature  which  excludes  them  for  ever 
from  the  fold  of  civilization.  May  there  not  be  some 
defect  in  the  means,  some  error  in  the  mode,  adopt 
ed  to  instruct  them  ?  and  cannot  we  better  account  for 
failure  in  this  way,  than  by  resorting  to  a  supposition 
which  seems  to  impugn  the  wisdom  and  benevolence 
of  the  Creator  ? 

In  considering  the  possibility  of  civilizing  the  In 
dians,  the  author  of  the  splendid  work  on  "The  Histo 
ry  of  the  North  American  Tribes  of  Indians,"  &c., 
makes  the  following  just  and  appropriate  remarks : 
"  We  consider  the  question  to  be,  not  whether  the  In 
dian  intellect  is  endowed  with  the  capacity  to  receive 
civilization,  but  whether  his  savage  nature  can  be  so 
far  conciliated,  as  to  make  him  a  fair  subject  of  the 
benevolent  effort.  The  question  is,  not  as  to  the  possi 
bility  of  eradicating  his  ferocity,  or  giving  steadiness 
to  his  erratic  habits,  but  as  to  the  practicability  of 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.        303 

bringing  to  bear  upon  him  the  influences  by  which  his 
evil  propensities  and  his  waywardness  must  be  sub 
dued.  The  wild  ass  may  be  tamed  into  the  most  do 
cile  of  the  servants  of  man  ;  the  difficulty  is  in  catching 
him,  in  placing  him  under  the  influence  of  the  process 
of  training.  Whenever  the  bridle  is  placed  upon  his 
head,  the  work  is  done ;  all  the  rest  follows  with  the 
certainty  of  cause  and  effect ;  in  the  contest  between 
the  man  and  the  brute,  between  intellect  and  instinct, 
the  latter  must  submit.  So  it  is  between  the  civilized 
and  savage  man.  The  difficulties  to  be  overcome 
are  the  distance  by  which  the  races  are  separated,  and 
the  repulsion  which  impedes  their  approach.  There 
is  no  sympathy  between  the  refinement  of  the  civilized 
man  and  the  habits  of  the  savage  ;  nor  any  neutral 
ground,  upon  which  they  can  meet  and  compromise 
away  their  points  of  difference.  They  are  so  widely 
separated  in  the  scale  of  being,  as  to  have  no  common 
tastes,  habits,  or  opinions  ;  they  meet  in  jealousy  and 
distrust ;  disgust  and  contempt  attend  all  their  inter 
course  ,  and  the  result  of  their  contact  is  oppression 
and  war.  And  why  ?  The  repulsive  principle  is  never 
overcome ;  the  attraction  of  sympathy  is  never  estab 
lished.  The  parties  do  not  gaze  upon  each  other  pa 
tiently  and  long  enough  to  be  reconciled  to  their  mu 
tual  peculiarities,  and  sit  together  in  peace  until  they  be 
come  acquainted.  The  habit  of  enduring  each  other's 
manners  is  not  established,  nor  the  good-fellowship 
which  results  from  pacific  intercourse,  even  between 
those  who  are  widely  separated  by  character  and 
station." 

Here  the   great  obstacle   to  the  instruction  of  the 


304       THE   PROSPECTS    OF   THE   WESTERN    TRIBES. 

Indian  tribes  is  clearly  stated ;  let  this  be  removed,  and 
we  have  little  doubt  that  we  shall  soon  have  to  regard 
the  current  opinion  of  their  obduracy  as  founded  in 
error.  The  circumstances  in  which  these  people  are 
now  placed,  —  large  bodies  of  them  having  made  con 
siderable  advances  in  many  of  the  arts  of  civilized 
life,  having  adopted  regular  governments,  holding  pa 
cific  intercourse  with  the  United  States,  and  enjoying 
the  ministration  of  zealous  and  faithful  missionaries 
among  them, — are  favorable  to  the  making  of  one  more 
experiment  for  their  redemption,  and  this,  too,  with  the 
important  advantage  of  a  good  understanding  between 
them  and  their  teachers. 

As  to  the  capacity  of  the  aborigines  for  civilization, 
we  have  little  doubt.  We  have  already  hinted  at  the 
successes  of  Eliot,  Mayhew,  and  the  Moravians,  in 
Christianizing  some  of  the  most  savage  tribes ;  and  it 
would  be  easy  to  add  other  facts  of  the  same  nature, 
and  tending  to  the  same  point.  We  could  also  set 
before  the  reader  numerous  incidents,  which  show  that 
the  Indian  character  is  by  no  means  destitute  of  the 
finest  elements  which  belong  to  human  nature. 

The  affecting  story  of  Totapia,  a  Choctaw  mother, 
known  to  the  whites  by  the  name  of  Jenny,  related  by 
the  Rev.  Dr.  Morse  in  his  Report,  exhibits  a  touching 
example  of  the  strength  and  sensibility  of  maternal  af 
fection  in  the  Indian  woman,  which,  in  a  Roman  or 
Grecian  matron,  would  have  been  rendered  immortal 
by  the  poet  and  historian.  She  was  the  widow  of  a 
Choctaw,  who,  having  slain  one  of  his  own  tribe,  was 
pursued  by  the  relatives  of  the  deceased,  and  put  to 
death,  according  to  the  Indian  law.  After  the  death 


THE   PROSPECTS    OF    THE   WESTERN   TRIBES.        305 

of  her  husband,  she  settled  near  St.  Fraricisville,  in 
Louisiana,  where  she  lived  reputably,  with  four  or  five 
children,  of  whom  Hoctanlubbie,  or  Soue,  her  son,  was 
the  eldest. 

At  the  age  of  .twenty-five,  her  son   murdered   an 
old  Indian,  for  which  act,  according  to  the  unalterable 
law  of  the  nation,  his  life  was  demanded,  and  he  was 
sentenced  to  die.     The  day  of  his  execution  was  fixed 
and  had  arrived,  and  the  relatives  and  friends  of  the 
murdered,  with  others,  a  mingled  throng,  were  assem 
bled   after   their   usual   manner,  and  all  things  were 
ready   for   inflicting   the    sentence    of   the   law.      At 
this  moment  of  strong  and   mingled   feeling,  Jenny, 
the  mother,  pressed  through   the   crowd   to   the  spot 
where  her  son  stood  by  the  instruments  prepared  to 
take  from  him  his  life.     She  then  addressed  the  chiefs 
and  the  company,  demanding  the  life  of  her  son,  and 
offeriiig  in  its  stead  her  own.    Her  plea  was  this  :   "  He 
is  young ;  he  has  a  wife,  children,  brothers,  and  sisters, 
all  looking  to  him  for  counsel  and  support.     I  am  old  ; 
I  have  only  a  few  days  to  live,  at  most ;  I  can  do  but 
little  more  for  my  family.     Nor  is  it  strictly  just,  it  is 
rather  a  shame,  to  take  a  new  chief  for  an  old  one" 
The    magnanimous    offer    of    the    devoted   mother 
was  accepted,  and  a  few  hours  were  allowed  her  to 
prepare  for  death.     She  repaired  immediately  to  the 
house  of  a  lady,  Mrs.  T.,  who  had  been  her  kind  and 
liberal   friend,  and,  without   divulging   what   had   oc 
curred,  said  she  came  to  beg  a  winding-sheet  and  coffin 
for  her  son.     Not  suspecting  the  arrangement  of  Tota- 
pia  to  preserve  her  son,  the  lady  acceded  to  her  request. 
When  asked  in  relation  to  the  length  of  the  coffin  and 
20 


306       THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

grave-clothes,  the  Choctaw  mother  replied,  "  Make 
them  to  suit  my  size,  and  they  will  answer  for  my  son." 
Soon  after  Jenny  had  left  Mrs.  T.  for  the  camp, 
where  all  things  were  ready  for  her  execution,  a  mes 
senger  arrived  in  haste,  and  informed  Mrs.  T.  of  what 
was  passing  in  the  camp,  and  that  Jenny  was  immedi 
ately  to  die.  She  hastened  to  the  scene,  with  the  in 
tention  of  rescuing  her;  but  Jenny,  the  moment  she 
saw  her  carriage  coming  at  a  distance,  imagining, 
doubtless,  what  her  object  was,  standing  in  her  grave, 
caught  the  muzzle  of  the  gun,  the  prepared  instrument 
of  her  death,  and,  pointing  it  to  her  heart,  entreated 
the  executioner  to  do  his  duty.  He  obeyed,  and  she 
fell  dead ! 

•  We  are  not  told  how  it  happened  that  the  son 
suffered  his  mother  to  die  for  him,  or  whether  he  could 
have  prevented  it.  It  seems,  however,  that  he  was 
despised  for  permitting  it,  and  that  his  own  conscience 
goaded  him.  The  friends  of  the  old  man  whom  he 
had  murdered  taunted  him,  "  You  coward,  you  let  your 
mother  die  for  you  ;  you  are  afraid  to  die."  Unable  to 
endure  all  this,  he  stabbed  a  son  of  his  former  victim, 
but  not  until  five  years  had  elapsed  since  the  death  of 
his  mother. 

He  returned  home  with  indications  of  triumph, 
brandishing  his  bloody  knife,  and,  without  waiting  for 
inquiry,  confessed  what  he  had  done.  He  told  his 
Indian  friends  that  he  would  not  live  to  be  called  a 
coward.  "  I  have  been  told,"  he  said,  "  that  I  fear  to 
die.  Now  you  shall  see  that  I  can  die  like  a  man." 
A  wealthy  planter,  whose  house  he  passed,  he  invited 
to  see  how  he  could  die.  This  was  on  Sunday.  Mon- 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.         307 

day,  at  twelve  o'clock,  was  the  day  he  appointed  for 
his  self-immolation.  Here  a  scene  was  presented 
which  baffles  all  description.  Soue  walked  forward  and 
backward  again,  still  keeping  in  his  hand  the  bloody 
knife.  With  all  his  efforts  to  conceal  it,  he  discov 
ered  marks  of  an  agitated  mind.  The  sad  group 
present  consisted  of  about  ten  men  and  as  many  fe 
males ;  the  latter  with  sorrowful  countenances  were 
employed  in  making  an  overshirt  for  Soue's  burial. 
The  men,  all  except  two  of  his  brothers,  were  smok 
ing  their  pipes  with  apparent  unconcern.  Several 
times,  Soue  examined  his  gun,  and  remained  silent. 
His  grave  had  been  dug  the  day  before,  and  he  had 
laid  himself  down  in  it,  to  see  if  it  suited  as  to  length 
and  breadth. 

No  one  had  demanded  his  death;  for  all  who 
were  interested,  and  felt  their  honor  concerned  in  it, 
resided  at  a  distance  of  thirty  or  forty  miles.  The 
death-song  was  repeated,  as  was  also  the  shaking  of 
hands.  Both  were  again  repeated  the  third  and  last 
time.  Immediately  after,  Soue  stepped  up  to  his  wife, 
a  young  woman  of  eighteen,  with  an  infant  in  her 
arms,  and  another  little  child,  two  or  three  years  old, 
standing  by  her  side,  and  presented  to  her  the  bloody 
knife,  which,  till  now,  he  had  kept  in  his  hand.  She 
averted  her  face  to  conceal  a  falling  tear,  but,  recov 
ering  herself,  with  a  forced  smile,  took  it.  His  sister 
was  sitting  by  the  side  of  his  wife,  wholly  absorbed  in 
grief,  apparently  insensible  to  what  was  passing,  her 
eyes  vacant,  and  fixed  on  some  distant  object.  His 
pipe  he  gave  to  a  young  brother,  who  struggled  hard  to 
conceal  his  emotions.  He  then  drank  a  little  whisky 


308       THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

and  water,  dashed  the  bottle  on  the  ground,  sung  a  few 
words  in  the  Choctaw  language,  and,  with  a  jumping, 
dancing  step,  hurried  to  his  grave.  His  gun  was  so 
fixed  by  the  side  of  a  young  sapling  as  to  enable  him 
to  take  his  own  life.  No  one,  he  had  declared,  should 
take  it  from  him. 

These  preparations  and  ceremonies  being  now 
complete,  he  gave  the  necessary  touch  to  the  ap 
paratus,  the  gun  was  discharged,  and  its  contents 
passed  through  his  heart.  He  instantly  fell  dead  to 
the  earth.  The  females  sprang  to  the  lifeless  body. 
Some  held  his  head,  others  his  hands  and  feet,  and 
others  knelt  at  his  side.  He  had  charged  them  to  show 
no  signs  of  grief,  while  he  lived,  lest  it  should  shake 
his  resolution  ;  as  far  as  possible,  they  obeyed.  Their 
grief  was  restrained  until  he  was  dead  ;  it  then  burst 
forth  in  a  torrent,  and  their  shrieks  and  lamentations 
were  loud  and  undissembled. 

In  the  midst  of  the  unnumbered  wrongs  which  the 
Southern  Indians  have  received  at  our  hands,  it  gives 
us  pleasure  to  record  an  act  of  justice  toward  an  inter 
esting  Choctaw  girl ;  while,  at  the  same  time,  the  inci 
dent  which  led  to  it  is  pertinent  to  our  present  purpose, 
which  is,  to  show  the  amiable  qualities  which  belong  to 
the  savages  even  in  the  untutored  state. 

"  The  Committee  on  Indian  Affairs,  in  the  late  House 
of  Representatives,  reported  a  bill  allowing  a  pension 
for  life  to  Milly,  an  Indian  woman  of  the  Creek  tribe, 
daughter  of  the  celebrated  prophet  and  chief,  Francis, 
who  was  executed  by  order  of  General  Jackson,  in  the 
Seminole  war  of  1817-  18.  The  subject  was  brought 
to  the  notice  of  the  Committee  by  the  Secretary  of 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE   WESTERN   TRIBES.      309 

War,  at  the  instance  of  Lieutenant-colonel  Hitchcock, 
who  communicated  the  particulars  of  the  incident  upon 
which  the  recommendation  to  the  favor  of  the  govern 
ment  was  founded. 

"  Milly,  at  the  age  of  sixteen,  when  her  nation  was 
at  war  with  the  United  States,  and  her  father  was  one 
of  the  most  decided  and  indefatigable  enemies  of  the 
white  people,  saved  the  life  of  an  American  citizen, 
who  had  been  taken  prisoner  by  her  tribe.  The  cap 
tive  was  bound  to  a  tree,  and  the  savage  warriors,  with 
their  rifles,  were  dancing  around  him,  preparatory  to 
putting  him  to  death.  The  young  Indian  girl,  filled 
with  pity  for  the  devoted  prisoner,  besought  her  father 
to  spare  him  ;  but  the  chief  declined  to  interfere,  say 
ing,  that  the  life  of  the  prisoner  was  in  the  hands  of 
his  captors,  whose  right  it  was  to  put  him  to  death. 
She  then  turned  to  the  warriors,  and  implored  them  to 
forbear  their  deadly  purpose  ;  but  she  was  repulsed, 
and  one  of  them,  much  enraged,  told  her  that  he  had 
lost  two  sisters  in  the  war,  and  that  the  prisoner  must 
die.  Her  intercession,  however,  continued  ;  she  per 
severed  in  entreaties,  and  used  all  the  arts  of  persua 
sion  which  her  woman's  nature  suggested  ;  and  she 
finally  succeeded  in  saving  his  life,  on  condition  that 
the  young  white  man  should  adopt  the  Indian  dress, 
and  become  one  of  the  tribe. 

"  It  appears  from  the  information  communicated  by 
Colonel  Hitchcock,  that,  some  time  after  this  event,  the 
white  man  sought  his  benefactress  in  marriage,  but  she 
declined,  and  subsequently  married  one  of  her  own 
people.  Her  husband  is  now  dead.  Her  father  was 
put  to  death  in  the  war  of  1817-18,  and  her  mother 


310 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN   TRIBES. 


and  sister  have  since  died.  She  is  now  friendless  and 
poor,  residing  among  her  people  in  their  new  country, 
near  the  Verdigris  River.  She  has  three  children,  a 
boy  and  two  girls,  all  too  young  to  provide  for  them- 
selves,  and,  consequently,  dependent  upon  their  mother 
for  support. 

"  The  Committee  thought  that  the  occasion  presented 
by  this  case  was  a  suitable  one,  not  only  to  reward  a 
meritorious  act,  but  also  to  show  to  the  Indian  tribes 
how  mercy  and  humanity  are  appreciated  by  the  gov 
ernment.  The  grant  of  a  pension,  with  a  clear  expo 
sition  of  the  grounds  of  its  allowance,  would  have  a 
salutary  influence,  it  was  believed,  upon  savage  cus 
toms  in  future.  A  bill  was  accordingly  reported,  to 
allow  to  Milly  a  pension  of  ninety-six  dollars  per  an 
num,  or  eight  dollars  a  month,  for  life." 

In  connection  with  this  detail,  we  may  remind  the 
reader  of  Pocahontas,  who,  with  proper  education,  had 
doubtless  proved  an  ornament  to  the  most  exalted  sta 
tion  ;  and  we  may  also  relate,  at  length,  the  story  of 
Attakullakulla  and  Captain  Stewart,  to  which  we  have 
adverted  in  the  preceding  pages. 

Fort  Loudon,  on  the  River  Tennessee,  was  situated 
five  hundred  miles  from  Charleston,  and  there  were 
few  towns  between.  It  was  built  in  1756,  for  the  pur 
pose  of  preventing  the  encroachments  of  the  French, 
who  used  to  steal  down  from  Canada,  and  annoy  the 
white  English  inhabitants,  who  were  forming  settle 
ments  in  that  part  of  the  country.  At  the  same  time, 
it  was  a  safeguard  against  the  Indians,  numerous  tribes 
of  whom  lived  round  about.  These  Indians,  at  all 
times  savage  and  cruel,  were  particularly  hostile  to  the 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.       311 

whites,  and  the  more  so  as  they  perceived  them  form 
ing  establishments  in  their  neighbourhood. 

In  the  abovementioned  fort,  at  the  time*  our  account 
commences,  there  were  but  few  soldiers.  This  fact 
the  Indians  by  some  means  discovered,  and  they  deter 
mined  to  make  an  attack  upon  it,  and,  if  possible,  to 
massacre  the  garrison. 

The  plan  was  conducted,  as  usual,  with  much  se 
crecy  and  cunning,  and,  before  the  soldiers  were  aware, 
the  fort  was  surrounded  by  a  large  number  of  savages, 
thirsting  for  their  blood.  The  fort  was  strong,  how 
ever,  the  gates  were  shut,  and  the  Indians  found  it 
impossible  to  enter.  But  they  could  watch  it.  They 
might,  perhaps,  in  time,  force  the  garrison  to  surren 
der,  because  their  provisions  could  not  last  always.  A 
guard  was,  therefore,  constantly  kept  round  about,  and 
so  vigilant  were  they,  that  not  a  single  white  man 
durst  venture  abroad,  nor  could  any  come  to  their  as 
sistance. 

For  a  time,  the  provisions  in  the  fort  held  out ; 
but,  at  length,  the  soldiers  were  obliged  to  resort  to  the 
flesh  of  their  horses  and  dogs,  which,  by  reason  of 
scanty  food,  had  dwindled  away  nearly  to  skeletons. 
For  two  long  months,  they  bore  up  under  the  pres 
sure  of  confinement  and  stinted  fare.  The  enemy 
that  surrounded  them,  they  well  knew,  were  at  all 
times  ferocious  ;  but  they  would  be  doubly  so  now, 
having  become  exasperated  by  watching  for  so  long 
a  period. 

The  soldiers  had  stout  hearts  and  good  courage; 
but,  at  length,  they  told  the  officers  that  they  could 
hold  out  no  longer.  Upon  this,  the  latter  came  to- 


312       THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

gether,  and,  after  due  consultation,  it  was  agreed  to 
surrender,  and  to  obtain  the  best  terms  of  capitulation 
from  the  Indians  they  were  able. 

There  was  one  man  among  them  whom  the  In 
dians  esteemed, —  Captain  Stewart.  He  was  accord 
ingly  selected  to  inform  the  enemy  that  they  had 
held  out  sufficiently  long,  and  were  willing  to  sur 
render,  provided  they  could  make  suitable  terms.  The 
Indians  replied,  that  they  might  march  out  with  their 
guns  and  a  little  powder  and  shot,  but  that  the  fort 
must  be  surrendered  that  very  day ;  adding,  that  they 
would  accompany  them  to  Fort  George,  where  their 
white  brethren  lived. 

As  these  were  better  terms  than  they  expected, 
the  English  officers  did  not  hesitate  to  accept  them. 
They  marched  out  accordingly,  and  speedily  set  out 
upon  their  journey  for  Fort  George.  It  was  noon  when 
they  left  the  fort,  and  night  before  they  halted. 

Wearied  with  their  toilsome  march,  they  soon  laid 
themselves  down  to  rest.  Just  as  they  were  doing  this, 
they  perceived  that  the  whole  body  of  Indians  were 
leaving  them.  The  object  of  this  movement  they  were 
unable  to  explain  ;  but,  well  knowing  the  cunning  and 
artifice  of  the  savage  warriors,  they  could  sleep  no 
more.  A  few,  perhaps  more  weary  than  the  others, 
dozed  occasionally  for  a  few  minutes ;  but  the  pain 
ful  state  of  anxiety,  in  which  they  were,  made  tj^eir 
sleep  short  and  unrefreshing.  Several  hours  passed  in 
this  state  of  suspense  ;  but,  as  no  Indians  came  nea* 
them,  they  began  to  indulge  the  hope  that  the  enemy 
had  left  them,  to  return  no  more.  They,  therefore, 
generally  laid  themselves  down,  anc^bne  after  another, 
sunk  into  a  sound  sleep. 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.       313 

About  the  dawn  of  day,  one  of  the  men,  who  had 
been  placed  as  a  guard,  came  running  in  great  haste 
to  inform  them  that  a  large  body  of  Indians  were 
secretly  approaching.  The  alarm  was  instantly  given, 
and  the  men  were  ordered  to  stand  to  their  arms.  The 
summons,  however,  was  so  sudden,  and  the  terror  so 
universal,  that  not  a  single  soldier  had  his  gun  loaded 
when  the  tremendous  war-whoop  broke  upon  them. 
The  onset  of  the  savages  upon  this  comparatively  fee 
ble  and  unprepared  band  was  so  furious  that  resist 
ance  was  vain.  Some  were  killed,  and  the  rest  were 
taken  prisoners.  Captain  Stewart  had  his  hands  tied 
behind  him,  and,  at  the  head  of  the  others,  was  led 
back  to  the  fort. 

On  their  arrival,  an  Indian  chief,  taking  Captain 
Stewart  by  the  hand,  conducted  him  to  his  own  hut, 
unbound  his  arms,  and  fed  him  from  his  own  bowl. 
This  was  Attakullakulla.  A  few  days  after,  the  In 
dians  held  a  great  council  as  to  the  disposal  of  the 
prisoners.  The  chiefs  were  all  present,  and,  though 
some  differed  for  a  time  from  others,  they  finally  agreed 
to  send  for  Captain  Stewart,  and  inform  him  that  they 
were  about  to  attack  Fort  George.  "  You  and  your 
men,"  said  they  to  him,  "  will  accompany  us.  You 
will  fight  with  us.  This  is  the  result  of  our  talk. 
You  must  do  more,"  added  they.  "  Write  to  the  cap 
tain  of  Fort  George  ;  tell  him  of  our  coming  ;  tell  him, 
th&t,  if  he  surrenders  the  fort  peaceably,  it  is  well ;  if 
not,  we  will  strip  his  friend  Captain  Stewart,  and  burn 
kirn  before  his  eyes  !  " 

Captain  Stewart,  finding  no  alternative,  sat  down, 
and,  in  the  presence  of  the  savages,  wrote  the  letter 


314       THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

required  ;  but  he  thought  within  himself,  that,  before 
he  would  fight  against  his  brethren,  he  would  undergo 
the  pains  even  of  savage  torture.  On  returning  home, 
he  said  to  Attakullakulla,  "  You  are  my  friend  ;  you 
have  shown  your  friendship  in  the  hour  of  danger  and 
of  trial.  Now  can  you  show  it  again  ?  I  cannot 
fight  my  brethren.  I  must  escape,  or  I  must  die." 

Attakullakulla  replied,  "  I  have  been  your  friend 
once  ;  I  will  be  so  again.  You  must  not  fight  your 
brethren.  The  red  men  must  not  kill  you.  Come 
with  me,  and  I  will  take  you  far  from  the  reach  of  the 
bloody  tomahawk." 

Before  the  next  morning,  Attakullakulla  and  Captain 
Stewart  were  far  on  their  journey  in  the  depths  of  the 
wilderness.  By  day,  they  travelled  with  great  expe 
dition,  and  at  night  slept  upon  the  open  ground.  The 
sun  and  moon  served  as  guides  to  the  sagacious  Indian 
chief;  and  as  they  kept  on,  over  hills  and  mountains, 
valleys  and  rivers,  Captain  Stewart  wondered  where 
their  journey  would  end.  On  the  fourteenth  day,  they 
saw  fires  -at  a  distance,  and  they  knew  men  were  near. 
They  soon  met  a  party  of  soldiers,  who  informed  them 
that  they  were  in  Virginia,  and  that  this  was  the  camp  of 
Colonel  Bird.  They  told  them  to  go  on  further,  where 
they  would  see  the  colonel  himself.  When  they  came 
up  with  this  officer,  Captain  Stewart  introduced  him 
self  and  his  Indian  friend  to  him.  He  was  delighted 
to  hear  of  the  captain's  escape,  and  was  much  pleased 
with  the  friendship  which  the  Indian  had  shown  to  the 
white  man.  "  This,"  said  he,  "  is  true  friendship, 
which  shows  itself  in  action,  not  in  words." 

When  Attakullakulla  said  he  must  depart  that  night, 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF   THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.       315 

the  two  officers  begged  him  to  remain  with  them  for 
a  few  days.  But  the  old  man  said,  "  No."  Find 
ing  that  he  could  not  be  persuaded,  they  loaded  him 
with  presents  of  all  kinds,  and,  bidding  him  farewell, 
saw  him  depart  for  his  home.  On  his  return  to  his 
tribe,  he  met  some  soldiers,  who  told  him  they  had 
been  sent  from  Fort  George,  the  place  which  the  In 
dians  were  going  to  attack.  They  said  that  the  captain 
of  Fort  George  had  received  their  letter,  and  had  heard 
that  they  were  coming  to  fight  him.  But  he  desired 
Attakullakulla  to  inform  his  brethren  that  they  must 
not  come  to  Fort  George,  for  there  was  much 
powder  and  ball  buried  in  holes  around  the  fort,  to 
blow  up  any  enemies  who  might  venture  too  near  ; 
and  that,  if  they  dared  to  approach,  they  would  cer 
tainly  be  blown  in  pieces. 

Attakullakulla  promised  the  soldiers  that  he  would 
tell  the  Indians  of  this,  and  again  proceeded  on  his  way. 
On  reaching  Fort  Loudon,  he  called  the  chiefs  to 
gether,  and  told  them  of  the  message  the  white  man 
had  sent  to  them.  They  were  much  frightened  when 
they  heard  of  the  powder  and  shot,  and  blessed  the  Good 
Spirit  that  he  had  not  permitted  them  to  attack  the 
fort,  as  they  must  all  have  been  killed. 

But  to  return  to  Captain  Stewart.  Now  that  he  had 
himself  escaped,  he  began  to  think  of  the  poor  soldiers 
whom  he  had  left  in  captivity.  For  a  time,  he  could 
hear  nothing  of  their  fate,  and  was  in  doubt  whether 
his  escape  might  not  have  led  to  the  massacre  of  them 
all.  But,  at  length,  he  had  the  pleasure  to  know,  by 
means  of  one  who  had  escaped  like  himself,  that  they 
were  alive,  though  still  in  captivity.  Upon  this  intelli- 


316       THE    PROSPECTS    OF   THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

gence,  he  collected  such  articles  as  he  thought  would 
be  acceptable  to  the  Indians,  beads,  buttons,  red  belts, 
&c.,  and  begged  him  to  divide  them  among  the  chiefs, 
and  to  ask  that  their  white  prisoners  might  be  sent 
to  him  in  return.  The  presents  proved  acceptable  to 
the  Indians,  and,  in  the  fulness  of  their  joy,  they  said 
they  must  send  something  in  return  to  their  friend,  Cap 
tain  Stewart ;  but  for  an  appropriate  present  they  were 
quite  at  a  loss.  Attakullakulla  told  them  he  could  help 
them  out  of  their  difficulty,  and  now  informed  them  of 
the  request  of  Captain  Stewart.  To  this  they  unani 
mously  assented,  and  forthwith  communicated  to  their 
prisoners  that  they  were  at  liberty. 

The  joy  of  the  prisoners  need  not  be  told.  Under 
the  guidance  of  the  man  whom  Captain  Stewart  had 
sent  with  the  presents,  they  were  conducted  in  safety 
to  Fort  George,-  where  they  had  the  pleasure  to  meet, 
once  more,  their  friend  and  benefactor,  Captain  Stew 
art  himself,  and  to  thank  him,  in  person,  for  his  kind 
remembrance  of  them  in  the  land  of  their  captivity. 

These,  and  numerous  other  instances  that  might  be 
cited,  show  that  boldness  and  cunning  are  not  the 
only  qualities  of  the  Indian,  but  that,  in  possessing  the 
nobler  attributes  of  kindness,  generosity,  and  friend 
ship,  he  may  often  challenge  our  respect  and  admira 
tion.  Of  the  capacity  of  the  Western  tribes  for  civil 
ization,  it  indeed  seems  that  there  can  be  no  reasonable 
doubt. 

What,  then,  is  to  be  done,  to  aid  them  in  taking  ad 
vantage  of  their  present  condition  for  improvement? 
Let  our  government  pursue  toward  them  a  conciliating 
policy  ;  and,  while  maintaining  their  present  relations, 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.       317 

do  all  in  their  power  to  secure  the  confidence  and  good 
will  of  these  tribes. 

One  of  the  greatest  difficulties  lies  in  conquering  the 
love  of  war  and  the  chase,  a  passion,  which,  once  in 
dulged,  is  apt  to  engross  the  whole  soul.  The  tame 
pursuits  of  agriculture  seem  tasteless,  if  not  revolting, 
to  those  who  have  been  accustomed  to  mingle  in  the 
stormy  excitements  of  savage  life.  But  this  difficulty 
may  still  be  overcome.  Let  the  master  spirits  of  the 
tribe  be  taught  that  the  war-path  is  no  longer  the  road 
to  distinction,  and  they  will  soon  seek  it  in  some 
other  way.  To  use  the  words  of  the  author  before 
quoted  on  this  subject,  —  "The  season  for  political 
competition  not  having  yet  arrived,  the  only  means 
of  distinction  would  be  wealth  ;  and  the  glory  of  accu 
mulating  the  bloody  trophies  of  the  battle-field  would-be 
exchanged  for  the  boast  of  broad  fields  and  numerous 
herds.  The  few,  possessed  of  prudence  and  foresight, 
or  desiring  eminence,  would  see  at  once  the  advan 
tages  of  agriculture,  and  would  become  farmers.  The 
example  would  be  salutary,  and  one  after  another 
•would  desire  to  possess  the  comforts  and  independence 
which  crown  the  labors  of  the  husbandman.  The  best 
and  most  influential  men  would  be  the  first  to  lead  the 
way  in  this  reformation  ;  and  every  man  who  became 
a  farmer  would  be  a  powerful  advocate  of  the  cause, 
because  it  would  be  his  interest  to  diminish  the  number 
of  the  idle  and  non-producing,  who  must  depend  on 
the  public  for  subsistence,  or  disturb  the  peace  by 
crime  and  violence. 

uTo  hasten  this  result,  to  hold  out  a  reward    for 
industry,  and  to  provide  for  a  more  advanced  civiliza- 


318       THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

tion  than  that  which  we  have  been  contemplating,  it 
should  be  provided,  that,  whenever  an  Indian  should 
have  actually  become  a  farmer,  and  should,  for  a 
specified  number  of  years,  have  tilled  the  soil,  a  tract 
of  land  should  be  granted  to  him,  the  title  to  which 
should  be  a  life-estate  to  himself,  and  a  fee  simple  to 
his  descendants.  By  this  provision,  portions  of  land 
would  be  converted  into  private  property,  and  the  re 
mainder  might  be  vested  in  the  nation,  whenever  they 
should  have  a  government  capable  of  properly  dispos 
ing  of  it. 

"  In  this  way,  the  Indian  might  be  allured  by  his 
interest,  and  led  to  self-elevation.  We  would  deprive 
him  of  his  natural  liberty  only  so  long  as  should  be 
necessary  to  bsing  about  that  lucid  interval  in  which 
he  would  become  sensible  of  his  true  condition,  and 
apprized  of  the  means  held  out  for  his  redemption  ; 
and  we  would  leave  it  to  himself  to  seek  out  his  own 
further  advancement  in  his  own  way.  In  this,  we 
should  pursue  the  plan  of  Nature.  The  primitive  na 
tions  were  not  precociously  instructed  by  their  Creator 
in  the  whole  circle  of  human  knowledge  ;  but  it  was  left 
for  them  and  their  descendants  to  discover  gradually 
the  wealth  and  resources  of  the  world  beneficently 
given  them,  and  to  increase  in  learning  by  an  easy  and 
healthful  gradation. 

"  The  attempt  to  civilize  the  roving  bands  by  rea 
son,  by  the  mere  force  of  truth,  or  by  any  abstract 
sense  of  duty,  has  always  been,  and  will  continue  to 
be,  abortive.  The  physical  impediments  must  first  be 
removed.  Among  white  men,  Christianity,  literature, 
and  the  arts  have  never  flourished  during  a  period  of 


THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES.       319 

anarchy  or  civil  war.  In  those  countries  where  the 
peasantry  are  oppressed,  and  have  no  rights,  property, 
or  education,  they  are  degraded  and  ferocious  ;  and  if 
the  passions  of  their  savage  nature  are  not  developed 
in  deeds  of  courage,  it  is  because  they  are  bridled  by 
the  strong  arm  of  power.  If  we  trace  the  nations  of 
Europe  from  their  former  state  of  barbarism  to  their 
present  moral  elevation,  we  shall  find  the  same  causes 
to  have  always  operated.  The  first  step  has  always 
been  the  acquisition  of  permanent  habitations,  and  the 
consequent  love  of  country  and  of  home.  Domestic 
comforts  warmed  into  life  the  social  virtues.  The 
possession  of  property  followed,  and  then  personal  and 
civil  rights,  one  after  another,  were  conceived.  Then 
emancipation  from  their  chiefs  ensued,  and  political 
rights  began  to  be  demanded.  The  state  of  war  be 
came  inconvenient.  It  was  now  the  interest  of  the 
honest  and  industrious  to  protect  themselves  against 
plunder  and  violence ;  and  the  deeds  of  murder  and 
robbery  ceased  to  be  heroic.  Commerce  between  na 
tions  softened  prejudice,  produced  the  interchange  of 
commodities,  encouraged  the  arts,  and  enlarged  the 
stock  of  knowledge.  And  lastly,  hand  in  hand,  came 
education  and  religion. 

"  The  ministers  of  the  gospel  and  the  schoolmaster 
have  been  powerful  agents  in  these  changes,  but  they 
have  never  marched  in  the  van.  They  form  an  effi 
cient  corps  in  the  main  body ;  but  their  business  is,  to 
secure  and  improve  the  acquisitions  which  bone  and 
muscle,  and  skill  and  courage  have  obtained.  As  the 
rifle  and  the  axe  must  first  subdue  the  forest,  before  the 
husbandman  can  cultivate  the  soil,  so  must  the  strong 


320       THE    PROSPECTS    OF    THE    WESTERN    TRIBES. 

arm  of  the  government  produce  peace,  enforce  obe 
dience,  and  organize  a  system  of  civil  rights  and  re 
straints,  before  the  mild  precepts  of  the  gospel,  and 
the  fructifying  streams  of  knowledge,  can  be  made  to 
pervade  the  wilderness,  and  teach  the  desert  to  blossom 
as  the  rose." 

With  these  suggestions  we  dismiss  this  subject,  in 
the  hope  that  it  will  attract  the  serious  attention,  not 
only  of  the  government,  but  of  the  people  of  the  United 
States ;  and  that  a  course  will  be  pursued,  in  respect  to 
these  remnants  of  the  American  tribes,  alike  dictated 
by  prudence,  justice,  and  general  benevolence. 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


tft'C'D  LD 

MAY  1  7  '65  -11  AM 

Wl  0  5  1991 

LD  21A-60m-3,'65 
(F2336slO)476B 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


34741 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


UNIVERSITY  OP  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


